16565asda5-HSE-Manual

8/12/2019 16565asda5-HSE-Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/16565asda5-hse-manual 1/447

HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT

DEPARTMENT Issue 02, Rev 05

ADGAS HSE MANUAL Date: August 2006

CONTENTS AND REVISION Chapter No. 0

Doc. Number Prepared By HSED Approved By

Network Loc. Directory Name HSE MANUAL Page No Page 1 of 448

ABU DHABI GAS LIQUEFACTION COMPANY LIMITED

HEALTH, SAFETY &

ENVIRONMENT MANUAL

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT DEPARTMENT









HSE MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

0 CONTENTS AND REVISION ................................................................................................................... 5

0.1 RECORD OF REVISIONS ....................................................... ............................................................ 5 0.2 REVISION REQUEST ......................................................................................................................... 7

1 GUIDE TO THE MANUAL ....................................................................................................................... 9

1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 9 1.2 USING THE MANUAL ..................................................................................................................... 11 1.3 MAINTENANCE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................................. 14

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS............................................................................................ 15 2 SAFETY MANAGEMENT ............................................................. .......................................................... 22

2.1 UNITED ARAB EMIRATES LEGISLATION .................................................................................. 22 2.2 HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT POLICY STATEMENT ..................................................

2.3 RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................................................................................................... 25 2.4 SAFETY COMMITTEES ......................................................... .......................................................... 31 2.5 MEETINGS ........................................................................................................................................ 42 2.6 EMPLOYEE INVOLVEMENT ......................................................................................................... 43 2.7 PLANNED INSPECTIONS................................................................................................................ 44 2.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 52 2.9 DIVISIONAL STANDING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................... ......................... 53 2.10 TASK R ISK ASSESSMENT ..................................................................................................................... 54

2.11 AREA AUTHORITIES ...................................................................................................................... 71 2.12 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE ........................................................................................................ 77

3 GENERAL AND PERSONAL SAFETY ............................................................. .................................... 83

3.1 SAFETY INDUCTION ...................................................................................................................... 83 3.2 VISITORS .......................................................................................................................................... 84 3.3 RESTRICTED AREAS ...................................................................................................................... 86 3.4 HAZARDOUS AREAS AND ZONES ........................................................... .................................... 86 3.5 HOUSEKEEPING .............................................................................................................................. 90 3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................. 91 3.7 PERSONAL SAFETY ........................................................................................................................ 95 3.8 SAFETY SIGNS AND BARRIERS ................................................................................................... 96 3.9 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT .............................................................. ....................... 100

3.10 MANUAL HANDLING ................................................................................................................... 111 3.11 HEARING CONSERVATION ............................................................ ............................................. 118 3.12 EYE SAFETY PROGRAMME ........................................................................................................ 123 3.13 VEHICLES AND BICYCLES ............................................................. ............................................. 125 3.14 HEAT DISORDERS ................................................................. ........................................................ 129 3.15 SAFE ACCESS AND WORK PLACES ......................................................... .................................. 133 3.16 OFFICE SAFETY .......................................................... ................................................................. .. 137

4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES ............................................................................................................... 145

4.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 145 4.2 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE CONTROL ...................................................................................... 148 4.3 RESTRICTED MATERIALS .............................................................. ............................................. 150 4.4 RISK AND CONTROLS .................................................................................................................. 152

4.5 CHEMICAL HANDLING ........................................................ ........................................................ 155









4.6 WORK WITH HARMFUL CONTACTS ....................................................... .................................. 158 4.7 LABELLING HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES ................................................................................ 166 4.8 COMPRESSED GASES ........................................................... ........................................................ 170 4.9 OTHER DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES ........................................................ .................................. 180 4.10 RADIOACTIVE SOURCES ............................................................................................................ 187 4.11 PLANT PRODUCT HAZARDS....................................................................................................... 205 4.12 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES DISPOSAL ............................................................. ....................... 214

5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 216

5.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 216 5.2 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................................... 216 5.3 PERMIT AUTHORITIES ......................................................... ........................................................ 217 5.4 WHEN IS A PERMIT REQUIRED ................................................................ .................................. 218

5.5 PERMIT SUBMISSION ........................................................... ........................................................ 219 5.6 TYPES OF PERMIT ................................................................. ........................................................ 219 5.7 PERMIT GAS TESTING .......................................................... ........................................................ 222 5.8 TRAINING ....................................................................................................................................... 223 5.9 AUDITING OF THE PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM .......................................................... ............ 223

6 HOT AND NAKED FLAME WORK .................................................................................................... 227

6.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 227 6.2 PRELIMINARY CONSIDERATIONS .......................................................... .................................. 227 6.3 WELDING, CUTTING, BURNING, BRAZING AND SOLDERING ............................................ 229 6.4 GAS WELDING AND CUTTING ................................................................................................... 232 6.5 ELECTRIC ARC WELDING AND CUTTING ............................................................................... 235 6.6 PLASMA CUTTING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................... 237

6.7 BLAST CLEANING AND PAINTING .......................................................... .................................. 238 6.8 PORTABLE TOOL IGNITION RISKS .......................................................... .................................. 242 6.9 STATIC ELECTRICITY .......................................................... ........................................................ 245 6.10 PORTABLE GAS DETECTORS ..................................................................................................... 248

7 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY ................................................................................................................. 273

7.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 273 7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT ....................................................................................................................... 274 7.3 ISOLATION AND GAS FREEING ................................................................................................. 276 7.4 SAFE WORKING ENVIRONMENT ............................................................. .................................. 277 7.5 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................. 281 7.6 PROTECTIVE AND RESCUE EQUIPMENT .......................................................... ....................... 286 7.7 CANCELLATION OF PERMIT ...................................................................................................... 287 7.8 HOT AND NAKED FLAME WORK HAZARDS ........................................................................... 287

8 PIPELINES, TANKS AND VESSELS ................................................................. .................................. 295

8.1 PIPELINES ....................................................................................................................................... 295 8.2 TANKS AND VESSELS .................................................................................................................. 304 8.3 SAFETY VALVES ........................................................ ................................................................. .. 312

9 MAINTENANCE SAFETY .................................................................................................................... 317

9.1 ELECTRICAL .................................................................................................................................. 317 9.2 LIFTING APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................... ....................... 332 9.3 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS .................................................................................................. 342 9.4 MACHINERY SAFEGUARDS ....................................................................................................... 357 9.5 EXCAVATIONS .............................................................................................................................. 365









9.6 DIVING OPERATIONS ........................................................... ........................................................ 367 9.7 WORK OVER WATER ............................................................ ........................................................ 369 9.8 WORK ON ROOFS .......................................................................................................................... 378 9.9 WORK AT HEIGHT ........................................................................................................................ 384

10 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS........................................................................................................... 389

10.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 389 10.2 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................. 389 10.3 REPORTING .................................................................................................................................... 390 10.4 INITIATING AUTHORITY ................................................................ ............................................. 391 10.5 MANAGEMENT ROLE .................................................................................................................. 391 10.6 HSED ROLE ........................................................ ................................................................. ............ 392 10.7 FOLLOW-UP PROCEDURE .............................................................. ............................................. 392

10.8 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS- REPORTABLE ACCIDENTS ................................................ 393 10.9 NOTIFICATION TO OTHER AUTHORITIES ........................................................ ....................... 393 10.10 IN-HOUSE NOTIFICATION ......................................................... ............................................. 394 10.11 MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS .............................................................................................. 394 10.12 BOARDS OF ENQUIRY ............................................................................................................. 395 10.13 INSURANCE REPORTING ........................................................... ............................................. 396 10.14 NEAR-MISS REPORTING ......................................................................................................... 396 10.15 REPORTING OF SERIOUS HSE INCIDENTS TO ADNOC ..................................................... 397

11 LABORATORY SAFETY ...................................................................................................................... 421

11.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 421 11.2 GENERAL SAFETY ........................................................................................................................ 421 11.3 GLASSWARE .................................................................................................................................. 422

11.4 SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND PPE .................................................................................................. 423 11.5 NAKED LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................. 424 11.6 SMOKING, FOOD AND DRINK .................................................................................................... 424 11.7 CHEMICAL USE ............................................................................................................................. 424 11.8 LABELLING .................................................................................................................................... 426 11.9 ULTRA VIOLET (UV) RADIATION ............................................................ .................................. 427 11.10 SAMPLE DESPATCH ......................................................... ........................................................ 427 11.11 WASTE DISPOSAL .................................................................................................................... 427 11.12 GAS CYLINDERS ............................................................... ........................................................ 428 11.13 ELECTRICITY ............................................................................................................................ 429 11.14 FIRST AID ................................................................................................................................... 430 11.15 CRYOGENIC MATERIALS ....................................................................................................... 430 11.16 MERCURY .................................................................................................................................. 430

12 OFF THE JOB SAFETY ......................................................................................................................... 433

12.1 FIRE PRECAUTIONS IN ACCOMMODATION UNITS ON DAS ISLAND ................................ 433 12.2 FIRE PRECAUTIONS AT HOME ................................................................. .................................. 434 12.3 SAFETY IN THE HOME ................................................................................................................. 436 12.4 SPORT AND RECREATION........................................................................................................... 437 12.5 DRIVING ......................................................................................................................................... 437

13 MANAGEMENT OF HSE IN PROJECTS ........................................................................................... 440

13.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 440 13.2 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................................. 440 13.3 GUIDANCE ..................................................................................................................................... 440









0 CONTENTS AND REVISION

0.1 RECORD OF REVISIONS

PageNumber Date of

issueREV Revision Details

ALL August 2006 01 Issue 02. Complete Manual update

25.11.2007 02 ADGAS HSE Policty updated.

Al l 25.11.2007 02 Replaced Tit le PROM by PM.

126 25/11/2007 02 Sub-section 3.12.8 updated.

378 25/11/2007 02 Sub-Section 9.9.1 updated.

384 25/11/2007 02 Added figure 10-15 in Sub-sect ion 10.3.

384 25/11/2007 02 Added paragraph on Accidents occurred innon-industr ial area in the sub-section 10.3.

388 25/11/2007 02 Added figure 10-16 in both 10.11.1.1 & 2 subsections.

Chapter 10 25/11/2007 02 Added 3 figures (figure 10-15, 10-16 & 10-17).

Chapter 4 25/11/2007 02 Corrected the word MSV with MSV in the…section 4.10.

Chapter 13 31/12/2007 02 Section 13.1.3 completely updated and all ofthe figures changed with new tables from 13.1to 13.5.

Chapter 2 08/01/2009 03 Section 2.11.7 changed the area authori ty for501/502.

Chapter 10 08/01/2009 03 -Section 10.2 updated the definitions for nearmiss and inc ident.

-Section 10.14 tit le of this section updated.









PageNumber Date of

issueREV Revision Details

Chapter 2 10/06/2009 04 Section 2.11.7 tables 2.14 and 2.15 HOPL &MGTS titles updated

Chapter 2 10/06/2009 04 ADGAS HSE Policy Update

Chapter 8 18/06/2009 04 Section 8.2.3.2 amended by addingrequirement for the area to be cordoned off

Chapter 3 24/06/09 04 Plant manager Title corrected

Chapter 2 21/04/10 05 ADGAS HSE Policy Update

Chapter 10 21/04/10 05 -Section 10.2 definitions of accident and Nearmiss updated.

-Terms of reference for the BOE amended toadd the nomination of a member from HR

Division.

Al l 21/04/10 05 Amended the footnote related to the revisionNo. in all pages.









0.2 REVISION REQUEST

Name Designation Location Date

Text Referred to Chapter Section Page(s)

Revision typeTick one or more

Add _ Delete _ Modify _

Details of suggested change (add sheets if necessary including photocopy of original textwith notations

Signature - Originator Date

Instructions:1. Photocopy this page and write in your proposed revision2. Send completed Revision Request to Manager Health, Safety and Environment

(MHSE) after approval by Division/Department Manager.






GUIDE TO THE M ANUAL Chapter No. 01



CHAPTER 1 CONTENTS

1 GUIDE TO THE MANUAL ....................................................................................................................... 9

1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 9 1.1.1 OBJECTIVES ................................................................................................................................... 9 1.1.2 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................. 9 1.1.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................... ................................................................. .... 10 1.1.4 SAFETY STANDARDS ................................................................................................................... 10 1.1.5 SAFE WORKING PRACTICES ....................................................... ............................................... 11

1.2 USING THE MANUAL ..................................................................................................................... 11 1.2.1

HIERARCHY OF HSE DOCUMENTATION ........................................................ ......................... 12 1.2.2 AVAILABILITY OF THE MANUAL ........................................................... .................................... 12 1.2.3 ORGANISATION OF INFORMATION ................................................................. ......................... 12 1.2.4 NUMBERING ............................................................ ................................................................. .... 12 1.2.5 GRAPHICS ................................................................ ................................................................. .... 13 1.2.6 FINDING INFORMATION ............................................................. ............................................... 13

1.3 MAINTENANCE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................................. 14 1.3.1 RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................ .......................................................... 14 1.3.2 TRAINING ................................................................. ................................................................. .... 14 1.3.3 REVISIONS ...................................................................................................................... .............. 14

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS............................................................................................ 15









1 GUIDE TO THE MANUAL

1.1 INTRODUCTION

This Health, Safety and Environment Manual (HSEM) details the procedures by which Abu Dhabi Gas Liquefaction Company Ltd. (ADGAS) implements the Company’s HealthSafety and Environment Policy and HSE Management System (HSEMS). It contains theminimum safety standards acceptable to ADGAS.

The manual has been revised to comply with the ADGAS Corporate Policy andProcedure standard. It has also been revised to ensure consistency with therequirements specified in the ADNOC Codes of Practice and Guidelines on Health,Safety and Environment Management, and is now issued as REV No 01, 2006.

1.1.1 OBJECTIVES

The objective of the ADGAS HSEM is to present in a clear and concise form theminimum requirements for Health, Safety and Environment for those responsible for theconstruction, operation and maintenance of the ADGAS Plant and equipment, andguidance for implementing these requirements.

Inevitably this manual does not meet every situation precisely, and special regulationsmay have to be issued from time to time to deal with particular cases that may arise. Itcannot be stressed too strongly that, in a difficult situation, the responsible person mustconsult higher Management rather than take risks.

1.1.2 SCOPE

The manual covers the Health Safety and Environmental requirements of the companyby the provision of information and references to allow all Divisions and Departments of ADGAS in Abu Dhabi and on Das Island to comply with the minimum safe workingpractices and safety standards required by ADGAS.

These requirements are equally applicable to all Contractors, contracted facilities andservices.

The guidelines contained within this manual are based upon United Arab Emirateslegislation, but do not supersede any acts or regulations. If a discrepancy arisesbetween this manual and acts or regulations, then the latter must take precedence.Where specific UAE legislation does not exist and there are no relevant ADNOC Codesof Practice or Guidance, internationally accepted standards will be utilised.









1.1.3 DEFINITIONSThe following terms are standard throughout this manual to define a condition or courseof action;

SHALLThe word 'SHALL' expresses a mandatory requirement for a condition or course ofaction.

SHOULDThe word 'SHOULD' expresses a strongly recommended or preferred condition or courseof action.

MAYThe word 'MAY' suggests a possible course of action or condition where other optionsare available.

The following terms are also used within this and other ADGAS documents:

QUALIFIED A person is qualified when he has taken a formal course of instruction (or has hadequivalent experience) to enable him to carry out the task and has a certificate to showthat his work has met the relevant standard.

COMPETENTThis applies to a person who has thorough training and/or experience, the skills andknowledge required to carry out the task to the satisfaction of ADGAS.

AUTHORISED This term is used where a person has permission to carry out the task, both fromexternal authorising bodies and internally by ADGAS or contractor management.

RESPONSIBLE A Responsible Person is one who has specific responsibility for a particular type of task

or for a worker engaged in that task (but not necessarily as his supervisor).

DEPUTYThroughout this manual the use of the full post title is synonymous with the back to backDeputy for that post.

1.1.4 SAFETY STANDARDS

The ADGAS minimum safety standards can be increased at a supervisor's discretion ifdeemed necessary, but not diminished. Temporary alternative standards must not beimplemented without the approval of the PM and the MHSE.









Approval will only be granted if other safeguards are introduced which will maintain theestablished work management system.

If an existing safety standard is to be permanently and significantly diminished, approvalmust be obtained from the PM and MHSE.

1.1.5 SAFE WORKING PRACTICES

The Permit to Work is the main tool used to assist in coordinating safe working practiceson site and is referred to throughout this manual

It is not the Permit to Work itself, but the control over the activity and the precautions

taken, which will ensure that work is conducted safely.

Other necessary elements contributing to safe working include:

· communication with all work groups to ensure no conflicting work activities· effective planning· training· workers skills· supervision· performance monitoring

NoteThe fact that a Permit to Work is issued for a particular job does not relieve, inany way, the person(s) carrying out the work of the responsibility for ensuringthat it is conducted safely. If an unsafe condition arises, work should bestopped and the condition reported immediately.

1.2 USING THE MANUAL

The overall hierarchy of HSE Documentation within ADGAS and its relationship to ADNOC is shown in Figure 1-1.









1.2.1 HIERARCHY OF HSE DOCUMENTATIONThe Hierarchy of the

HSE Management Documentation

ADGAS

HSE MANUAL

MAINTENANCE

SIs and PROCEDURES

OPERATIONS

SIs and PROCEDURES

ENGINEERING DIVISION

SIs and PROCEDURES

DEPARTMENTAL

SIs and PROCEDURES

ADGAS

HSEMS

ADGAS

HSE POLICY

ADNOC

HSE POLICY

and HSEMS

Figure 1-1: Hierarchy of HSE Documentation

1.2.2 AVAILABILITY OF THE MANUAL

The Manual is made available in two formats:

· A microsoft word version of the latest issue posted in the HSED's intranet site

· A HTML version, mirroring the microsoft word version, and posted in the HSED'sintranet site

The HTML version provides a user friendly format in which references, to other parts ofthe Manual and other documents in the ADGAS intranet, are hyperlinked.

The microsoft word version is the definitive version of the manual and is also suitable forproviding uncontrolled printed versions of the Manual.

1.2.3 ORGANISATION OF INFORMATION

The Manual is divided into thirteen Chapters, 0 to 13. Chapter 0 contains the overall

Manual Contents List and QA Sheets.

1.2.4 NUMBERING

· The chapter number identifies the chapters as they appear sequentially in the manual· The section number identifies the sections sequentially within the chapter· Subject headings and topic headings are also numbered and may be found listed

with their page number in each chapter Table of Contents· Pages are numbered sequentially within each chapter, not sequentially through the

manual.









1.2.5 GRAPHICSIllustrations, tables, forms and colour plates are numbered sequentially within eachsection and titled Table or Figure.

1.2.6 FINDING INFORMATION

Look in the Manual Table of Contents at the front of the Manual to see if the generalsubject is covered in the manual and in which chapter it is located. Each chapter withinthe body of the manual has its own Chapter Table of Contents with subjects and topicslisted by page number.

1.2.6.1 WARNING, CAUTIONS AND NOTESWhere it is necessary to highlight potentially hazardous situations, critical procedures ormatters of concern which may not be obvious, notation appears in the text as follows:

Warning A warning is used where failure to follow an instruction could result in a majoraccident

Caution A caution is used where failure to follow an instruction could result in AN ACCIDENT or creation of a serious hazard

Note A note is used to draw attention to any matter of concern that may not beobvious, or to a procedure that enables the job to be performed more safely oreffectively.

Further InformationThis summarises references to other sections and information.

1.2.6.2 REFERENCES

References, to other parts of the Manual and other documents in the ADGAS intranet arecontained throughout the Manual, and references in the Intranet HTML version arehyperlinked.

1.2.6.3 REVISIONS

All revisions will be referenced and detailed in Chapter 0 of the Manual.









1.3 MAINTENANCE OF THE MANUAL

1.3.1 RESPONSIBILITY

The HSE Department (HSED) is the custodian of this manual and is responsible for itsmaintenance and periodic upgrading. HSED will work closely with divisional anddepartmental managers and designated manual holders to ensure the following:

· The establishment and promotion of procedures for maintaining the manual· the co-ordination of revisions

1.3.2 TRAINING

Formal training on the HSEM will be conducted as part of the primary safety inductioncourse for all new employees and employees being relocated to Das Island. Sections ofthis manual will also be periodically discussed at safety meetings and as part of thegeneral training programme.

Contractors involved in work activities on Das Island must also be given a briefing on thecontents and correct use of the HSEM by the relevant Job Officer and must, beforestarting work, be able to demonstrate competency in understanding the relevant aspectsof the contents and correct application of the manual.

NoteWhen HP and SE-GS require to issue copies of the HSEM to contractors undertheir control, they should be printed when required and given to the contractor.

Awareness and ongoing compliance with the HSEM's requirements and the validity ofthe manual will be achieved by regular HSED audits of both ADGAS and Contractorsactivities.

The success of the manual in forming safe work place habits and providing a high levelof safety management will only be achieved through referral to the manual and by theapplication of the listed safe work practices by all employees.

1.3.3 REVISIONS

Personnel may initiate changes or add new text material by:

· completing a Revision Request form (see Chapter 00 - Revision and Distribution )· attaching the suggested text, graphics or photographs· sending the form and new text to the HSED

1.3.3.1 REVISION REVIEW

The HSED will acknowledge, review and consider all new material for inclusion in themanual. The originators will be advised of the outcome of the request. Approved









material will be published as a revision or as a bulletin if the revision is urgent, to beincorporated later into this manual.

Types of Revisions

The HSED will make required changes to the manual by issuing to manual holders:

· normal revisions (on a periodical basis) and· bulletins (urgent revisions)

1.3.3.2 MANUAL UPDATE

The HSED together with division/department managers and manual holders willperiodically revise the manual by incorporating planned revisions with all currentbulletins.

NoteWhere any uncertainties exist regarding the revision of the manual contactHSED for further clarification

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

ac Alternating Current

AFFF Aqueous Film Forming Foam AGT Authorised Gas Tester ANSI American National Standard Institute ATC Alcohol Type Concentratebarg Gauge Pressure in BarsBA Breathing Apparatus/Ball ValveBCF Bromochlorodifluoromethane ExtinguishantBDV Blowdown valveBS British StandardBTM Bromochlorotrifluoromethane ExtinguishantCABA Compressed Air Breathing Apparatus

CAF Compressed Asbestos FibreCCB Central Control BuildingCCTV Closed Circuit TelevisionCID Corrosion & Inspection DepartmentCM Commissioning ManagerCO Carbon MonoxideCO2 Carbon DioxideCWS Central WorkshopdB(A) Noise Level 'A' scale Decibelsdc Direct CurrentDC Day Controller

DECR Das Emergency Control Room









DIFS Das Island Fire ServiceDV Deluge ValveECS Engineering Commissioning SuperintendentEFR Earth Fault RelayEPPM Emergency Plans and Procedures ManualES Emergency StopESCR Emergency Services Control Room (Fire Service)ESD Emergency ShutdownESLO Emergency Services Liaison OperatorE&TSM Engineering & Technical Services ManagerETSD Engineering & Technical Services Department

Ex. Explosion ProofEx. 'd' Flameproof CertificationEx. 'i' Intrinsically Safe CertificationF&G Fire and GasHAZOP Hazard and Operability StudyHAZAN Hazard AnalysisHC&I Head of Corrosion & InspectionHED Head of Engineering DepartmentHDE Head of Development EngineeringHDO Head of Das OperationsHEE Health and Environment EngineerHF High FrequencyHMO Head of Materials OperationsHMSD Head of Medical Services, DasHO Head of OperationsHOM Head of MaintenanceHOPL Head of Shutdown and PlanningHOW Head of WorkshopsHP Head of Projects/High PressureHPE&T Head of Process Engineering & TechnologyHPO Head of Processhp HorsepowerHSEE (Trng) Health, Safety and Environment Engineer (Training)

HSE Health and Safety EngineerHSED Health, Safety and Environment DepartmentHSEM Health, Safety and Environment ManualHSEMS Health, Safety and Environment Management SystemH2S Hydrogen SulphideHVAC Heating, Ventilation, Air ConditioningHz Hertz (frequency)ION IonisingID Internal DiameterIDLH Immediately Dangerous to Life and HealthIR Infrared Radiation

IS Intrinsically Safe









ISRS International Safety Rating SystemISS Installations Shift SupervisorJSA Job Safety AnalysiskPa KilopascalI Litre/sLA Legal advisorLC50 Lethal Concentration for 50% exposed populationLD50 Lethal Dose for 50% exposed populationLEL Lower Explosive LimitLNG Liquefied Natural GasLP Low Pressure

LPG Liquefied Petroleum GasLS Lab SupervisorLSM Lead Safety ManMDI(S) Manager Das Island (Services)MHSE Manager HSE DEpartmentmm MillimetresMOLSA Ministry of Labour and Social AffairsMPa MegapascalMPI Magnetic Particle InspectionMRU Mercury Recovery UnitMSDS Material Safety Data SheetMV Medium VoltageN2 NitrogenNDT Non Destructive TestingNon-IS Non Intrinsically SafeNPS National Pipe Straight ThreadNPT National Pipe Taper ThreadNTF New Tank FarmNRV Non Return ValveO2 OxygenOC Operations Co-ordinatorOD Operations Division/ Outside DiameterODS Ozone Depleting Substance(s)

OMO Operations & Maintenance OfficeOP OperatorOSS Operations Shift SuperintendentP&ID Piping & Instrument DiagramP&TM Personnel & Training ManagerPA Public Address SystemPABX Private Automatic Branch ExchangePC Production Controller/Portable ComputerPCV Pressure Control ValvePCS Permit Co-ordination SupervisorPFD Process Flow Diagram

Perc Powered Emergency Release Coupling









PGI Planned General InspectionspH Acidity and Alkalinity MeasurePLC Programmable Logic ControllerPOSSUM Personnel Offshore Supervisory Management systemPP Production ProgrammerPPE Personal Protective Equipmentppm Parts Per MillionPMED Plant Maintenance and Engineering DivisionPM&EM Plant Maintenance & Engineering ManagerPPE Personal Protective EquipmentMP Plant Manager

PSCE Process Shift Charge EngineerPSS Power Shift SupervisorPSV Pressure Safety ValveQMB Quarry Maintenance BaseRPS Radiological Protection Supervisorrpm Revolutions Per MinuteSAE Society of Automotive EngineersSAP System Application ProductsSAVER Self Activated Valve Escape RespiratorSCBA Self Contained Breathing ApparatusSC Superintendent of ContractsSDV Shutdown ValveSE Safety Engineersec. Second (time)SEE Senior Electrical EngineerSEGS Senior Engineer General ServicesSES Storage & Export SuperintendentSF&RS (D) Supdt. Fire & Rescue Services (Das)SG Specify GravitySHEE Senior, Health and Environment EngineerSHSEE(Ops) Senior Health, Safety and Environment Engineer (Operations)SHSEE(Tech)Senior Health, Safety and Environment Engineer (Technical)SI Standing Instruction/Système Internationale d'Unités (Metric

System)SIE Senior Instrument EngineerSME Senior Mechanical EngineerSMF Synthetic Mineral FibreSMOD Senior Medical Officer, DasSOV Solenoid Operated ValveSRR Self Rescue Respirator.SSE(D) Senior Safety Engineer (Das) ADMA-OPCOST Safety TechnicianSPC Supreme Petroleum CouncilSPE Senior Process Engineer

SPIE Senior Plant Inspection Engineer.









SSS Steam Shift SupervisorSTEL Short Term Exposure LimitSWAF Spiral Wound Asbestos FibreSWL Safe Working Loadt TonneT&DC Training and Development Co-ordinatorTFCR Tank Farm Control RoomTLV-C Threshold Limit Value-CeilingTLV-STEL Threshold Limit Value-Short term Exposure LimitTLV-TWA Threshold Limit Value - Time Weighted AverageTSS Train Shift Supervisor

UEL Upper Explosive LimitUHF Ultra High FrequencyUPS Uninterruptible Power SupplyUS Utilities SuperintendentUSCE Utilities Shift Charge EngineerUV Ultraviolet (Radiation)V VoltsVac Volts Alternating Current.Vdc Volts Direct CurrentVDU Visual Display UnitVHF Very High FrequencyW WattsWBGTI Wet Bulb Globe Temperature IndexWG Water Gauge (pressure)






S AFETY M ANAGEMENT Chapter No. 02



CHAPTER 2 CONTENTS

2 SAFETY MANAGEMENT ............................................................. .......................................................... 22

2.1 UNITED ARAB EMIRATES LEGISLATION .................................................................................. 22 2.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. .......................................................... 22 2.1.2 FEDERAL LAW No.8, YEAR 1980 (As amended 1986) ............................................................. .... 22 2.1.3 MINISTERIAL DECISION NO.32 OF 1982 ......................................................... ......................... 22 2.1.4 ADDITIONAL MEASURES ............................................................. ............................................... 23 2.1.5 ARABIC AUTHORITATIVE VERSION ................................................................. ......................... 23

2.2 HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT POLICY STATEMENT ........ ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT

DEFINED. 2.3 RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................................................................................................... 25

2.3.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. .......................................................... 25 2.3.2 GENERAL MANAGER ......................................................... .......................................................... 25 2.3.3 PLANT MANAGER ........................................................................................................................ 25 2.3.4 DIVISIONAL AND DEPARTMENTAL MANAGERS ................................................................. .... 25 2.3.5 MANAGER HEALTH, SAFETY and ENVIRONMENT .................................................................. 26 2.3.6 SUPERINTENDENTS/SUPERVISORS ................................................................. ......................... 26 2.3.7 EMPLOYEES .................................................................................. ............................................... 27 2.3.8 CONTRACT EMPLOYEES ............................................................................................................ 28

2.4 SAFETY COMMITTEES ......................................................... .......................................................... 31 2.4.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. .......................................................... 31 2.4.2 HSE WORKPLACE COMMITTEE MEETINGS .............................................................. .............. 32 2.4.3 ADGAS PROJECTS SAFETY COMMITTEE ........................................................ ......................... 38 2.4.4

ADNOC SAFE PRACTICE COMMITTEE ............................................................ ......................... 39 2.4.5 ADMA-OPCO SAFETY COMMITTEE ................................................................. ......................... 40 2.4.6 EMERGENCY COMMITTEE .......................................................... ............................................... 40 2.4.7 HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATION COMMITTEE ........................................................... .... 41 2.4.8 MAJOR OVERHAUL SAFETY COMMITTEE ................................................................ ............... 42

2.5 MEETINGS ........................................................................................................................................ 42 2.5.1 WORKPLACE HSE TALK MEETINGS ......................................................................................... 42 2.5.2 SAFETY PROJECTS MEETINGS .................................................................................................. 42 2.5.3 TASK RISK ASSESSMENT MEETINGS ........................................................................................ 42 2.5.4 DEPARTMENTAL MEETING ........................................................ ............................................... 42

2.6 EMPLOYEE INVOLVEMENT ......................................................................................................... 43 2.6.1 NEAR MISS REPORTING and HSE SUGGESTION SCHEME ..................................................... 43 2.6.2 HSE QUIZ ................................................................. ................................................................. .... 43 2.6.3

HSE MAN OF THE MONTH ......................................................................................................... 43 2.6.4 SPOTLIGHT ON HSE / HSE Flash ............................................................................................... 44 2.6.5 WORKPLACE HSE COMMITTEES .............................................................................................. 44 2.6.6 TOOL BOX TALKS ........................................................................................................................ 44 2.6.7 ADVANCED SAFETY AUDITS...................................................................................................... 44

2.7 PLANNED INSPECTIONS................................................................................................................ 44 2.7.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. .......................................................... 44 2.7.2 TYPE OF INSPECTION................................................................................................................. 45 2.7.3 INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITY .................................................................................... .............. 45 2.7.4 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION .......................................................... ............................................... 46 2.7.5 INSPECTION REPORT ........................................................................................ ......................... 47 2.7.6 REPORT ANALYSIS AND RECORDS ....................................................... .................................... 48

2.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 52

2.8.1 MAINTENANCE OF QUALITY ................................................................. .................................... 52









2.8.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTION .................................................................................... 52 2.8.3 SAFETY AUDITS ........................................................................................................................... 52

2.9 DIVISIONAL STANDING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................... ......................... 53 2.9.1 OBJECTIVE ................................................................................................................................... 53 2.9.2 PREPARATION ......................................................... ................................................................. .... 53 2.9.3 DIVISIONS ................................................................ ................................................................. .... 53 2.9.4 RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................ .......................................................... 54

2.10 TASK R ISK ASSESSMENT ..................................................................................................................... 54 2.10.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ .......................................................... 54 2.10.2 WHAT SHOULD BE RISK ASSESSED? ................................................................................... 54 2.10.3 WHAT IS RISK? ............................................................... .......................................................... 55 2.10.4 TASK RISK ASSESSMENT TEAM ......................................................... .................................... 55 2.10.5 CONDUCTING THE RISK ASSESSMENT ............................................................................... 56

2.10.6 THE QUALITATIVE RISK MATRIX ......................................................................................... 56 2.10.7 MINIMISING THE RISK ............................................................ ............................................... 57 2.10.8 CLOSING THE RISK ASSESSMENT LOOP ............................................................... .............. 57 2.10.9 IMPLEMENTATION OF TRA RECOMMENDATIONS ........................................................ .... 57

2.11 AREA AUTHORITIES ...................................................................................................................... 71 2.11.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ .......................................................... 71 2.11.2 INDUSTRIAL AREA ........................................................ .......................................................... 71 2.11.3 RESTRICTED/ NON-INDUSTRIAL AREAS ................................................................ .............. 71 2.11.4 NON-INDUSTRIAL AREA ROUTINE WORK ............................................................. .............. 71 2.11.5 PERMIT WORK ............................................................... .......................................................... 71 2.11.6 TYPES OF PERMITS ................................................................................................................ 72 2.11.7 NOMINATED AREA AUTHORITIES ............................................................... ......................... 72 2.11.8 RESPONSIBILITIES OF AREA AUTHORITIES ......................................................... .............. 73

2.11.9 JOB OFFICERS .............................................................. .......................................................... 73 2.11.10 PERFORMING AUTHORITY.................................................................................................... 73 2.11.11 PROCEDURE FOR ISSUE OF PERMITS (NON-INDUSTRIAL) ............................................. 73

2.12 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE ........................................................................................................ 77 2.12.1 PLANT MODIFICATIONS AND PROJECTS ........................................................................... 77 2.12.2 ORGANISATIONAL CHANGES................................................................................................ 78









2 SAFETY MANAGEMENT

2.1 UNITED ARAB EMIRATES LEGISLATION

2.1.1 INTRODUCTION

United Arab Emirates legislation in regard to matters of safety was first introduced in1980 with the publication of Federal Law No.8 regulating labour relations. This wasfollowed in 1982 by the issue of Ministerial Decision No.32 on The Determination ofPreventative Methods and Measures for the Protection of Labour from Risks at Work.

2.1.2 FEDERAL LAW NO.8, YEAR 1980 (AS AMENDED 1986)

Within Part V of this Law, Industrial Safety, Preventative Measures, Health and SocialCases for Workers are addressed in general terms indicating the provisions required byboth employer and employee.

The employers duties include, but are not limited to:

Provision of preventive equipment to give protection against accidents, occupationaldiseases, fire hazards, and hazards from the use of equipment.

· Display of instructions to prevent fire, and to protect against work hazards.· Provision of first aid boxes.· Ensure ventilation and cleanliness, with provision of adequate lighting, drinking water

and toilets.· Periodic medical examination of workers, and provision of medical care facilities.· Provisions of details relating to workplace hazards.· Prohibit the use of alcoholic beverages at work.· Disciplinary code for contravening safety provisions.· Remote area provisions.

Employees duties include, but are not limited to:

· Use and maintenance of protective equipment supplied.· Compliance with instructions given to protect against hazards.

Provision is also made within Law No.8 (1978), for additional safety related matters,namely, Accident Compensation, Accident Reporting, Workplace Inspections, and itdefines Occupational Diseases and Disability Compensation Assessments.

2.1.3 MINISTERIAL DECISION NO.32 OF 1982

This Decision defines in more detail the provisions of Law No.8 (1980), giving specific

requirements for working conditions, fire precautions, hazard protection, safety of









machines, provision of safety instructions and their compliance, safety provisions forsteam boilers, protective clothing, hazardous materials, construction safety, health andsafety inspections and audits, accident reporting, and industrial security.

Details are also provided as to:-

· Lighting Levels.· Maximum Permissible Airborne Concentrations of Hazardous Substances.· First Aid Box Contents.· Accident Notification Requirements.

2.1.4 ADDITIONAL MEASURESMinisterial Decision No.32 (1982) enables the imposition of additional measures andalterations to that Decision, as and when required, by the Under-secretary of the Ministryof Labour and Social Affairs.

Ministerial Decision No 467 (2005) relates to the control of work carried out "under thesun" and in "exposed work sites (open air)" during the months of July and August. Referto Chapter 3, Section 14.

2.1.5 ARABIC AUTHORITATIVE VERSION

It should be noted that both the above pieces of legislation were originally published in Arabic, and although official translations into English are available, the Arabic versionshall be regarded as authoritative.

ReferencesFederal Law No.8, Year 1980 (As Amended 1986)Ministerial Decision No.32 Of 1982Ministerial Decision No 467 (2005) ADNOC_COPV1-01 HSE Administration Systems

2.2 ADGAS HSE POLICY STATEMENT

















2.3 RESPONSIBILITIES

2.3.1 INTRODUCTION

The responsibilities and arrangements that follow from the HSEM Policy Statement aredetailed in the following pages and are illustrated Figure 2-1.

2.3.2 GENERAL MANAGER

The General Manager has the following responsibilities as custodian of the company'sassets:

· To define the Company's HSEM Policy.· To ensure that appropriate arrangements exist, and are in place, regarding the

fulfilment of that policy.· To delegate the implementation of that policy, ensuring that the Plant Manager fully

understands the requirements of the policy and its implications.

Further Information ADNOC_COPV1-01 HSE Administration Systems. Section 4.5

2.3.3 PLANT MANAGER

The Plant Manager (PM) has prime accountability to the General Manager for theimplementation of the ADGAS HSEM Policy on Das Island.

This places the following responsibilities for ensuring the safe and proper care of the DasIsland facilities on the Plant Manager:

· Ensure that the policy and its interpretation are understood by DepartmentalManagers and other plant personnel.

· Ensure that arrangements to fulfil the policy are in place and that they are reviewedfrom time to time to ensure their adequacy.

· Ensure that safety performance is effectively monitored and that remedial action istaken to maintain a high standard.· Review and authorise proposals concerning contingency planning and emergency

procedures.· Ensure interchange of ideas and good communications by establishing and chairing

the Management Safety Committee.· Ensure that the arrangements are, where appropriate, integrated with ADMA-OPCO

arrangements.

2.3.4 DIVISIONAL AND DEPARTMENTAL MANAGERS

Divisional and Departmental Managers are responsible for ensuring the application of the

HSEM Policy as directed by the PM.









This responsibility includes the following:

· Ensure that Superintendents and Supervisors are fully conversant with the HSEManual and the arrangements affecting their particular areas.

· Ensure that Task Risk Assessment is carried out on all new or unusual tasks toensure a safe work method.

· Formulate, and recommend to the Plant Manager, methods to ensure correctapplication of the policy and subsequently implement and operate these methodswithin their Division/Department.

· Ensure that adequate monitoring of worksite safety practices is carried out.

· Attend the Management Safety Committee Meeting to ensure an interchange ofinformation both inter and intra Departmental.

· Ensure the promotion of safety awareness within his Division/Department.

2.3.5 MANAGER HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT

The Manager Health, Safety and Environment is responsible for advising the PM on theday to day implementation of the Health, Safety and Environment Management Policy.


· Act as Health, Safety and Environment Co-ordinator and has specific responsibility to

control the Health, Safety and Environment Programme.· Ensure that Management is kept fully informed of the latest requirements, both

statutory and in terms of good working practice, for occupational safety, health andenvironment.

· Ensure that all accidents and incidents are investigated and remedial measures areimplemented.

· Act as a co-ordinator to develop and administer the overall emergency plan.· Ensure that written guidance material in the form of Health, Safety and Environment

instructions, operating and emergency procedures are maintained up to date andcomplete.

· Attend various Safety Committees to ensure sufficient and suitable interchange ofinformation on safety, health, environment and fire protection matters, both within theCompany and within the ADNOC group.

· Implement the Company policy on safety, fire and emergency training.· Ensure that technical input is provided for modification/reviews and additional or

improved safety or fire detection/protection systems.· Act as the focal point for the implementation of Safety Audits, Inspections, and other

special studies.

2.3.6 SUPERINTENDENTS/SUPERVISORS

Superintendents and supervisors are responsible for ensuring the application of the

arrangements for individual job/tasks and day-to-day work activities.










· Ensure that safe systems of work under their jurisdiction are prepared andimplemented.

· Ensure that a Task Risk Assessment is carried out on all new or unusual tasks toensure a safe work method.

· Ensure that all employees and contractors comply with all physical and proceduralarrangements associated with their work activities.

· Monitor work activities, reporting to Senior Management potential hazards, unsafepractices and accidents/incidents.

· Formulate, and recommend to Senior Management, improved methods of work topromote safe operation.

· Attend appropriate Safety Committees to ensure interchange of information betweenemployees and Management.

· Ensure that employees for whom they are responsible read the following asappropriate:

o Safety Instructionso HSE Manual.o Operating Procedures.o Standing Instructions.o Emergency Plans and Procedures

2.3.7 EMPLOYEES

All personnel have the following responsibilities:-

· To take due care in the performance of their duties to prevent personal injury tothemselves and their fellow workers and damage to property.

· To be diligent in identifying potential hazards and taking the appropriate actions tomitigate their effects.

· To report all unsafe conditions and accidents/incidents to their supervisor.· To wear or make use of protective clothing and equipment as directed by their

Supervisor.· To take good care of Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) and avoid its abuse.· To comply with the Company's Safety Instructions, HSE Manual, Operating

Procedures, Standing Instructions, Emergency Plans and Procedures.· To read the following as appropriate:

o Safety Instructions.o HSE Manual.o Operating Procedures.o Standing Instructions.o Emergency Plans and Procedures.









2.3.8 CONTRACT EMPLOYEES2.3.8.1 CONTRACT WORKFORCE

Additionally, all contractor's employees have the following responsibilities:

· To take due care in the performance of their duties to prevent personal injury tothemselves and their fellow workers and damage to Company's property.

· To be diligent in identifying potential hazards and taking the appropriate actions tomitigate their effects.

· To report all unsafe conditions and accidents/incidents to their supervisor.· To wear or make use of protective clothing and equipment as directed by their

Supervisor.· To take good care of Personnel Protective Equipment and avoid its abuse.· To comply with their own company's and ADGAS Safety Instructions, HSE Manual,

Operating Procedures, Standing Instructions, Emergency Plans and Procedures.· To read the following ADGAS and contractor documents as appropriate:

o Safety Instructions.o HSE Manual.o Operating Procedures.o Standing Instructions.o Emergency Plans and Procedures

2.3.8.2 CONTRACTOR M ANAGEMENT All Contractors supplying labour for employment on ADGAS facilities will present theirHealth and Safety Policy with its particular arrangements to ADGAS Management toensure compliance with the HSEMS Policy.

In addition the Contractor shall ensure the following:

· Adherence to ADGAS Safety Instructions and the safety precautions and proceduresoutlined in the HSE Manual.

· That the personnel supplied have received adequate training for the job functionallocated and that all employees have received the appropriate safety training.

· That suitable provision for personal protective clothing and equipment has beenmade.

2.3.8.3 S AFETY OFFICERS

Contractors are to provide a Safety Officer for their work, to ensure the implementation ofhigh standards of safety that meet the requirements of ADGAS and this manual.

Designated Safety Officers must be qualified to a standard acceptable to the MHSE.









The contractors managers and supervisors have the responsibility to ensure that ADGASand their own safety policies are followed and that their Safety Officer(s) and employeesfulfil their responsibilities.



HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT DEPARTMENT Issue 02, Rev 05





EMPLOYEES AND CONTRACTORS

Their safety and those they work with

SUPERVISOR

Implementation of policy for work group

DIVISIONAL/DEPT MANAGER

Implementation of policy

HSE MANAGER

Day to day implementation of policy

PLANT MANAGER

Site implementation of policy

GENERAL MANAGER

Defines Policy and delegates

ORGANISATION/ACCOUNTABILITY

ADMA-OPCO

PROJECTS

HSE COMMITTEES

MANAGEMENT

SAFETY COMMITTEES

B.A. COURSES

FIRE TRAINING COURSES

SAFETY TRAINING COURSES

SAFETY TRAINING MANUAL

SAFETY, FIRE AND

EMERGENCY TRAINING POLICY

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

MANUAL

EMERGENCY

COMMITTEE

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES AND

CONTINGENCY PLANS

CONTRACTORS

RESPONSIBILITIES

STANDING

INSTRUCTIONS

HSE MANUAL AND

OPERATING PROCEDURES

WORK ACTIVITY

HAZARDOUS AREA

CLASSIFICATION COMMITTEE

INTRODUCTION INTO COMPANY

RECORDS AND PROCEDURES

COMMISSIONING/

ACCEPTANCE

SAFETY REVIEW

HAZOP/HAZAN

CODES, STANDARDS

AND APPROVALS

DEFINITION OF REQUIREMENTS

SPECIFICATIONS/MODIFICATIONS

PLANT MODIFICATION/PROJECTS

SAFETY

INSPECTION

SAFETY

AUDIT

QUALITY CONTROL/

INSPECTION

QUALITY

ASSURANCE

Special Projects

Meetings

Work Site (Tool Box)

Safety Meeting

Task Risk

Assessment

Health, Safety and

Environment Department

MEETINGS

ARRANGEMENTS

HSE POLICY

Figure 2-1: Policy Implementation Flowchart









2.4 SAFETY COMMITTEES

2.4.1 INTRODUCTION

2.4.1.1 GENERAL

ADGAS is committed to ensuring a safe and healthy working environment for allpersonnel in its offices and worksites. ADGAS believes that all work-related injuries,diseases and property losses are preventable, and that safety is good business. ADGASconsiders that there is no more important factor in the undertaking of anyone's job thanthe prevention of injury or ill-health

The main purpose of safety committees and meetings is to stimulate effective two-waycommunication between management and personnel regarding occupational health,safety and welfare matters.

Safety committees should effectively contribute to full employee participation in theimplementation of the safety programme, thereby enhancing its effectiveness.

In addition, safety committees should serve as advisory bodies to management.

The ADGAS hierarchy of safety committees and meetings is illustrated graphically inFigure 2-1.

2.4.1.2 OBJECTIVES

The ADGAS objectives in the fulfilment of this policy are:

· To be an industry leader in occupational health and safety.· To give occupational health and safety considerations equal status with other primary

business objectives· To provide facilities designed to minimise risk and to develop safe working practices

to ensure that hazards to personnel are minimised· To minimise any adverse impact of its activities on the environment

· To ensure that no work starts without confirmation that essential safety systems arein place, and that if safety would be compromised, operations are to be suspended

· To audit and continually improve occupational health and safety standards andprocedures

· To staff its activities with competent, adequately trained personnel· To have all personnel recognise their responsibility to identify and eliminate hazards

and to prevent injury to themselves and others· To promote a pro-active approach to health and safety and encourage all personnel

to participate actively in development of its occupational health and safety programs· To provide appropriate levels of health care and rehabilitation for all personnel· To share occupational health and safety experience with all personnel and relevant

organisations









· To ensure that its contractors and other third parties clearly understand and adhere tothe ADGAS HSEM Policy.

2.4.1.3 MEETING FORMAT

All formal safety meetings should have the aim of being productive and incorporate thefeatures of:

· Following an agenda which has been well published beforehand so that meetingparticipants have time to formulate ideas for constructive input at the meeting.

· Effective leadership which gives all present an opportunity to express their views,encourages participation and keeps discussion focused on the current topic without

wandering.· Elimination of distractions as much as possible.· Keeping to a timetable while fully using the time allotted for the meeting.· Good recording of minutes which catch the essence of the meeting discussion and in

particular the decisions, resolutions and group views.· Aiming for consensus on group decisions and recommendations.· Using minutes from previous meetings as a stepping stone to the achievement of

safety goals.· Being in touch with, and forming a part of, the plant and the company safety

objectives and programmes.

2.4.2 HSE WORKPLACE COMMITTEE MEETINGS

2.4.2.1 INTRODUCTION

Responsibilities for HSE matters are defined in the Company’s HSE ManagementSystem Manual and in the HSE Manual.

Line Management has particular responsibility for operational safety and for handling anyHSE hazards, problems or issues that might arise. HSE Department is available toprovide advice on these matters to both management and employees.

2.4.2.2 OBJECTIVE

To provide a formal forum for consultation and participation between Management andCompany personnel on HSE Protection matters. Specifically to reduce accidents andincidents by promoting awareness; positive attitudes; health, safe and environmentallyacceptable systems of working and identification and rectification of perceived hazards.

Note All Chairmen of HSE Workplace Committees are advised to ensure thatmeetings should not exceed one hour.









2.4.2.3 TIER SYSTEMThere are three tiers of formal consultation operating within ADGAS on HSE matters,These tiers are structured to allow workplace HSE Workplace Committees to monitor theeffectiveness of the arrangements in operation within their areas with management andto promote improvements.

A Central HSE Committee is available for referral if problems cannot be resolved at theWorkplace Committee. This Central Committee also encourages and supervises theactivities of the Workplace Committees in accident/incident prevention and in maintaininga health place of work. The Central Committee reviews substantive changes to the HSEManual before issue as well as passing concerns on HSE Policy to Executive Meeting.

The Executive HSE Committee discusses policy and strategy matters and monitors theoverall functioning of these arrangements.

2.4.2.4 REPRESENTATION

EXECUTIVE HSE COMMITTEE

Production Manager (Chairman)Personnel & Training ManagerIntegrity & Quality ManagerManager Health, Safety and Environment (Secretary)

CENTRAL HSE COMMITTEE

Integrity & Quality Manager (Chairman)Head of OperationsHead of Operations SupportHead of MaintenanceHead of General & Technical ServicesHead of Overhaul and Planning.Head of Product & QualityHead of Corrosion & Inspection

Personnel & Training ManagerSenior Process EngineerSenior Health, Safety and Environment EngineerManager Health, Safety and EnvironmentEngineering Division ManagerHead of Material OperationsSenior Operational Safety Engineer (Secretary)

OPERATIONS HSE WORKPLACE COMMITTEE

Head of Operations Support (Chairman)

Head of Operations









Shift Superintendent Area Controllers Area Team LeadersSenior Process EngineerSafety Representatives – (2 or 3)Representative from HSE Department

This is the representation for the Operations Areas. Other Workplace Committees(Maintenance, Product & Quality (Lab), General & Technical Services, etc…, will havedifferent representation.).

2.4.2.5 FREQUENCY OF MEETINGS

Executive HSE Committee

These are held bi-annually in the Management Conference Room.

Central HSE Committee

These are held quarterly at dates to be agreed at the end of each calendar year, for thenext year.

Workplace HSE Committee

These are held once every 2 months on dates to optimise, so far as possible, attendanceby all participants. The Workplace HSE Meetings will be held in locations convenient forthe ease of access for the shift representatives at the meeting each.

NoteWorkplace Committee Chairman must ensure the attendance of theContractor(s) Representative(s) at each committee.

2.4.2.6 SPECIAL MEETINGS

Where there is an important issue, or the occurrence of a serious accident or incidentrequiring consultation with Company personnel, the Chairman of each Committee maycall a special meeting.

For Overhaul and Major Projects Safety Committees will stay as they are. ( No change inthe present practice)

2.4.2.7 QUORUM

The Quorum shall be at least five Committee members for the Executive Committee.









The Quorum for a Workplace Committee meeting shall be the AreaHead/Superintendent, two Safety representatives, a representative from HSEDepartment, Shift superintendent and one nominated members of day staff.

The Contractors Committee does not have a specified quorum for contractors due tovariability of the number of contractor companies on site. The three ADGAS membersspecified above or their replacement must be in attendance.

2.4.2.8 AGENDA

Items for the Executive, Central and Contractor HSE Committee Meeting Agendas mustbe submitted to the secretary three weeks prior to the meeting. Items arising within the

three-week period may be discussed. Copies of the Agendas will be submitted toCommittee members seven days before the meeting.

Items for the Workplace HSE Committee Meeting Agenda should be submitted to thesecretary at least two days before the meeting.

Where an item on the agendas requires the presence of a Departmental Head or anyother specialist member, he shall be invited to attend to report on the relevant item.

Normally matters should be fully discussed at the Workplace and Central Committeesprior to being submitted as agenda items for the Executive Meeting.

2.4.2.9 COMMITTEE ACTIVITIES

As a routine, each Committee should discuss relevant Health, Safety and Environment(HSE) topics. Matters for discussion should be passed through the three levels i.e.Workplace, Central, then Executive Committees. Only in exceptional circumstancesshould any of the levels be bypassed

2.4.2.10 MINUTES OF MEETINGS

HSE Division shall provide a Secretary for the Executive and the Central Committeeswho shall produce minutes of each meeting. One copy of the minutes of the Executiveand Central Committee’s Meetings shall be sent to members of the Committee and toeach Safety representative. A nominated member of the day staff from the Workplace Area shall be appointed as Secretary for the Workplace Committee and shall produceminutes of each meeting.Copies of the minutes of Workplace Meetings shall be copied toeach member of the Committee and to the Area Notice Boards and to HSE Department ifthey are not present on the Committee

Personnel assigned actions in the minutes not in attendance at the meeting should begiven details by the secretary of the meeting and a timescale for response agreed. Thisshould be included in the minutes. All actionees should receive copies of the minutes.

Progress on actions should be followed up under “Matters Arising” at the next meeting.

Items with protracted completion periods should be listed in an updated attachment to









the meting minutes and discussed at the appropriate future meeting. References shouldbe in the following format:

Date raised/minute number/completion date/person responsible e.g.17.07.99/2.11/1q92/HSE.

Feedback to persons raising items is through the minutes of the meeting and their Safetyrepresentatives.

2.4.2.11 LINES OF COMMUNICATION

Should an employee observe a situation which he believes unsafe, or wishes to request

information concerning HSE matters, the first action is to raise it with his immediatesupervisor.

Should the outcome of this approach be unsatisfactory to the employee he may requestthe Safety representative for the Workplace to raise the point with the Line Supervisor.

If no acceptable action follows this approach then the Safety representative and LineSupervisor should contact HSE Department for advice.

2.4.2.12 FUNCTIONS OF SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE

A Safety Representative shall represent all employees in his work area. In case of his

absence another Safety Representative may by mutual consent, assume hisresponsibilities.

A Safety Representative is an official position recognised by ADGAS Management as animportant member of the HSE structure. He is an integral member of a work team at theoperator or technician level and as such will be the recognised point of contact for thiscolleagues to raise and discuss HSE issues. He will help to communicate the output ofthe HSE Committee structure to and from his colleagues.

When a Safety Representative is asked to investigate a potential hazard or inspect awork area or the scene of an accident, or to take part in a Board of Enquiry his line

Supervisor will normally grant the necessary time off the job.

In normal circumstances only Safety Representative with responsibility for the area inquestion will be involved in inspections and investigations.

A HSE Comments book shall be provided in each area for logging of any HSE relatedhazards or defects. The HSE comments book will be reviewed at the WorkplaceCommittee. The Safety Representative will inform himself of the position of alloutstanding items prior to each workplace HSE Protection Committee Meeting. Anyoutstanding actions will be discussed at the Workplace HSE Protection CommitteeMeeting.









2.4.2.13 COMPOSITION OF WORKPLACE COMMITTEESOperations Workplace Committee

· Head of Operations (HO) - Chairman Alternative Secretary· Area Coordinator (U) Alternative Secretary· Area Coordinator (P)· Shift Superintendent· Area Team Leader (U)· Area Team Leader (P)· Process Operator, Trains 1, 2 & 3

· Utilities Operator, Trains 1, 2 & 3· UAE Assignee· Representative from HSED

General & Technical Services HSE Committee

· Head of General & Technical Services (Chairman)· Instrument Electrical Supervisor· Mechanical Supervisor· Fabrication Supervisor· Senior. Engineer (General Services) +

o Rigging/scaffolding Supervisoro Civil Supervisoro Painting Supvr.o Insulation Supervisor

· Safety Representatives (2)· Representative from HSE Department· Representative(s) from Contractors

Maintenance HSE Committee

· Head of Maintenance (Chairman)

· Electrical Section Engineer or Supervisor· Instrument Section Engineer or Supervisor· Mechanical Section Engineer or Supervisor· Safety Representatives (3 or 4)· Representative from HSE Department· Representative(s) from Contractors

Product & Quality HSE Committee

· Head of Product & Quality (Chairman)· Chief Chemist

· Member of Laboratory Staff









· Safety Representative· Representative from HSE Department· Representative(s) from Contractors

Materials HSE Committee

· Head of Materials Operations· Senior Stores Supervisor· Store Keeper· Safety Representatives (2)· Representative from HSE Department

· Representative(s) from Contractors

Personnel & Training HSE Committee

· Personnel & Training Manager· English Language Instructor· Head of Training (Das)· Training Coordinator· Senior Personnel Officer (Das)· Personnel Officer (Das)· Senior Accommodation Officer· Representative from HSE Department· Representative(s) from Contractors

Other personnel may be asked to attend where appropriate. The meetings should beconvened in sufficient time to allow comments and business to be forwarded asnecessary to the Central Committee for discussion at its quarterly meeting.

The convening and administration of the Workplace Committee meetings shall be theresponsibility of the person from the area nominated by the Chairman of the Committee.

2.4.3 ADGAS PROJECTS SAFETY COMMITTEE

OBJECTIVES

The objective of the Projects Safety Committee is to provide a forum for effectivecommunication on occupational health, safety and welfare and fire protection/preventionfor projects being carried out on Das either managed directly by ADGAS or by others onbehalf of ADGAS.

REPRESENTATION:

· Head of projects

· Health, Safety and Environment Manager









· Senior Health, Safety & Env. Engr.(P) (Secretary)· Senior Project Representative] Each Project· Senior Project Safety Officer ]· Senior Contractor Safety Officer· Project Liaison Officer

TERMS OF REFERENCE

The Committee will normally meet on the third Sunday of every other month at 10:00hours at a nominated venue when required when projects are being executed.

The frequency of meetings may be increased from time to time, to suit high levels ofcontract work.

The topics for discussion at the meting will be of a general policy nature and notindividual project activities.

The Committee will, in particular, deal with safety matters within one project groupaffecting other groups on the island including ADGAS and ADMA-OPCO.

Items discussed at this Committee may be referred to the appropriate ManagementSafety Committees or actioned directly.

All other functions of the Committee are covered in the preceding sections.

2.4.4 ADNOC SAFE PRACTICE COMMITTEE

OBJECTIVE

The objective of the ADNOC Processing Directorate Safe Practice Committee is toprovide a forum for discussing all aspects of occupational health, safety, and welfare andfire protection/prevention within the group of joint venture companies.

REPRESENTATION

Representatives at Safety Superintendent level from the following companies:

· ADNOC (PD) (Various Centres)· GASCO· ADGAS· FERTIL· ADMA-OPCO

TERMS OF REFERENCE









These are prescribed by ADNOC Processing Directorate, but it is understood that theCommittee is to assist the respective Senior Management by considering the following:-

Planning and co-ordinating the development of common operating safety practices.

Execution of joint safety campaigns.

2.4.5 ADMA-OPCO SAFETY COMMITTEE

OBJECTIVE

To facilitate the flow of safety information between ADGAS and ADMA-OPCO a

representative of the ADGAS HSED attends the above Committee.

REPRESENTATION

The representative is the MHSE.

TERMS OF REFERENCE

The terms of reference, objectives and membership of the Committee are as prescribedby ADMA-OPCO.

2.4.6 EMERGENCY COMMITTEEOBJECTIVETo act as a focal point for the co-ordination and implementation of emergencyprocedures and contingency plans as laid out in the HSEM Policy.

REPRESENTATION

ADGAS· Operations Manager (Chairman, alternately)· Manager Health, Safety & Environment· Senior Health, Safety and Environment Engineer (Secretary, alternately)

ADMA-OPCO

· Head of Das Operations (Chairman, alternately)· The Supdt. Fire & Rescue Services or his deputy· Senior Safety Engineer (Das) (Secretary)· Other disciplines to be invited depending on the topics under discussion.

TERMS OF REFERENCE









The Committee should meet on a quarterly basis or more frequently dependent on thematters under consideration

The Committee will provide an interface between all interested parties and will develop aconsensus approach to emergency procedures and contingency plans within the HSEMPolicy.

In particular the Committee will consider, but not be limited to, the following:

· Overall emergency organisation within ADGAS and interrelationship with ADMA-OPCO.

· The preparation of, or modification to, Emergency Procedures and ContingencyPlans.· Prior to forwarding such procedures to Management for approval, the Committee

shall review and approve all joint new and modified procedures.· Critically consider the effect on joint ADMA-OPCO and ADGAS emergency

procedures of plant facilities and, if deemed necessary, recommend HAZAN studiesbe carried out.

· Monitor the various Safety Committees to ensure that the views of various personnelon emergency procedures are being noted.

· To note all comments and recommendations from planned general inspections andplant audits which might affect emergency procedures and ensure arrangements are

modified accordingly including the effects this may have on the services supplied by ADMA-OPCO.· Review Emergency Evacuation Procedures with regard to the marine capability to

evacuate Das Island within the planned period and account for varying populationlevels subject to construction activities.

2.4.7 HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATION COMMITTEE

OBJECTIVE

The objective of the Committee is to ensure that appropriate hazardous areaclassification techniques are applied to ADGAS facilities.

REPRESENTATION

· Manager Health, Safety and Environment (Chairman).· Senior Electrical Engineer .· Senior Instrument Engineer.· Operations Co-ordinator.· Senior Development Engineer (E&I)· Secretary nominated by Manager Health, Safety and Environment.

TERMS OF REFERENCE









The Committee shall meet as necessary to review changes to the hazardous areaclassification drawings brought about as a result of modifications, process changes,installation of new plant, etc

2.4.8 MAJOR OVERHAUL SAFETY COMMITTEE

OBJECTIVES

The objective of the Committee is to provide a forum for effective communication onoccupational health, safety and environment for major overhaul of the LNG Plant

REPRESENTATION

· Health, Safety and Environment Manager (Chairman)· Head of Overhaul and Planning· Senior Health, Safety and Environment Engineer (Secretary)· Contractor Overhaul Manager· Contractor HSE Manager/ Safety Engineer

2.5 MEETINGS

2.5.1 WORKPLACE HSE TALK MEETINGS

These meetings shall be held by the supervisor with his work group usually once permonth or more often if required. It covers selected safety topics, new work plans,significant accidents and other useful items of safety and occupational health.

Safety topic materials and training videos are available from the HSEE (Trng) as well asassistance in preparing talks on safety subjects.

2.5.2 SAFETY PROJECTS MEETINGS

These are found necessary when substantial work projects of non-routine nature are tobe introduced. These serve to inform incoming project teams of current safetyrequirements and restraints and establish good understanding and lines of

communication with plant operations personnel.

2.5.3 TASK RISK ASSESSMENT MEETINGS

Task Risk Assessment meetings are held with all participants in selected new non-routine or other hazardous activities for the purpose of examining the job in detail,identifying likely hazards and incorporating preventative safeguards into the job process.(See Section 9 of this Chapter)

2.5.4 DEPARTMENTAL MEETING

(HSE Department)









OBJECTIVE

Interchange of information between members of the HSED.

REPRESENTATION

All senior members of staff in the HSED present on Das Island will attend. The MHSE orhis Deputy shall chair the meeting.

TERMS OF REFERENCE

The meeting will be held bi-monthly.

The meeting is a forum for members of the Health, Safety and Environment Departmentto discuss department matters, exchange ideas and review various strategies toprogress the aims of high standards of occupational health and safety for all personnel.

Other areas for considerations may include:

· Training and continuing education for Health, Safety and Environment personnel.· Safety performance in ADGAS contract work and other associated contracts.· Skills and induction training programme.

2.6 EMPLOYEE INVOLVEMENT

2.6.1 NEAR MISS REPORTING AND HSE SUGGESTION SCHEME

All ADGAS personnel are encouraged to report near misses and propose HSEsuggestions. All reports and proposals are scrutinised by the HSE Initiative Committeeon a regular basis where rewards are made.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV4-01: FRAMEWORK OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY RISKMANAGEMENT

2.6.2 HSE QUIZ

All ADGAS personnel can take part in the monthly HSE quiz. The quiz focusses onrelevant and current HSE issues and requirements. Winning entrants are rewarded withprizes such as mobile phones.

2.6.3 HSE MAN OF THE MONTH

This is awarded to the person who has taken an action which had a positive HSE impacton the plant operation or plant personnel. The HSE Initiative Committee evaluates thecandidates and decides who receives awards.









2.6.4 SPOTLIGHT ON HSE / HSE FLASHThese bulletins provide a rapid and succinct medium for publicising HSE incidents/issuesand dissemination of lessons learned. They are produced by the HSED on a regularbasis in response to current HSE issues.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV1-01: HSE ADMINISTRATION

2.6.5 WORKPLACE HSE COMMITTEES

Provide a formal forum for consultation and participation between Management and

Company personnel on HSE protection matters. Specifically to reduce accidents andincidents by; promoting awareness; positive attitudes; health, safe and environmentallyacceptable systems of working; and identification and rectification of perceived hazards.(Refer to Section 4.4)

2.6.6 TOOL BOX TALKS

The Tool Box Talk (HSE talk) subject addresses the hazards of the work beingperformed. Control measures to minimise risk as identified in the Task Risk Assessmentmust be communicated to all employees on site in order for ensuring safety at the worksite. These measures must be communicated to employees in the form of job specifictool box talk (HSE talk) prior to commencement of the work being performed.

2.6.7 ADVANCED SAFETY AUDITS

All ADGAS Departments and Divisions are encouraged to carry out Advanced Safety Audits. Departments and Divisions whose Auditors carry out prescribed numbers areeligible for receiving rewards in line with the HSED Guidelines.

2.7 PLANNED INSPECTIONS

2.7.1 INTRODUCTION

Inspection is one of the best tools available to identify hazards and assess their risks

before accidents and other losses occur. A well managed inspection programme helpsto identify potential hazards not anticipated during design, equipment deficiencies due tonormal wear and tear or abuse, employees unsafe acts, inadequacies in remedial actiontaken earlier for a specific problem and effect of cumulative changes in people,equipment and material.

Planned inspection involves the systematic examination of the production units,equipment, tools, materials and their use by the employees. These inspections are abasic and important element of the loss prevention programme.









Further Information ADNOC-COPV1-01: HSE ADMINISTRATION SYSTEMS. Section 9.3

2.7.2 TYPE OF INSPECTION

PLANNED GENERAL INSPECTIONS

Planned General inspections are the Supervisor's self inspection of their work areas (orother areas within same division on mutual exchange basis).

These inspections shall be carried out by line supervisors for their area as they have the

primary interest in and responsibility for efficient and safe operation and they have betterworking knowledge of the jobs and the people doing them.

A flow chart for Planned General Inspection is given in Figure 2-2: Planned GeneralInspections.

MANAGEMENT SAFETY TOURS

Management Safety Tours are neither Planned Inspections nor Plant Audits and aremeant to visibly show the interest of upper/middle level managers towards safety andhealth/loss control. These are not comprehensive inspections, rather they are a "walkthrough" of an area to observe critical safety and health items. Details regarding thesetours have been issued separately to relevant managers.

2.7.3 INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITY

Managers/superintendents shall assign inspection responsibility for each area/facility oroffice to the concerned supervisor by job title.

It shall be the responsibility of the line supervisors to inspect the area/facility or office thatfalls within the area of their responsibility.

Occasionally supervisors from one area should be assigned to inspect other areas within

the same division on a mutually agreed exchange basis.

FREQUENCY OF INSPECTIONPlanned General Inspection of units and facilities shall be done once in every 2 monthswhile the frequency of inspection for offices shall be 3 months.

INSPECTION CHECK LISTThe individual or the team shall plan the inspection in advance and determine what tolook at and what to look for. Check lists providing details on items that need to be lookedat and condition/practices which need to be looked for shall be made for each area andused during inspection.









Once made the check list needs only to be kept up-to-date as things change andexperience dictates.

This check list shall be updated by line supervisors on an annual basis and forwarded toMHSE for records.

Personnel using the check list shall guard against relying only on the check list. It is tobe used as a guide and not regarded as a comprehensive list of every conceivablesubstandard practice/condition.

2.7.4 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION

Hazard classification is the technique used to describe the loss potential of a condition orpractice observed during the inspection. The most apparent benefit of hazardclassification is the establishment of priorities for remedial action.

Hazards can be classified as follows:

Class '1' Hazard

A condition or practice likely to cause permanent disability, loss of life or body part,and/or extensive loss of structure, equipment or material.

Example 1. A barrier guard missing on a large press brake for a metal shearingoperation.

Example 2. A maintenance worker observed servicing a large sump pump in anunventilated deep pit, with the gasoline motor running.

Class '2' Hazard

A condition or practice likely to cause serious injury or illness, resulting in temporarydisability or property damage that is disruptive but not extensive.

Example 1. Slippery oil condition observed in main aisle way.

Example 2. Broken tread at bottom of office stairs.

Class '3' Hazard

A condition or practice likely to cause minor, non-disabling injury or illness, or non-disruptive property damage.

Example 1. A carpenter observed handling rough timber without gloves.

Example 2. A strong rancid odour from cutting oil circulating in the bed of a large lathe.









2.7.5 INSPECTION REPORT

2.7.5.1 GENERAL

The Inspection Report shall provide the following information;

· Identification of the item or area inspected· List of substandard practices and conditions observed· Classification of the degree of hazard· Immediate remedial action taken, if any· Recommendations for permanent action to eliminate the basic or real causes of the

sub-standard condition/act· Assignment of responsibility and schedule for completion of the recommended action.

Good conditions and practices noted during inspection shall be commended separatelyand attached to the report.

2.7.5.2 PLANNED GENERAL INSPECTION (PGI)

The report for PGI shall be prepared by the concerned supervisor conducting theinspection using the form shown in Figure 2-3: Inspection Report. The supervisor shallcomplete all the columns of the report except columns 3, 11 and 12 titled "Quality Score","Action By" and "Target Dates" respectively. Column 13 titled "Remarks" shall be used

to highlight items carried over from earlier inspection reports, recurring substandardconditions or acts and any problems or delays in implementation of remedial actions.

The supervisor shall forward the report to his Division/Department Head within 48 hoursof inspection. The Division/Department Head shall review/approve the report, assignresponsibility and schedule for completion of remedial actions (columns 11 and 12) andsign the report before distributing it within 24 hours of receipt to MHSE and all personnellisted in Column 11.

2.7.5.3 REMEDIAL ACTION

Action required to rectify certain substandard conditions or acts may consist only of averbal request. The concerned supervisor shall initiate the verbal request during or soonafter the inspection and record it in the report.

Remedial action that cannot be implemented by verbal request shall be developed forother substandard conditions or acts noted during inspection and recorded in the reportunder column 10.

2.7.5.4 SCHEDULE OF IMPLEMENTATION

The priority of implementation of the action shall depend on the combination of thepotential severity of loss (as determined by hazard classification of 1, 2 and 3) and the

probability of a loss occurring from the exposure or hazard (i.e. high, medium or low).









For example a class 2 hazard with a high probability of loss occurrence shall be given ahigher priority for rectification than a class 1 hazard with a low probability of lossoccurrence.

Remedial actions requiring plant modification or project of capital nature shall beimplemented as quickly as possible within the constraints of the existing procedure forplant modification and capital projects.

All other actions shall be completed within a period of 1 week to 4 weeks depending onthe combination of potential severity and probability of loss occurrence.

2.7.5.5 FOLLOW-UPRemedial actions arising out of an inspection shall be entered into the SAP System. Itshould be understood that all actions will not be related to Mechanical Maintenance andsome might require procedural changes, capital expenditure, engineering control, etc.The use of SAP System is recommended for the convenience of keeping a track of allremedial actions through a single report. At the end of each month a summary of allactions completed during the month and the status/cause of delay of remaining jobs shallbe produced and copied to MHSE for review. Jobs once reported as complete will not bereflected in subsequent reports.

It shall be the responsibility of the person whose name appears in Column 11 of the

report to ensure that the action is completed as per the target date mentioned in Column12.

MHSE shall report the status of all actions pertaining to Class 1 & 2 hazards that havebeen delayed in the first weekly PM meeting of the month.

MHSE and the concerned Division/Department Head shall review the remedial actionafter its implementation as and when deemed appropriate to confirm that it providesadequate control of the risk and has no undesired side effect.

2.7.6 REPORT ANALYSIS AND RECORDS

STL (Tech and Training) shall be responsible for the following:

· Maintain a central file for all inspection and follow-up reports.· Prepare a quarterly report highlighting percentage of inspections completed versus

planned for all areas/facilities for management review.· Determine the quality of inspection reports using the Inspection Report Analysis

sheet shown in Figure 2-4. Compile quality score on a quarterly basis formanagement review.

· Analyse all inspection reports to identify repetitive substandard conditions and theirbasic causes on a half yearly basis using the Analysis Sheet for management review.









Figure 2-2: Planned General Inspections

GENERAL INSPECTION

DEVELOPMENT CHECK

LIST

LOCALISED

INSPECTION REPORT

COMPLETE REPORT

1. ACTIONEES 2. MHSE

QUARTERLY REPORT

MHSE

DEPARTMENT HEAD

FOLLOW UP REPORTSTL (Tec & Trg)

PM MEETING, 1ST

WEEK OF MONTH

CENTRAL FILEQUARTERLY

FILEQUALITY ANALYSIS

Every Two Months

Area/ ExchangeSupervisors

48 hrs

Dept. Head

Inspection Report

Review Action









Figure 2-3: Inspection Report









Figure 2-4: Inspection Analysis









2.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2.8.1 MAINTENANCE OF QUALITY

The maintenance of Quality is an essential aspect of the HSE Management Policy toensure high standards of engineering and operational practice to plant and personnelsafety.

Quality assurance is a built-in responsibility of all employees. In addition to thisresponsibility, the MHSE through a programme of monitoring and compliance withappropriate ADGAS procedures will ensure these aims are met and that in particular, the

following areas are given consideration:

· The selection of new equipment is correct, taking into account safety, application,reliability, operability and maintainability.

· That operational, safety and engineering procedures are adhered to, and monitoredto ensure their adequacy during changing plant circumstances.

· A formal training policy is administered to promote sufficient and suitable job skillsamongst personnel.

· The various audit functions are carried out professionally and their recommendationsare followed up. Working groups responsible for such auditing functions are, Health,Safety and Environment Division, Corrosion and Inspection Department and the

Laboratory.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV1-01: HSE ADMINISTRATION SYSTEMS. Section 9.2 HSE Audit

2.8.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTION

To maintain a high level of safety on the site, inspection is carried out on all aspects ofplant and equipment. The Corrosion and Inspection Department of Engineering andTechnical Services Division ensures the following:

· That statutory requirements are met. Where no local statutes apply, acceptedInternational Standards and Codes of Practice are used.

· That all appropriate design requirements are incorporated.· That all relevant certification is prepared and catalogued.· That all installation procedures, e.g. welding, are carried out to the appropriate

standards.· That equipment is inspected to ensure that it remains fit for purpose.

2.8.3 SAFETY AUDITS

A Safety Audit subjects all areas of ADGAS activities to a systematic critical examination

with the object of minimising loss.











Engineering Division


Divisional Managers are responsible for sending revisions to all manual holders.

Note A Standing Instruction is a procedure, which is prepared by concerned divisionand cover a variety of specific items related mostly to HSE. It should not beanomalous or contradictory to any other ADGAS documents, it should be writtenin the imperative sense, in the simplest English language and should be

available for all concerned personnel.

2.10 TASK RISK ASSESSMENT

2.10.1 INTRODUCTION

All activities or tasks undertaken in our organisation represent a potential risk to manyaspects of the business and in particular to health, safety and environment. It isrecognised that in undertaking an industrial activity risk can never be eliminated,however, we must always mange risk to a level that is as low as reasonably practicable.

In other words, we must reduce the risk to a level that is acceptable. The Company usesmany techniques to analyse risk at various levels. In this section the tools are providedto allow structured analysis of risk and allow methods to be put in place to ensureminimisation of the risk.

Further Information ADNOC_COPV4-01 FRAMEWORK OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY RISKMANAGEMENT. Section 3

2.10.2 WHAT SHOULD BE RISK ASSESSED?

In theory all tasks undertaken on a day to day basis requires risk assessment however

many of these tasks are of such low risk that there is no need to document how the riskis controlled. In ADGAS maintenance and other activities are controlled by the permit towork system and other risks by procedures and standing instructions. In producing apermit, a procedure or a S.I. the author is going through the thought process of a riskassessment in developing the controls.

The tools provided in this section allow a structured approach to be taken to riskassessment that will document the thought process involved in controlling a particularrisk. Whilst task risk assessment can be utilised for all tasks only the tasks perceived tobe high-risk by management or employees need be tasks risk assessed. Examples oftasks that are likely to require risk assessment are: -









· Use of cranes lifting over live lines/plant.· Working over water.· Work on live flare systems.· Activities that have been known to cause serious accidents/incidents.· Tasks with high hazard potential to people, assets, environment or reputation. (listing

of these activities can be found in Chapter 2 Section 2.9.1 of ADGAS Safety Casedocument which is available in the Public folder “All Public Folders/ HSEMSSupporting Documents/ ADGAS Safety Case”

However assessments should not only be restricted to the above list, experience and judgement should be utilised to decide if a task needs to be risk assessed.

2.10.3 WHAT IS RISK?

Risk is defined as the product of the measure of the likelihood of occurrence of anundesired event and the potential adverse consequences which this event may have on:

· People – injury or harm to physical or psychological health.· Assets (or revenue)– damage to property (assets) or loss of production.· Environment – water, air, soil, animals, plants and social.· Reputation – employees and third parties.

Risk can be measured in strict mathematical terms, however, for the purpose of tasksrisk assessment the assessment will be entirely qualitative, utilising the qualitative riskmatrix in Figure 2-5. The assessment will require experience and judgement.

2.10.4 TASK RISK ASSESSMENT TEAM

The task risk assessment is the type of assessment that requires to utilise the knowledgeand experience of a small multi-disciplinary team. A small competent team will producemuch more useful and realistic tasks risk assessment than a large team of people whoonly partly understand the work to be undertaken. The suggested optimum size for sucha team is around four typically consisting of:

· HSED Member· Production Div. Member· Engineering Div. Member· Job Officer ( person who will lead the work)

The actual team members will depend on the work to be assessed, for example if thework was in the laboratory then a member of Engineering Division will be moreappropriate than a Production Division member. An HSED member will always bepresent to guide HSE input and further technical expertise can be co-opted to the teamas required.









If additional support is required from Das Fire Rescue Team, then the Job Officer mustensure that Fire Rescue Team member is present during the Task Risk Assessment.

2.10.5 CONDUCTING THE RISK ASSESSMENT

The first step is for the full assessment team to visit the proposed worksite and to bebriefed by the job officer on how the work will be carried out. Any procedures ordocumentation should also be available for review. The idea of the site visit is for theteam to gather information and get a full picture of how the work will be carried out andan indication of the hazards present, and the hazards to the process plant that may arisewhilst the task is being carried out. As an aid-memoire the hazard checklists in Error!Reference source not found. can be utilised at this stage to help identify potential

hazards.

On completion of the site visit, the task risk assessment team can conduct the remainderof the assessment primarily in an office-based environment. The procedure, work planor method statement should be reviewed by the team and the HSE Task Risk Assessment Form in Error! Reference source not found. completed by:

· Listing each activity in the activity column.· Listing the associated hazards identified from site visit or discussions that are

associated with each activity.· List the relevant associated effects (or “type of harm”) associated with each hazard.

· The team should then utilise the qualitative risk matrix and using their combinedexperience and judgement to rate the severity (guidance for levels of severity aregiven in Figure 2-5) of each effect on the Scale 1 to 5 (Negligible to Catastrophic).The probability should also be rated on the Scale A to E.

· The risk can then be stated as the product of probability and severity e.g. A.5. whichfrom the qualitative risk matrix can be seen to fall in the medium risk (M) region.

2.10.6 THE QUALITATIVE RISK MATRIX

The qualitative risk matrix can be used for many applications e.g. accident/incidentinvestigation categorisation and in this case for pre-work risk assessment.

As described above the task risk assessment team will have assessed the probabilityand severity of the various activities in the task being studied. This will result in the riskfalling into one of three categories which require to be treated in deferent ways, i.e.:

2.10.6.1 HIGH RISK

This is intolerable and work should not be undertaken unless steps can be taken tominimise risk and move it into the medium or low risk category.

2.10.6.2 MEDIUM RISK

In this area the risk can be tolerable provided every effort is made to minimise the risk to

as low as reasonably practicable (ALARP) by putting minimisation measures in place.









2.10.6.3 LOW RISK

This is considered an acceptable level of risk for industry.

2.10.7 MINIMISING THE RISK

On completion of the evaluation of the initial risk level at either high or medium the teamshould now develop ideas or measures that will reduce the risk to as low as reasonablypracticable. The “risk reduction measures” will normally be extra controls that will be putin place to result in risk reduction.

The team should then assess the final risk on implementation of the risk reductionmeasures to either medium (ALARP) or to low and then slate final assessment as eitheracceptable or not acceptable.

2.10.8 CLOSING THE RISK ASSESSMENT LOOP

The risk assessment should be given a unique reference number from the HSED – Indexof Risk Assessments, controlled by the SOSE. Copies of the completed form should besent to all Team members and a copy to the SOSE for central filing. The completed riskassessment forms should be used to incorporate the risk reduction measures into theprocedures or other methods of work control. Any lessons learnt from the implementedcontrol measures should be passed to the SOSE for future reference.

2.10.9 IMPLEMENTATION OF TRA RECOMMENDATIONS

Control measures to minimise risk as identified in the TRA must be communicated to allemployees on site in order for ensuring safety at the work site. These measures must becommunicated to employees in the form of job specific tool box talk (HSE talk) prior tocommencement of the work being performed.

The Tool Box Talk (HSE talk) subject must address the hazards of the work beingperformed.

Should conditions on the work site change which introduces new hazards that are not

addressed in the Task Risk Assessment (TRA) then work should be suspended and theSafety Engineer informed. Safety Engineer and Job Officer will then discuss and decidethe need for a further TRA and if required then Job Officer should reconvene the newTRA.

Worked ExampleFor guidance and as a point of illustration see Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8 for completedrisk assessment form.









PROBABILITY

A B C D E

SEVERITY PEOPLE ASSETS ENVIRONMENT REPUTATION

Has occurredin world-wideindustry but

not in ADNOC

Has occurredin other

ADNOC GroupCompany

Has occurredin specific

ADNOC GroupCompany

Happensseveral times

a year inspecific

ADNOC GroupCompany

Happensseveral times

per year insame locationor operation

5.Catastrophic

Multiplefatalities or

permanent totaldisabilities

Extensivedamage

Massive effectInternational

impact

4. SevereSingle fatalityor permanenttotal disability

Major damage Major effect National impact HIGH RISK

3. CriticalMajor injury orhelath effects

Local damage Localised effectConsiderable

impact MEDIUM RISK (ALARP)

2. MarginalMinor injury orhealth effects

Minor damage Minor effect Minor impact

1. NegligibleSlight injury orhealth effects

Slight damage Slight effect Slight impact LOW RISK

Figure 2-5: Qualitative Risk Matrix

Detailed breakdown of consequences for the Health Risk Management Categories

Table 2-1: People

Severity Description

5 Multiple fatalities - from an accident or occupational illness(poisoning, cancer).

4 Single fatality or permanent total disability - from an accident oroccupational illness (poisoning, cancer).

3 Major injury or health effects (including Permanent Disability) – Affecting work performance in the longer term, e.g. prolonged

absence from work. Irreversible health damage without loss of life,e.g. noise induced hearing loss, chronic back injuries.

2 Minor injury or health effects –Affecting work performance, e.g.restriction to activities (restricted work case –RWC) or need to takea time off work to recover (lost time incident – LTI). Limited,reversible health effects, e.g. skin irritation, food poisoning.

1 Slight injury or health effects (incl. first aid case –FAC and medicaltreatment case –MTC). Not affecting work performance or causingdisability.









Table 2-2: Assets


5 Extensive damage - Substantial or total loss of operation (costs inexcess of US$10,000,000).*

4 Major - Partial operation loss (2 weeks shutdown, costs up toUS$10,000,000).*

3 Local damage - Partial shutdown (can be restarted but costs up toUS$500,000).*

2 Minor damage - Brief disruption (costs less than US$100,000).*1 Slight damage - No disruption to operation (costs less than

US$10,000)*.

These losses in US$ are meant as guidance only. Individual ADNOC Group Companymay use more appropriate figures provided they are within the above quoted limits.

Table 2-3: Environment


5 Massive effect - Persistent severe environmental damage or severe

nuisance extending over a large area. In terms of commercial orrecreational use or nature conservation, a major economic loss forthe company. Constant, high exceedance of statutory or prescribedlimits.

4 Major effect - Severe environmental damage. The company isrequired to take extensive measures to restore polluted or damagedenvironment to its original state. Extended exceedance of statutoryor prescribed limits.

.3 Localised effect - Limited loss of discharges of known toxicity.Repeated exceedance of statutory or prescribed limit. Affectingneighbourhood Spontaneous recovery of limited damage within oneyear.

2 Minor effect - Contamination. Damage sufficiently large toattack the environment. Single exceedance of statutory orprescribed criterion. Single complaint. No permanent effect on theenvironment.

1 Slight effect - Local environmental damage. Within the fence andwithin systems. Negligible financial consequences.









Table 2-4: Reputation


5 International impact - International public attention. Extensiveadverse attention in international media. National/ internationalpolicies with potentially severe impact on access to new areas,grants of licenses and/ or tax legislation.

4 National impact - National public concern. Extensive adverseattention in the national media. Regional/national policies withpotentially restrictive measures and/ or impact on grant of licences.Mobilisation of action group.

3 Considerable impact - Regional public concern. Extensive adverseattention in local media. Slight national media and/ or local/ regionalpolitical attention. Adverse stance of local government and/ oraction groups.

·.2 Limited impact - Some local public concern. Some local mediaand/or political attention with potentially adverse aspects forcompany operations

1 Slight impact - Public awareness may exist, but there is no publicconcern









Table 2-5: Hazards associated with plant and equipment (including non-poweredplant and hand tools)

CATEGORY TYPE OF HARM EXAMPLES OF HAZARD

Mechanical Trapping (crushing, drawingin and shearing injuries)

Two moving parts or one movingpart and a fixed surfaceConveyor belt and driveVee belt and pulleyPower press"in-running nips"Mangle

GuillotineScissorsStaplerUsing hammer

Impact (includes puncture) Something that may strike or stabsomeone or can be struck againstMoving vehicleRobot armSewing machineDrillHypodermic needle

PendulumCrane hook

Contact (Cutting, friction orabrasion)

Something sharp or with a roughsurfaceKnife, chisel, saw, etc.Blender bladeCircular saw bladeSanding belt Abrasive wheelHover mower blade

Entanglement (rotating parts) Drill chuck and bit

Power take off shaftPipe threading machine Abrasive wheel

Ejection (of work piece orpart of tool)

Cartridge toolThicknessing machineUsing hammer and chisel Abrasive wheel









CATEGORY TYPE OF HARM EXAMPLES OF HAZARDElectrical Shock/burn/fire/explosion

Ignition sources

Electricity above 240vElectricity - 240vElectricity- 110vCTEExtra low volt electricityStaticBatteries

Pressure Release of energy(Explosion/injection/implosion)

Compressed airCompressed gasSteam boilerVacuum

Hydraulic systemStored energy Flying/Failing materials Springs under tensionSprings under compressionHoist platform/lift cageConveyor tension weightRaised tipper lorry bodyCounterweightLoad carried by crane

Thermal Burns/fires/scalds/frostbite Hot surfaceUsing blow lampWelding flame/arc

RefrigerantSteamRadiation Ionisingradiation

Burns, cancer X Raysa or b RadiationNeutrons

Non ionisingradiation

Burns Micro waveRadio frequencyLaserUltra violetlnfra red

Noise Hearing loss, tinnitus, etc. Noise > 85 dB(A)L EP,d

Vibration Vibration white finger, wholebody effects Pneumatic drillOperation of plantStability Crushing Inadequate crane base

Fork lift truck on slopeMachine not bolted downMobile Scaffold too highScaffold not tied

Overload/defective due tomechanical failure

Crushing Crane overloadChain slingEye bolt overloadScaffold overloadHopper overfill









Table 2-6: Hazards associated with materials and substances


FIRE/EXPLOSION Combustion

Burns Timber stackCoal storePaper storeGreaseMagnesiumStraw

Plastic foamIncreasedCombustion

Burns Oxygen enrichment

Flammablesubstance (inc.Highly andExtremelyFlammable) Seealso explosivebelow

Burns PetrolPropane gasMethaneCarbon MonoxideMethanolParaffin AcetoneToluene

Oxidisingsubstance

Burns Organic peroxidePotassium permanganateNitric acidExplosive materialFireworksProprietary explosivesDetonatorsSome oxidising agentsHighly flammable gas in confinedspace

Dust explosions Burns Coal dustWood dust

Aluminium powderFlour

Table 2-7: Health Hazards


HEALTHHAZARDSCorrosive/irritating materials

Skin effects Sulphuric acidCaustic sodaMan made mineral fibre

Particles Lung effects Asbestos fibres









CATEGORY TYPE OF HARM EXAMPLES OF HAZARDSilica dustDust mite faecesPigeon droppingsCoal dustGrain dustWood dust

Fumes Acute and chronic effects onhealth (Local and systemiceffects)

Lead fumeRubber fume Asphalt fumes

Vapours Acute and chronic effects on

health

Acetone

1,1 1-TrichloroethaneDichloromethaneBenzeneLsocyanates

Gases Acute and chronic effects onhealth

Carbon monoxideHydrogen sulphideCarbon disulphideSulphur dioxide

Mists Acute and chronic effects onhealth

Oil mistPrinting ink mistWater – legionelia

Asphyxiants Acute and chronic effects onhealth NitrogenCarbon dioxide Argon

Health hazards byingestion

Burns to upper alimentarytract

Toxic, harmful, corrosive andirritant liquids

Poisoning All harmful aerosolsPolluted waterContaminated food and drink

Hazards bycontact

Cuts, abrasions SwarfRough timber

Concrete blocksBurns, Frostbite Molten metalFrozen food

Table 2-8: Hazards assoc iated with the place of work


Pedestrian Access

Tripping, slipping Damaged floorsTrailing cablesOil spillsWater on floors









CATEGORY TYPE OF HARM EXAMPLES OF HAZARDDebrisWet grassSloping surfaceUneven stepsChanges in floor level

Work at heights Falls Fragile roofEdge of roofEdge of mezzanine floorWork on ladderErecting scaffold

Hole in floorObstructions Striking against Low headroomSharp projections

Stacking/Storing Failing materials High stacksInsecure stacksInadequate rackingStacking at heights

Work over/nearliquids, dusts,grain, etc.

Fall into substances,drowning, poisoning,suffocation, etc.

Grain siloTankReservoirSump

Work over riverWork near canalEmergencies Trapping in fire Locked exits

Obstructed egressesLong exit route

Table 2-9: Hazards associated with the working environment


Light (NB: Alsoincreases risk ofcontact with otherhazards)

Eye strain, arc eye andcataracts

GlarePoor lightingStroboscopic effect Arc weldingMolten metal

Temperature Heat stress, hypothermia Work in furnaceCold room

Heat stress, sunburn,melanoma, hypothermia, etc.

Outdoor workHot weatherCold weatherWind chill factorWork in rain, snow, etc.

Confined spaces Asphyxiation, explosion, Work in tank









CATEGORY TYPE OF HARM EXAMPLES OF HAZARDpoisoning, etc. Chimney

PitBasementUnventilated roomVesselSilo

Ventilation "Sick Building Syndrome",nausea, tiredness, etc.

FumesOdoursTobacco smoke

Table 2-10: Hazards associated with methods of work


Manual handling Back injury, hernia, etc. LiftingLoweringCarryingPushingPullingHot / Cold loadsRoughloadsLive loads - animal/person

Repetitivemovements

Work related upper limbdisorders

Keyboard workUsing screwdriverUsing hammer and chiselBricklayingPlucking chickensProduction line tasks

Posture Work related upper limbdisorders, stress, etc.

Seated workWork above head heightWork at floor level

Table 2-11: Hazards associated with work organisation


Contractors Injuries and ill health toemployees by contractorswork

Work above employeesUse of harmful substancesContractors' welding

Injuries and ill health tocontractors' employees bywork in premises.

Process fumesServices (e.g. undergroundelectricity cables)Stored hazardous materials









CATEGORY TYPE OF HARM EXAMPLES OF HAZARDOrganisation ofwork

Injuries to employees Monotonous workStressToo much workLack of control of jobWork too demanding

Work in publicareas

Injuries and ill health of public Trailing cablesTraffic/plant movementObstruction to blind personObstruction to prams, etc.Work above public

Table 2-12: Other types of hazard


Attack by animals Bite, sting, crushing, etc. BeesDogBullFleasSnake

Attack by people Injury, illness, post trauma

stress disorder

Criminal attack

Angry customer Angry studentDrunken personDrug abuserMentally ill person

Natural hazards Various injuries, illnesses LightningFlash flood

Table 2-13: Hazards to Process Plant


Vibration Plant trip Jack hammersMobile cranes and equipmentPortable motors and generators

Dropped objects Plant damage Cranes and lifting equipmentOverhead workScaffolding

Fire Plant damageProduction loss

Hot workCutting and weldingVehicle entry









Figure 2-6: HSE Task Risk Assessment Form









Figure 2-7: Example of Completed HSE Task Risk Assessment (i)









Figure 2-8: Example of Completed HSE Task Risk Assessment (ii)









2.11 AREA AUTHORITIES

2.11.1 INTRODUCTION

To ensure that all locations and personnel in work areas have a clearly and definedpersonal responsibility for safety matters, a system of Area Authorities is in place in ADGAS, and is divided into two main areas, Industrial and Non-Industrial.

2.11.2 INDUSTRIAL AREA

This area covers the LNG Plant, Storage and associated facilities. Within this area, the

nominated Area Authorities have detailed responsibilities under the Permit To WorkSystem.

2.11.3 RESTRICTED/ NON-INDUSTRIAL AREAS

Industrial areas are divided into Restricted & Non Restricted Areas as shown in theDrawing No. 33-AOZ-03735 Rev 8. There are four (4) areas that are considered non-restricted areas in the industrial areas. They are QMB, CCB, 501/502 Laydown Areaand Train 3 Construction Jetty, as shown in Drawing No 33-AOZ-03735 Rev 8.

Further InformationOD Permit-To-Work Manual: Chapter 5

2.11.4 NON-INDUSTRIAL AREA ROUTINE WORK

In general, routine work operations performed outside of the Industrial Area do notneed a Permit-to-Work System, such as:-

Workshops:Excluding any modifications/construction work on the Workshop itself.

General Maintenance of Buildings and Offices:To carry out light maintenance of the building, such as cleaning, painting, plumbing,

bulbs and tube lights replacement, fixing of cupboards shelving etc. Cleaning/replacement of HVAC window units, alarm testing and floor tile replacement.

ADGAS Stores Areas:Excluding any modifications/construction work.

2.11.5 PERMIT WORK

There are certain classes of work, normally of a routine nature, for which a standardwritten authorisation, to initiate such work, is essential to ensure the safe conduct ofworking.

The following are operations that do require a Permit-to-Work.









· Welding/gas cutting torches.· Excavation/Trenching.· Confined Space Entry.· Working on elevated places (roofs, walls etc.).· Cable laying/Electrical Isolation.· Service piping modifications.

2.11.6 TYPES OF PERMITS

Standard documentation for the above work can be in the form of:-

· A Long Term Permit or,· A Non-Industrial Area Permit.

2.11.7 NOMINATED AREA AUTHORITIES

Table 2-14: Area Authorit ies Plant (Indust rial)

Area Tit le

Plant (Industrial)

LNG Plant HSOProcess Area. OC(P)Utilities Area. OC(U)Installations Area. OC(S)501/ 502 Laydown Area HTAPQMB LME(M)Train 3 Construction Jetty HTAPCCB HSO

Table 2-15: Outside Plant (Non Industrial)

Product & Quality (Lab) HPQ

OMA Building SSSE(P)Safety Building SSSE(P) ADGAS Office Building SPO (Das)Materials Stores HMOCentral Workshop MGTSTraining Office & Workshop T&DC Al-Jimi Village SAOProject Building SSSE(P) (old E&TSD Building)Contractors Yards MGTS









2.11.8 RESPONSIBILITIES OF AREA AUTHORITIESThe general responsibilities for Area Authorities (Non-Industrial Areas) are:-

· To ensure that no work in their area of responsibilities proceeds without theirknowledge and clearance.

· To act as a focal point for safety matters in their area and initial contact forcontractors working in their area of responsibility.

· To initiate the Non-Industrial Area Permit, Figure 2-9, if required for work tocommence in their area of responsibility

· To highlight all hazards in the work area covered by the permit.· To ensure that employees and contractors working in their area have received a

safety induction (Random checks shall be carried out for currency of induction card -which for contractors is valid for three years only).

· Exclusively for QMB, CCB, 501/502 Laydown and Train 3 Construction Jetty areas,Non Industrial permit applies, however Area Authority must ensure that ShiftSuperintendent countersigns the Non-Industrial Permit prior to performing any NakedFlame job.

Note Any person leaving ADGAS for a period exceeding six months will requireSafety Induction on his return to the ADGAS facilities.

2.11.9 JOB OFFICERS

All ADGAS Job Officers with responsibility for contractors, must ensure that the Non-Industrial Area Permit is completed and signed by all parties before commencement ofwork. Also, that the Performing Authority is fully aware of the scope of work and anyassociated hazards.

2.11.10 PERFORMING AUTHORITY

In the Non-Industrial Area, the Performing Authority shall be the person nominated by the ADGAS Job Officer.

2.11.11 PROCEDURE FOR ISSUE OF PERMITS (NON-INDUSTRIAL)

The procedure for the permit issue, to the completion of work, is as follows:

· The Job Officer, initiating the Permit Application, fills in Section ‘A’ and passes it tothe Area Authority.

· After being informed by the Job Officer of the scope of work to be performed, the Area Authority will complete Section ‘B’ of the permit, indicating any hazards in thearea covered by the permit.

· Section ‘C’ will be completed by the Job Officer after being informed of any jobhazards and means of control.









· The Performing Authority will complete Section ‘D’ after being informed of the fullscope of work and any hazards in the area of work.

Before the work is commenced, the Performing Authority shall ensure that all personnelcarrying out the work are aware of the exact identity, nature, extent of the job, hazardsinvolved and means of control

· Section ‘E’ will be completed by the Performing Authority, accepted by the Area Authority and the Job Officer will then sign off the work on the white copy along withthe pink copy.

· The white copy is retained by the Job Officer, and completed at the end of the job for

reference only.· The yellow copy is retained by the Performing Authority and displayed on the work

site until the job is completed.· The green copy is forwarded to the SOSE for reference and scrutiny.· The pink copy remains with the Area Authority, to be completed when the job has

finished and the area is accepted. This copy is then signed off along with the whitecopy.

Further InformationOD Permit to Work Manual Chapter 3.14









NON-INDUSTRIAL AREA PERMIT

A. Job Officer Serial

Location of Work Site: Date:

Description of Work:

Tools & Equipment to be Used:

B. A REA A UTHORITY :- I confirm that I have discussed the Scope of Work with theOfficer who has been advised of the following hazards and means of

Name: _____________Signature: _____________ Designation: _________Date:

C. J OB O FFICER :- I confirm that I have discussed the Scope of Work with the Authority and have been informed of the hazards and the means of control asSection ‘B’.


D. P ERFORMING A UTHORITY : I confirm that I am aware of the Scope of Work andbeen advised on the hazards as listed in Section ‘B’ and will inform mythe job, hazards and means of


E. W ORK COMPLETED : Date: Time: _________ Signature:

Performing Name:

Work & Area Area Authority Date:______Signature:________

Job Officer: Date: _____ Signature: ____________

Distribution: White copy – Job Officer, Yellow copy – Performing Authority Green copy – SHSEE, Pink copy – Area Authority

Hazard Means of Control

Figure 2-9: Non-Industrial Area Permit









M.P. 1

M.P. 2

M.P. 3

M.P. 4

M.P. 5

M.P. 6

M.P. 7

M.P. 8

MARSHALLING POINTS - INDUSTRIAL AREA

AL JAZ ERA CLUB

SAFETY DEPT

A MESS

B & C MESS

OASIS CLUB

AL-JIMI VILL AGE

MARSHALLING POINTS - NON-INDUSTRIAL AREA

INDUSTRIAL AREA

Figure 2-10: MAP OF INDUSTRIAL / NON-INDUSTRIAL AREA









2.12 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

2.12.1 PLANT MODIFICATIONS AND PROJECTS


Procedures for modifications to the plant and the design, construction andcommissioning of new facilities are required to ensure that appropriate engineering andHSE controls are implemented. The procedures detail all items required from initiationthrough to physical completion, commissioning and post commissioning evaluation.

Further Information

ADNOC GROUP GUIDELINE HSEM S5.5 Management of Change

2.12.1.2 OBJECTIVE

To ensure that in the design, construction and commissioning of new facilities, ormodification to existing facilities, due attention is paid to the safety of personnel and plantas stated in the Health, Safety and Environment Management Policy.

The means to achieve this are firstly, by correct specification and utilisation ofappropriate Codes and Standards in order to obtain the relevant approvals and secondly,the rigorous application of safety review techniques at all stages.

All documentation relating to any modification shall be logged and maintained within theCompany records for future retrieval if required.(held by Engineering Division).

2.12.1.3 DETAILED PROCEDURES

The procedures for work involving modifications and new construction is detailed inETSD SI, D-1. Modification Procedures.

2.12.1.4 SCOPE OF THE MODIFICATIONS PROCEDURE

Consideration for applying the Modifications Procedure must be considered for thefollowing changes:

· Operating conditions including;o routeso materialso system parameterso isolationso relief arrangementso line specifications

· Operating parameters· Control logic· Trip systems

· New Construction









· Minor changes· Temporary changes· Intermittent Plant Changes· Plant documentation of the Engineering Division including:

o Standing Instructionso Procedureso Plant Manuals

2.12.1.5 JOINT INTERFACE MODIFICATION BETWEEN ADMA-OPCO & ADGAS

All modifications / studies on interface systems affecting joining systems between the twocompanies must be mutually agreed before implementation. Any development processof any changes of the following systems should be done with the involvement of ADMAOPCO Technical Support.

· LNG/ ADMA OPCO manifold location West of 7th Street (includes Feed Gas Inlet line – atmos., 35#, 75#, 230# and 780 – HP).

· 6” Pentane Spiking line West of Tank D 15.· Oily water line from discharge separators (includes oily water from 21-C-1/C-2/C-3)· Sulphur Product Steam and Condensate line (ADGAS OBL)· Fuel Gas line to ADMA Power station (includes 11KV Switch Room)· 30” Firewater Backup line (33-MOV-196)· Potable water supply line (to ADGAS)· BFW make-up to ADMA utilities.· Knockout drums for onshore flares (includes HP relief header in North foreshore

area)· 60” Manifold at Plant 26 (Booster Compressors suction header)· Nitrogen Supply line.· Stripping (Sweet Gas Supply to Strippers) gas lines.· Cooling Water supply (includes the header supplying to fire main)· Ground and Elevated Flares· Plant 26 pipelines to LNG Manifold· 30” MGL valve pit near LNG/ LPG Tank Farm Area

· ADMA-OPCO Blow Case No. 6 (located at the junction of Road 6 and 6th Street)· Feed Gas Compressors (Trains 1 & 2) relief line to HP Relief Header· Oily water line from Booster Compressors to BQ.

2.12.2 ORGANISATIONAL CHANGES


Organisational change is a normal and inevitable part of ADGAS's business, however,such changes, if poorly managed, can lead to unwanted consequences such asaccidents and plant failures. Organisations associated with major accident hazards,such as ADGAS, have the potential for disastrous consequences and high costs in terms









of lives and money, and therefore all organisational changes require to be carefullymanaged.

2.12.2.2 OBJECTIVES

The objective of this guidance is to ensure that organisational changes are analysed andcontrolled as thoroughly as plant modifications. Also, organisational change may lead toopportunities to improve HSE standards, for example through the reappraisal ofsafeguards or clarification of personal accountabilities.

2.12.2.3 SCOPE OF ORGANISATIONAL CHANGES

Organisational changes which may need to be managed include changes to:

· Roles and responsibilities· Organisational structure· Staffing levels· Shift rotas· Key personnel· Communication systems or reporting relationships· Personnel resources· Management systems· Availability of specialist expertise (for design, engineering support, procurement etc.).

2.12.2.4 CONTROLS

The UK Health and Safety Executive (http://www.hse.gov.uk/) provide guidance on howto manage organisational changes.

Further InformationChemical Information Sheet No CHIS7: Organisational Change and Major Accident HazardsContract Research Report 348/2001: Assessing the safety of staffingarrangements for process operations in the chemical and allied industries

The HSED will provide guidance and support to Departments who are implementingorganisational changes.






GENERAL AND PERSONAL S AFETY Chapter No. 03



CHAPTER 3 CONTENTS

3 GENERAL AND PERSONAL SAFETY ............................................................. .................................... 83

3.1 SAFETY INDUCTION ...................................................................................................................... 83 3.1.1 ATTENDANCE .......................................................... ................................................................. .... 83 3.1.2 CATEGORIES ................................................................................................................................ 83 3.1.3 RECORDS ................................................................. ................................................................. .... 83 3.1.4 SAFETY TRAINING MANUAL ...................................................................................................... 83 3.1.5 JOB OFFICERS RESPONSIBILITY .......................................................................................... .... 84

3.2 VISITORS .......................................................................................................................................... 84 3.2.1 DEFINITION .............................................................. ................................................................ .... 84 3.2.2 ROLE OF THE GUIDE/HOST ........................................................ ............................................... 84 3.2.3 COMPLIANCE .......................................................... ................................................................. .... 84 3.2.4 VALID PASSES .............................................................................................................................. 84 3.2.5 PERMISSION ................................................................................................................................. 85 3.2.6 NATIONAL DRESS .............................................................. .......................................................... 85 3.2.7 VISITOR REGULATION CHECKLIST ................................................................. ......................... 85

3.3 RESTRICTED AREAS ...................................................................................................................... 86 3.3.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 86 3.3.2 DAS ISLAND .............................................................. ................................................................ .... 86 3.3.3 CONSTRUCTION SITES ............................................................................................................... 86 3.3.4 INDUSTRIAL AREAS ........................................................... .......................................................... 86

3.4 HAZARDOUS AREAS AND ZONES ........................................................... .................................... 86 3.4.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. .......................................................... 86 3.4.2

HAZARDOUS ZONES .......................................................... .......................................................... 87 3.4.3 VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL BOUNDARIES ................................................................................... 87 3.4.4 HAZARDOUS ZONE DRAWINGS ............................................................. .................................... 87 3.4.5 RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................ .......................................................... 88 3.4.6 IGNITION SOURCES .......................................................... .......................................................... 89 3.4.7 BATTERY EQUIPMENT, MATCHES AND LIGHTERS ............................................................ .... 89 3.4.8 SMOKING ...................................................................................................................................... 90

3.5 HOUSEKEEPING .............................................................................................................................. 90 3.5.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 90 3.5.2 HOUSEKEEPING COMPETITION ........................................................... .................................... 91

3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................. 91 3.6.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 91 3.6.2 WASTE IDENTIFICATION AND CLASSIFICATION ................................................................... 93 3.6.3

WASTE SEGREGATION AND COLLECTION ................................................................ .............. 94 3.6.4 RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................. .................................... 95 3.6.5 RECORDS ................................................................. ................................................................. .... 95

3.7 PERSONAL SAFETY ........................................................................................................................ 95 3.7.1 GENERAL SAFETY RULES ............................................................ ............................................... 95 3.7.2 ALCOHOL AND DRUGS ................................................................ ............................................... 95 3.7.3 FINGER RINGS, NECK CHAINS AND BRACELETS ................................................................ ... 96

3.8 SAFETY SIGNS AND BARRIERS ................................................................................................... 96 3.8.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. .......................................................... 96 3.8.2 ROLE OF SAFETY SIGNS .............................................................. ............................................... 96 3.8.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................... ................................................................. .... 96 3.8.4 CLASSIFICATION ......................................................................................................................... 97 3.8.5 COLOURS ................................................................. ................................................................. .... 97

3.8.6 VISIBILITY ..................................................................................................................................... 97









3.8.7 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 98 3.8.8 PORTABLE SIGNS ........................................................................................................................ 98 3.8.9 ROAD TRAFFIC SIGNS ....................................................................................... ......................... 99 3.8.10 BARRIERS ........................................................................................................ ......................... 99

3.9 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT .............................................................. ....................... 100 3.9.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 100 3.9.2 MINIMUM SAFETY WEAR .................................................................................. ....................... 100 3.9.3 HAZARDS ............................................................................ ........................................................ 101 3.9.4 HEARING PROTECTION ............................................................... ............................................. 101 3.9.5 HEAD PROTECTION .......................................................... ........................................................ 102 3.9.6 FOOT PROTECTION .................................................................................................................. 103 3.9.7 EYE AND FACE PROTECTION ................................................................ .................................. 104 3.9.8 OPTICAL FILTERS...................................................................................................................... 105

3.9.9 HAND PROTECTION .......................................................... ........................................................ 105 3.9.10 VISORS/FACE SHIELDS ........................................................................................................ 106 3.9.11 BODY PROTECTION ................................................................. ............................................. 106 3.9.12 RESPIRATORY PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 107

3.10 MANUAL HANDLING ................................................................................................................... 111 3.10.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ ........................................................ 111 3.10.2 RISK IDENTIFICATION ............................................................ ............................................. 111 3.10.3 RISK FACTORS ............................................................... ........................................................ 112 3.10.4 SAFE MANUAL HANDLING .................................................................................................. 113 3.10.5 TRAINING ............................................................................................................................... 117 3.10.6 SUPERVISION ........................................................................................................................ 117 3.10.7 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ..................................................................................................... 117 3.10.8 RISK CONTROL .............................................................. ........................................................ 117

3.10.9 RISK CONTROL OPTIONS.............................................................................. ....................... 118 3.11 HEARING CONSERVATION ............................................................ ............................................. 118

3.11.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ ........................................................ 118 3.11.2 DEFINITIONS ................................................................. ........................................................ 119 3.11.3 HEARING CONSERVATION PROGRAMME ............................................................. ............ 119 3.11.4 NOISE ASSESSMENT ........................................................................... .................................. 120 3.11.5 HEARING CONSERVATION METHODS ........................................................ ....................... 121 3.11.6 NON-HAZARDOUS NOISE .................................................................................................. .. 122 3.11.7 NOISE PROBLEM INDICATORS ......................................................... .................................. 122

3.12 EYE SAFETY PROGRAMME ........................................................................................................ 123 3.12.1 PURPOSE .............................................................. ................................................................ .. 123 3.12.2 OBJECTIVES ........................................................ ................................................................. .. 123 3.12.3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................. 123

3.12.4 EYE TESTING ....................................................................................... .................................. 124 3.12.5 PRESCRIPTION GLASSES ..................................................................................................... 124 3.12.6 CONTACT LENSES ......................................................... ........................................................ 124 3.12.7 SAFETY SPECTACLES/ EYESHIELDS/ OVERSPECS........................................................... 124

3.13 VEHICLES AND BICYCLES ............................................................. ............................................. 125 3.13.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ ........................................................ 125 3.13.2 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................... 126 3.13.3 REVERSING ......................................................... ................................................................. .. 126 3.13.4 PASSENGER SAFETY ................................................................ ............................................. 126 3.13.5 PASSENGER LOAD LIMITS ................................................................. .................................. 127 3.13.6 SPEED LIMITS ................................................................ ........................................................ 127 3.13.7 ROAD LIMITS ................................................................. ........................................................ 127 3.13.8 ROAD CLOSURES (TOTAL/PARTIAL) ........................................................... ....................... 127 3.13.9 ROAD MOVEMENT OF WIDE IRREGULAR LOADS ......................................................... .. 128









3.13.10 DRIVER TRAINING ......................................................................................... ....................... 128 3.13.11 LOADING/UNLOADING ........................................................... ............................................. 128 3.13.12 PROJECTING or WIDE LOADS ........................................................... .................................. 128 3.13.13 TOWING ................................................................ ................................................................ .. 128 3.13.14 MAINTENANCE .............................................................. ........................................................ 129 3.13.15 BICYCLES ............................................................ ................................................................. .. 129

3.14 HEAT DISORDERS ................................................................. ........................................................ 129 3.14.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ ........................................................ 129 3.14.2 BODY HEAT RESPONSES ......................................................... ............................................. 130 3.14.3 ACCLIMATISATION ....................................................... ........................................................ 130 3.14.4 BODY TEMPERATURE .......................................................................................................... 130 3.14.5 HEAT EXHAUSTION ................................................................. ............................................. 131 3.14.6 HEAT STROKE ................................................................ ........................................................ 131

3.14.7 TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS ........................................................... .................................. 132 3.15 SAFE ACCESS AND WORK PLACES ......................................................... .................................. 133

3.15.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ ........................................................ 133 3.15.2 ENTRANCE AND EXIT .............................................................. ............................................. 133 3.15.3 RESTRICTED AREAS ..................................................... ........................................................ 133 3.15.4 TEMPORARY ACCESS ........................................................................................................... 134 3.15.5 ACCESS TO ELEVATED AREAS .......................................................... .................................. 134 3.15.6 ESCAPE ROUTES ........................................................... ........................................................ 134 3.15.7 SAFE WORK PLACES ............................................................................................................ 135

3.16 OFFICE SAFETY .......................................................... ................................................................. .. 137 3.16.1 FIRE ........................................................................................................................................ 137 3.16.2 TRIPS and FALLS.................................................................................................................... 137 3.16.3 LIFTING ................................................................ ................................................................ .. 138

3.16.4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES................................................................ .................................. 138 3.16.5 ELECTRICAL HAZARDS ........................................................... ............................................. 138 3.16.6 WORKSTATION ...................................................................................................................... 138 3.16.7 BREAKS ................................................................ ................................................................. .. 140 3.16.8 FIRST AID ............................................................................................................................... 141









3 GENERAL AND PERSONAL SAFETY

3.1 SAFETY INDUCTION

3.1.1 ATTENDANCE

All personnel regardless of employer or grade shall have attended an ADGAS safetyinduction (A) course before working for ADGAS on Das Island. Until such induction iscompleted the personnel are to be regarded as visitors and treated accordingly.

3.1.2 CATEGORIES

The following categories of Safety Induction Courses are available.

· Senior staff (English Language)o ADGASo Contractor

· Breathing Apparatus and Resuscitationo Junior staffo Englisho Arabico Hindio Urduo Malayalam

· Visitor briefing

3.1.3 RECORDS

Records are kept of all personnel inductions and an attendance card issued to theattendee. The number of the induction card is referenced to personal possum cardnumbers. Job Officers can check attendees records by advising HSED of possumnumbers.

3.1.4 SAFETY TRAINING MANUALFull details of the course content for inductions is contained in the Safety TrainingManual

· The Safety Training Manual specifies the minimum safety training requirements forvarious categories of Company and Contract personnel.

· Initial and Refresher training are essential to ensure that all personnel are adequatelytrained to carry out their appointed tasks safely.

· The Safety Training Manual is a guide for line managers to identify the training needsof their subordinates to fulfil their obligations under the Health, Safety andEnvironment training policy.









3.1.5 JOB OFFICERS RESPONSIBILITYJob Officers are responsible for arranging safety inductions for all personnel under theircontrol. The Health, Safety and Environment Engineer (Training) shall be advised,wherever possible, at least 48 hours prior to the induction

Further Information ADNOC-COPV4-01: FRAMEWORK OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY RISKMANAGEMENT. Section 8. TRAINING AND COMPETENCY

3.2 VISITORS

3.2.1 DEFINITION

A visitor is a person who is not normally a resident of Das Island and who will beaccompanied throughout their visit to the Plant by a member of ADGAS staff who will beresponsible to the Plant Manager for the visitor's safety and conduct.

3.2.2 ROLE OF THE GUIDE/HOST

The person designated to accompany the visitor(s) should ensure that the visitor areprovided with helmet, ear protection, eye protection, self rescue respirator and check list(Refer to Error! Reference source not found.). the contents of the check list should beexplained to the visitor(s) with particular emphasis given to:

· No matches/lighters to be carried.· No calculator, telephones, bleepers which are Non- Intrinsically safe· Use of Self Rescue Respirator· Action if alarm sounds.

3.2.3 COMPLIANCE

All personnel proceeding to Das Island shall comply with the Health, Safety andEnvironment Manual as well as any other requirements stipulated by the respectivedivisional or departmental manager.

3.2.4 VALID PASSES

All visitors shall be in possession of a valid security card to the installation issued by theOil Installation Security Department and Area Access Pass (Possum Cards) asappropriate for their visit.

The areas to be visited shall be indicated on the card.









3.2.5 PERMISSIONThe person responsible for visitor proceeding to Das Island shall ensure that the relevantDivisional/Departmental heads permission, as appropriate, is obtained at least twenty-four hours prior to the person(s) entering a restricted area.

3.2.6 NATIONAL DRESS

Guides/Hosts are to ensure that visitors in National Dress are not placed in a positionwhere the lack of Personal Protective Equipment would put them at risk. When enteringthe Industrial Area, visitors must stay in the bus/ car. If they wish to enter into the Plantarea, then they must comply with the minimum requirements as per Chapter 3-9

“Minimum Safety Wear”.

3.2.7 VISITOR REGULATION CHECKLIST

THE FOLLOWING REGULATIONS ARE MANDATORY ON ENTRY TO THE ADGAS FACILITIES.

· All personnel require an Area Access Pass (Possum Card) and a Security Pass to enter theIndustrial Area.

· Smoking is not permitted in any Industrial Area except where valid Smoking Permits aredisplayed. Matches and lighters must NOT be carried by any person.

· Safety Helmets and Safety Glasses will be worn in the designated areas.· Self Rescue Respirator is issued and must be kept close at hand at all times.

· Ear plugs or ear muffs are issued and shall be worn in the designated hearing protection areas.· Visitors will be accompanied by an ADGAS employee at all times. The Shift Superintendent

should be informed of the visit when the visit is about to start.· On a fire or gas outbreak, the alarm siren will be sounded and the staff member will direct you

across wind to safety. When the alarm sounds, use your respirator immediately.

NoteThese sirens are tested at 07.30 (ADMA) 07.35 hours (ADGAS) and 07.40 hours (ADGASTank Farm) on Thursdays when no action is required of the visitor.

Only personnel authorised by the Ministry of Petroleum Security Branch may use a camera, and onlythen when accompanied by a Police Officer and having obtained the necessary ADGAS permit.

Evidence of identity may be requested at any time by a member of staff and it should be noted thatentry to the Jetty Area is forbidden without the clearance of the Storage & Export Superintendent.

CautionThe emergency telephone number for the lng Control Room is 62222

WarningNon-intrinsically safe pagers, Mobile telephones, Computers, Calculators and other nonapproved electronic equipment shall not be taken into the lng Plant









3.3 RESTRICTED AREAS

3.3.1 GENERAL

These are areas where only authorised personnel are permitted to enter because of therequirement for special precautions due to the high risks presented by an explosiveatmosphere, toxic or hazardous substances, e.g. H2S, radioactivity, etc.

3.3.2 DAS ISLAND

· The Restricted Areas on Das Island are those areas where hydrocarbons areprocessed, stored or loaded, offshore flares and central manifold platform. It includes

that part of the water surface bounded by an imaginary line not less than 100 metresfrom a berthed tanker and from any tanker moving within the Port limits.· The management of both ADGAS and ADMA-OPCO exercise strict control over all

movements and operations in those Restricted Areas for which they are respectivelyresponsible.

· Within the Restricted Areas the majority of work is not permitted unless authorised bythe issue of a Work Permit.

· Outside the Restricted Areas all work involving excavations, valve pits, sewagesystems, domestic gas supplies and major modifications to buildings is also coveredby Work Permits.

· Restricted Areas shall only be entered or left by recognised routes according to local

restriction area notice.· No unauthorised or non-operational craft may enter a Marine Restricted Area without

permission.

3.3.3 CONSTRUCTION SITES

Any ADGAS area that is designated a construction site is subject to the same restrictionsand regulations in force in that area. Dispensations for specific types of work shall beauthorised by the PM after consultation with concerned managers and MHSE.

3.3.4 INDUSTRIAL AREAS

That part of Das Island for which a valid area access pass (Possum Card) is required forentry. The ADGAS Industrial area is that part of Das Island containing the ADGAS Plant,Storage and other facilities.

The other three industrial areas on Das Island are Airport, Harbour and ADMA-OPCO.Drawings : A-33-AOZ-0-3735-0001-8 & A-100A1Z-0-10034-0001-0

3.4 HAZARDOUS AREAS AND ZONES

3.4.1 INTRODUCTION

A further division within the restricted area is the classification of the plant into hazardous

areas zones, in which there is a known risk that a flammable atmosphere may occur, and









into non-hazardous areas in which such a risk is non-existent or may be neglected. Thisprovides the basis for the selection and protection of electrical and instrument equipmentappropriate to the defined areas, and for the safe positioning of other potential or actualsources of ignition (e.g. fired heaters).

3.4.2 HAZARDOUS ZONES

A hazardous zone is defined by the distance in any direction from the source of potentialrelease to a point where the ignition potential of the flammable atmosphere createdwould have dropped to below the lower flammable limit.

The classifications are:

Zone 0 Areas where the explosive atmospheres are continually present for long periods, i.e.vapour space of a storage tank for flammable liquids.

Zone 1 Areas where the explosive atmospheres are likely to occur during normal plantoperations, i.e. leakages from pump shafts, control valves, automatic instrument gasvents, sump vents, etc.

Zone 2

Areas where explosive atmospheres are not likely to occur except during abnormalcircumstances and when it does occur is of short duration, i.e. flange joints, gaugeglasses, etc.

Non Hazardous AreasThese contain no source of flammable materials.

3.4.3 VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL BOUNDARIES

It should be remembered that hazardous zones extend horizontally and vertically overthe source of the dangerous atmosphere and in some cases overlapping of differentzones may exist.

3.4.4 HAZARDOUS ZONE DRAWINGS

Hazardous zone drawings are prepared for all ADGAS facilities in general accordancewith BS EN 60079-14:2003, BS EN 60079-25:2004 and BP RP 44-6. The application ofthese codes of practice refers to normal operating conditions and does not cater forcatastrophic situations, e.g. rupture of a process vessel or large pipeline.









Further InformationBS EN 60079-14:2003: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres.Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)BS EN 60079-25:2004: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres.Intrinsically safe systemsBP RP 44-6

Copies of the hazardous zone drawings are enclosed as Appendices 1 to 14 at the endof the Manual as follows:

Appendix 3-4-1 Process & Utilities Area (Drg. No.33-AOZ-0-3785

1 of 6) Appendix 3-4-2 Blowdown & Flare Area (Drg. No.33-AOZ-0-37852 of 6) Appendix 3-4-3 LNG/LPG Storage Tanks (Old) (Drg No. 33-AOZ-0-37853 of 6) Appendix 3-4-4 LNG/LPG Storage Tanks (New) (Drg. No.33-AOZ-0-37854 of 6) Appendix 3-4-5 Jetty Walkway & Head (LNG/LPG) (Drg. No.33-AOZ-0-37855 of 6) Appendix 3-4-6 Booster Compressor/QMB (Drg. No.33-AOZ-0-37856 of 6) Appendix 3-4-7 New Seawater Intake (Drg. No.C42/43-30-DOP-P7851) Appendix 3-4-8 Composite Area 6, Trains 1 & 2, Plant (Drg. No. RMP-7-EP-0-016) Appendix 3-4-9 Composite Area 6, Trains 1 & 2, Elevation (Drg. No. RMP-7-EP-0-017) Appendix 3-4-10 Sulphur OBL Facilities (Drg. No. EB-A-42004) Appendix 3-4-11 Sulphur Berth (Drg. No. EB-A-42005) Appendix 3-4-12 Third LNG Train - Plan (Drg. No. 100-AOP-3-0001-1) Appendix 3-4-13 Third LNG Train - Elevation (Drg. No. 100-AOP-3-0001-2)

Appendix 3-4-14 BOG Compressor Area. (Drg. No. 100-AIP-3-0002)


The responsibility for area classification rests with the Hazardous Area ClassificationCommittee chaired by MHSE or his Deputy. The committee shall submit anyrecommendations for changes to the Plant Manager. The composition and terms ofreference of this committee can be found in Section 2.4 of this manual.

It is important that, when considering modifications to process equipment or operatingprocedures, the requirements of area classification are considered and reviewed by the









committee responsible for area classification. Where changes are necessary, it isessential that they be recorded, and any re-classification implemented immediately byupdating of drawings. A similar review shall be carried out periodically to ascertainwhether the area classification is being affected by deterioration in the performance ofprocess equipment, or by any other changed circumstances.

Further InformationModel Code of Safe Practice for the Petroleum Industry. Part 15: AreaClassification Code for Installations Handling Flammable Fluids 3rd ed., July2005. ISBN 0 85293 418 1BP RP 44-6 :Area Classification

BS EN 60079-14:2003: Code of Practice for the Selection, Installation andMaintenance of Electrical Apparatus for Use in Potentially Explosive AtmospheresBS EN 60079-25:2004: Electrical Apparatus for potentially explosiveatmospheres

3.4.6 IGNITION SOURCES

Within Restricted Areas no ignition source may be introduced without an authorised HotWork or Naked Flame Permit.

Examples of local ignition sources that are capable of igniting flammable substances are:

· All naked flames, fires, exposed incandescent material including pyrophoric deposits,electric arcs and sparks.

· Electric and gas welding torches.· Grit and shot blasting apparatus.· Power operated grinders and cutting machines.· Electrical equipment of normal industrial type, i.e. that which is not flame proof,

intrinsically safe or approved.· Power operated ferrous tools in contact with dry concrete, stone or masonry.· Internal combustion engines.· Diesel engines that are not provided with approved inlet and exhaust systems and

ancillary electrical equipment.· Any machine capable of producing a local source of ignition.· All instruments embodying the use of electricity either in the driving, indicating or

recording mechanism that are not flame-proof, intrinsically safe or approved.· Static electricity

3.4.7 BATTERY EQUIPMENT, MATCHES AND LIGHTERS

The carrying of matches, safety or otherwise, lighters, non-approved electric torches andother battery operated equipment (i.e. not flame proof or intrinsically safe) such asportable transistor radios, tape recorders, portable telephones or Etisalat commercial









pagers is strictly forbidden in Hazardous Areas. Special matches or igniters for particularpurposes may be used but only by nominated persons under the Permit to Work System.

Batteries themselves are to be considered "battery operated equipment". Batteries willonly be changed in a pressurised/safe area.

A Hot Work Permit shall be obtained to carry out any work requiring the use of non-approved battery operated equipment.

3.4.8 SMOKING

Smoking is forbidden in any Restricted Area except in specially selected places referred

to as "designated smoking areas" in which a valid Smoking Permit is displayed.

In places where smoking is permitted, matches or other means of ignition andincombustible receptacles for spent matches shall be provided.

"No Smoking" notices are prominently displayed at entrances to all Restricted Areas andat all exits from places where smoking is permitted.

Smoking is prohibited on all chartered flights to and from Das Island.

3.5 HOUSEKEEPING

3.5.1 GENERAL

All plant and areas under the authority of ADGAS will maintain the highest possiblestandard of housekeeping. High standards contribute to safe working conditions, whereas poor housekeeping is one of the major causes of accidents and incidents.

The work place should be tidy before beginning a task, at the end of shifts and oncompletion of the task. This should be specified on the Work Permit and should not besigned off until the area is clear of all work materials.

Floors will be kept free from oil, grease and other slippery substances and kept clean at

all times.

Staircases, gangways, passages and doorways shall be kept clear of obstructions. Allhandrails, safety railings and netting should be kept in good repair.

Toe boards shall be fitted to all overhead platforms, gangways, scaffolding and workplaces, etc. to prevent articles from falling or rolling off.

Suitable receptacles should be provided for the collection of solid and liquid wastematerials and marked as such, e.g. waste oil. These should be emptied at regularintervals.









Any unnecessary materials or liquids shall not be permitted to accumulate in areas orstores.

Unnecessary tools and equipment should be removed from work sites and returned tostores.

Solvents, paints, flammable liquids, chemicals and explosives are to be stored in lockedcontainers or stores used solely for the purpose. The containers or stores are to belocated outside of workshop, portacabin and working areas.

Fire or emergency equipment should never be obstructed by stacking objects around or

in front of them.

Hoses, wires, ropes and electric cables should never be left over walkways where peoplecould trip over them. Electric/welding cables should be kept out of water. Fire doorsshould never be obstructed by cables or propped open by fire extinguishers.

Guards, rails and gratings should never be removed before first erecting barriers andwarning notices.

Concentrations of dust should not be allowed to build up on structures, shelves, ledgesetc. in stores or other buildings.

3.5.2 HOUSEKEEPING COMPETITION

A housekeeping promotion programme involving quarterly inspections is carried out inthe following areas.

· CWS· QMB· Utilities & NSI· Materials Stores· LNG/LPG Jetties and Tank Farm· Train 1 and Plants 18 & 19

· Train 2 and Plant 26· Train 3

A standard checklist is used by the HSED to assess each area and quarterly and annualwinners are selected.

3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT

3.6.1 GENERAL

A waste is material which is discarded or intended to be discarded.









The management of waste calls for a great degree of supervision to minimise it from ADGAS operations. Principally a common methodology for a waste managementprogramme covers, elimination, source reduction, recycling / revovery, reuse, treatmentand disposal. This is generally known as the waste hierarchy and is shown in Figure 3-1.

3.6.1.1 THE STEPS IN THE W ASTE HIERARCHY

The Waste Hierarchy

Eliminate

Reduce

Re-use

Recycle

Energy

Recovery

Disposal

Best Environmental Option

Worst Environmental Option

Figure 3-1: The Steps in the Waste Hierarchy

EliminateNot creating waste for disposal by adhering to the following hierarchy; consumptionavoidance, product and packaging re-use, and organic and non-organic material

recycling and composting (in that order of priority).

Reduce Applying the principle of 'true cost', shows that it is far more time and cost effective totackle the causes of waste rather than treat the waste once it has been produced.Reducing waste can be achieved through a combination of monitoring and analysingsystems and processes. This is where staff can make an invaluable contribution inidentifying improvements.

Re-useImagination and innovation is required, remember not to be restricted to the continuousre-use of a material for its original purpose. For example, much ingenuity has been seen









in the re-use of materials for packaging, using shredded paper and cardboard as apackaging material is one such example, thus extending the useful life of thepaper/cardboard and reducing the cost of buying in specific packaging materials. Repairor upgradability may also be a consideration when deciding whether an item has re-usepotential.

RecycleRecycling involves the recovery of materials for use in another product. The process ofrecycling includes the segregation and collection of waste, as well as the physicalrecycling itself. The term also encompasses composting and waste exchange. Items ormaterials must be considered discarded and available for disposal in order to be

recycled, therefore the item or material is legally classified as waste. Recycling can beconducted in-house or through a direct relationship with a re-processor.

Recover EnergyEnergy can also be recovered from waste by using it as a fuel; the viability of this optionis often dependent on the materials calorific value. The energy is usually recovered in theform of heat but can include electricity and biogas generation. This also reduces itsvolume and weight for disposal.

DisposalDisposal generally either involves containment, generally through landfill, or destruction,normally through incineration. Incineration reduces the waste to approximately a third ofits original mass. Disposal in these ways is considered the least sustainable option,maximising resource recovery in all the ways outlined reduces the demand for rawmaterials, thus lessening the impacts on the environment whilst providing an economicincentive to re-use and recycle "waste".

Further InformationHazardous Substance Manual.Waste Disposal Manual.OD SI W-08, Disposal of dangerous materials. ADNOC-COPV2-05: Waste Management

3.6.2 WASTE IDENTIFICATION AND CLASSIFICATION

Wastes are classified as either Hazardous or Non-Hazardous in the form of solid, semi-solid, liquid and gaseous.

Wastes produced in ADGAS operation are identified and listed in the Waste DisposalManual with ID No. against each waste. The data sheet for the respective waste willdescribe identification, waste name, classification, source, main chemical constituents,chemical formula, description , estimated discharge rate, hazards, procedure fordisposal, documentation requirements and any other additional information.









3.6.3 WASTE SEGREGATION AND COLLECTION3.6.3.1 NON-H AZARDOUS W ASTE DISPOSAL PRACTICE

In ADGAS labelled and colour coded drums are placed in strategic locations to collectdifferent types of routinely produced non-hazardous waste.

Office cleaners assigned to a department pick up the waste from each office and depositit in the labelled drums.

The labelled drums are emptied out by the Das Island Services Department when theyare full.

The responsibility lies with the generator of the waste to ensure that all such wastes aredeposited in the correct drum as per the following colour codes:-

Waste Type Drum Colour

Scrap metal (any metal or metal object) RedGlass (Bottles, broken window, glass electrical fittings and noncontaminated laboratory glass)

Green

Waste paper (clean grease free paper, cardboard, photocopypaper, old books and files)

White

Scrap plastic (Mineral water/ drink bottles, plastic sheet, plasticpackaging material/ file folder etc.

Blue

Other Waste (Dirty paper, contaminated food wrapper, waxpaper oily rags, wood cuttings, paper towels etc.)

Cream

The waste is collected, volume reduced and sent to vendor for recycling and disposal ofother waste by incineration.

3.6.3.2 H AZARDOUS W ASTE DISPOSAL PRACTICE

Recyclable hazardous waste are primarily the lubricating oil, printer cartridge, liquidchemical samples etc. The waste generator shall collect liquid hazardous waste in goodsteel/plastic drums with bungs only .DO NOT USE DEFORMED OR LEAKING DRUMS.

Ensure no leakage occurs. Printer cartridges shall be collected in double polythene bags.Label the description of the waste on the receptacles as described in ADGAS WasteDisposal Manual, section 5.

Disposal of the waste shall be initiated through waste disposal form and sent to HSEDfor approval and documentation. After receiving the feedback from HSED, the generatorwill arrange for its disposal as per the procedure outlined in the ADGAS Waste DisposalManual.

Non recyclable hazardous wastes are those other than the above and listed in section 5of the ADGAS Waste Disposal Manual. This will generally require the waste to be

properly segregated, labelled, packed and transported to ADNOC – Ruwais site.









3.6.4 RESPONSIBILITIES

For a complete description of responsibilities, refer to section, “Disposal To Places OtherThan Das Island of ADGAS WASTE DISPOSAL MANUAL”.

3.6.5 RECORDS

A Waste Disposal Form must be produced for all types of Waste, by the generator andapproved by HSED. Record of Waste disposal will be maintained by the waste generatorand HSED.

The minimum required procedure has been outlined in the ADGAS Waste DisposalManual.

Further Information ADGAS Waste Disposal Manual.

3.7 PERSONAL SAFETY

3.7.1 GENERAL SAFETY RULES

The following are some important General Safety Rules that shall be observed at alltimes by all persons:

· Do not smoke in the Plant area except where a valid Smoking Permit is displayed.· Do not carry matches/lighters within the Plant area.· Report all accidents/hazardous conditions to your Supervisor immediately, regardless

of how minor it appears. Get first aid promptly, if injured.· Obey all rules, procedures, signs and instructions.· Always carry your Self Rescue Respirator and wear hard hat, approved eye

protection, safety shoes and ear muffs while in the plant. Keep them in goodcondition.

· Do not do any work in the Plant area without obtaining a Work Permit from the Area

Authority.· Be familiar with the Emergency Procedures. Always be aware of the wind direction.· Ensure Good Housekeeping. Always keep your work area clean and orderly.· Use, operate, repair or adjust equipment only when authorised.· Use the right tool/equipment for the job. Use them correctly.· Ensure adequate liquid intake during the working days in summer.

DO NOT TAKE CHANCES, IF IN DOUBT, PLEASE ASK

3.7.2 ALCOHOL AND DRUGS

Alcoholic drinks are not allowed on Das Island except where specifically authorised by

MDI(S) and PM.









Drugs, other than those specifically required for medical use, are prohibited.

Personnel travelling to Das Island carrying prescribed medication shall report the fact tothe HMSD on arrival.

3.7.3 FINGER RINGS, NECK CHAINS AND BRACELETS

CautionThe wearing of finger rings, neck chains and bracelets can create a potentiallyserious hazard. The possibility of these articles being caught on moving orstatic equipment and their electrical conductivity leaves the wearer susceptible

to shock, burns and severe hand and other injuries.

3.8 SAFETY SIGNS AND BARRIERS

3.8.1 INTRODUCTION

As in other industrial work environments, safety signs play an important role in safety onDas Island.

There exists a wide variety of types, shapes, colours, sizes and legends. This sectionbreaks down to basics the principles involved in designs for different purposes and

assists with improvement in recognition and understanding in this field.

3.8.2 ROLE OF SAFETY SIGNS

In general, safety signs are used for the purposes of:

· preventing accidents· identifying health hazards· giving locations for safety and emergency equipment· giving guidance and instruction in emergency procedures· assisting in movement of personnel in emergencies· drawing attention to objects and situations involving health, safety and environmental

issues.

NoteSafety signs do not replace, but supplement proper accident preventionmeasures. To ensure full benefit, the function and meanings of safety signsshould be included in basic induction and safety training.

3.8.3 DEFINITIONS

3.8.3.1 S AFETY SIGN

Gives a particular safety message to those who may be exposed to hazards in an

industrial environment.









The message is obtained from:

· A combination of geometric form, a safety colour and a safety symbol.· A combination of text and safety colour· A combination of all the above.

3.8.3.2 SUPPLEMENTARY SIGN

A sign with text only used in conjunction with a symbolic sign

3.8.4 CLASSIFICATION

Safety signs may be classified as:

· Regulatory signs - mandatory or prohibitive instructions· Caution (warning) signs - potential hazards, advisory· Emergency information signs - first aid, exits, etc.

Combinations of shape, symbol, colours and text are employed to convey the sign'smessage.

3.8.5 COLOURS

· Regulatory Signs:o Prohibition: RED AND WHITEo Mandatory: BLUE

· Caution/Warning Signs: YELLOW· Emergency information signs: GREEN

The colour of the text lettering on a sign may be either black or white only, depending onthe base colour of that sign.

3.8.6 VISIBILITY

The size and proportions of a sign are determined by the location, viewing distance, typeof hazard and the type of symbol or legend it contains. Signs are generally placedslightly above eye level, but in some situations other levels may be more suitable.

Signs should contrast with their background environment colour whenever possible.

Locations should avoid the possibility of screening or obstruction, e.g. stacked materials,trees, bushes etc.

Illumination of signs is especially important in the plant. The possibility of poor visibility orlighting failure is inherent.









On the plant three types of illumination are employed:

· Reflective glows when light is directed towards the sign.· Photoluminescent stores light energy and glows for a period in darkness· Self Illuminating uses energy independent of power supplies and is usually

low energy radiation source powered.

3.8.7 GENERAL

Care must be taken that a sign does not create a visual or physical hazard in itself.

If the reason or purpose for the sign is eliminated the sign must be removed. Redundant

signs left in position after their purpose is no longer relevant may induce a disregard forall signs on the facility.

Prohibition, danger, obligation and warning signs should be sited in relation to thehazards to allow ample time after first viewing the sign to heed the warning.

Signs must not be placed on moveable objects such as doors, racks, etc. Subsequentmovement of the object may render the sign void or conceal it.

A large number of different signs in a particular area may create confusion and lessenvisual impact. Care must be exercised to ensure that the messages from the most

important signs are not compromised

Deterioration of signs must be monitored with the sign maintained or replaced asrequired to retain legibility or visibility.

The placement of a new sign or change of location warrants the reasons for the changeexplained.

Symbolic (pictorial) signs are widely used due to the ease and speed of messagerecognition and international acceptability. On ADGAS facilities and sites the Arabic andEnglish languages are used for all text and legends on safety signs.

3.8.8 PORTABLE SIGNS

Along with the permanent signs found in fixed locations on the plant there is a need formoveable signs.

Some work activities on the plant are of a temporary, non-routine and often hazardousnature and may obstruct, interfere with, or create hazards for routine activities.Examples are:

· Radiography· Hot work

· Abrasive blasting









· Overhead work· Excavation

Characteristics of a good portable sign are:

· lightweight, non-corrosive fibreglass material· incorporation of the standard layout, wording and colours to identify it as a "Danger"

or a "Caution"· provision of a plain panel of sufficient area for the hand lettering of the appropriate

safety message with a felt marker· holes and/or hooks suitable for secure fastening to rope barriers or standard

handrails.

Typically the hand written message on the portable temporary sign will state:

· the type of work in progress, e.g. abrasive blasting· the type or hazard involved (eye injuries)· the protection or hazard avoidance required (full eye protection)· the serial number of the work permit current for the job

This sign may be supplemented by standard safety signs at the site to reinforce themessage.

3.8.9 ROAD TRAFFIC SIGNS

All road traffic signs on Das Island conform to the requirements of United Arab Emirateslegislation.

3.8.10 BARRIERS

Barriers, either structural, roped or flagged may be employed to warn personnel and limitaccess to the job site, together with appropriate signs at all approaches to the risk area.

Barriers are a safety precaution specified on a work permit.

Barriers must not obstruct established escape routes. Persons may only bypass abarrier if they are authorised to do so or the conditions on the displayed sign permit it.

Further InformationBS 5378, Safety Signs and Colours








Network Loc. Directory Name HSE MANUAL Page No Page 100 of448

3.9 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

3.9.1 INTRODUCTION

Personal protective equipment (PPE) must not be regarded as a substitute for safeworking practices, but as an extra protective barrier to prevent injury.

In every work situation, some form of PPE is necessary. The Permit to Work for any taskmust specify the PPE requirements that are not part of the minimum standard for theoperational area and should re-emphasise the minimum standards where they might beoverlooked.

Where particular forms of PPE are mandatory for everyone entering a particularoperational area, whether on a permanent or a temporary basis, boundary marking mustbe provided and appropriate mandatory safety signs must be displayed.

Further InformationChapter 3 Section 8 ADNOC-COPV4-04: PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

3.9.2 MINIMUM SAFETY WEAR

The wearing of protective clothing in the ADGAS Industrial area is mandatory. The

minimum PPE required is as follows:

· Safety Helmet· Safety boots/shoes· Trousers and short sleeved shirt or short sleeved coveralls· Self Rescue Respirator· Ear protection.· Eye protection.

Coveralls and PPE are provided by the Company at no cost to the employee.Contractors must be in possession of all necessary PPE prior to entry into the plant area.

Industrial clothing should always be in good repair, close fitting and secured, especiallywhen around moving machinery.

NoteThe need for PPE and clothing above and beyond this minimum requirementmust be identified in the development of a Task Risk Assessment for non-routine or high risk category jobs. Details of protective wear, in addition to theminimum plant requirements, must be noted on work permit forms andchecklists.









3.9.3 HAZARDSThe nature of safety hazards in the workplace may be identified as one or a combinationof:

· Direct contact, projectile, sharp or abrasive· Moving machinery· Biological, bacterial, parasitic, fungal· Chemical

o irritanto carcinogenico system poisono sensitiser

· Physicalo noiseo radiationo extreme temperatureso vibration

In identifying the need for and the appropriate type of personal protective wear, thefollowing aspects should be considered.

What form is the hazard in ?

· Gas, vapour, mist, dust, fume, liquid, solid, temperature, pressure

How will the hazard act on the person ?

· Inhalation, skin, hearing, eyes, whole or specific part of body, ingestion

What type of effect does exposure to the hazard cause ?

3.9.4 HEARING PROTECTION

Short periods of exposure to excessive noise levels can produce hearing loss that initiallymay be reversible. Permanent damage occurs however, when exposure to excessivenoise continues over a longer time.

Noise elimination or attenuation at its source are the most satisfactory methods ofhearing protection. Where such measures are not practical, personal hearing protectionis required.

All persons in designated noise areas must wear hearing protection to the appropriatestandards.

Common types of hearing protection available include:









· Disposable (mouldable) earplugs· Re-usable earplugs· Ear muffs of various types and ratings· Combination of plugs and ear muffs

Disposable earplugs are found in dispensers located in strategic locations around theplant. Both the head fitting and helmet attachment types of earmuffs are drawn fromstores.

Full details of the problems of, and protection against, noise are found elsewhere in this

manual.

Further Information3.11 HEARING CONSERVATION

3.9.5 HEAD PROTECTION

The head, or more specifically the brain, is the part of the body most susceptible todisabling injury from an impact. Safety helmets are intended to protect the personagainst impact and penetration damage and are so designed that they will not fracturewhen struck, or transfer the force of the blow to the wearer’s skull below the point of

impact

The wearing of a safety helmet is mandatory outdoors in the designated plant areas.

Note All safety helmets must comply to Standards and must be clearly marked withthe year and quarter of manufacture.

Further InformationBS EN 397:1995: Specification for industrial safety helmets

WarningHelmet shells made of metal or electrically conductive material are prohibited onthe plant

3.9.5.1 ACCESSORIES

· Chin strap of fabric, leather or plastic covered elastic· Visors and face shields· Sweatbands· Earmuffs









NoteChin straps should be worn by all personnel in high winds

Caution Any unauthorised alterations to helmets including drilling of holes or painting willcompromise the protection of the helmet and are not permitted.

3.9.5.2 M AINTENANCE

· Helmets must be regularly cleaned using warm water and soap solution· All components must be inspected visually on a weekly basis for signs of dents,

cracks, penetration or rough treatment· Helmets showing signs of damage or deterioration must be immediately withdrawn

from service and destroyed.

NoteComplaints of discomfort may be attributed to fit characteristics and be due totoo rigid suspension components or poorly adjusted suspension.

3.9.5.3 PRECAUTIONS

The following precautions must be observed:

· If the safety helmet has been subjected to a heavy blow, it must be replacedimmediately even though there may be no visible damage

· The shell or suspension must never be altered or modified· Wearers must not carry or transport anything inside the helmet· Helmets must not be dropped, thrown or used as supports, or subjected to any other

form of abuse.

All safety helmets are susceptible to damage from:

· Ultraviolet light (sunlight)· Temperature extremes· Chemical degradation

Suspension systems must be inspected regularly as perspiration, hair oils and normalwear can affect their integrity.

3.9.6 FOOT PROTECTION

Protective footwear must provide protection against hazards ranging from dermatitis tocrushing injuries. The possibility in the work place exists for exposure to:

· Chemicals









· Extremes of cold or heat· Slippery or abrasive surfaces· Punctures from nails or other sharp objects· Heavy dropped objects· Crushing· Electrical hazards

In use, no electrically insulating element should be introduced between the shoe soleand the wearer's foot. Cotton socks are generally suitable in preventing a build-up ofstatic electricity on the person's body.

Special footwear, may be required for certain tasks or occupations such as "Trainer" typesafety shoes for riggers/scaffolders. These give a better "feel" on rigging and scaffoldingtasks with a consequent increase in safety.

Safety footwear meeting BS EN ISO 20345:2004 is to be worn by all personnel, exceptvisitors, who will be assessed for their specific requirements in the ADGAS Industrialarea.

Further InformationBS EN ISO 20345:2004: Personal protective equipment. Safety footwear

3.9.7 EYE AND FACE PROTECTION

The list of equipment for the protection of the eyes and face can be divided into:

· Spectacles· Goggles· Visors/face shields· Hoods

Eye and face protection is designed to protect the wearer from hazards such as impact,chemical splashes, gases and vapours, foreign bodies and ultraviolet and infrared

radiation.

Damage to sight can be caused by injury:

· To the surface of the eye· Within the lenses· At the retina

Damage to the eye may result in permanent scarring of the surface of the eye withresultant long term sight defects.









Personnel working in areas of abrasive grinding, scaling and blasting are at risk.

Contact lenses are not protective but may be worn in combination with approved eyeprotection. The wearer must be made aware that the contact lenses may be lost duringemergency irrigation of the eye or damaged by chemical contact. Accidentaldisplacement can also cause temporary loss of vision.

Where there is a significant risk of splashing hazardous substances a visor in addition togoggles is recommended in order to provide full face protection.

For personnel with sight defects, safety glasses with prescription lenses are available

and can be worn instead of plain safety glasses. Goggles must be worn over non-safetyprescription glasses in risk areas.

Further InformationBS EN 166:2002): Personal eye protection. SpecificationsChapter 3.12 EYE SAFETY PROGRAMME

3.9.8 OPTICAL FILTERS

Optical filters for spectacles, sunglasses, goggles and welding shields are designed toreduce radiation intensity to a safe level and prevent eye damage. They may attenuateall wavelengths or bands of wavelengths or have specific properties related to a

particular radiation risk.

CautionThe safe level of intensity varies with wavelength. The optical properties of thefilters differ and it is essential that the correct filters are used during welding orwith other high intensity radiation sources.

Welding glasses or lenses protect the eyes from visible or infrared radiation as well asinvisible ultraviolet. Replaceable clear glass or polycarbonate covers must be used toprotect the optical filters from damage due to impact, molten metal, fume.

3.9.9 HAND PROTECTIONGloves must be used in risk areas to protect the hands against chemical, physical andbiological hazards. There is no glove that suits every purpose, and a glove should beselected by referring to the manufacturer's recommendations. Process operators, andmaintenance personnel are encouraged to carry gloves at all times to cater foremergency use.

Most gloves do not provide total protection during immersion in some chemical solutions.

Gloves of impervious synthetic materials (e.g. PVC/Neoprene) or leather gloves orgauntlets must be worn according to the type of exposure. In general PVC/Neoprene









gloves are suitable for oil/chemical handling and leather generally for dry handling.Special gloves are available (nitrile) for handling solvents.

Hands and arms should be thoroughly washed after the gloves/gauntlets are removed atthe end of the working period or before meals.

3.9.10 VISORS/FACE SHIELDS

The full-face welding helmet is recommended for arc welding operations. Whilst the flip-front helmet gives clear glass protection for chipping, etc., the operator must always wearregulation safety spectacles for full-time eye protection when the helmet is up.

Visors fitted to head harness or safety helmets should be the lift-up type for intermittentuse. Goggles must also be worn with them when the possibility of face splashes underthe visor exists.

A combination of goggles plus face shield may also be needed for chemicals veryhazardous to the eyes.

Visors are generally resistant to fogging and where necessary can be worn together withprescription spectacles.

3.9.11 BODY PROTECTION

3.9.11.1 CHEMICAL PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

The purpose of chemical protective clothing is to prevent chemical contact with the skin.No material is totally impermeable to all chemicals and all commonly used materialshave protection limitations. Manufacturer's recommendations and relevant standardsshould be consulted for the right protection in each case.

Full protective suits fabricated from PVC are available to protect against toxic vapours,liquids and, when supplemented by a cryogenic suit, low temperature liquids. Thesesuits should always be worn in conjunction with suitable gloves and footwear.

Aluminised close proximity suits are available for when personnel might be exposed toflames or where a flash fire might occur.

3.9.11.2 HOT WORKING ENVIRONMENTS

Clothing reduces the heat transfer between the wearer and the environment. In hotenvironments the clothing should be light and well ventilated. Clothing restricts thebody's ability to remove heat through evaporation and perspiration and forced ventilationof clothing may be necessary for prolonged work at high temperatures.









The wearing of chemical protective clothing to prevent exposure to toxic chemicals alsopresents an additional barrier to perspiration, thereby significantly increasing thepotential for heat stress.

Further Information3.14 HEAT DISORDERS

3.9.11.3 CLOTHING STATIC ELECTRICITY

Natural fibres have better capacity to dissipate static electrical charges than syntheticfibres due to their greater ability to absorb moisture.

A hazardous discharge could occur if synthetic fibre clothing is removed in a potentiallyhazardous gas atmosphere.

3.9.12 RESPIRATORY PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT


The use of respirators, where an inhalation hazard exists, is mandatory when it isnecessary:

· To reduce the level of exposure until engineering controls are installed· To supplement engineering controls and work practices which have failed to reduce

the hazard to an acceptable level· During short term activity such as maintenance and inspections when engineering

control is not feasible· During emergencies· When measures and procedures necessary to control the exposure do not exist

Air supplied respiratory protection (BA) must be used when the oxygen level in theworking atmosphere is below 20%

Respiratory protection equipment is provided both for use in an emergency and formaintenance operations where there is the potential for the release of toxic materials or

where low oxygen levels may be encountered.

Resuscitation equipment is available throughout the facilities and also carried inemergency vehicles.

3.9.12.2 F ACIAL H AIR POLICY FOR WEARERS OF BREATHING APPARATUS

Breathing Apparatus is designed to provide an effective seal between the face mask andthe Wearers face when the person is clean shaven. Any person with heavy facial hairwill be unable to obtain a satisfactory face seal. A poor face seal can result in injury orpotentially asphyxiation of the wearer due to lack of air supply or ingress of toxic gases ina hazardous environment.









ADGAS policy regarding employees who may be required to wear B.A. and who work onthe plant or other hazardous areas falls into two distinct categories depending on thereason for wearing of B.A.

1. B.A. for escape from a hazardous area.2. B.A. worn as part of a procedure (e.g. emergency response, search and rescue,

fire fighting, vessel entry, toxic gas sampling etc.).

Persons who are likely to be involved in ‘1’ above, escape from a hazardous area, canhave facial hair however, the hair must be trimmed to a level which will allow a

reasonably good sealing of the B.A. Mask (5 to 10 minutes for escape). All suchemployees are responsible for ensuring that their beards are kept trim.

Persons who, as part of their job, are likely to be involved in ‘2’ above, B.A. worn as partof a procedure, must be clean shaven to enable them to utilise the B.A. Set safely andperform the operation successfully. Immediate Line Supervisors are responsible toensure that those people with facial hair are not permitted to carry out activities involvingthe wearing of B.A. as part of a procedure.

3.9.12.3 HEALTH ASPECTS

There are a number of physiological and psychological conditions that may interfere with

safe and effective respirator use. These include:

· Impaired function of heart, blood vessels or lungs· Thermal stress· Diminished sense· Skin reactions· Anxiety· Claustrophobia

If users are known to have any of the above problems, medical clearance is required.Before being assigned to tasks requiring respirators or BA, the user must also be

observed during a trial period to evaluate potential physiological and psychologicalproblems.

The type of respirator must be worn during the trial for at least 30 minutes during whichthe person will engage in an exercise similar to the actual working situation before beingexposed to risk. This test is normally carried out as part of the Breathing ApparatusCourse and Refresher Training conducted by the HSED.

3.9.12.4 FILTERING RESPIRATORY PROTECTION

NON-POWERED AIR PURIFYING SYSTEMS

Disposable filtering face piece - are used for a day or task then discarded.









Half-mask or full face piece air purifying - uses a screw-in renewable cartridge.

No absorbent cartridge will remove all gaseous contaminants, therefore the type ofabsorbent must be carefully selected according to the hazards. Cartridges must only beused for gases and vapour listed on the label.

CautionRespirable dust particles, which actually penetrate into the lungs are usually notvisible to the naked eye.

Combination vapour cartridge and filter type are used against gaseous and particulatecontaminations and have a combination of cartridge and dust filter.

3.9.12.5 EMERGENCY BREATHING EQUIPMENT

SELF RESCUE RESPIRATOR

· All personnel working or visiting the ADGAS Facilities are issued with a Self RescueRespirator for protection against hydrogen sulphide if there is a gas release.

· The respirator is to be carried at all times when working or visiting ADGAS facilities.

DRAEGER S.A.V.E.R. BREATHING APPARATUS (ESCAPE SETS)

The SAVER Set is provided at particular locations throughout the Plant to enable a manto escape from a work area if there is gas release. The wearer breathes from a highpressure air cylinder via a reducing valve and demand valve controlling the air supply tothe face piece. The exhaled air passes from the face piece through a non-return valve tothe atmosphere.

· The nominal duration of the set is ten minutes.· The locations of all sets are indicated on Safety Equipment Layout Drawings at

Section 1.4 in the Emergency Plans and Procedures Manual.· The SAVER Set is not to be used for normal BA work or rescue operations.

S ABRE CEN-PAQ BREATHING APPARATUS

· A limited supply of CEN-PAQ, of fifteen minutes duration, is kept in the Laboratory forthe exclusive use of Laboratory Staff.

· The CEN-PAQ Set is not to be used for normal BA work.

FIREFIGHTER COMPRESSED AIR BREATHING APPARATUS (CABA)

The Firefighter CABA sets are strategically located throughout the ADGAS Industrial Area for use by Operations and other designated personnel if there is an emergency(see Emergency Plans and Procedures Manual).









These sets are for emergency use only. Firefighter BA Sets required for normalmaintenance duties will be obtained from Safety Division through the normal laid downprocedures.

The Firefighter CABA is a positive pressure self contained open circuit type of breathingapparatus in which the wearer exhales direct to the atmosphere. A single cylinder is mounted on the lightweight back plate together with a main reducingvalve and pressure outlets.

A warning whistle is fitted to indicate approaching exhaustion of the cylinder. (This maynot be audible in the plant and a constant visual check must be maintained). A nominal

working duration of twenty minutes can be expected dependent on the individual and theamount of work undertaken.

3.9.12.6 M AINTENANCE BREATHING EQUIPMENT

COMPRESSED AIRLINE BREATHING APPARATUS (HOSE REEL AND TROLLEY)

The airline breathing apparatus is for use by Control Room personnel of the OperationsDivision and Maintenance personnel when working in an area where the potential for agas leak is present or when working in enclosed environments where there may be lowoxygen content, e.g. vessels subsequent to purging.

Air is supplied to the user through the axis of the reel from compressed air cylinders

mounted beneath the reel. The air supplied from the reel is used by one (or two)person(s) wearing a positive pressure demand valve and face mask. To provideappropriate back-up, if there is isolation from the source of air due to severance orinaccessible kinking of the hose, self-contained breathing apparatus with a suitablytrained stand-by man shall also be available.

FIREFIGHTER COMPRESSED AIR BREATHING APPARATUS (CABA)

In certain circumstances where it is not possible to safely use a Trolley Set, theFirefighter set may be used for personnel protection.

3.9.12.7 RESUSCITATION EQUIPMENT

The resuscitation equipment used by ADGAS is the MicroVent. Sets of this equipmentare available in Emergency Vehicles and at various locations throughout the Trains.

The MicroVent is a pneumatically powered, time/ volume resuscitator with an additionalManual Trigger for use in conjunction with external cardiac massage. The automaticcycling is used for longer term ventilatory support or patient transport.

3.9.12.8 TRAINING

Appropriate training in the use of the above equipment is provided periodically by theHSED Training Section.











CautionThis is only guidance and the weights shown must not be regarded as "safe" forall personnel.

Figure 3-2: Guidance on Safe Weights

3.10.3 RISK FACTORS

3.10.3.1 DURATION AND FREQUENCY The risk of injury rises with the increased frequency, repetition and duration of manualhandling activity by any one person.

These risks are not restricted to lifting or lowering of loads. Pushing, pulling, carryingand holding of loads can also have potential for injury.

The same manual handling task repeated over long periods may induce feelings ofmonotony and boredom. The reduction of alertness may have important safetyconsequences. A person's ability to continue prolonged exertion depends upon energyreserves, physical fitness, relative work load and the physical activity required for the

task.

Manual handling operations involving the use of hands only can quickly cause musclefatigue when overloaded.

3.10.3.2 DISTANCES MOVED

Distances over which loads are manually moved must be as short as possible todecrease the injury risks, if the load is located:

· Above the person's shoulder height· Below mid-thigh height









· At an extended reach

Injury potential is also aggravated if the load:

· Requires manoeuvring to be placed accurately into position· Requires twisting of the back· Requires sideways bending of the back

3.10.3.3 WEIGHT

In seated work it is advisable not to lift loads more than 4.5kg.

The risks of back injury increase significantly lifting weights above 20kg.

In a work situation loads above 55kg should not be lifted manually. Mechanicalassistance and/or team lifting arrangements must be provided to reduce the risk of injury

Attempting to lift an object of unknown weight is to risk accident or injury. With unfamiliarloads an idea of weight must be gained to ensure it is within the lifter's capabilities underthe prevailing conditions. Large or awkward loads require special care whereas a handycompact load, e.g. toolbox with handle, is relatively safe to lift.

Weight assessment can be gained by one or more of these methods:

· Move the object around on the ground· Try lifting one side (half the weight)· Read the labels and markings· Open the container or read contents. It could be toilet rolls or large bolts.· Ask a knowledgeable person

If after assessment, the weight appears close to the person's limits, team help or use ofmechanical aids, e.g. crane or chain block, should be employed.

Caution

Serious injuries have resulted from a heavy weight, thought to be lighter, beingpulled from a higher level, with the person being unable to control its fall.

A short time taken before the lift to make an assessment of all factors and takeappropriate actions will contribute to prevention of most manual handling accidents.

3.10.4 SAFE MANUAL HANDLING

Before starting any handling procedure, assess the situation by sizing up the load, and:

· Position the body correctly before starting









· Use the legs to raise and lower loads· Use the legs to provide momentum for horizontal movement when pushing or pulling.· Use body weight together with the above actions to counter loss of balance and to

assist in moving loads

3.10.4.1 POSITION OF THE FEET

When lifting objects the following should be observed.

· Feet placed comfortably apart, one foot forward, one foot back. This position helps tomaintain balance.

· When lifting, the feet should if possible be placed around the load. If not possiblethen the feet should be placed close to the load.

· When neither method is possible, the load is moved to a suitable position clear ofobstruction before lifting, or lifted with mechanical assistance.

· When lowering the load, this should, if possible, be done between the feet· Where forward movement is anticipated, the front foot is placed beside the load

pointing in the direction of movement.· When moving backwards, one foot is placed backwards to receive the combined

weight of load and body. Most of the weight should be on this foot before anypivoting movement is made

· All handling movements are carried out smoothly and rhythmically.

Having the legs naturally apart during lifting improves stability, and does not necessarilyincrease the risk of hernia.

3.10.4.2 KNEES AND B ACK

The knees should be bent before the hands are lowered to lift or set down loads.

When loads must be raised above waist level, the knees should first be bent, thenstraightened, to give momentum to the upward movement.

When a load is taken from the shelf, or received from another person, the knees must be

bent so that the force of the load can be absorbed.

If the knee is bent acutely the mechanical efficiency of the leg muscles is lessened.

Bending of knees is greatest when loads are taken up from the floor.

When the load is on the floor, loads must be limited.

In a typical lifting posture, with the knees and hips bent, the lumbar spinal curve shouldbe flattened resulting in a straight back but not necessarily a vertical back.









When only one hand can be used for lifting, overloading the back muscles can bereduced by placing the other hand on the knee or against a firm support.

Lifting and carrying heavy loads with one hand must be avoided.

3.10.4.3 ARMS AND H AND GRIP

During lifting the arms should be kept close to the body and:

· The hands must if possible hang between the thighs when lifting or lowering a load· The load is carried close to the body with elbows by the sides· Wide loads may be held obliquely or vertically provided that the load does not

obscure vision· Loads should not be held out from the body when they are being raised, lowered or

supported.· The arms must act as links, not sources of power, i.e. the muscles of the legs and

buttocks are used to move the load· In lifting, the hand on the same side of the body as the forward foot should grasp the

side of the load further from the body· When carrying, the hand supporting the far side of the load pulls the load to the body· In all handling procedures a secure grasp should be used to keep control of the load· The load must be grasped with the whole length of the fingers and palm of the hand,

not just the finger tips· In continuous carrying of light loads by only one hand the hand used should be

alternated.

3.10.4.4 HEAD POSITION

During lifting keep the head erect and:

· Raise the head just before the lift thus automatically assisting in keeping a straightback during the lift

· Keep a straight back to ensure that uniform pressure is applied to discs between thespinal bones

· Avoid turning the head causing the spine to rotate. This must be avoided· If it is necessary to look around, the body must be turned by pivoting on the feet.

3.10.4.5 BODY M ASS

Body mass used as a source of momentum acts with the muscles to set loads in motionand to propel moving loads.

When setting loads in motion, jerky actions must be avoided by applying force slowly tothe load through the shoulders, arms and hands. Never flex the back whilst carrying theload as shown in Figure 3-3.









Figure 3-3: Safe Handling

Body mass may be used as a counter balance in handling procedures.

NoteSituations are rare when all procedures and precautions can be adhered to atthe same time. In all cases when lifting procedures must be compromised dueto circumstances, the load limit must be reduced accordingly.

Refer to Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4: Handl ing Techniques









3.10.5 TRAINING All personnel must be advised of the risks arising from incorrect handling and instructedin recommended methods of manual handling and the use of mechanical handlingequipment appropriate to the work sites.

The training must be at a level giving all personnel a thorough understanding of therecommended techniques and ensuring they will be used in all phases of the work.

CautionNo person SHALL be required to undertake manual handling beyond theirphysical capacity, training and experience.

3.10.6 SUPERVISION

Supervisors must be prepared to set a good example and be able to demonstrate thecorrect methods of manual handling.

Supervisors are responsible for:

· Ensuring jobs involving physical effort are correctly planned and carried out.· Recognising handling hazards and initiating corrective methods.· Encouraging reports and suggestions.

· Ensuring that all personnel receive adequate instructions in the skill of manualhandling.· Providing follow-up instructions.· Ensuring there is adequate space for manual handling.· Arranging adequate rest periods or rotation of duties if relief is not afforded by the

nature of the work cycle.· Investigating all accidents and incidents caused by manual handling· Arranging correction of potential injury causes.

3.10.7 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

Close fitting overalls in good repair are recommended work wear, and in addition aprons

when the load is wet, dirty or greasy, as there is a tendency for loads to be held awayfrom the body to protect clothing, thereby increasing risk of injury.

The correct type of protective gloves must be worn if there is a possibility of materialsinjuring the hands.

3.10.8 RISK CONTROL

Risk control is the process of eliminating or reducing identified and assessed risk factors.Risk control can be best accomplished by a combination of:









· Job redesign· Mechanical handling· Training

3.10.8.1 JOB REDESIGN

· Modifying the object - to a different size, shape or weight· Modifying the workplace layout - so that arrangements of plant equipment reduces

risk· Rearrange materials flow - to improve positioning and timing of materials movement· Different actions - in modifying the means of doing the job with or without workplace

changes· Mechanical assistance - used to reduce risk· Team lifting - can share lifting loads· Eliminating the job, e.g. sacks changed to bulk handling

3.10.8.2 MECHANICAL H ANDLING EQUIPMENT

Use to replace manual handling and reduce the forces required.

3.10.8.3 TRAINING

Giving particular instruction, training and education to reduce risks at work.

3.10.9 RISK CONTROL OPTIONS

Success in reducing manual handling injuries is usually achieved by applying the mosteffective combination of control options to each risk factor:

3.11 HEARING CONSERVATION

3.11.1 INTRODUCTION

Constant daily exposure to high noise levels causes irreversible damage to delicate haircells within the inner ear of the exposed person. These cells convert the mechanicalenergy of sound waves into electrical impulses that are transmitted to the brain,

classified and perceived as sounds. Permanent damage to the hair cells thereforecauses permanent loss of hearing.

Noise induced hearing loss progressively affects perception of the sound frequencies inthe speech range. This progress is gradual and without regular monitoring the decreasein hearing levels may not be noticed until the affected person is suffering a severechronic social disability, finding it diff icult to understand spoken communication.

The ADGAS Hearing Conservation Program has been designed to prevent industrialdeafness in its employees on Company worksites.









The responsibilities for noise reduction and hearing conservation extends back to thedesigners, the manufacturers, suppliers, installers and ultimately the users of noisy plantand equipment.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV3-10: NOISE CONTROL AND HEARING CONSERVATION

3.11.2 DEFINITIONS

Action Level - the level of noise above which steps must be taken to reduce that level orimpose other protection strategies. The ADGAS level is 85dB(A)

dB(A) - units of measurement of sound pressure level expressed in decibels in the A -weighted scale (audible frequencies)

dB(Lin) - units of measurement of sound pressure level expressed in decibels in the'linear' or unweighted scale.

Noise Exposure - (LAeq. 8h) is the equivalent continuous A-weighted sound pressurelevel a person would be exposed to during a representative working day of 8 hours.

Steady State Noise - noise with small fluctuations of level not exceeding a range of8dB(A).

Intermittent Noise - noise that fluctuates more than 8dB(A) in sound pressure level.

Broad Band Noise - noise without significant tonal components with continuousfrequency distributions in the audible frequency range.

Narrow Band Noise - noise whose energy is concentrated in a small portion of audiblefrequencies.

Meters and Measuring Instruments - these include the integrating sound level meter,noise dosimeter, sound level meter and other analysers and tape records.

Hearing Protection Device - A personal protection device worn to reduce the effects ofnoise on the auditory system of the wearer.

3.11.3 HEARING CONSERVATION PROGRAMME

The ADGAS program for hearing conservation comprises of the following:

· Noise surveys conducted throughout the plant to identify the noise hazardous areasand the sound pressure levels within them.









· In practice, noise hazard areas are identified on drawings before plant constructionand signs are in place when the new plant is first occupied and the equipmentcommissioned. Periodical noise surveys are an ongoing requirement.

· Engineering investigations are undertaken in each noise hazard area to determine:o whether the noise hazard can be eliminatedo whether the noise hazard can be reducedo whether the noise hazard can be isolated from employees

All the above are assessed within the physical, logistical and financial constraints of thecompany's operations.

· Noise hazard areas still remaining are all identified and warning signs erected.· Educational programs are designed and run, highlighting the effects of noise and

means required to minimise exposure. This education is ongoing.· When engineering and administrative measures do not satisfactorily reduce noise

levels to below 85dB(A), hearing protection devices are required to be used by alllikely exposed personnel in all designated noise risk areas.

An additional feature of the Company program is audiometric testing of employeesbefore employment.

Further audiometric testing is carried out as part of the periodic medical examinations at

Das Island Hospital. Audiometric hearing tests are designed to provide early warning forpotential victims of hearing loss and assist in highlighting areas where hearingconservation measures may not be effective.

3.11.4 NOISE ASSESSMENT

Noise in all areas of the plant is assessed on a frequency dictated by relevant standards,whenever a change has occurred affecting noise levels and every five years.

3.11.4.1 INITIAL ASSESSMENT

A walk-through survey identifies those areas on the plant of potential noise hazard riskrequiring more detailed information or a survey.

3.11.4.2 NOISE SURVEY

This is conducted in areas suspected of containing a noise hazard, by appropriatelytrained and certified personnel.

A noise survey is conducted for the following purposes:

· Identifying noise hazard areas and the drawing of 85dB(A) contours for hazardwarning sign placement.









· Determining attenuation (noise reduction) requirements for personal hearing devicesand checking the suitability of those supplied.

· Assessment of employee exposure to noise using the standard LAeq. 8h = 85dB(A)as the standard.

· Compliance testing of newly installed or modified plant and equipment andassessment of its effects on employees.

Results of noise surveys must be recorded on an approved form and the valuestransferred to a contoured floor plan of the subject area.

3.11.5 HEARING CONSERVATION METHODS

3.11.5.1 CONTROL OF EXPOSURE TIME

If engineering noise control measures are unavailable or inadequate, the option of jobdesign change is considered.

Line management is responsible for assessing all noise exposed jobs and reducingemployees exposure time where practicable. Job design changes and personnelrotation out of hazard areas are options.

3.11.5.2 PERSONAL HEARING PROTECTION

Wearing of approved hearing protection is compulsory for all plant noise areas known to

be within the 85dB(A) contours and where hearing protection signs are displayed.

Hearing protectors must be readily available and comply with relevant standard:BS EN 352-1:2002

Attenuate the loudest noise received by the wearer to preferably below 85dB(A) ascalculated using approved methods.

Further steps are necessary if the attenuation of available ear protectors is calculated asnot providing reduction to less than 85dB(A).

These steps are required by the line supervisor

· Limit personnel access time in the area so that the noise exposure standard is notexceeded.

· Impress on employees the need for double protection, i.e. ear plugs plus ear muffs.· Seek assistance in sourcing ear protectors which by calculation do comply.· Expedite a noise reduction program.

Supervisors must also ensure that all employees in designated high noise areas areaware of the full range of hearing protectors and are able to correctly fit, store and









maintain each type. The supervisor must also closely supervise and reinforce mandatoryhearing protection requirements.

Information on the design, wearer information, performance and procedures relative tohearing protectors (ear muffs) can be found on relevant supplier literature and in theBritish Standards.

Further InformationBS EN 352-1:2002: Hearing protectors. Safety requirements and testing. Ear-muffs

All personnel likely to be exposed to noise in workshops and in the use of power tools,must carry their own pair of earmuffs of approved and suitable type.

Ear plugs are suitable for intermittent, short term protection only. Long term presence inthese designated areas requires the wearing of appropriately rated ear muffs, whilst forlong term exposure in high noise areas the double protection of ear muffs and ear plugsworn together shall be used.

The use of some power tools also generates high noise levels, in particular the largerright angle disc grinders, and double protection is also required for users of these tools.

CautionThe claimed attenuation value for any hearing protection device may becompromised if:· The size and type is inappropriate for the area· The fit and adjustment of the device is incorrect· The unit is old, poorly maintained or broken· The fit is impaired by spectacles, clothing, etc.

Further Information3.9.4 HEARING PROTECTION

3.11.6 NON-HAZARDOUS NOISE

Noise in some areas of the plant may be below the level of hearing loss risk, but maycause other problems. Noise that may interrupt verbal communication or createdistraction also needs to be monitored and controlled.

3.11.7 NOISE PROBLEM INDICATORS

Noise may occur in non routine activity or in the use of newly installed machinery, e.g.portable diesel power packs, which have not been assessed or identified in previousroutine surveys.









A noise problem exists if:

· Voices have to be raised in speech communications in the affected area at a range ofone metre or less.

· There is a residual ringing in the ears or difficulty in hearing normal soundsexperienced after exposure (threshold shift).

· There is a prevalence of hearing problems amongst employees.

3.12 EYE SAFETY PROGRAMME

3.12.1 PURPOSE

To define the appropriate standards of mandatory eye protection for personnel workingon ADGAS facilities.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV4-04: PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT. Section 3.2Eye Protection

3.12.2 OBJECTIVES

· To prevent injury to eyes of employees, contractors and third parties while working on ADGAS facilities.

· To identify and eliminate potential eye injury hazards. Where it is not possible toeliminate hazards, work practices and personal protective equipment are to be usedto minimise the risk.

· To ensure that all employees, contractors and third parties know, understand andcomply with the requirements of this policy, and their duty of care regarding their ownsafety , and that of others.

3.12.3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

To achieve these objectives, the following specific requirements must be complied with:

· Prior to the commencement of any work activity, the hazards that may lead to eye

injury are to be identified and where possible eliminated· Where hazards cannot be removed, appropriate protection will be used.· Evidence is required that eye safety has been considered in all jobs by Task Risk

Assessment or other appropriate means.

It is recognised that at times temporary removal of eye protection may be necessary forcleaning and de-fogging or for close inspection when it is not hazardous.

In these cases common sense should ensure that the eye protection is removed awayfrom potential hazards and replaced as soon as possible.









If a situation arises where the actual wearing of eye protection is thought to be potentiallyhazardous, the relevant supervisor will convene a Task Risk Assessment, to determinethe safest way to perform the job.

Note'Appropriate' eye protection indicates a need for the best protection for the job,which may be safety spectacles (with side shields) minimum protection, safetygoggles, a face shield, or any combination of these.

3.12.4 EYE TESTING

All employees will have a pre-employment eye test according to the ADGAS Pre-

employment Health Assessment Policy.

3.12.5 PRESCRIPTION GLASSES

Where prescription glasses are worn and an employee is required to work in the ADGASIndustrial Area, the company will provide one pair of glasses conforming with BritishStandard 2092.

The glasses will be replaced by ADGAS when visual ability changes, or when glassesare accidentally damaged.

Prescription safety glasses are not provided for personnel employed solely outside theplant unless they are also required to work in the Industrial area.

3.12.6 CONTACT LENSES

Although not recommended, there is no barrier to wearing contact lenses on the plantproviding the appropriate level of eye protection is also worn according to this policy.

Further InformationBS 7028:1999 - Selection, use and maintenance of eye protection for industrialand other uses.

3.12.7 SAFETY SPECTACLES/ EYESHIELDS/ OVERSPECS3.12.7.1 INTRODUCTION

The safety spectacles/ eyeshields have been reviewed and additional types have beenadded to the range.

The following types are available on stores requisition.

· Clear for general use, and to be worn in areas of reduced lighting.· Tinted for general use, particularly in areas of intense radiation (sunlight)

and excessive glare.









· Overspecs (clear/tinted) for general use, worn over non-safety prescriptionspectacles.

· Antiflash to be worn in the immediate areas of welding.

3.12.7.2 CONDITIONS

· Supervisory staff must ensure that eye protection is worn at all times, within the ADGAS Industrial Area, by their workforce.

· Spectacles may only be adequate for relatively low energy projectiles e.g. metalswarf. Whenever there is a risk of high speed solid projectiles, an exposure to dust orsplashing of toxic/ corrosive substances, then goggles or face shields should beworn.

· Tinted spectacles/ eyeshields must not be worn in any area, that has subduedlighting i.e. within the LNG Trains.

3.12.7.3 C ARE AND M AINTENANCE

· Ensure adequate fitting of the spectacles/ eyeshields to the face by altering the lengthof the side frame to fit snugly over the ears, if applicable, and adjust the angle of theside frame/ main body for a comfortable fit, wherever possible.

· Employees must take all reasonable steps to ensure that the safety spectacles/eyeshields supplied are correctly used and maintained in a clean condition.

· Cleaning can be carried out by the use of lens cleaner and tissue or if there is heavy

contamination, washing in a mild soap solution. Strong detergents should beavoided.· Lenses that are heavily scratched, pitted or show other signs of damage should be

replaced as they will impair vision, and the impact resistance may be reduced.

Prompt Reporting of Loss or Damage will Aid in a Speedy Replacement.

3.13 VEHICLES AND BICYCLES

3.13.1 INTRODUCTION

Road traffic on Das Island is governed by the Abu Dhabi Traffic Laws and nothing in this

Section of the HSE Manual will supersede or be interpreted to supersede relevant itemswithin these laws.

All drivers must be in possession of a current driving licence issued by the PoliceDepartment of Abu Dhabi, and be fully conversant with and comply with all requirementsof local traffic regulations.

Along with the above, drivers and other vehicle users must comply with the requirementslaid down in this Section to ensure the safety of personnel.









The term "vehicle", as used within this Section, includes all motorised vehicles and pedalcycles.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV4-06: ESSENTIAL FEATURES OF ROAD TRANSPORTOPERATIONS, RISK ASSESSMENT AND CONTROL

3.13.2 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

Drivers and passengers should never mount, or dismount from a moving vehicle or jumpfrom a high cab instead of using the steps. Neither should they (because they intend tobe away for a short time) leave the vehicle with the engine running. An unattended

vehicle should have the engine switched off, the gears in neutral and the hand brake on. As an added precaution on sloping ground the wheels should be chocked. Tippingbodies should always be lowered whenever the Operator leaves the machine.

Drivers and front seat passengers must wear seat belts, as required by the Abu DhabiTraffic Law.

3.13.3 REVERSING

Large vehicles should not be reversed without the help of a banksman. If a banksman isunavailable, then the driver must ensure before moving that no-one is in a position ofdanger. Audible warning systems should be installed where possible.

3.13.4 PASSENGER SAFETY

Suitable arrangements must be made for the transport of personnel through the facilities.

The number of passengers carried in company vehicles must be strictly limited to thefigures quoted in the Passenger Load Limits following.

In the case of a vehicle provided with only one seat, e.g. tractor, dumper, etc., thenpassengers are strictly forbidden.

Certain vehicles may be used to transport personnel that are not specifically designed tocarry personnel. To ensure the safety of personnel in such vehicles the following mustbe complied with:-

Permanent or temporary seating shall be fitted to all vehicles. If temporary, adequatemeans of securing must be fitted.

All flat beds and trailers transporting passengers shall be approved by ADMA-OPCOTransport Engineer and MHSE.









3.13.5 PASSENGER LOAD LIMITS3.13.5.1 CARS

Driver and up to four passengers with one passenger only in front passenger seat.

3.13.5.2 LIGHT DUTY (SHORT WHEEL BASE) PICK-UP

Driver and one passenger only in front, and, where seats are provided, up to sixpassengers in the rear.

3.13.5.3 HEAVY DUTY (LONG WHEEL BASE) PICK-UP

Driver and one passenger only in front, and, where seats are provided, up to sixpassengers in the rear.

3.13.5.4 LORRY

Driver and one passenger only in front, and, where seats are provided, up to eighteenpassengers in the rear.

3.13.6 SPEED LIMITS

The speed limit for all vehicles between Marshalling Points 1 and 5 is 25 kph. On otherroads the speed limit is 45 kph.

3.13.7 ROAD LIMITS

All five bridges on Das Island are constructed for a single maximum axle load of 20tonnes, and the four height restrictions are set at 5.20m. The routing of heavy loadvehicles from site to the harbour must be approved by ADMA-OPCO.

If construction work on roads is required for piping, culverts, cables, etc., there mustalways be left open for vehicular traffic at least a 3m wide unrestricted road width.Measures are to be provided for traffic lights or a flag man. A complete blockage ofroads is not acceptable.

3.13.8 ROAD CLOSURES (TOTAL/PARTIAL)

Any road normally open to traffic within the areas operated by ADMA-OPCO, that is to befully or partially closed, requires notification to ADMA OPCO in order to Obtain ADMA’sapproval through ADGAS HSE . Total/ Partial road closures within the ADGAS operatedareas must be requested through HSED and HO.

The above permits/ requests must be completed in sufficient time to comply with themandatory requirement of 72 hours notification to the Police and the EmergencyServices.









3.13.9 ROAD MOVEMENT OF WIDE IRREGULAR LOADSWhenever a wide/ irregular load is to be moved which is liable to obstruct normal trafficdue to its shape, length or speed, a permit (Road Movement of Irregular Loads/Equipment) is required within the ADMA-OPCO operated areas. Notification ofmovement must be submitted to HSED for roads within the ADGAS areas.

Submission of the permit/ notice for the above must be in time to comply with themandatory 72 hours notification.

If trailers are used then they must have an integrated braking system with the towingunit.

3.13.10 DRIVER TRAINING

Specialised vehicles such as tractors, forklifts, cranes, etc. may only be driven bypersons who have been appropriately trained and who have passed a competence testto drive the particular vehicle.

ADMA-OPCO is responsible, on request, for arranging the testing of drivers of suchvehicles.

3.13.11 LOADING/UNLOADING

Vehicles must not be overloaded and the loads must be evenly distributed, secured andnot projecting beyond the sides of the vehicle wherever possible.

When vehicles are to be loaded by means of some other machine, the driver shouldleave the cab before loading commences.

It is the responsibility of the user Department to ensure safe loads according to thevehicle capacity, and to secure all loads adequately.

3.13.12 PROJECTING OR WIDE LOADS

If some degree of projection is unavoidable, it should be properly marked in a manner

that makes the projection clear to other road users.

At the discretion of MHSE a warning vehicle may be required to accompany and or directthe abnormal load within the ADGAS Industrial Area.

3.13.13 TOWING

The towing vehicle and trailer, compressor, etc. must be matched to ensure thecombination is capable of negotiating inclines, bends, etc. Brakes on the trailer unitshould be operable from the towing unit.









Any connections between the trailer and the towing unit must be securely fixed using thecorrect towing pin and the trailer parking brakes applied before disconnection from thetowing vehicle. Suitable wheel chocks should be provided when parking on an incline.

3.13.14 MAINTENANCE

Company owned motor vehicles and those permitted to be used for Company projectsmust be maintained in an efficient and safe condition.

Vehicles must be taken to the ADMA-OPCO Garage for servicing on the day specified. Any defects must also be reported so that repairs can be effected.

No driver may attempt to carry out his own repairs to the vehicle or engine.

Each vehicle must have a current registration document that is to be kept in the vehicleand display a rear number plate sticker.

Additionally, police permission to use the vehicle must be kept in the vehicle. Themaintenance of current documents is the responsibility of ADMA-OPCO TransportSection.

3.13.15 BICYCLES

Bicycles must be maintained in a good and safe condition and not used during the hoursof darkness unless they have a white light showing to the front and a red light showing tothe rear.

Bicycles are not allowed in certain areas as indicated by notices in the ADGAS Industrial Areas. All bicycles and riders must be licensed by the Das Island Police. Brakes, bothfront and rear, shall be regularly checked for effective operation.

3.14 HEAT DISORDERS

3.14.1 INTRODUCTION

Ideally man's thermal environment should maintain the body temperature at about36.8°C or, if under thermal stress, some value normally within the range of 36.5-39°C.The thermal environment has a pronounced effect on personal comfort. Markeddeviations can cause adverse effects including fatigue, irritability, reduced concentration,heat cramps due to salt loss, fainting, heat exhaustion and heat stroke. These in turnaffect productivity, increase error and accidents and, of course, an individual's health.

In addition to presenting information on the body's response to high temperature,sensible precautions are suggested here for reducing the effects of working in a hotenvironment.









Further Information ADNOC-COPV3-08: GUIDELINE ON OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH RISK ASSESSMENT( OHRA)

3.14.2 BODY HEAT RESPONSES

When the body senses increased skin temperature, peripheral blood vessels dilate andpulse rate increases resulting in a greater flow of blood to the surface of the body. Thisincreases the potential for heat transfer from the body core to the skin and surroundings.Sweating increases heat loss due to latent heat of evaporation of sweat. In very hotclimates sweating offers the greatest potential for regulating body temperature.

3.14.3 ACCLIMATISATION

On going from a cool to a predominantly warmer climate it is necessary to allow the bodyto acclimatise by increasing the body's ability to replenish lost fluids and sweat capacitywhile decreasing salt losses in sweat. It takes about three days to get to 60% sweatcapacity and ten days for complete acclimatisation. This increased sweat capacity is lostafter a few days in a cooler environment.

3.14.4 BODY TEMPERATURE

In the thermal environment and general working conditions on Das the following factorsare most important in the regulation of body temperature:

3.14.4.1 AIR VELOCITY

Heat will be removed from the body by convection when an air current passes over itunless the air temperature is higher than the temperature of the skin.

Air movement will also affect the rate of evaporation of moisture (sweating) from the skinunless the air is 100% saturated or it's vapour pressure is greater than that on thesurface of the skin.

It is therefore beneficial to maintain air movement in areas of high ambient temperature,particularly in enclosed spaces.

3.14.4.2 HUMIDITY

As indicated above, the evaporation of moisture (sweat) plays a major role in dissipatingbody heat and thus the temperature and humidity of the air are important.

The higher the humidity the more difficult it is for the sweat to evaporate; hence the effectof heat on the body is greater.









3.14.5 HEAT EXHAUSTIONHeat exhaustion is associated with a depletion of both salt and minerals. Theconcentration of body fluids is not altered greatly, but there is a drop in blood volume thatcauses the symptoms.

Symptoms over a period of a few days the person complains of weakness, fatigue andheadache with perhaps vomiting.

Treatment consists of removing the patient to a cool place, rest in bed and replacementof salt and water, normally orally. Only in severe cases is intravenous supplementnecessary.

3.14.6 HEAT STROKE

Heat stroke indicates the failure of the thermoregulatory mechanism and consequentincreasing of body temperature. When the body temperature reaches 40.6oC the personwill fall unconscious. Onset is abrupt. If a person has heat-stroke, he must be rapidlycooled, by whatever means are available, to reduce his temperature.

Treatment may be required for as long as a week before sweating returns and the patientis able to regulate his temperature unaided.

The differences between the two heat disorders are illustrated in Figure 3-5:

Signs and Symptoms of heatexhaustion include:

· Cool, clammy, pale skin· Sweating· Dry mouth· Fatigue, weakness· Dizziness· Headache

· Nausea, sometimes vomiting· Muscle cramps· Weak and rapid pulse

Signs of heat st roke include:

· Very high temperature (104 degreesF or higher)

· Hot, dry, red skin· No sweating· Deep breathing and fast pulse - then

shallow breathing and weak pulse· Dilated pupils

· Confusion, delirium, hallucinations· Convulsions· Loss of consciousness

Figure 3-5: HEAT EXHAUSTION, HEAT STROKE









3.14.7 TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONSMinisterial Decision No 467 (2005) ADGAS and ADGAS contractors are required to set a roster specifying the daily workinghours for all labourers working under the sun or in exposed work sites during the monthsof July and August. The roster must be displayed in a prominent place, and must be in Arabic and other languages understood by the labourers.

American industrial hygienists recommend to use Wet Bulb Globe Temperature Index(WBGTI) to establish exposure limit values for work in hot environment. This index setsthe duration of work and rest periods so as to ensure that the core body temperaturedoes not rise above 38°C

WBGTI is calculated as follows:

(i) Outdoors when solar radiation is present.

WBGTI = 0.7 WBT + 0.2 BGT + 0.1 DBT

(ii) Indoors or outdoors when solar radiation is not present.

WBGTI = 0.7 WBT + 0.3 BGT

Where WBGTI = Wet Bulb Globe Temperature Index in °CWBT = Wet Bulb Temperature in °CBGT = Black Globe Temperature in °CDBT = Dry Bulb Temperature in °C

Recommended work/rest duration for various type of activities and correspondingWBGTI is given below:

Work/restWorkload

Light Medium HeavyContinuous work 30.0 26.7 25.0

75% work - 25% rest 30.6 28.0 25.950% work - 50% rest 31.4 29.4 27.925% work - 75% rest 32.2 31.1 30.0

The duration of each work/rest cycle should be one hour, i.e.: 45 minutes work - 15minutes rest, 30 minutes work - 15 minutes rest etc.

The above values are recommended when temperature conditions at the resting placediffer little from those at work place. If the resting place temperature is equal to or lessthan 24°C WBGT, the rest periods may be shortened by 25%.









The limit values in table above shall not be exceeded.

3.15 SAFE ACCESS AND WORK PLACES

3.15.1 INTRODUCTION

Plant layout and building designs are such that safe entrance and exits are provided toall normal/regular work locations. Emergency escape routes are also provided in mostareas to afford a secondary route of escape.

The purpose of this section is to detail the minimum acceptable criteria for safe means ofaccess and workplace safety.

3.15.2 ENTRANCE AND EXIT

3.15.2.1 GENERAL

All normal routes of entrance to and exit from and within work places must be sized toaccommodate the anticipated normal traffic, in both directions, for that route.

As a minimum, all normal means of access must have a width of 1 metre and aclearance height of 2.2 metres.

Access routes should be defined where possible within Plant and Workshop areas by

yellow markings delineating the width and direction of the route.

Adequate lighting shall be provided on all entrance and exit routes.

Surfaces of routes shall provide firm footing without trip hazards and be non-slip.

Constructions and equipment must not protrude into the designated route.

No "dead end" access routes are to exceed 10 metres in length.

Where possible, secondary means of access should be provided to work areas.

Any routes requiring to cross pipes, etc., shall be provided with ramps or steps ofsuitable width and inclination.

3.15.3 RESTRICTED AREAS

Restricted Areas are defined as those in which ADGAS exercises control over movementand operations.

The Restricted Area shall be entered or left only by the recognised routes.









3.15.4 TEMPORARY ACCESSWhere normal routes of access are obstructed due to operational or maintenancerequirements, alternative routes shall be established and clearly signed.

Temporary accesses are not required to conform to the minimum criteria given, but shallbe free of protrusions and trip hazards.

Any restrictions in height or width on temporary walkways less than the normal minimumcriteria, are to be clearly marked with yellow and black diagonal stripes.

3.15.5 ACCESS TO ELEVATED AREAS

The following criteria apply to all work places that are 2m or more above grade.

Wherever possible access should be by stairways complete with handrails.

Ladders in excess of 2.5 metres must be provided with a safety cage from 2.5 metresabove grade to the ladder top.

Landings are to be provided at 6 metre intervals for extended height accesses.

Safety bars or gates are to be provided at ladder tops.

Ladder hand rails are to extend 1 metre above the platform, etc., level.

Where ladder access movements are minimal or the fitting of safety cages is notoperationally feasible, provision must be made for the use of safety belts/harnesses andlines, ideally of the permanently engaged type.

All accesses that have a vertical drop of more than 2m on either or both sides, shall beprovided with handrails.

3.15.6 ESCAPE ROUTES

3.15.6.1 GENERAL Emergency escape routes shall be provided from work areas, each route being clearlydefined. A normal access route can be designated an escape route provided theminimum requirements designated below are met.

Lighting on emergency escape routes is to be provided with battery backup to ensurevisibility if there is power failure.

Routing of emergency escape routes must take into consideration the inherent hazardsof the work place and where possible, minimise them by physical separation or byshielding.









3.15.6.2 BUILDINGS

Escape routes within buildings are to take the minimum practicable route to an externaldoor.

Where dead ends or excessively long routes exist, provision shall be made foremergency escape doors, each fitted with panic bar or break-glass bolts.

All doors on escape routes are to open in the direction of escape.

3.15.6.3 ESCAPE ROUTE SIGNS AND M ARKINGS

The directions of emergency escape routes are to be clearly defined by white arrows ona green background.

At the beginning of the escape route and at subsequent junctions, the direction arrowsare to be supplemented by a sign with the wording "Escape Route" in white on a greenbackground in Arabic and English.

Exits from buildings are to be indicated by self illuminated or photoluminescent signsabove the door indicating "Exit" or "Emergency Exit" - again, white lettering on a greenbackground in Arabic and English.

3.15.7 SAFE WORK PLACES

3.15.7.1 GENERAL

Design and layout of plant, equipment and facilities are to ensure, where practicable, thatall hazards are minimised.

Procedures for routine and specific work requirements shall reflect safe and acceptedwork practices.

Housekeeping within work areas shall be maintained at a high standard.

Employees shall ensure familiarity with workplaces, especially escape routes andemergency equipment locations.

3.15.7.2 PLANT AND WORKSHOPS

All access and escape routes must be maintained free of obstructions.

Hand tools and portable equipment are to be maintained in good condition with repairsonly being undertaken by competent persons. All tools and portable equipment are to bereturned to their proper place of storage after use.









Electrical leads and cables are to be utilised with approved connectors only. Temporaryrepairs to cables are not permissible.

Waste and rubbish shall be deposited in approved containers as soon as practicable andnot allowed to accumulate.

3.15.7.3 CONTROL ROOMS AND SUBSTATIONS

All panel doors shall be secured except during maintenance.

Control stations are to be maintained free of obstructions and desk top surface controlsare to remain unobscured.

Where computer type floor or floor panels are used, panels are to be secured and level.If any panels are removed for access, the opening shall be barriered.

3.15.7.4 OFFICES

The following items are the responsibility of all employees:

Do not allow electrical leads to trail where someone may trip over them. Frayed ordamaged leads are to be replaced immediately by a competent person.

Keep gangways and passages clear - do not leave drawers of desks and filing cabinets

open.

Never overload shelves and always use step ladders to reach shelves out of your reach.

3.15.7.5 T ANK ROOFS

All work on tank roofs shall be covered by a valid permit.

Unsafe tank roofs shall be so marked with a notice at the top of the tank stairs or ladder,where a barrier prohibiting access shall be placed.

Access onto floating tank roofs requires an Entry Permit See Chapter 9

3.15.7.6 FRAGILE ROOFS

Buildings having asbestos or similar fragile roofing materials shall be marked by a noticegiving warning of this.

Any work undertaken on fragile roofs shall use roofing boards or if necessary, properscaffolding or walkways. Stepping onto the roof is prohibited.

If no safety barriers are provided, safety belts/harnesses with life lines attached tosuitable anchor points shall be used.









If ladders are used for roof access, their construction and use shall comply with therequirements detailed in Section 9-3 Scaffolding and Ladders.

Further InformationChapter 9.7 WORK OVER WATERChapter 9.8 WORK ON ROOFSChapter 9.9 WORK AT HEIGHT

3.16 OFFICE SAFETY

3.16.1 FIRE3.16.1.1 EVACUATION OF ADGAS MAIN OFFICE BUILDING (DAS)

On the sounding of the local Fire Alarm, personnel SHALL take the following actions:

· Leave their place of work or office.· Shut, but do not lock, doors.· If safe to do so, attack fire with available fire extinguisher.· Call Fire Service, 63333 from safe area.· Evacuate the building through the nearest fire exit.· Assemble at either Marshalling Points (North or South side)

· Await further instructions.

3.16.2 TRIPS AND FALLS

Watch out for falls. You can fall while walking, climbing stairs or even leaning back inchairs. You can trip on telephone and electric cords, open drawers and misplaced boxesor furniture. It’s easy to slip on a spot of spilled coffee on a polished floor. To preventthese common office accidents:

· Keep your office tidy, with boxes and furniture in their proper places· Don't leave the bottom drawers of desks and filing cabinets open. Open one drawer

at a time, and close the drawers slowly and carefully· Clean up any spills immediately and use a suitable cleaning agent if spills are greasy· Report worn or loose tiles and carpets immediately· Use warning signs and arrange alternative routes when floors are wet· Make sure cables don't cross pedestrian routes, secure them to the floor, or use

cable covers where appropriate· Keep mats securely fixed to the floor surface and make sure they don't have any

curling edges· Do not allow rubbish to build up; clean up and keep work areas free of obstructions· Ensure pedestrian routes are free of obstacles left in the way and protruding

obstacles









· If you cannot safely reach items on high shelves, re-organise your arrangements. Ifthis is not practicable use a step-up or step ladder

· Be wary of top-heavy drawers can cause a filing cabinet to topple over· Drawers can also pinch fingers if slammed shut

3.16.3 LIFTING

Avoid lifting any heavy or awkward items

· Use a trolley when possible· Break down large or heavy loads· Seek help if necessary· Check your route is clear· Take extra care with awkward tasks such as emptying a car boot

· Stand close to the item with feet apart· Bend your knees, not your back· Grip the item firmly· Lift with your legs· Bend your knees to lower the load· Don’t trap your fingers and toes· Put it down first, then slide it into place

· Don’t over-reach or stretch

3.16.4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

Exposure of personnel to hazardous substances in office environments is minimal.Nevertheless, some hazardous substances such as cleaning materials and copyingmaterials may be present in small quantities. Office personnel should avoid contact withsuch substances, however, if they must be handled reference should be made toHazardous Substances Manual, and the controls in the MSDS's should be applied.

3.16.5 ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

· Guard against electric shock by making sure equipment is properly connected usingthree-pronged plugs· Check cables regularly and replace frayed or improper wiring· Never tamper with electrical plugs to make them fit the wrong type of socket· Keep coffee and other liquids away from your electrical equipment.

3.16.6 WORKSTATION

Setting up your workstation correctly will reduce most of the causes of pain anddiscomfort from sitting at a computer. Approach this from the point of view that yourcurrent setup is, obviously, what you thought was OK, but now the idea is to change it.









The correct setup might not feel right straight away, and changing ingrained habits maytake a prolonged effort.

First, adjust your chair height so that when you put your fingers on the middle row of thekeyboard your forearms and hands are horizontal, with your elbows vertically under yourshoulders and no angle at the wrist. Often it helps to get a colleague to look from theside, as it can be hard to judge for your self. Many people have their chair too high soadjust your chair to this height now.

If the undersides of your thighs are now compressed, you need either a footrest or alower desk. Most desks are a standard height of around 2'6" (710 mm) so a large

proportion of people will benefit from a footrest

Adjust the height of the monitor so that you are looking horizontally, not down at it.Generally this means having the top of the visible area at eye height, when you aresitting upright. Many people have their monitor too low, but you can raise the monitor onanything suitable that you have to hand, it doesn't need to be an adjustable monitor arm.

Adjust the angle of the backrest, and/or the length of the bottom-cushion, so that yourback is supported in your work position, and the bottom-cushion is not too long for you.If you can't sit fully back and upright without the back of your knees hooking the front ofthe seat, you need a different chair with a shorter bottom-cushion. Adjust the backrestheight so that it supports the lower back Sit very upright. If the shape of the backrestdoes not fit fully into the small of your back, you would probably benefit from adding aback support.

Move your chair so that when typing your elbows are vertically under your shoulders. Ifyou cannot get close to the desk because the chair armrests hit the edge of the desk,either change the chair or remove them. Fixed-height armrests are generally too low,encouraging you to slump down to them. Adjustable-height armrests are usually shorterand will let you get close enough to your desk while offering valuable support takingsome of the weight of your arms off your shoulder and neck muscles. Short but fixedarmrests can be raised by wrapping foam round them, or adding a layer of foam andwrapping fabric round. Don't be surprised if you need to add up to three inches of height

in order to have elbow support when sitting upright.

Check the distance of the monitor. For most people to view the screen comfortably itshould be about 22-26" (55 - 65 cm) away, so that your eye focus muscles do not haveto work too hard. If you are sitting much closer than this, consider if there is a problemwith your eyesight, the screen quality or settings, or the desk depth. Usable desk depthcan often be increased by pulling the desk away from the wall and allowing the monitorto overhang at the back. Check the side-to-side position of the monitor - it should bedirectly in front of you. Don't put the monitor in the corner - either it will be hard to getclose enough to the keyboard, or you will be twisted and your back and neck maydevelop problems.









Sit close to the desk and don't put things between you and the keyboard except a gelwrist rest - your elbows need to be vertically under your shoulders. Don't automaticallydeploy the keyboard's rear feet - you only need them if your elbows are below deskheight. If you rest your wrists on the table when you type you should use a wrist rest.

Position and use the mouse as close to you as you can. Aim to have your elbowvertically under your shoulder, and right by your side or on the armrest.If your mouse tends to stray away from you during the day, try making your mouse matsmaller (most can be cut easily) and sticking it down in the correct position with double-sided tape or blu-tak. If possible, or at all costs if you develop any sensation in your

mouse-side shoulder, use a narrow (84-key) keyboard so that you can have your mousecloser.

If you often refer to documents whilst typing use a document holder. This should bepositioned at the same height and distance as your monitor. If you look at the documentsmore than the screen put the document holder directly in front of you and the monitor tothe side.

Eliminate any glare or reflections on your monitor. Try closing blinds and changing theposition of the workstation so that the monitor is at right-angles to the window.Turn off overhead lights unless you really need them, using a tall desk lamp for reading.You can reduce reflections from overhead lights by raising your monitor then tilting itdown to make the screen vertical.

Position any additional equipment e.g. phones, paper trays, reference material inaccessible places. Try to avoid reaching and twisting. Investigate storage facilities anddesktop accessories to help you organise your workstation better.

3.16.7 BREAKS

The timing of breaks is more important than length of the breaks. Take short, frequentbreaks before you become tired. A 2-3 minute break after 30 minutes of screen andkeyboard work is more refreshing than a 15 minute break after 2 hours.

Taking a break need not mean going for a cup of coffee. Simply changing activities is auseful type of break. Alternate between screen and non-screen based tasks throughoutthe day. Make sure the change of activity uses different muscles and tendons to yourcomputer work. Take short pauses from your work to stretch your arms and legs.

Use your formal breaks to get away from your keyboard and screen. Help to relax youreyes by finding somewhere that allows you to look at a distant object.









3.16.8 FIRST AID A small cut, seemingly a minor graze which causes no pain, can quite easily turn septicwhich in turn can lead to blood poisoning. All this may happen because a simpleantiseptic cover was not applied at the time of injury. Know who your first aiders are andwhere first aid equipment is located.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV3-03: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH RISK MANAGEMENT -GENERAL. Section 8.4 Facilities and Personnel for Medical EmergencyResponse






H AZARDOUS SUBSTANCES Chapter No. 04



CHAPTER 4 CONTENTS

4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES ............................................................................................................... 145

4.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 145 4.1.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 145 4.1.2 NEW CHEMICAL APPROVAL PROCEDURE ............................................................... ............ 145

4.2 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE CONTROL ...................................................................................... 148 4.2.1 ELIMINATION .......................................................... ................................................................. .. 148 4.2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF LESS HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ............................................................. .. 148 4.2.3 ENCLOSURE OF THE HARMFUL PROCESS ............................................................... ............ 148 4.2.4 ISOLATION OF THE HARMFUL PROCESS ................................................................. ............. 148 4.2.5 LOCAL EXHAUST VENTILATION ................................................................................. ............ 148 4.2.6 GENERAL VENTILATION........................................................................................................... 148 4.2.7 WET METHODS .......................................................................................................................... 149 4.2.8 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT .................................................................................. 149 4.2.9 PERSONAL HYGIENE ................................................................................................................ 149 4.2.10 EDUCATION ........................................................ ................................................................. .. 150 4.2.11 HOUSEKEEPING AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................. ............. 150 4.2.12 WARNINGS AND PUBLICITY .............................................................. .................................. 150

4.3 RESTRICTED MATERIALS .............................................................. ............................................. 150 4.3.1 ASBESTOS ................................................................................................. .................................. 150 4.3.2 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES ........................................................ .................................. 151 4.3.3 POLY CHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBS) ............................................................................. 151

4.4 RISK AND CONTROLS .................................................................................................................. 152 4.4.1

INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 152 4.4.2 DEFINITIONS ........................................................... ................................................................. .. 152 4.4.3 RESTRICTIONS ........................................................ ................................................................. .. 153 4.4.4 FLAMMABILITY .......................................................................................................................... 153 4.4.5 HEALTH HAZARDS ....................................................................... ............................................. 154

4.5 CHEMICAL HANDLING ........................................................ ........................................................ 155 4.5.1 GENERAL SAFETY...................................................................................................................... 155 4.5.2 FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS .............................................................................................................. 156 4.5.3 UNSTABLE MATERIALS ................................................................ ............................................. 157 4.5.4 REACTIVE MATERIAL ........................................................ ........................................................ 157 4.5.5 INCOMPATIBILITIES .................................................................................................... ............. 157

4.6 WORK WITH HARMFUL CONTACTS ....................................................... .................................. 158 4.6.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 158 4.6.2

SYNTHETIC MINERAL FIBRES ................................................................................................. 159 4.6.3 ASBESTOS ................................................................................................. .................................. 159 4.6.4 QMB and CWS AREAS ................................................................................................................ 162 4.6.5 ASBESTOS WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................................. .................................. 163 4.6.6 LAGGING AND OTHER FIBROUS INSULATION ......................................................... ............ 163 4.6.7 STORES PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................. 163 4.6.8 CHEMICAL CLEANING ................................................................. ............................................. 164

4.7 LABELLING HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES ................................................................................ 166 4.7.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 166 4.7.2 ARABIC WARNING .............................................................................................. ....................... 166 4.7.3 CLASSES ...................................................................................................................................... 166 4.7.4 SUB-DIVISIONS .......................................................................................................................... 166 4.7.5 LABELLING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. .................................. 166









4.7.6 NON HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES ........................................................... .................................. 168 4.7.7 CLASS LABELS/HAZARD DIAMONDS ...................................................................................... 168 4.7.8 RISK PHRASES ......................................................... ................................................................. .. 168 4.7.9 SAFETY PHRASES ...................................................................................................................... 169 4.7.10 UN NUMBERS ........................................................................................................................ 169 4.7.11 NFPA SYSTEM ................................................................ ........................................................ 169 4.7.12 GENERAL SAFETY ................................................................................................................. 169 4.7.13 INFORMATION ............................................................... ........................................................ 169 4.7.14 RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................ ........................................................ 170

4.8 COMPRESSED GASES ........................................................... ........................................................ 170 4.8.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 170 4.8.2 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION .......................................................... ............................................. 170 4.8.3 PROPERTIES OF GASES ............................................................... ............................................. 171

4.8.4 OXYGEN ...................................................................................................................................... 173 4.8.5 LIQUIFIABLE GASES ......................................................... ........................................................ 175 4.8.6 SAFE STORAGE .......................................................................................................................... 177 4.8.7 SAFE HANDLING........................................................................................................................ 177 4.8.8 LEAK TESTING ............................................................................................................... ............ 177 4.8.9 CARE OF CYLINDERS ........................................................ ........................................................ 178 4.8.10 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS ................................................................. .................................. 178

4.9 OTHER DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES ........................................................ .................................. 180 4.9.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 180 4.9.2 METHANOL ............................................................... ................................................................. . 180 4.9.3 CAUSTICS AND ACIDS .............................................................................................................. 181 4.9.4 AMMONIA ................................................................................................. .................................. 182 4.9.5 CAUSTIC SODA .......................................................................................................................... 182

4.9.6 MIXED LIGHT HYDROCARBONS ........................................................... .................................. 183 4.9.7 CARBON DIOXIDE AND NITROGEN ................................................................. ....................... 183 4.9.8 ACETYLENE .............................................................. ................................................................ .. 183 4.9.9 MERCURY ................................................................................................. .................................. 183 4.9.10 MERCURY RECOVERY UNITS ............................................................ .................................. 184 4.9.11 PYROPHORIC MATERIAL HANDLING STORAGE AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURE ......... 185

4.10 RADIOACTIVE SOURCES ............................................................................................................ 187 4.10.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ ........................................................ 187 4.10.2 DEFINITIONS ................................................................. ........................................................ 187 4.10.3 PERSONAL MONITORING .................................................................................................... 189 4.10.4 INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBILITY .......................................................... .................................. 189 4.10.5 EMERGENCY EXPOSURE ........................................................ ............................................. 190 4.10.6 WORK PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 190

4.10.7 RADIOGRAPHY .............................................................. ........................................................ 190 4.10.8 CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE SOURCES ............................................................................ 190 4.10.9 NUCLEONIC SOURCES ............................................................ ............................................. 193 4.10.10 SITE RADIOGRAPHY ............................................................................................................. 195 4.10.11 OTHER APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 196 4.10.12 MONITORING ................................................................. ........................................................ 196 4.10.13 RADIOACTIVE EMERGENCY ................................................................................... ............ 197 4.10.14 TRANSPORT ........................................................................................................................... 197 4.10.15 DEFINITIONS OF RADIOLOGICAL TERMS ............................................................ ............ 199 4.10.16 DOSE LIMITS.......................................................................................................................... 201 4.10.17 APPOINTED RADIATION PROTECTION SUPERVISORS ................................................... 205

4.11 PLANT PRODUCT HAZARDS....................................................................................................... 205 4.11.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ ........................................................ 205









4.11.2 CRYOGENIC MATERIALS ..................................................................................................... 206 4.11.3 CRYOGENIC SPILLS/FLARES ............................................................. .................................. 208 4.11.4 EQUIPMENT FOR CRYOGENIC SERVICE .............................................................. ............ 210 4.11.5 PENTANE ................................................................................................................................ 210 4.11.6 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE (H2S) ................................................................................. ............ 210 4.11.7 SULPHUR ............................................................................................................................... 212

4.12 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES DISPOSAL ............................................................. ....................... 214 4.12.1 GENERAL .............................................................. ................................................................ .. 214 4.12.2 OUTSIDE AGENCIES ................................................................ ............................................. 214









4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

4.1 INTRODUCTION

4.1.1 GENERAL

Exposure of personnel to hazardous substances must be kept to levels as low asreasonably achievable, and in all cases, below levels set by regulations and relevantU.A.E and/or international exposure standards.

Exposure and/or environmental control measures are evaluated and implemented in thefollowing order of preference:

· Elimination of the need for the hazardous substance· Substitution with a less hazardous substance· Engineering measures, such as enclosure and/or ventilation· Administrative measures such as restricting access/exposure via job rotation.· Use of personal protective equipment.

Exposure of personnel to hazardous substances on Das Island should be minimal, butfor certain non-routine operations importation and use may be unavoidable.

NoteThe use of special personal protective equipment to control exposure must berestricted to short term, non-routine work, or for emergency situations.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV3-04: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH RISK MANAGEMENTCHEMICAL & BIOLOGICAL AGENTS

4.1.2 NEW CHEMICAL APPROVAL PROCEDURE

Divisional Managers /Departmental Heads are responsible for informing the HSED whennew chemicals are about to be introduced. A memorandum following the format shownin Figure 4-2: New Chemical Request Form (NCRF), Introduction Of New Chemicalshould be sent to MHSE with attached Material Safety Data Sheet.

HSED will review and inform approval or rejection to the initiator. Once the chemical isapproved, the old chemical will be taken out from the inventory list after 6 months.

Chemical brought for trial purpose shall follow MSDS of the manufacturer. The approvedchemical will then be included in the Hazardous Substance Manual.









Roadmap to new chemical approval procedure is shown in Figure 4-1: New Chemical Approval Procedure.

NEW CHEMICAL APPROVAL PROCEDURE

Look for other

users for r eference

Look for otherusers for reference

User’s dpt. Procure MSDSUser’s dpt. Procure MSDS

Send request to HSED with MSDS and a

brief justification in the prescribed format



HSED will review on HSE issues and

Feedback within 2 weeks in writt ing


Feedback within 2 weeks in writ ting

User’s Dpt. will advice Materials Dpt. Toprocure for field trial


User Dpt. To carry out field trialand feed back to HSED of the result.

User Dpt. To carry out f ield trialand feed back to HSED of the result.

HSED formally endorses if t he feedbackfrom the trial is successful.

HSED formally endorses i f t he feedbackfrom the trial is successful.

User’s dpt. will advise Materials dpt. toInclude in the materials register.

User’s dpt. will advise Materials dpt. to

Include in the materials register.

MSDS

Alternate chemical s

MSDS


ALL CHEMICALS INTENDED FOR USEIN DAS ISLAND MUST HAVE THE

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET AND

BE REVIEWED BY HSED BEFORE

PROCUREMENT.

Inform MaterialsDpt.to look for

alternative


alternative

Not AcceptableNot Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable

NEW CHEMICAL APPROVAL PROCEDURE

Look for other

users for r eference

Look for otherusers for reference

User’s dpt. Procure MSDSUser’s dpt. Procure MSDS






Feedback within 2 weeks in writt ing


Feedback within 2 weeks in writ ting



User Dpt. To carry out field trialand feed back to HSED of the result.

User Dpt. To carry out f ield trialand feed back to HSED of the result.

HSED formally endorses if t he feedbackfrom the trial is successful.

HSED formally endorses i f t he feedbackfrom the trial is successful.

User’s dpt. will advise Materials dpt. toInclude in the materials register.

User’s dpt. will advise Materials dpt. to

Include in the materials register.

MSDS


MSDS


ALL CHEMICALS INTENDED FOR USEIN DAS ISLAND MUST HAVE THE

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET AND

BE REVIEWED BY HSED BEFORE

PROCUREMENT.


alternative


alternative

Not AcceptableNot Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable

Figure 4-1: New Chemical Approval Procedure

Further InformationHazardous Substances Manual

Full details on all approved hazardous substances are contained in the ADGASHazardous Substances Manual. Any chemical missing from the list may please beintimated to HSED.









To be completed by New Chemical Init iator

From: …………………………………… To: HSED:

Date: ……………………………………(Strike out as applicable)

1. Name of Chemical: ………………………………………………………………………………2. Supplier: ………………………………………………………………………………………….3. Anticipated use t/annum: ……………………………………………………………….………..4. Type of container :……………………………………………………………………………..…

5. What will chemical be used for? ……………………………………………………………...…6. New/ Replacement chemical? (Strike out as applicable)7. Store ID Number of old chemical (where applicable) …………………………………………..8. Is this chemical really required? Please supply answers to the following questions as

attachment to this form:8 (a) If a replacement chemical, what is it’s advantage over existing chemical?8 (b) What benefits does the chemical give over not using it?8 (c) Is the chemical effective? Please supply supporting evidence from field trial.8 (d) Is the chemical economically justified? Please give details of alternatives, including nouse.

9. Where will chemical finish up? Air ……………..% Water …………….% Oil …………….%10. Please attach completed MSDS (yes/no) (Strike out as appropriate)11. Please supply plan for monitoring effectiveness of chemical during use.

Signed: ………………………………………………. Telephone Number: …………………

To be completed by HSED

The chemical is approved/ rejected ((Strike out as appropriate)

Signed ………………………………………….(HSED) Date:…………………………..(Strike out as appropriate)

NB: If the replacement chemical is approved, the old chemical will be taken out ofinventory list after 6 months.

Figure 4-2: New Chemical Request Form (NCRF)









4.2 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE CONTROL

4.2.1 ELIMINATION

Division/Department Managers shall make every effort to control and minimise theeffects of hazardous substances in their areas.

If the substance cannot be eliminated then the methods of control are listed below inorder of preference.

4.2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF LESS HAZARDOUS MATERIALThis is the most effective method of dealing with a hazardous substance hazard. Thehazardous substance is removed and another substance that will do the job, but whichdoes not produce toxic effects, is substituted.

4.2.3 ENCLOSURE OF THE HARMFUL PROCESS

This is the method adopted in most chemical manufacturing where the product orintermediates are toxic. Enclosure with automatic operation further reduces the risk ofexposure of employees.

4.2.4 ISOLATION OF THE HARMFUL PROCESS

This is a useful method for dealing with a hazard in a workshop where most of the workis hazard free. The particular process that is dangerous can be segregated and specialprecautions can be taken in this area. The people who work in this area may alsorequire special protection.

4.2.5 LOCAL EXHAUST VENTILATION

This is the standard way of dealing with dusts, vapours and fumes arising from a pointsource, for example in grinding, cutting, welding and burning. The harmful substancesshould be extracted at source so that they do not enter the general atmosphere. Thedirection of the ventilation should be away from the breathing zone of any potentially

exposed workers. The velocity of air that is needed for the purpose must be adequateand orifice sizes and the extractor fans capacity to shift air must be specified exactly.

4.2.6 GENERAL VENTILATION

The main problem with this method is that it is only effective against low concentrationsof hazardous substances. General ventilation can only be used effectively and safely ifthe following criteria are satisfied:

· The quantity of the contaminant is not too great.









· People must be far enough away from the contaminant for general ventilation todilute the contaminant to levels below the control limit or the contaminant must beevolved in levels below the control limit.

· The contaminant must be of low toxicity.· The release of the contaminant must be uniform and without sudden peaks.

4.2.7 WET METHODS

These are used for dust suppression. A fine spray of water can often be utilised tominimise dust. Powders which give rise to dust when dry will give little or no dust whenwetted.

4.2.8 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

These devices, such as dust masks, ear defenders and gloves are the last line ofdefence and should not be resorted to unless all other methods have been exhausted.

There are certain criteria that can be applied to the use of personal protection, i.e. whenthe effect of not using the personal protection provided is:

· immediate· painful or disabling· certain.

Personal protection shall be worn.

As these criteria are removed, so the likelihood of personal protection being wornreduces, particularly if the apparel is uncomfortable.

4.2.9 PERSONAL HYGIENE

Washing with soap and water can make a great deal of difference to whether a persondevelops skin trouble or not, for example, the person who washes seldom, who wearsclothing saturated or heavily contaminated with work-soiling and who is generally dirty inhis habits, thus increasing the risk of infection, will be at much greater risk than the

fastidious person who takes a pride in his appearance.

Cutting oils, (oil-water emulsions), which are used to cool the cutting areas of machinetools needed in metal cutting, are a source of potential skin hazards that may vary fromirritation and oil acne to, in a few instances, cancer.

In general, the people who suffer problems arising from cutting oils use poor workmethods, allowing oil to spray around needlessly and are often not scrupulous about thecleanliness of their skin, their clothes or the workplace. Barrier creams are sometimespresented as a panacea for all skin troubles in industry. Far from being so, these creams









may easily detract from the real needs of the situation, which are to keep the offendingsubstances and the skin apart.

Substitution, enclosure, better work methods, waterproof aprons and personal hygieneare all more important and effective ways of tackling the problem.

4.2.10 EDUCATION

In general the best protection that any person can have against any hazard is aknowledge of that hazard. Employees should know, for example, how a substance canor could harm them, what they can do to prevent trouble, what has been done in designand engineering of plant and equipment to make the work safe and the various rules that

have to be followed.

4.2.11 HOUSEKEEPING AND MAINTENANCE

Tidiness, (good housekeeping), plays an important role in the prevention of hazards atwork. No installation or plant that looks a mess can possibly be as safe as one that isfree from spillages, accumulated dust and dirt and which is generally clean and tidy.

4.2.12 WARNINGS AND PUBLICITY

These are effective as reminders and as stimulators of awareness provided that traininghas previously been carried out. Alone, they are at very best a very poor way of trying to

deal with any problem and at worst they can be an evasion of a real control plan to dealwith hazards.

Further InformationSubstances Hazardous to Health - Croner ADGAS Hazardous Substances Manual

4.3 RESTRICTED MATERIALS

4.3.1 ASBESTOS

Medical evidence has firmly established that exposure to inhalation of asbestos fibre canlead to fatal illness in humans.

The only asbestos based products currently authorised for use within ADGAS are:

· Spiral wound asbestos fibre (SWAF) and compressed asbestos fibre (CAF) gasketswithin existing facilities, where it can be demonstrated that use of alternativematerials may increase the risk of plant failure and accident.

· Some brake linings.









Further InformationChapter 4 Section 6 Work with Harmful Contacts

4.3.2 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS), mainly halons and chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), areused on Das Island. The increasing scientific evidence that halons and CFCs aredamaging the earth's ozone layer has prompted a global review of the use of thesesubstances.

As an interim measure, fixed flooding fire fighting systems still use halon where it can be

shown to be "essential". this is defined as providing protection from risk of:

· Loss of life or traumatic injury· Acute or chronic illness (effects of alternative agents)· Damage to the environment (due to major catastrophe)

Other applications where CFCs and halons are used will come under the ADGAS policyof elimination of these agents and replacement with suitable substitutes as soon as thesebecome available.

Applicants and systems affected are:

· Portable fire extinguishers· Fixed or flooding fire fighting systems· Aerosol propellants (CFCs)· Laboratory chemicals· Foam insulation blowing agents· Refrigeration systems· Cleaning applications

4.3.3 POLY CHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBS)

These chlorinated hydrocarbons are extremely stable, non-flammable, non-explosive and

oxidation resistant liquids. Such properties make them very attractive for use in electricalheat transfer and insulation equipment, as well as other systems such as hydraulics andvacuum pumps. Upon proof that the substance was carcinogenic manufacture ceased.

As a result of the systematic substitution of PCBs throughout industry, ADGAS hasalready initiated PCB phase out programme for the transformers.









Further InformationUnited Nations, Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods.Seventh Revised Edition 1991.International Maritime Organisation. International Maritime Dangerous GoodsCodes.International Air Transport Association. (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations1992.US EPA guidelines.

4.4 RISK AND CONTROLS

4.4.1 INTRODUCTIONChemical hazards are found in many areas on Das Island. Chemicals with hazardousqualities are used in the production processes and in construction and maintenance atvarious locations. The range of hazardous chemicals includes additives, reagents, by-products, wastes and those used in construction and maintenance processes such aslubricants, sealants, cleaners, protective coating, building/ insulation materials,welding/soldering/bonding consumables, pesticides, etc.

Products that are purchased and brought to Das Island need to be carefully controlled.

4.4.2 DEFINITIONS

Hazardous Substance.

This term is used to denote any of the following:

· Chemicals - elements and compounds or formulated mixtures of those in gaseous,liquid or solid state, packaged or in bulk.

· Explosives· Radioactive substances

Hazardous substances can be classified by the effects they produce:

· Acute lethal effects· Non lethal reversible effects· Severe effects after prolonged exposure· Irritancy affecting the skin and lungs· Sensitisation causing long term allergic reactions.· Carcinogenic, which may induce or increase the frequency of cancer· Teratogenic, which is having a damaging effect on the embryo· Mutagenic, which is alteration of the genetic programme of a person.· Corrosive, that is capable of tissue damage by corrosion or burning.









4.4.3 RESTRICTIONSUnnecessary procurement, storage and handling of hazardous substances must beavoided or eliminated.

A hazardous substance must not be introduced to an ADGAS workplace unless:

· Its use, presence or production is essential and there is no alternative product orprocess available that is less hazardous but otherwise equivalent.

· An approved Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) is available to those handling orusing the material, before exposure.

· All statutory and ADGAS requirements can be met for:o safe handling and health protectiono packagingo labellingo transporto storageo emergency procedureso waste disposal and environmental protection

In particular, those directly handling possibly hazardous substances must not do so untilthey have satisfied themselves that they have identified the material, and if it is classifiedas hazardous, they have established the practices to be adopted.

4.4.4 FLAMMABILITY

An understanding of the following terms is important in the LNG industry:

Flash point - is the lowest temperature at which vapour is given off from a material insufficient quantities that mixed with air will ignite in the presence of a flame or other directignition source but will not sustain combustion.

Flammable - having a closed cup flash point below 37.8°C .

Combustible - will continue to burn in air after the heat source has been removed

Non Combustible - combustion ceases when the heat source is removed

Explosive Clouds/Mists - finely dispersed particles or droplets in air creating conditionsfor an explosion.

Auto-ignition Temperature - is the lowest temperature at which a substance will igniteand sustain combustion when mixed with air without the presence of a spark or flame.









Explosive Limits - or flammable limit, relates to the range in which a mixture of vapour(gas, mist or powder) with air can burn on ignition. Gas and vapour concentrations aregiven in percent by volume in air and powdered substances in grams per cubic metre.

Lower Explosive Limit (LEL). The minimum percentage of a vapour which in air willsupport ignition. Lower percentages will not ignite.

Upper Explosive Limit (UEL): The maximum percentage of a vapour which in air willsupport ignition. Higher percentages will not ignite.

4.4.5 HEALTH HAZARDS

The form of exposure to harmful substances can be categorised in several waysdepending on the means of contact, i.e. skin contact, inhalation, etc.

The effects of the substance can be categorised in varying degrees of either irritation tothe body or toxicity (poisoning).

4.4.5.1 INHALATION

Irritation can range upwards from mild discomfort to laboured breathing and fluid in thelungs.

Toxic effects are measured on the LC 50 scale (lethal concentration), based on animalexperiments. The level of toxicity is given in parts per million (PPM) concentration in airranging from 10,000ppm and above as non toxic, with up to 100ppm as highly toxic. Thelower figure represents the more dangerous level of toxicity.

Asphyxiation, caused by lack of oxygen and high background concentrations of inertgases (CO2 and N2) can cause suffocation due to impaired respiration. The minimaloxygen content in breathing air is 18% by volume at normal pressure.

Sensitisation may be caused in certain persons by repeated exposure causing an allergictype asthmatic bronchitis.

4.4.5.2 SKIN

Irritation degrees range from minor discomfort up to blistering or full depth skin loss aswhen in contact with strong acids and alkalis. Dermatitis may result from defatting of theskin from contact with organic solvents. Repeated contact may also cause allergic skinreactions.

Toxic effects result from a substance being absorbed through the skin. Degrees oftoxicity are based on the LD 50 scale (lethal dose) given as mg/kg of body weight.Toxicity ranges from 350mg/kg which is slightly toxic up to 50mg/kg or less in the highestrange of toxicity.









4.4.5.3 EYES Irritation from contact with chemicals can range from mild discomfort up to permanenteye damage and loss of sight as with the effect of concentrated acid or alkali.

4.4.5.4 INGESTION

This is an unlikely route for the entry of occupational chemicals. Ingestion can occurhowever, in small and significant quantities by means of poor hygiene with meals,smoking, or from airborne particles swallowed and accumulating in the body.

Irritation can range from minor discomfort up to severe tissue loss and scarring in the

mouth, throat and stomach caused by swallowing strong acid or alkali.

Toxic effects of various substances ingested are measured on the LD (Lethal dose) scaleand given as mg/kg of body weight.

Degrees of toxicity range from slight toxicity at 500mg/kg and above, up to highly toxic at50mg/kg or less.

The preceding information is based on the more acute forms of response to irritants ortoxic agents. Long term effects are a separate study, but may result from exposure tocommon agents including dusts, welding, soldering and cutting fumes, smoke, solvents,paint polymers and cleaning agents and others.

4.5 CHEMICAL HANDLING

4.5.1 GENERAL SAFETY

4.5.1.1 H AZARD INFORMATION

The MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) is the guide to handling and disposal of eachchemical in the workplace. Before attempting to work with any chemical, the relevantMSDS must be read and the procedures and precautions given must be taken intoaccount. A Task Risk Assessment may have to be prepared.

Further InformationChapter 2.10 Task Risk Assessment

4.5.1.2 S AFETY WEAR

Dangerous chemicals and strong acids and alkalis may only be handled by personsproperly protected by appropriate selection of the following safety apparel:

· Eye goggles and face visor· Rubber/PVC gloves· Rubber/PVC footwear









· Rubber/PVC apron· Overalls or chemical suit· Appropriate breathing apparatus

MSDS or assessment reports will specify the personal protective equipment required.The MSDS gives general information whilst the assessment report is specific to the jobtask.

4.5.1.3 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

Eyewash stations and emergency showers must be located close to chemical handlingareas. Should contamination occur, the person either irrigates the eyes for 15 minutes or

uses the shower and removes contaminated clothing whilst in the shower as required.

Persons must ensure they are familiar with all safety and emergency equipment andcheck that it is immediately available:

· Learn the hazards of each chemical before working with it.· Clean up and/or neutralise any spilt chemicals.· Pack leaking containers in another outer leak proof container, suitably identified as a

damaged container, with appropriate hazard labels and return to stores for disposal.· Ensure appropriate neutralising chemicals, hoses and containers are on hand to deal

with spills.· Do not allow personnel to work alone or unaided with dangerous chemicals.

Supervision is required.· Avoid weather conditions which may cause spilling, spraying or dusting.

CautionLarger hazardous chemical jobs involving pumping acids, etc. Will require theuse of a Task Risk Assessment and a work permit.

4.5.2 FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS

Storage of flammable liquids, e.g. oils, solvents, paints, etc. is restricted to designated

areas. These areas have the appropriate signs and barriers, good ventilation andappropriate portable and fixed fire fighting equipment.

Flammable liquids may be kept outside of main storage areas in quantities up to 8 litresonly. Larger quantities must be returned to protected storage after use. Container typewill depend on the volatility and the flash point of the liquid, highly flammable products,e.g. solvents, must be in portable safety containers with spring closure, flame traps andstout construction. Red is the approved signal colour.

Storing drums of solvents, lubricants and similar products in pump and generator spaces,turbine rooms or switch rooms is prohibited.









4.5.3 UNSTABLE MATERIALS A material that will vigorously polymerise, decompose or condense or become selfreactive and undergo other violent chemical changes is known as an unstable chemicalor compound.

4.5.4 REACTIVE MATERIAL

A material is termed reactive when it can enter into a chemical reaction with other stableor unstable materials. Water is included if in the resultant reaction energy is released.

Reactions of some chemicals or products with common materials may release energy in

a violent manner.

The range of materials commonly found in LNG operations that can be considered in thelist of reactive materials in particular combinations are:

· Water or water vapour· Air· Metals· Rubber· Plastics· Oxidants

· Reducing agents· Acids· Alkalis

4.5.5 INCOMPATIBILITIES

The physical characteristics and behaviour of some chemicals may change when incontact with other materials and create potential hazards of :

· Hazardous reaction products, e.g. flammable or toxic gases· Fire or explosion (including violent reactions)· Loss of protection· Hazardous polymerisation

Incompatibilities exist in the transport and storage of flammable liquids in use in thehydrocarbons industry. Flammable liquids must be segregated from:

· Flammable, compressed gases· Substances liable to spontaneous combustion (Class 4.2)· Oxidising substances (Class 5.1 and 5.2)· Radioactive substances (Class 7)









General incompatibilities are shown in Table 4-1: INCOMPATIBILITIES OFSUBSTANCES.

CLASS INCOMPATIBLES

Flammable Solids 2.1, 4.2, 5.7

Substances Liable to SpontaneousCombustion

2, 3, 4.1, 5, 7

Dangerous when wet 2.1, 5, 7, 8

Oxidising Agents 2.1, 2.3, 3, 4, 5.2, 7, 8

Organic Peroxides 2, 3, 4, 5.1, 7, 8Poisons - (combustible) 5

Poisons - (cyanides) 8

Poisons - (general) Foodstuffs

Radioactive Substances 2.1, 3, 4, 5, 8,

Corrosives 4.3, 5, 6, 7

Table 4-1: INCOMPATIBILITIES OF SUBSTANCES

CautionSupervisors are to ensure that all users of each chemical substance have beenmade aware of the appropriate incompatible chemicals with that substance fromthe Materials Safety Data Sheet.

4.6 WORK WITH HARMFUL CONTACTS

4.6.1 INTRODUCTION

Some of the materials encountered in work processes may involve exposure of

personnel to potential short term or long term health effects.

Synthetic Mineral Fibres (SMF) are found as fibrous insulating material in the industry asa substitute for asbestos.

Chemical cleaning procedures pose special risks and require a knowledge of thepreventive measures required to reduce contact hazards to a safe level.









4.6.2 SYNTHETIC MINERAL FIBRESMany asbestos substitutes are based on SMF of various types such as glass fibre, rockwool, slag wool and refractory ceramic fibres. These are found in many applicationswithin ADGAS, mainly in tapes, lagging, gaskets and other insulating applications.

In general, SMF are less hazardous than asbestos, but there is still some potential forharm if dust is produced during handling. Safe handling of SMF products therefore,requires precautions that are similar to those used for asbestos, although less stringent.

SMF Handling Procedure

General safety requirements in the handling and use of SMF include:

· Selection of those products packaged and/or treated to reduce the generation of dust.· Procurement of the material pre-cut as far as practicable to reduce on-site work.· The use of manually operated tools for on-site cutting or shaping.· Ensuring that the material is clearly labelled with the product identification and

contents, directions for use and precautions.

NoteSpecial protective procedures will be required only if the SMF is likely bedisturbed and if significant amounts of free fibre may be generated. For larger

long term work, preparation of a Task Risk Assessment and a work permit arerequired.

Large scale disturbance or working of SMF involving exposure to fibrous dust requiresthe operators to:

· Wear an appropriate particle respirator, dust goggles, gloves and one piece hoodeddisposable overalls.

· Damp or wet down materials wherever possible· Clean up Synthetic Mineral Fibre (SMF) waste immediately. If dust is present, use

vacuum or wet methods.

· Securely package or label surplus SMF for future storage and use if required.· Package and label waste SMF to be disposed of according to the environmental

procedures.

4.6.3 ASBESTOS

Company policy is to avoid the use of asbestos wherever possible. There are someapplications however, where non asbestos substitutes are less than satisfactory orunsafe and white asbestos may still be found in the form of:

· CAF gaskets (compressed asbestos fibre)









· SWAF gaskets (spiral wound asbestos fibre)· Asbestos based packings for valves and pumps.· Asbestos woven tape for high pressure vessels (boiler steam drum).· Some brake linings· Boiler FD air dust bellows.

Because of crystalline structure, asbestos splits to produce fine fibres which can remainsuspended in the air for considerable periods. When inhaled, fine asbestos fibres arecapable of being deposited in the deepest regions of the lung, where they may causediseases such as asbestosis and mesothelioma, both forms of lung cancer.

To control exposure of airborne asbestos fibres, whenever work with asbestos isconducted, practicable measures wherever applicable should be undertaken as follows:-

· Adherence to working methods which minimise breakage, abrasion, machining,cutting that might generate dust.

· Suppression of dust by keeping the material wet, where appropriate.· Temporary segregation – avoid asbestos work and other activities in the same place.· Keeping work areas clean by removing debris offcuts promptly.· “Permit to Work” system.

The controlled wet stripping technique could be an effective method in minimising dust

release.

Asbestos Handling Procedure

Procedures for Removal of CAF/ SWAF with Gaskets and Packing Material

Obtain the required replacements from the store. Ensure they are correctly packaged inpolyethylene bags and labeled.

Prior to breaking the line flanges, ensure that any residual line pressure is vented awayfrom the system. Loosen bolts of the flange or spade in the respective line.

Wear PVC/ Neoprene long sleeve gloves and disposable half face piece valved mask“JSP make FFP3/SL”, NPF 50 prior to starting the job.

Do not use electric or air powered tools for removal of stuck gasket material.

Wet the gasket surface by spraying with water using the garden spray pot. Spread apolyethylene drop sheet underneath to collect all pieces dropped on floor.

Remove slowly the old gasket or packing, place it directly into a specific “Asbestosdisposal bag” with “Asbestos Warning Label”. Seal the bag and place it directly into the









dedicated “Asbestos only container”. Avoid breaking the gasket and packing materialinto small pieces.

If all or part of the gasket sticks to the face, wet it with water. Manually scrape and wirebrush the remnants. Re-wet as often as necessary to prevent dust formation.

Fold the drop sheet and dispose it in the “Asbestos Disposal Bag”.

Wash hands and face with soap and water thoroughly to remove any residualcontamination.

Maintenance Procedure with asbestos lagging and Other Asbestos Reinforced CalciumSilicate Insulation (Friable Asbestos)

Contractor employees engaged in asbestos related work must be assessed forcompetency by ADGAS Job Officer, in safe handling, working and disposal of asbestoscontaining material, according to this procedure.

Wear disposable zipped up boiler suit and disposable half face piece valved mask “JSPmake FFP3/SL”, NPF 50.

Put tools and wet cleaning rag and water spray inside plastic glove bag for asbestos. Inabsence of plastic glove bag, use disposable gloves.

Sprinkle water using the garden spray pot on the surface of the insulation.

Areas where insulation is required to be removed wrap the plastic glove bag around thearea of the pipe and seal it with masking tape.

Put a plastic drop sheet underneath the area where the insulation will be removed.

While removing the insulation sprinkle water intermittently to keep the surface always wetand avoid dispersing of the friable fibers.

Once all insulation removed and collected in glove bag, clean the pipe surface with wetrag to remove any remnant particles/ fibers from the surface; and then gradually removeglove bag from the pipe.

Fold and dispose the “Asbestos glove bags” in the “Asbestos Disposal Bag”. Seal thebag and place it directly into the dedicated “Asbestos only container”.









NoteWhere insulation dismantling work is more than the area covered by glove bag,use a plastic sheet underneath and wet area thoroughly and use trolleymounted full mask breathing apparatus. Area must be barricade at least 5meter around job to minimize exposure of other personnel working in the area,and displayed with standardized warning sign.

Do not use electric or air powered tools for removal of insulation material.

During tea and lunch breaks, remove used PPE and dispose inside the “AsbestosDisposal Bag”. Always remove the disposable coverall first and then remove the half

piece face mask.

Wash hands and face with soap and water thoroughly to remove any residualcontamination.

4.6.4 QMB AND CWS AREAS

Cutting and finishing CAF, SWAF and Asbestos packing material must be carried out inwell ventilated and isolated area which should be permanently assigned for this job.Instruction “Asbestos material-Keep Away’ should be displayed in the same area. Do notuse electric or air powered tools.

Before the activity starts, the employee must wear a disposable zipped up boiler suit anddisposable half face piece valved mask “JSP make FFP3/SL”, NPF 50. Put a plasticdrop sheet in the area of gasket cutting/ packing material finishing.

After the activity is over wipe off the contaminated tools with moist cloth and discard italong with the remnants and the PPE outfit in the provided Asbestos disposal bag. Rollup plastic sheet and put if in the asbestos disposal bag. Tie the bag properly to avoidany spill. Always remove the disposable coverall first and then remove the half pieceface mask.

Put the filled Asbestos only bag in the provided Asbestos container in the respective

areas. No other waste to be dumped in the asbestos only container. Seal the containeronce it is full.

Wash thoroughly face, hands and other exposed parts of the body with soap and water.

A waste disposal form must be filled and authorized by HSED prior to disposal from thearea.









4.6.5 ASBESTOS WASTE DISPOSALThe containers having asbestos waste shall be stored in a secure barricaded area. Aninstruction board “Asbestos Material Keep Away” should be displayed in Arabic, English,Hindi, Urdu & Malayalam.

The quantity of asbestos waste shall be recorded by the concerned supervisor.

When the asbestos containers are full, they should be properly sealed.

A Waste Disposal Form must be filled by the responsible supervisor and authorised byHSED prior to dispatch of the containers to Ruwais for disposal.

NoteIn case the half-valved face piece mask is out of stock in the store, the personengaged in Asbestos Handling Materials must wear a disposable dust mask.

Wear personal protective clothing as specified by the perceived risk of contamination andinhalation in the job.

NoteBags for asbestos waste must be of double wall heavy duty plastic with legibleasbestos warning labels.

4.6.6 LAGGING AND OTHER FIBROUS INSULATION

The removal or installation of large quantities of lagging or insulation containing asbestosor SMF fibres must be performed by a contractor familiar with this type of work.

Removal and replacement of lagging and cladding from valves, flanges and small itemsof equipment, will require the following precautions:

· Wear disposable overalls and an appropriate respirator.· Use a plastic drop sheet to catch loose material. Fold and dispose of it according to

current regulations.· Maintain the material in a wet condition during the work if possible.

4.6.7 STORES PROCEDURES

The day to day management of stock items of gaskets and packings involves thefollowing precautions and procedures:

· All bins and racks containing asbestos items must be clearly labelled with blackletters on a pink background (the colour pink identifies asbestos materials within ADGAS)









· SWAF and CAF gaskets are stored in labelled plastic bags in the prescribed height inthe rack

· Asbestos packings in the storage bins must be in the required labelled plastic bags.· Handling asbestos items is kept to a minimum and issue of gaskets is in multiples of

3, 5 or 10 depending on size· Any opening of sealed bags must be performed so that dust is contained in the bag.

No specific personal protective wear is required for these routine activities in the store.

Major movements of the store asbestos inventory or major housekeeping activities willrequire the use of full personal protective wear and isolation of the area with signs and

barriers.

All waste in sealed, labelled plastic bags is to be disposed of in the prescribed manner.

4.6.8 CHEMICAL CLEANING


Cleaning methods that may involve the use of chemicals are:

· Removal of scale produced by corrosion on metal surfaces· Removal of by-products from process systems

· Removal of inorganic salts from water heat transfer surfaces· Removal of oil and grease from mechanical equipment· Rust conversion

Chemical agents used are normally acid or alkaline solutions containing corrosioninhibitors, or they may be organic solvents. As these chemicals may be used at elevatedtemperatures, additional hazards may be associated with their use.

Risks associated with the use of chemicals and solvents for cleaning purposes include:

· Eye and skin injuries as a result of contact with the cleaning agent.

· Health effects of the respiratory system due to the inhalation of chemical agents.· Narcosis (dizziness) from inhalation of solvent fumes which may result in lack of

control in work tasks and risk of disease.· Metal corrosion leading to the weakening of associated equipment that can arise from

the wrong choice of cleaning agents, inadequate inhibition of cleaning solutions oruse of excessive temperatures.

· Generation of flammable and/or toxic gases that may arise from the chemical processor the reactions involved.

· Environmental pollution as a result of spilt or incorrect disposal of cleaning agents.

Chemical cleaning of large items of fixed equipment may involve the problems of:









· Damage to associated equipment.· Spillage and run-off causing environmental pollution.

4.6.8.2 WORK PERMITS

For chemical cleaning with hazardous agents, the use of high pressure, or risk to plantand personnel, a work permit is required detailing all safety requirements andprocedures. Use of flammable chemicals is to be avoided with substitution by watersoluble agents wherever possible. Any flammable vapours produced by cleaning mustbe treated in the same way as other flammable emissions on the plant.

Work permits must specify all personal protective wear according to the risk. Referenceto the MSDS for the cleaning agent and process will suggest the correct type to wearwhich may include as required:

· Breathing mask or other respiratory protection· Face shield and chemical goggles· Chemical resistant gloves· Chemical work suit, apron or appropriate barrier· Chemical resistant safety approved footwear· Standard safety helmet if compatible with other headgear

NoteThe appropriate use of the above safety wear will be determined using a TaskRisk Assessment with the MSDS as a guide.

Included in the safety precautions are the provision of emergency shower and eye washfacilities and agreed emergency procedures.

4.6.8.3 CHEMICAL AGENTS AND EQUIPMENT

Chemical containers must be safely transported, segregated, stored and usedaccordance with the MSDS. Containers must be labelled according to the nature of the

chemical under the chemicals regulations.

All pumping and dispensing equipment must be inspected and maintained in serviceablecondition. Quick release fittings shall be secured with safety clips and all necessarysteps taken to avoid over pressuring systems.









4.7 LABELLING HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

4.7.1 INTRODUCTION

Correct labelling of all dangerous goods and containers is required to facilitate theiridentification and hazards associated with their transport, handling, storage and use, soas to reduce the risk to personnel and property.

Suppliers of chemicals and chemically formulated materials to ADGAS are required tosupply all necessary information on the relevant MSDS and label all materials andcontainers according to legislative requirements.

4.7.2 ARABIC WARNING

Any door or hatch giving access to any place at which radioactive, corrosive, toxic orexplosive substances are stored shall bear on the outside the word "DANGER" in red Arabic and English capital letters at least 50 mm high with an adequate description orindication of the substances in question. This is to be in addition to any other requiredsignage.

4.7.3 CLASSES

Dangerous goods are each assigned to a class representing their major hazard undertransport, storage and handling conditions.

Some materials may also bear a subsidiary risk label if warranted by the hazards theyrepresent. Subsidiary risk labels do not carry the class number.

4.7.4 SUB-DIVISIONS

In addition to the allotted class number given each substance, e.g. No. 2 - Gases, 3 -Flammable liquids, the class may be subdivided relative to the type and degree ofhazard. Class 6- Poisonous Substances is sub-divided into, 6.1 Toxic Substances and6.2 Infectious. Refer to Table 4-2.

4.7.5 LABELLING REQUIREMENTS

Hazardous substances labelling must give the following information:

· Full chemical name (if a pure chemical)· Full proprietary name· Active ingredients and/or major components· Appropriate poison label if required· Appropriate hazard label if required· UN number· First aid advice· Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer or supplier









Further InformationIATA Dangerous Goods Regulations (air transport)International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) code

These authorities are most commonly referred to for air and sea shipment of materials toDas Island. Refer to Table 4-2.

Classes Subdivisions

Class 1 Explosives Divisions 1.1 to 1.5 in accordancewith the nature of the hazard.

Class 2 Gases: compressed, liquefiedor dissolved under pressure

2.1. Flammable gases2.2. Non-Flammable gases2.3. Poisonous (toxic)gases

Class 3 Flammable liquids 3.1. Liquids with a flashpointbelow 23oC (closed cup test)-(highly flammable)3.2. Liquids with a flash point of230C or more up to and including610C

Class 4 Flammable substances otherthan those of classes 1.2.3

and 5.2

4.1. Flammable solids4.2. Substances liable to

spontaneous combustion4.3. Substances which, oncontact with water, emit flammablegases

Class 5 Oxidising substances 5.1. Oxidising agents (oxidisingsubstances other than organicperoxides)5.2. Organic peroxides

Class 6 Poisonous (toxic) or infectioussubstances

6.1. Toxic substances6.2. Infectious substances

Class 7 Radioactive substances Category 1WhiteCategory IIYellowCategory IIIYellow

Categories inaccordance with thelevel of radiationemitted from thecontainer

Class 8 Corrosive substances No subdivision of classClass 9 Miscellaneous dangerous

substancesNo subdivision of class









Table 4-2: Classification System.

4.7.6 NON HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

Non-hazardous substances are those not classified as dangerous goods under UnitedNations classification system.

Labels on all containers, packets, tins and the like for non-hazardous substances mustshow:

· Full chemical name (if a pure chemical)

· Full proprietary name· Active ingredients and/or major components· Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer and/or supplier

4.7.7 CLASS LABELS/HAZARD DIAMONDS

Class labels (hazard diamonds) found on containers of hazardous substances may beeither stick on metal plates or stencilled or printed on the container.

Sizing of class labels is according to the volume and mass of the container.

Each class may be identified by its label colour:

CLASS LABEL COLOUR

Class 1 Explosives orangeClass 2 Gases red, green or whiteClass 3 Flammable liquids redClass 4 Flammable solids red, white or blueClass 5 Oxidising agents yellowClass 6 Poisonous or infectious whiteClass 7 Radioactive yellow or whiteClass 8 Corrosive black and white

Table 4-3: Label Colours

4.7.8 RISK PHRASES

Risk phrases (R-phrases) convey a general description of the risk relative to the material,to supplement the class labels.

The R system runs from R1 to R43, examples are R1-'explosive when dry' and R11-'highly flammable'.









When the R numbers are combined, this indicates a combination of two hazards from thematerial, e.g. R15/29 - contact with water liberates toxic, highly flammable gas.

4.7.9 SAFETY PHRASES

Safety phrases (S-phrases) provide information on safe storage, handling and personalprotection.

The S system runs from S1 to S49. Examples are:

S15 - 'keep away from heat' and S37 - 'wear suitable gloves'

4.7.10 UN NUMBERS

The UN (United Nations) Substance Identification Numbers are used in conjunction withother systems of labelling on packages and in particular on shipping manifests fortransport to the Island.

Comprising a series of four-digit numbers, each number represents a substance, or classof substances with like characteristics. They are primarily intended to facilitate theidentification of substances without the need for a knowledge of the language in whichthe chemical name of the substance is printed. Their use has also proved to be of greatvalue for emergency services and the correct relaying of long or complex substancenames, thus allowing error-free identification.

4.7.11 NFPA SYSTEM

This system was developed by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) in theUnited States of America.

The unique coded NFPA diamond symbol gives a quick visual indication of the degree ofhazard associated with that substance in the field of health, flammability and reactivity.

4.7.12 GENERAL SAFETY

All decanted hazardous substances must be fully labelled according to the regulations in

the same way as the parent package.

All containers of hazardous materials must remain labelled until cleaned and free of thesubstance that they contained.

If the contents of a container cannot be positively identified, the contents must be safelypackaged, labelled 'CAUTION: DO NOT USE-UNKNOWN SUBSTANCE', shipped anddisposed of in a safe manner.

4.7.13 INFORMATION

On Das island information on any hazardous chemical may be found by reference to:









· Hazardous Substances Manual.· MSDS (Materials Safety Data Sheet) provided by the manufacturer/supplier of a

substance.· Placards on larger containers showing the nature and hazards associated with a

particular chemical· Identification of hazardous products in pipes and vessel by labels and colour coding.

4.7.14 RESPONSIBILITIES

4.7.14.1 NEW CHEMICALS

It is the responsibility of the relevant Divisional/Departmental Manager to ensure that nonew chemicals are used without the accompanying MSDS being available in theHazardous Substance Manual.

4.7.14.2 TRAINING

All users through training must understand how to access MSDS in the HazardousSubstance Manual and be able to apply the information in terms of the health and safetyeffects, precautions/protective measures and application of these measures appropriateto the hazard.

4.7.14.3 COMMUNICATION

Each Supervisor and Manager must ensure that sufficient people know how to accessthe information, apply it and pass it on to users in a usable form.

4.8 COMPRESSED GASES

4.8.1 INTRODUCTION

Compressed gases on Das Island are used in a variety of work applications. Thissection deals with the portable, refillable type of cylinders used for welding and cutting,inerting, fuel and some special purposes.

4.8.2 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION4.8.2.1 D ANGEROUS GOODS

All compressed or liquefied gases are classified dangerous goods. There are nineclasses of dangerous goods in all including Class 6 poisonous, Class 8 corrosive, etc.

A class diamond (label) is used on all dangerous goods packages to indicate the class towhich it belongs.(Refer Section 4.7 - Labelling Hazardous Substances.









All gases are Class 2 and a major hazard is the pressure under which gases are stored.Class 2 is divided into three sub classes to indicate the chemical hazard:

2.1 Flammable Gas (red diamond)2.2 Non-flammable gas (green diamond)2.3 Poisonous (white diamond)

4.8.2.2 SUBSIDIARY RISK

Some dangerous goods have hazards in more than one category. These are given asecond class or 'subsidiary risk' and are labelled with a second diamond. Oxygen is anexception, having a single 'oxidising gas' yellow diamond.

Some typical gases with subsidiary risk are:

Carbon monoxide (2.1, 2.3) - red, white diamondsChlorine (2.3, 5.1) - white, yellow diamondsHydrogen chloride (2.3, 8) - white/black diamondsLiquid oxygen (2.2, 5.1) - green, yellow diamonds

Exceptions are:

Compressed oxygen (2.2, 5.1) - yellow diamond only

Compressed nitrous oxide (2.2, 5.1) - yellow diamond only.

4.8.3 PROPERTIES OF GASES

4.8.3.1 PRESSURE

Non Liquifiable gas can only be stored under pressure, which can result in two majorhazards:

· Over pressure - leading to rupture of the container with the resultant shock wave andfragmentation damage.

· Leaking into the atmosphere - creating a hazard dependent on the sub-class of the

gas involved.

Over pressure precautions are:

· Check that gas pressure will not exceed the pressure rating of the equipment.· Do not tamper with pressure safety devices· Do not weaken containers through damage - ensure they are secured in vertical

position, etc.· Shield cylinders from the heat of the sun and flares (the surface temperature of gas

cylinders should never exceed 45°C









Leaking precautions are:

· Use care and cleanliness in connections and valve operation· Check for leaks regularly· Use/store/transport in well ventilated conditions preventing build-up and

concentration

4.8.3.2 FLAMMABILITY (CLASS 2.1)

Gases such as acetylene, propane and hydrogen, when mixed with air or oxygen canexplode violently in the presence of an ignition source. Explosions, depending on size,can lead to serious damage and injury. The flammable range of different gases varies

and is defined by the Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) below which concentration in air anexplosion cannot occur due to lack of fuel and the Upper Explosive Limit (UEL) abovewhich an explosion cannot occur due to lack of oxygen.

The precautions to be taken with flammable gases, in addition to those precautions ofpressure are:

· Avoid sources of ignition· Avoid mixtures of flammable gas and air/oxygen/oxidising agents· Segregate flammable gases from oxidising gases, flammable/ combustible materials.· Have fire fighting equipment on hand

4.8.3.3 TOXICITY (CLASS 2.3)

Poison gases react adversely on human beings. They usually enter through the lungsbut some may also be absorbed through the skin.

These effects may be quick or delayed. They are termed acute if they kill in minutes ordays. Their effects may also be long term and be termed chronic. Survivors may be leftwith lingering disability. Some toxic gases may also be carcinogenic.

The ways by which gases poison humans are varied. One group of poisons are simplyirritants, i.e. the acid gases such as sulphur dioxide, hydrogen chloride and others, andthe caustic gases, e.g. ammonia. Irritant gases can be quite deadly but do have thevirtue of making their presence felt. Other poisons are more insidious.

The common measure of toxicity is the Threshold Limit Value Time Weighted Average orTLV (TWA) for short. This is the concentration in parts per million (ppm) to which youmay be exposed eight hours a day, five days a week without harm. As a general rule,any gas with a TLV (TWA) of less than 100 ppm is classed 2.3 (white diamond). Anothermeasure of toxicity is the Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL) which is the concentration(ppm) which will not harm you with a 15 minute exposure.









Peak limitation values are also quoted for some substances where short term (i.e. a fewminutes) exposure may cause intolerable irritation, chronic tissue damage or narcosisleading to accidents.

Yet another is the Immediate Danger to Life and Health (IDLH) which is theconcentration (ppm) which will permanently disable in 30 minutes.

An example is carbon monoxide which has a TLV of 50, a STEL of 400 and an IDLH of1500.

4.8.4 OXYGEN

4.8.4.1 OXYGEN DEFICIENT ATMOSPHERE

While only some gases are poisonous, only oxygen is positively beneficial (and eventhen only at 21% in a breathing atmosphere)

Any gas entering the atmosphere can create a hazard if it lowers the oxygen content to18%. Any gas at about 17% concentration in the atmosphere will displace oxygen to thishazardous level.

Gases which create a hazard simply by displacing oxygen are termed simpleasphyxiants.

Asphyxiation can cause death in seconds if the oxygen content is zero, or in minutes if itis less than 8%.

All simple asphyxiants are Class 2.2 with no subsidiary risk. Common asphyxiant gasesare nitrogen, argon, carbon dioxide and some refrigerant gases.

The hazard is increased because there is no warning (no smell, no flames). The victim isunaware of anything wrong and rescuers are often trapped (and become victims) inoxygen deficient atmospheres.

The universal precautions of leak avoidance and ventilation apply. There is however a

further precaution which is "beware of confined spaces".

The two significant asphyxiant gases found in quantity on Das Island are nitrogen used inpurging and carbon dioxide in fire fighting systems.

Further InformationChapter 7 Confined Space Entry









4.8.4.2 OXYGEN ENRICHED ATMOSPHERE An oxygen content above 23% (i.e. 2% additional oxygen) will increase the flammabilityof any fuels in the atmosphere, even those that would not normally burn in air.

A particular hazard is oxygen saturated clothing. This will burn vigorously if ignited. Agrinding spark, which would normally just scorch cotton overalls, will cause them to ignitein an oxygen enriched atmosphere with serious to fatal consequences for the wearer.

WarningNever attempt to blow dust etc. off work clothing with the oxygen stream from awelding or cutting torch.

Again the precautions of leak avoidance and ventilation apply.

Additionally:

· Follow the rules in 7 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY.· Never use oxygen as a substitute for compressed air for any purpose.

4.8.4.3 OXYGEN NON COMPATIBILITY

Flammable gases and other fuels will burn because they react with oxygen.

Burning is rapid oxidation.

An important property of oxygen is that it is very reactive. Almost everything will oxidiseif enough heat and energy (i.e. pressure) are applied. These conditions can be achievedby rapid pressurisation of closed oxygen systems.

Oxygen systems made up of oxygen compatible components may be contaminated withnon compatible materials. Oil is one, but any contamination, e.g. dust, grit, swarf and lintwill be non compatible. They will either burn readily or provide a source of ignition forcompatible components.

Once a fire starts, the abundance of oxygen will fan it into a major burn-out with risk ofburn injury and property damage.

Caution

· Keep oxygen systems clean.· Never use lubricants or sealants.· Use only equipment designed for oxygen.· Open valves slowly, 'cracking' first to pressure up.









4.8.5 LIQUIFIABLE GASES All gases are stored under pressure, but some gases are liquefied at storage pressureand ambient temperature. This increases the gas contents of the cylinder, but createssome new hazards. The common liquifiable gases are carbon dioxide, LPG, nitrousoxide and refrigerants.

The hazards with liquefied fuel gases are:

· Depending on the orientation of the cylinder, liquid may come out of the cylindervalve and into the user system. This will give a higher than expected flowrate (anLPG torch could act as a flame thrower).

· Similarly liquid leaks have a much greater effect on the working atmospherecontamination level than dry gas leaks.

· If the safety device of the cylinder is submerged in the liquid phase of the contents, itsoperation will not lower the pressure as quickly as with gas venting. This may lead toover pressure and rupture in a fire.

· Venting liquid flashes to cold gas and liquid which may cause cold burns.· If cool liquid is trapped in a system and subsequently warmed up, the pressure may

rise to exceed the bursting pressure of that system.

The precautions to be followed are:

· Only use cylinders in the upright position.· Only store and transport cylinders in the upright position.· Wear gloves when handling any liquefied gas, consider further protection, e.g. eye

and face protection.· If a liquid leak cannot be stopped, move the cylinder to convert it to a gas leak.

4.8.5.1 G AS N AME IDENTIFICATION

The gas name label is the primary identification of any cylinder contents and is usuallylocated on the shoulder of the cylinder. This identifies the product by its correct technicalname and classification. On some cylinders the gas name is labelled or stencilled on the

body of the cylinder.

4.8.5.2 UNITED N ATIONS NUMBER (UN NO.)

The number may appear near the gas name on cylinders, either on the label or asstencil.

4.8.5.3 COLOUR CODE

Table 4-4 shows typical cylinder colours and characteristics for gases in common usedon Das Island

GAS CHARACTERISTICS CYLINDER









BodyColour Neck Bands

Oxygen(O2)

No smell. Non-toxic. Will not burnbut supports and acceleratescombustion. Materials notnormally considered combustiblemay be ignited by sparks inoxygen rich atmosphere.

Black

Nitrogen(N2)

No smell. Does not burn. Inertexcept at high temperatures. Non-toxic but does not support life socould cause asphyxiation in high

concentrations.

FrenchGrey

Black

Argon(Ar)

No smell. Heavier than air. Doesnot burn. Inert. Will causeasphyxiation in absence ofsufficient oxygen to support life.

PeacockBlue

Black

Acetylene(C2 H2)

Distinctive garlic-like smell. Fireand explosion hazards are similarto those for propane. However, itis lighter than air and less likely tocollect in ducts and drains.

Maroon

Propane(C3H8)

Distinctive fish-like smell. Will

ignite and burn instantly from aspark or piece of hot metal. Isheavier than air and will collect inducts, drains, etc.

Signal Red

bearingwords"Propaneand "Highlyflammable"

Hydrogen(H2)

No smell. Non-toxic. Much lighterthan air. Will collect at the highestpoint in any enclosed spaceunless ventilated there. Firehazard.

Signal Red

AirNo smell, Non-toxic. Essential for

life

French

Grey

Carbon Dioxide(CO2)

No smell. Heavier than air. Doesnot burn. Will cause asphyxiationin absence of sufficient oxygen tosupport life

Black White

Table 4-4: Gas Characteristics/Cylinder Colours

CautionIf the contents of a gas cylinder cannot be positively identified, the cylindershould not be used. It must be identified with a tag, manifested as dangerous









goods and returned to the gas agent onshore. Never use an unidentifiedcylinder and always assume the worst, i.e. It is flammable and poisonous.

4.8.6 SAFE STORAGE

Storage Design

Gas cylinder stores must be:

· Constructed of fire rated materials and have firm level floors.· Away from escape routes and emergency equipment.· Well ventilated and preferably provided with basic weather protection.· Free from fire risk.· Away from sources of artificial heat and ignition.· Free from contamination (dust, fumes, spray or chemicals).· Designated and marked as a 'no hot work' area.· Clearly marked as a gas store with appropriate hazard diamond signs, e.g.

flammable, poison, corrosive, etc.· Kept clean and with clear access restricted to authorised personnel.· Provided with appropriate safety/emergency equipment and fire and gas

detection/protection systems.· Provided with sign "DANGER" in red Arabic and English letters at least 50mm high

with an adequate description of the substances.· Provided with appropriate racks or chains to secure cylinders.

4.8.7 SAFE HANDLING

Personnel who regularly move and use gas cylinders must follow the precautions for thiswork:

· Wear personal protective wear free of grease, oil and grit including gloves, and eyeprotection along with minimum worksite safety wear requirements.

· Use recommended mechanical handling aids, e.g. quads, racks, trolleys, etc. andsecure cylinders at all times.

· Follow the approved manual handling procedures and techniques to prevent backinjury.

· Make sure valve caps, plugs and other devices are fitted when provided.

4.8.8 LEAK TESTING

In the case of an oxy/acetylene torch assembly a simple leak test of the complete systemis recommended:

· 'Crack' the cylinder valve to remove dirt· Attach and tighten the regulator, hose and equipment









· Shut off the control valve on the blowpipe· Slowly open cylinder valve, then screw in regulator control knob to pressurise the

system· Close the cylinder valves and watch the regulator pressure gauges.

If pressure is retained there is no leak in the system. If pressure drops, a leak is presentand should be located with the leak detection solution then de pressurised and repaired.Further leak testing using leak detection solution will include:

· Cylinder valve gland.· Cylinder safety device.

· Cylinder neck thread.

4.8.9 CARE OF CYLINDERS

· Do not drop cylinders from a height or allow them to fall over.· Secure cylinders against falling while in use, storage or transport.· Do not allow naked flames to impinge on cylinders.· Do not allow any form of heating which would raise the temperature of the cylinder

above 45°C.· Do not use cylinders as rollers or supports.· Protect cylinders from impact damage from passing vehicles or crane loads.

· Protect cylinders from paint spray, acids, alkalis and prolonged water contact.· Ensure no electrical power can flow through a cylinder, e.g. arc welders.· Do not attempt to repair cylinder valves.· Keep cylinders and in particular the valves, clean and oil free.· Do not use cylinders with dirty valves· Do not attempt to clean valves other than 'cracking' before fitting regulators· Close cylinder valves when the cylinder is not in use and especially when the cylinder

is empty

NoteDischarged cylinders must be tagged and/or prominently marked "MT" and

stored in a separate dedicated area for return to the supplier.

4.8.10 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS

4.8.10.1 GENERAL

Emergencies involving compressed gases are unlikely provided the recommendationsare followed for their correct storage, handling and use.

When major hazards do arise they are usually due to:









· Fire threatening the cylinder. Compressed gas cylinders if in contact with excessiveheat for prolonged periods may rupture or explode.

· Flammable gas leak. All flammable gases will form explosive mixtures with air.When ignited, significant explosive energy can be released from flammable gas/airmixtures.

· Toxic gas leak.· Non-flammable compressed (inert) gas leak. This is usually considered to be

harmless, however, if in a confined or poorly ventilated space, asphyxiation and deathof unprotected personnel can occur.

4.8.10.2 FIRE EMERGENCIES

General procedures and precautions are:

· Isolate supplies so they do not flow into the affected area. Safely release gaspressure in affected pipelines and equipment. Ventilate the area to prevent explosiveatmosphere build-up, i.e. keep it below the lower explosive limit (LEL).

· When fire threatens compressed gas cylinders there is a risk of rupture/explosion ofcylinders subject to prolonged heating. These should be moved to a protected safeplace before they become too hot or if this is not possible, cooled with a fire hose at asafe distance.

· Any cylinder that has been involved in a fire must be segregated and clearly markedas such and the supplier must be notified accordingly to prevent hazards to people

who refill cylinders.· Visibility of flames. Not all fuel gases burn with a clearly identifiable flame. Burning

hydrogen for example is very difficult to see

WarningWith a burning flammable gas leak isolate the gas supply, if this is not possible,do not extinguish the flame. Ensure the flammable gas burns in a controlledmanner, does not ignite anything else and does not impinge on any pressurisedgas containers, equipment or pipelines. keep surrounding area cool by sprayingwith water from a protected safe distance.

4.8.10.3 G AS LEAKS

In general, gas leaks are dealt with by:

· Establishing the name and type of gas involved.· Isolating the cylinder valve.· Evacuating the area if necessary.· Instituting fire prevention measures if appropriate.· Ventilating if possible and moving faulty cylinders to an open area.









NoteDirt ingress in cylinder valves is a common cause of leakage. In this case'crack' the cylinder valve to open air wearing hearing and eye protection. Thisshould be a standard procedure before fitting regulators together withexamination for oil or other contamination in the area of connection.

4.9 OTHER DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES

4.9.1 INTRODUCTION

This heading covers a wide variety of chemical products; some of the more potentialdangers to personnel are covered in the following paragraphs. Normally, those used inspecific process will be delivered in highly concentrated form. It is therefore necessarythat their toxic and other properties should be known and understood before thematerials are used. These are detailed on the MSDS which are available for allchemicals used in ADGAS in the Hazardous Substances Manual.

4.9.2 METHANOL

Methanol is a poison with a vapour toxicity comparable with that of many commonsolvents. It burns with a colourless flame. Prolonged exposure to methanol at relativelylow concentrations (200ppm) can have some physiological effects. Blindness can occurfrom severe exposure and very large doses can be lethal.

Methanol is toxic to humans through ingestion, inhalation or skin absorption and harmfulon repeated skin contact. Methanol shall not be dumped into the sea. Special emphasisis placed on the requirements involving the use of personal protective equipment whilehandling Methanol and Methanol inhibitor.

Personnel assigned to this handling operation shall wear chemical goggles, chemicalgloves and full chemical protective suits.

Eye wash and emergency shower station shall be in the immediate vicinity of theMethanol handling areas.

Self Contained Breathing Apparatus shall be readily available for use should vapourescape into the atmosphere during this operation.

Entry to a Methanol tank, vessel or pipeline shall be governed by the conditions andprecautions as stated in the MSDS. Entry to a tank or vessel is permitted only whencovered by a valid Entry Permit.

The areas of Methanol handling, tanks, pipelines, vessels and heat exchangers shall befree from any source of ignition including any mechanical equipment used during thisoperation that may cause any spark.









Methanol shall only be allowed to enter the pipelines, vessels or heat exchangers thathave been purged with nitrogen and the oxygen content has been reduced to below 2%.

Dry powder fire extinguishers shall be placed at the Methanol tanks, pipelines andvessels.

Fire hoses shall be readily available and stand-by watch shall be provided during thisoperation.

Electrical earthing/bonding shall be provided to all Methanol associated tanks, equipmentand piping.

Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus shall be used when cleaning up spills of Methanol toavoid inhalation of vapours emitted.

An absorbent shall be readily available for use should a spill occur.

Personnel shall make every effort possible to prevent Methanol from entering the sea.

4.9.3 CAUSTICS AND ACIDS

Caustics, hydrochloric and other acids used for acidising are dangerous in that they candestroy normal clothing fabric and rapidly affect the skin, causing severe burns.

Breathing of the acid fumes should be avoided as they are asphyxiants, and even insmall quantities can be injurious to the membrane of the nose. When diluting always addacid to water, and not the reverse.

Personnel handling acids should be equipped with protective clothing, including hoods,PVC/Neoprene gloves and rubber boots.

All chemicals shall be clearly marked and labelled (preferably on two sides) with thecontents, nature of associated hazards and recommended means of safe handling.

During acidising operations no person other than the crew directly employed should be

allowed nearby.

A quantity of lime should be made available and utilised to neutralise any acid spilled.

Pumps, lines, tanks, etc., through which acid and caustic substances are handled shouldbe thoroughly washed out with water upon completion of the operations.

A check valve should normally be installed in the treatment lines as close to the work aspracticable. All pressure lines and related connections shall be pressure tested beforeoperations commence.









Acid carboys shall be stored in single tiers. They shall not be lifted by the neck of thecarboy. Spilt acid shall be neutralised under supervision or washed away with waterfrom a safe distance. Discharge should be by pouring, mechanical siphoning, pumpingor by means of an approved discharge device. Galvanised iron drums shall not be usedfor the storage or transport of acid solutions.

Overhead acid tanks shall have adequate overflow pipes to a safe location, where anyspillage may drain away. The area below the tanks should be bunded.

Closed tanks shall be provided with air vents which cannot be shut off.

Drums or carboys of acid shall not be discharged by the application of any gas pressureto the container.

If there is an accident with acid, first-aid treatment should be carried out immediatelyaccording to the instructions, which should always be contained in each adjacent first-aidkit.

4.9.4 AMMONIA

Ammonia is usually stored as an anhydrous liquid under pressure in cylinders from whichit can be released either as a liquid or as a gas. It is also supplied as an aqueoussolution in various concentrations. The gas is colourless and has pungent easily

detectable odour even in low concentrations. Its density relative to air is 0.771, and it willrapidly disperse in open locations.

The flammable range is from 16% - 25% by volume in air with an auto-ignitiontemperature of 650°C.

It is extremely irritating to the eyes, nose throat and lungs and all moist parts of the body.The TLV is 25ppm.

Whenever ammonia is used in quantity, protective equipment should be readily available. Air line masks or self-contained breathing apparatus should be used for all

concentrations of ammonia. Severe skin irritation will result from prolonged work in acontaminated area unless full body protection or a chemical suit is also worn.

Since ammonia is extremely soluble in water, water fog or spray can be used to goodeffect as a dispersant where large leakages occur.

4.9.5 CAUSTIC SODA

Caustic Soda is a water soluble alkali used in the treatment of hydrocarbon products forthe removal of undesirable sulphur products. It is mainly supplied as a solution in specialcontainers.











Exposure to mercury vapour for short periods requires only removal from exposure torectify but if mercury is swallowed, medical attention should be sought.

Mercury is volatile at room temperature and dangerously high concentrations can buildup in a non-ventilated area (TLV 0.0005ppm).

4.9.10 MERCURY RECOVERY UNITS


Trains 1 and 2 have both been provided with Mercury Recovery Units (MRU). Each

MRU consists of 2 vessels, one for treating the vapour stream and the other for treatingthe liquid condensate stream. The vapour treating vessel 3-C-150/250 contains asingle bed of 10.2 Tons of Chemivron (HGR) granulated sulphur impregnated activatedcarbon. The liquid condensate treating vessel 3-c-151/251 contains a single bed of 3.6Tons of PROCATALYSE CMG 273 granulated alumina impregnated with coppersulphide.

Each mercury guard vessel is followed by a dust filter to remove any particulate matterescaping from the vessel.

The mercury guard beds are of a non-regenerative type and are expected to be disposedof after 3 to 6 years of continuous service. Train 3 has a gas bed of 18 tons ofChemivron (HGR).

4.9.10.2 H ANDLING OF FRESH MERCURY GUARD M ATERIALS

Absorbent materials must be handled with care to avoid formation of dust. Personsinvolved in handling of the absorbent materials must be suitably attired with protectiveclothing consisting of :

· Long Sleeved· Boiler Suit· Rubber Gloves

· Goggles· Filter type face mask

Dust contact with the eyes must be avoided and a supply of water or drench showermust be available at all times at the work place.

4.9.10.3 H ANDLING OF SPENT MERCURY GUARD M ATERIALS

Mercury contaminated absorbents must be handled with extreme care. Full protectiveclothing must be worn when removing and handling the spent absorbents.

Protective clothing shall consist of :









· A long sleeved boiler suit· Rubber gloves· Long Rubber Boots· Goggles· Filter type face mask (for correct type, contact HSED)· Face mask with air supply if person has to enter vessel.

A supply of water or drench shower must be available at all times at the work place.

For handling and disposal procedure. See HSED Waste Disposal Manual.

4.9.10.4 WRITTEN PROCEDURES/T ASK RISK ASSESSMENT

All aspects of work shall be covered by a Task Risk Assessment that should include:

· Containment of contamination as near as possible to its site of production.· Limiting the possibility of ingestion or inhalation· Controlling and restricting direct exposure of workers

4.9.11 PYROPHORIC MATERIAL HANDLING STORAGE AND DISPOSALPROCEDURE

4.9.11.1 DEFINITION Pyrophoric material is a complex ferrite type compound and is formed when iron scale orcorrosion debris combines with sulphur compounds, (in particular H2S), often withorganic materials. This compound is stable when kept wet. On drying, it will combinevigorously with the oxygen in air producing considerable heat reaction, which will result inspontaneous ignition. The reaction takes place below about 45oC and hence thehazards arising from the use and handling of such materials involve fire, either fromdirect contact with the pyrophoric material or as a result of secondary fires followingignition. Oxidisation of the pyrophoric will, in any case cause sufficient temperature riseto ignite a flammable vapour/air mixture in its vicinity.

4.9.11.2 CONTROL MEASURES

Before opening any equipment on the LNG plant the possibility of pyrophoric materialpresence must be assessed and precaution taken as follows;

· The sludge 1 deposits must be wetted down with water and, when removed fromplant equipment must be kept wet.

· The material must be immediately put into empty dedicated drums, they must containat least 15 cm of water in the bottom and all times the contents must maintain a 15cm level of water above the level of pyrophoric material.









· The metal drums should be black with the identification "pyrophoric material"Stencilled in white. If possible drums should be used on a "once only" basis.

· All Supervisors must ensure that no pyrophoric material is spilled on platformswalkways, into drains etc. If this occurs the spillage must be kept damp and cleanedup immediately. Drains and sewers must be adequately covered to prevent anymaterial failing into them.

· The drums must be immediately removed from the site and to be temporarily storedin the waste disposal area (plant 19). They must not be allowed to dry out withinprocess area. In no circumstances will pyrophoric material be allowed to remain onor about the job-site.

· Once in Plant 19, pyrophoric drums shall be unloaded and spreaded evenly on the

ground. The waste should be kept moist for 30 days. Level the date of waste dump.Every forthright the waste should be mixed and re-spreaded.

· After 30 days, collect the weathered waste in the metal drums. Cover the waste withsand/earth material. Seal and level as "PYROPHORIC" hazardous waste.

· Fill waste disposal form and inform ADGAS civil when the waste drums are sealedand labelled. Civil will arrange to pick up and organise with store for onward dispatchto Ruwais.

· All pallets used to transport the drums must be cleaned and removed from storagearea.

· If a vehicle, skip, or containers is used for disposal of pyrophoric material, all parts,which may have been in contact with the material must be thoroughly hosed down

with water before it leaves the disposal area. If this is not done, there is a very highrisk of the vehicle catching fire.

Further InformationOperations- Standing Instructions C-14 (Potential sources of PyrophoricMaterial)

NotePyrophoric sludge MUST be carefully segregated from other materials beingstored in the dedicated area (Plant 19).

4.9.11.3 PERSONNEL PROTECTION To prevent contamination of personal clothing with pyrophoric material disposable masksand overalls, gloves of PVC material and boots should be worn by personnel employeesduring its removal. Anyone handling pyrophoric material which could result in airbornedust must wear goggles for eye protection.

All disposable overalls etc., must be dumped with the pyrophoric material into the samededicated area. The PVC gloves and boots must be washed with water to remove anyadhering pyrophoric material at the end of each work period.









4.9.11.4 TRAINING Supervisors must ensure that all persons who are engaged on operations involvingpyrophoric material are properly instructed on, and constantly reminded of the dangersrelated to the job and the proper precautions which must be taken to minimize the risk.

· Wash skin/eye with large amounts of water (emergency showers), continuously forat least 15 minutes.

· Remove contaminated clothing whilst in the shower.· If swallowed, wash mouth, drink plenty of water.· Do not induce vomiting, summon medical assistance.

4.10 RADIOACTIVE SOURCES

4.10.1 INTRODUCTION

Sources of ionising radiation are employed for several purposes within the ADGASIndustrial Area. These are:

· Sealed sources of radioactive material used in Nucleonic instruments, installed onPlant for Process Control, e.g. level measurement.

· Temporary use of sealed sources by the C&ID or by Contractors for checking thequality of welds by radiographic methods (NDT).

· X-ray generator for radiography.· Use of sealed sources in the Nucleonic Analyser, for alloy identification.

The potential for personal injury resulting from excessive doses of ionising radiation iswell known, but as radiation is not detected by any of the human senses, controls arenecessarily rigidly enforced by strict safety procedures and practices.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV3-09 (GUIDELINES): Ionising Radiation

4.10.2 DEFINITIONS

4.10.2.1 EMPLOYER

The PMshall be regarded as the agent of the Employer on the site and all formalcommunications with external bodies, i.e. Government Departments or other companies,must be channelled via the PROM. For administration of radiological matters, thePROM's nominees are the HC&I/DHC&I for all NDT operations and the SIE/LIE’s for allNucleonic Instrument equipment and procedures.

4.10.2.2 R ADIATION PROTECTION SUPERVISORS (RPS)

Radiation Protection Supervisors are nominated by the HC&I for their departmentaloperations. The SIE and LIE are nominated as RPS’s for PROM&ED. The personnel









nominated as RPS’s are appointed in writing by the Plant Manager. See Appendix 4-10-6.

The RPS should be directly involved with the work with ionising radiations and employsuch supervision that will ensure that the work is done in accordance with the writtenprocedures and practices.

No person should be appointed as an RPS unless they:

Know and understand the requirements of the regulations, written procedures andpractices.

Understands the necessary precautions to be taken in the work which is being done andthe extent to which these precautions will restrict exposures.

4.10.2.3 R ADIATION PROTECTION ADVISOR (RPA)

In the event of an incident involving radioactive isotopes, the use of a normal RadiationProtection Advisor should be used to provide advice on a call off basis. A contact for thistype of service is:-

Synetix Services,Tracerco,P.O.Box 1

R2 Building, Belasis Avenue,BillinghamCleveland, England.

Telephone: 0044 1642 522350Fax: 0044 1642 522991

4.10.2.4 CLASSIFIED WORKERS

Any person who is (or is liable to be) employed for any part of their time in an areadesignated as a radiation controlled area and authorised under a written system of work,will be a "Classified Worker"

4.10.2.5 MONITORED PERSONNEL

All authorised personnel who come into contact, with Nucleonic devices and operateunder a written system of work which includes monitoring their exposure by anacceptable method, will be "Monitored Personnel" only.

NoteContractors shall ensure ADGAS that all designated "Classified Workers" meetthe requirements of the mandatory regulations. ADGAS personnel who performthe functions of a "Classified Worker" will be so certified.









Further InformationChapter 4.10.2 DEFINITIONS for additional definitions

4.10.3 PERSONAL MONITORING

4.10.3.1 THERMOLUMINESCENT DOSEMETER (TLD)

It is mandatory that all classified personnel and authorised monitored personnel areissued with monitoring badges (TLDs) and that they are worn at all times when workingwith radiation.

Any lost, damaged or accidentally exposed badge must be reported immediately and a

replacement obtained before work in continued.

4.10.3.2 DOSIMETRY

Monitoring badges (TLDs) are normally issued to be worn over a four week period andthen assessed by an Approved Dosimetry Service e.g. The National RadiologicalProtection Board (NRPB) in the UK, where the radiation dose records are kept. Copiesof the TLD assessments will be retained by the Contractor.

4.10.3.3 TRANSFER RECORDS

It is the responsibility of the contractor to comply with all regulations pertaining to transfer

records of Classified Workers.

4.10.3.4 HIGH EXPOSURE

If at any time it appears that a person has received a radiation dose greater than 15 mSv(three tenths of permitted dose), the HC&I/DHC&I or the SIE/LIEs will;

· Contact the MHSE who will then notify the PMand Head of Medical Services Das(HMSD).

· Initiate an investigation into the circumstances leading to the exposure and reporttheir findings to the MHSE, who will ensure that the principle of individualresponsibility has been complied with by all involved personnel. The final report will

be submitted to the PROM.

4.10.3.5 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE

All medical arrangements required for Contractor Classified Workers, and the keeping oftheir Health Records, is the responsibility of the Contractor.

4.10.4 INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBILITY

It is the individual's responsibility to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, thatexposure to ionising radiation shall not be greater than is necessary for the purpose ofhis work. Dose rates shall be maintained below the value given Section 4.10.16.









4.10.5 EMERGENCY EXPOSURE

Personnel involved in an emergency exposure to radiation will undergo a medicalexamination and monitoring.

4.10.6 WORK PERMIT REQUIREMENTS

All use of portable radioactive sources for radiography will require the coverage of a HotWork Permit and be conducted by approved Classified Workers. All work will beconducted by a minimum of a two man team, never by a single person.

The prepared Safety Checklist for Radiography, Figure 4-3, is attached to the White copyof the permit. This gives details of the isotope and the safety requirements prior tocommencing work. The ADGAS NDT Specialist, carrying out the work, will then tick theboxes according to the needs of the job. The HSED will then sign the checklist afterchecking that all the requirements have been met.

4.10.7 RADIOGRAPHY

Radiography can isolate substantial work areas and for this reason is usually restricted tothe hours with the minimum of personnel activity.

No other work permits may be issued or remain current for the area designated.

The approved radiation symbol is to appear on all packages and storage containers andon barrier signs around the radiation work areas.

4.10.7.1 S AFETY PROCEDURES

With the work place and affected area identified, the checklist must be rigorously applied. Along with the items in the checklist the following actions are required.

· Good liaison and communications should be established in case field personnel needto access past the barriers.

· All radioactive sources are to be stored within locked shields when not in use.

· If there is a plant emergency, the radiation source is returned immediately to its safestorage.

· All sources of ionising radiation shall, where reasonably practicable, be adequatelyshielded.(Collimated)

· Radioactive sources must only be manipulated by remote handling equipment.

4.10.8 CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE SOURCES

4.10.8.1 M AXIMUM HOLDINGS

The maximum quantity of sealed sources of Iridium 192 for radiography purposes on DasIsland at any one time shall not exceed 3.7 TBq (Terabecquerels) (100 Curies)









The size of any single Iridium 192 source shall not exceed 1.1 TBq (30 curies).

Total holdings of Caesium 137 and Cobalt 60 sources shall not exceed 111GBq(Gigabecquerels) (3 Curies).

4.10.8.2 NOTIFICATION OF IMPORT TO D AS ISLAND

The HC&I and the SIE/LIE shall ensure that the following information is submitted to the ADMA-OPCO Safety and Environmental Protection Department (SEPD – Das) andcopied to the MHSE at the time of mobilisation and that the radioactive sources arewithin the agreed limitation set by ADMA-OPCO.

· Completed Radioactive Isotope Movement Form.· Decay Table (Iridium Sources)· Radioactive Source Test Report.· Radioactive Material Package Certificate.· Civil Defence Valid Registration Certificate.

Prior notification of disposal shall also be given to the ADMA-OPCO SEPD and copied tothe MHSE. (See appendix 4-10-5).

4.10.8.3 M ASTER REGISTERS

It is the responsibility of the HC&I to maintain an up-to-date Register of sealed sources,for general NDT, and the same applied to the SIE/LIE for Nucleonic Sources.

Each specific source shall be identified by its serial number.

Copies of all certificates and decay charts (where applicable) shall be copied to theMHSE, this also applies to Contractors carrying out radiography work.

4.10.8.4 STORAGE OF R ADIOACTIVE SOURCES

There are two main stores for radioactive isotopes within the ADGAS Industrial Area.

502 Laydown AreaThe storage area consists of two stores, one for Nucleonic sources under the control ofthe SIE/LIEs and one for general NDT sources controlled by the HC&I.

Train 3 AreaThis store area is used for general operational NDT sources for ADGAS and for all ADGAS subcontractors sources and is under the control of the HC&I.

When not installed on the plant, in use, or in transit, all radioactive sources shall behoused in adequately shielded containers within the radioactive source stores.









Every container shall be marked with a warning notice and shall specify the identificationnumber of the source, the isotope and strength.

The stores shall be reserved exclusively for the storage of sealed radioactive sourcesand, in particular, no flammable material will be located in the store area.

The stores shall be kept locked and the keys shall be under the control of the HC&I andSIE/LIE’s for their respective store areas, allowing access to authorised personnel only.The function may be carried out by the departmental RPS.

The maximum reading at the outside of the radiation stores must not exceed 2.5 mSv/hr(0.25 mrem/hr) at any place around the perimeter. Suitable signs must be displayed onthe outside of the stores advising of the nature of the hazard presented by the contentsand also information must be displayed regarding RPS and emergency contact numbers.

A radiation Dose Rate Meter or monitor should always be used when approaching orentering the isotope stores to remove or replace an isotope or when checking thecontents.

Note All notices shall be in Arabic and English

4.10.8.5 ISOTOPE MOVEMENT REGISTER

When an isotope is removed from, or returned to any radiation store, the details must beentered into the source Movement Register together with the signature of the authorisedperson in charge of the movement.

This also applies to any Nucleonic source that may be placed in the pit for long termstorage or on a temporary base, having been removed from the Plant.

4.10.8.6 LOCATION OF R ADIOACTIVE SOURCES

General NDT isotopes will always be placed in the radioactive source stores when not inuse.

The location of all nucleonic sources is listed in Figure 4-4.

It shall be the responsibility of the SIE/LIE to advise the MHSE of any changes to thelocation list so that amendments may be notified to all Manual holders.









4.10.9 NUCLEONIC SOURCES4.10.9.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Each installation shall be such that the dose rates on any external surface of theinstrument or plant on which it is installed shall not exceed 7.5 mSv/hr ( 0.75 mR/hr).

To ensure that this is achieved, each radioactive source shall be securely housed in ashielded container of sufficient size to ensure that radiation dose rates on all accessiblesurfaces are below 7.5 mSv/hr. If this is not possible, extra guards must be positionedand fixed securely in place to ensure that the dose rate at the guard is less than 7.5mSv/hr.

Additionally, radiation dose rates on all surfaces of the vessel or item to which theinstallation is fixed should be less than 7.5 mSv/hr, even when empty. If not, thenadditional guards must be positioned and fixed securely in place and the dose rate at theguard must not exceed 7.5 mSv/hr.

The immediate source container shall be painted yellow and bear the internationalradiation symbol (black trefoil on a yellow background).

The shielded source container shall provide protection of the source against damage andcollimate the useful beam to the minimum dimensions necessary for efficient operation of

the installed instrument.

The shielded source container shall be fitted with a shutter that shall be capable of beinglocked in the closed position, to attenuate the useful beam such that any residual doserate accessible to personnel does not exceed 7.5 mSv/hr. Clear notices should be fixedto the container to indicate whether the shutter is in the open or closed position.

The source holder shall be locked into the shielded source container and the keyscontrolled by the OSS.

4.10.9.2 W ARNING NOTICES

Fixed to the shielded source container or immediately adjacent to it there must be anotice that bears the radiation symbol. The notice must also indicate the presence of aradioactive source and give the following information:

"Make no adjustment to the installation without clearance from SIE/LIE. In the event ofany unusual occurrence involving the source the OSS must be contacted immediately"

In cases where a source is installed on or inside a process vessel having manholeaccess, then additional notices of a similar type must be fitted to each manhole. Theseshould bear the additional instruction:









"Contact the SIE/LIE before entering vessel"

NoteWarning notices shall be in Arabic and English.

4.10.9.3 INSTALLATION

A suitable area around the Plant on which an instrument is to be installed shall beisolated by temporary barriers at which the dose rate will not exceed 7.5 mSv/hr.

Installation shall be carried out by Authorised Persons from the Instrument Section.

A calibrated Radiation Dose Rate Meter must be used during the installation process.

4.10.9.4 SUPERVISION

The RPS shall be responsible for ensuring that the shutter is locked in the closedposition. The keys will be under the control of the OSS.

4.10.9.5 M AINTENANCE

Access to installed equipment will require a Hot Work Permit issued by the OSS andcountersigned by the RPS.

The RPS shall issue specific instructions on precautions to be taken before dismantlingor removing a shielded container from it's normally installed position.

4.10.9.6 ACCESS

No person shall be permitted to enter a vessel or have access to any vessel, pipe, orother part of the Plant on which a sealed source is installed without clearance from theRPS.

Further Information

Operations Department Permit to Work Manuals. Sections 6.13 and 10.47

4.10.9.7 LEAKAGE TESTING

A test for leakage of radioactive substances shall be organised by an RPS, who shallarrange for swabs to be taken and assayed by a qualified person at least once in everyperiod of twenty-six months of:

· Every immediate container or bonding which forms part of a sealed source, OR· Every container in which a sealed source is permanently installed but which does not

form part of a sealed source according to the relevant British Standard









Further InformationBS 5288 : 1976: Specification. Sealed radioactive sources. Section D21

Each leakage test shall be indicated by the request of the RPS from the Departmentresponsible for the use and control of the source.

The result of each test shall be entered into a Master Register. A satisfactory result willbe recorded if the activity measured on the swab is less than 185 Becquerels (5nanocuries)

If any leakage is observed above this level, the RPS will arrange for its safe disposal and

replacement.

4.10.10 SITE RADIOGRAPHY

The requirements relating to site radiography are as follows:

4.10.10.1 PRIOR TO EXPOSURE

The Controlled Area, within which the radiography takes place, shall be segregated bymeans of a barrier at such a position to prevent access by other than classified personsassociated with the radiography work.

The instantaneous dose rate shall not exceed 7.5 mSv/hr at the barrier.

No classified personnel should be within the Controlled Area during radiographicexposure.

When this cannot be avoided for the purpose of commencing or terminating an exposure,a person entering should not be exposed to an instantaneous dose rate more than 2µSv/hr(200 mR/hr).

Local shielding of sources, including collimators, should be used where possible toreduce dose rate and size of controlled area.

Warning signs should be clear, unambiguous and carefully situated so that any personwithin or approaching an area is made aware of the presence of radiation.

Further InformationChapter 3 Section 8 Safety Signs and Barriers.

4.10.10.2 DURING EXPOSURE

Once the exposure has commenced no alterations shall be made to the radiographic set-up until the exposure has terminated.









4.10.10.3 AFTER EXPOSURE After every exposure using sealed sources, a check using a monitoring instrumentshould be made to ensure that the source has properly retracted into its shield orcontainer.

Sources must never be handled with the bare hands; handling tools must always beused. Lead shot and sheet for shielding purposes shall be readily available for use in anemergency.

X-ray equipment shall be provided with effective means of isolation to preventunauthorised use. Source containers shall have a lock to prevent unintended or

unauthorised exposure. The lock should be such that if defective it does not preventretraction of the source and the act of unlocking does not give rise to an immediateexposure of the source.

Every exposure container used with radiography shall comply with BS 5650:1978, ISO3999-1977: Specification for apparatus for gamma radiography (for remote exposureunits only) and the position of the shutter, whether open or shut, shall be clearlyindicated.

4.10.11 OTHER APPLICATIONS

Any work with sources of ionising radiation not covered by these instructions shall becarried out only with the approval of the MHSE

4.10.12 MONITORING

4.10.12.1 GENERAL

The RPS shall ensure that adequate and appropriate monitoring equipment is availableto assess the radiological safety of all applications of sources of ionising radiation inprogress at any time on the Site.

4.10.12.2 M AINTENANCE AND CHECKING

The RPS of the Department concerned shall ensure that each Radiation Dose RateMeter is maintained in good working order and is calibrated by a qualified personaccording to the following:-

· Once in every period of 14 months, and· After any repair.

The calibration report shall be retained by the RPS with a copy to the MHSE.









4.10.13 RADIOACTIVE EMERGENCY4.10.13.1 OCCURRENCE CONSTITUTING AN EMERGENCY

Any suspected loss of, breakage of, or damage to any sealed source of radioactivematerial or to the shielding of any source or any circumstance which may result in theseoccurrences (e.g. fire on the plant) shall be regarded as an emergency.

Further InformationEmergency Plans and Procedures Manual Section "Loss of RadioactiveSource".

4.10.14 TRANSPORT4.10.14.1 INTRODUCTION

All regulations governing the transport of radioactive materials, nationally orinternationally, are based on the International Atomic Energy Agency's "Regulations forthe Safe Transport of Radioactive Materials".

International organisations involved in moving radioactive materials have produced theirown Regulations and Codes, specific to their own mode of transport, embodying theprinciples of the IAEA Regulations and the two of particular relevance to movements toand from Das Island are:-

The International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code - produced by the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative Organisation.

The Dangerous Goods Regulations - produced by the International Air Transport Authority.

Both are updated and re-issued regularly.

They are both designed to ensure that no hazard arises to personnel, passengers orpersons handling the packages and, to this end, sufficient information must be given tothe carrier to enable him to make suitable arrangements for transport. The materials

must be correctly packed and warning notices should be fixed to the packages.

Further InformationInternational Atomic Energy Agency's "Regulations for the Safe Transport ofRadioactive Materials".The International Maritime Dangerous Goods CodeThe Dangerous Goods Regulations

4.10.14.2 DESPATCH OF R ADIOACTIVE M ATERIALS

All arrangements for receipt and despatch of radioactive materials are made by the ADGAS Transit Store, Abu Dhabi and the Materials Store, Das Island.









To enable them to comply with the Regulations they must be given the correctinformation to pass on to the carrier and the containers of radioactive material must be ofthe correct type and correctly labelled.

4.10.14.3 INFORMATION REQUIRED

The information is in the form of a Shippers Declaration for Dangerous Goods. Details ofthe Shipper, Consignee, airport of departure and destination and whether the materialmay be carried by passenger and cargo aircraft must be completed.

Additional information and documentation must be supplied as follows:

· A description of the material. For sealed sources this will normally be a statement,"Radioactive Material", and the type of isotope, together with its composition, i.e."Iridium 192", (or Caesium 137) "Metal, Solid", "Not Otherwise Specified"(abbreviated to N.O.S.).

· If the isotope has undergone the rigorous testing for it to be classed as "SpecialForm" material, a statement to this effect and a copy of the special form certificate.Larger quantities of special form material (A1 limit) may normally be carried than ofnon-special form materials (A2 limit), e.g. for Caesium 137, 30 curies and 20 curiesrespectively, although 20 curies of either form of Iridium 192, when carried in type 'A'containers.

· If it is desired to carry greater quantities of material than those mentioned above, thentype 'B' containers must be used. The limit then becomes the limit detailed in thetype 'B' container certificate, issued by an approved Government Department. Onecopy of this certificate must accompany the Shippers certificate. For 'A' typecontainers, i.e. those carrying up to the A1 or A2 limits, no certificate is necessarysince the testing has been carried out by the owner of the container, rather than aGovernment Department, although the container must be legibly marked 'A' typecontainer.

· The dimensions of the package must also be given on the Shipper Declaration forDangerous Goods.

· Details of the Transport Index (abbreviated to T.I.) of the package and type of

warning label used must also be given on the Shipper's Declaration for DangerousGoods (see Section below).

4.10.14.4 L ABELLING OF CONTAINERS

The objective of the labels used on radioactive containers is to give immediateinformation to any person concerned, that:

· The material is radioactive.· The type of isotope enclosed.· The quantity of radioactive material.· The radiation dose rate from the container.









Special labels are therefore used, all carrying the International Trefoil Symbol and theword "Radioactive". Space is provided to write in the isotope and quantity of radioactivematerials in the container. Two labels must be used, fixed to the top and side of thecontainer. Information on dose rate at the surface of the container is given by using aparticular type of label and information on dose rate at a distance is given by writing onthe Transport Index of the container (i.e. the maximum dose rate measured, in mSv/hr(milliRad per hour), at one metre from the surface of the container). For the isotopesused on site (non fissile isotopes) one of three types of label will be appropriate. Use:

· A white label when surface dose is less than 5 mSv/hr (0.5 mRad/hour).

· A yellow II label when both surface dose rate is within the range 5 to 500 mSv/hr (0.5-30 mRad/hr) and the Transport Index is less than 1.

· A yellow III label when either the surface dose rate is greater than 500 mSv/hr (50mRad/hr) or the Transport Index is greater than 1.

NotePackage surface dose rates may not exceed 2 µSv/hr (200 mRad/hr) or thetransport index exceed 10, unless the consignee has sole use of the transportmedium, i.e. the material goes as a "Full Load".

4.10.14.5 DESPATCH REQUEST

A completed despatch request form in duplicate must be sent to the Transit or MaterialsStore with the isotope information.

4.10.14.6 CONFIRMATION OF DESPATCH

Following despatch of the radioactive materials the Transit or Materials Store shall senda copy of the dispatch request to the MHSE.

4.10.14.7 PRIOR NOTIFICATION

Before any radioactive material is imported to/from Das Island, notice must be given tothe ADMA-OPCO Senior Safety Engineer (SSE) Das.

4.10.14.8 NOTIFICATION OF RECEIPT/ DISPATCH

Notification of receipt/ dispatch of radioactive materials on Das Island must be given bythe relevant department to the ADMA-OPCO SSE(Das) and copied to the MHSE usingthe Radioactive Isotope Movement Form, Figure 4-5.

4.10.15 DEFINITIONS OF RADIOLOGICAL TERMS

RADIOACTIVE SUBSTANCEMeans any substance having an activity concentration of more that 100 Bqg-1 and anyother substance that contains one or more radionuclides whose activity cannot be









disregarded for the purposes of radiation protection, and the term includes a radioactivesubstance in the form of a sealed source.

IONISING RADIATIONMeans electromagnetic radiation (that is to say, X-rays and gamma rays) or corpuscularradiation (that is to say, alpha particles, beta particles, electrons, positrons, neutrons, orheavy particles) being electromagnetic radiation or corpuscular radiation capable ofproducing ions and emitted from a radioactive substance or from a machine or apparatusthat is intended to produce ionising radiation or from a machine or apparatus in whichcharged particles are accelerated by a voltage of not less than five kilovolts.

USEFUL BEAMMeans, in the case of X-rays, that part of the radiation from a X-ray tube that passesthrough the aperture, cone or other device for collimating the X-ray beam, and, in othercases, any ionising radiation from a sealed source that can be employed for the purposefor which the sealed source is used.

CONTROLLED AREAMeans a part of premises in which any person is exposed to a radiation dose rate whichwhen averaged over any one minute exceeds or is liable to exceed 7.5 mSv/hr.

ADEQUATE SHIELDINGMeans shielding or a demarcating barrier outside which the radiation dose rate averagedover any one minute does not exceed 7.5 mSv/hr.

RADIATION PROTECTION SUPERVISOR

Means a person appointed in writing by the Plant Manager to exercise specialsupervision with regard to the control and use of sources of ionising radiation and toassist in the implementation of these instructions.

CLASSIFIED PERSONMeans a person who is (or is liable to be) employed for any part of his time in acontrolled area in work involving operations with sealed sources and has been

designated by an appointed doctor.

MONITORED PERSONMeans a person who is involved with radioactive sources, but is not a "ClassifiedPerson".

GRAY (GY)Is defined as the unit of absorbed dose equal to 1 joule/ kilogram (J/Kg) in any medium.(original unit was the rad. 1 Gy = 100 rads).









SIEVERT (SV)Is the dose equivalent, and is obtained when the absorbed dose (Gy) is multiplied by theappropriate quality factor. (original unit was the rem. 1 Sv = 100 rems).

BECQUEREL(Bq)The activity of radiation that undergoes one disintegration per second. (original unit wasthe curie.1Ci = 37 gigabequerels (Gbq)

4.10.16 DOSE LIMITS

DOSE LIMITS FOR THE WHOLE BODY

The dose limit for the whole body resulting from exposure to the whole or part of thebody, being the sum of the following dose quantities resulting from exposure to ionisingradiation, namely the effective dose equivalent from external radiation and the committedeffective dose equivalent from that year's intake of radionuclides, shall in any calendaryear be:· For radiographers aged 18 years or over 50 mSv· For trainees aged under 18 years 15 mSv· For all other personnel 5 mSv

DOSE LIMITS FOR INDIVIDUAL ORGANS AND TISSUES Without prejudice to Part 1 of this schedule, the dose limit for individual organs or

tissues, being the sum of the following dose quantities resulting from exposure to ionisingradiation, namely the dose equivalent from external radiation, the dose equivalent fromcontamination and the committed dose equivalent from that year's intake of radionuclidesaveraged throughout any individual organ or tissue (other than the lens of the eye) or anybody extremity or over any area of skin, shall in any calendar year be:· For radiographers aged 18 years or over 500 mSv· For trainees aged under 18 years 150 mSv· For all other personnel 50 mSv

In assessing the dose quantity to skin whether from contamination or external radiation,the area of skin over which the dose quantity is averaged shall be appropriate to the

circumstances but in any event shall not exceed 100 cm2.

DOSE LIMITS FOR THE LENS OF THE EYEThe dose limit for the lens of the eye resulting from exposure to ionising radiation beingthe average dose equivalent from external and internal radiation delivered between2.5mm and 3.5mm behind the surface of the eye, shall in any calendar year be:· For radiographers aged 18 years or over 150 mSv· For trainees aged under 18 years 45 mSv· For all other personnel 15 mSv









1. Details of Isotope

Type..........................................................................Type of Emission................................................Strength on manufacture...........Ci...............................Date......................Present Strength.......................Ci...............................Date......................Decay Rate..............................Days/Years.................Collimated/uncollimated

2. Safety Requirements Yes No

a) Erect Safety Barriers.

b) Place Trefoils (Radiation Warning Signs).

c) Place Warning Lights (in low light areas).

d) Inform Plant/Workshops personnel that work with isotopes is imminent.

e) Check locker rooms, toilets, showers and offices in sterile area.Evacuate personnel and lock or wire shut all doors in sterile area.

f) All "Classified Persons" equipped with TLD's.

g) Calibrated Dose Rate Meter on Site.

h) Adequate shielding in place.

i) Safe Working platform with safe means of access.

3. Health, Safety and Environment Division.

I have checked the area in which Radiography will take place and am satisfied that all therequirements have been met.

Name............................................................ Time ....................... Date.......................................Name............................................................ Time........................ Date.......................................Name............................................................ Time ....................... Date.......................................Name............................................................ Time ....................... Date.......................................

(This document must be attached to a Hot-Work Permit and the relevant requirementsmust be met before any Radioactive Isotope is exposed in the Plant or Workshops).

Figure 4-3: Radiation Safety Checklist









TRAIN I SOURCE(S) SERIAL NO.

Hot Carbonate Absorber 2-C-103 11 x 0.5mCi Cs137M5917, M5921, M5922, 5923M5924, M5925, M5928, M5930M5932, M5936, M5938.

Hot Carbonate Absorber LLA 2-C-103 20mCi Cs137 M5761

Hot Carbonate Flash Drum 2-C-108 260mCi Cs137 0975 GM (Upper)255mCi Cs137 M5940 (Lower)

Amine Absorber 2-C-109 1Ci Cs137 N1314

Amine Flash Drum 2-C-111 16mCi Cs137 0122GM16mCi Cs137 0123GM

TRAIN II

Hot Carbonate Absorber 2-C-203 11 x 0.5Ci Cs137M5915, M5916, M5918M5919, M5920, M5929M5931, M5933, M5934M5935, M5936

Hot Carbonate Absorber LLA 2-C-203 20mCi Cs137 M5946

Hot Carbonate Flash Drum 2-C-208 250mCi Cs137 0976 GM (Upper)269mCi Cs137 M5943 (Lower)

Amine Absorber 2-C-209 1Ci Cs137 N1344

Amine Flash Drum 2-C-211 16mCi Cs137 M596316mCi Cs137 M5979

Plant 27

LPG Flare Line 18-LSH-37 3mCi CS 137 4222 GF

LNG Flare Line 18-LSH-35 5mCi Cs137 4135 GF

LNG Flare Line 18-LSH-36 5mCi CS137 3900 GF

Train III

Sour Gas Flare Blowdown Drum Exit Line 3mCi Cs137 8127 GF

502 LAYDOWN AREANUCLEONIC STORE

Calibration Source 3mCi Cs137 0646 GMIsotope storage pit 22mCi Cs137 4681 GF

Figure 4-4: RADIOACTIVE SOURCE LOCATION LIST









To : Senior Safety Engineer (Das) Date :

From : Ref. :

Subject : Mobilisation/ Demobilisation of Radioactive Isotope(s)

A. The under mentioned Radioactive Isotope (s) have arrived on Das Island. Decaychart attached for your reference.

Isotope No. Isotope ActivityUpon Arrival Storage Pit

B. The under mentioned Radioactive Isotope (s) have been removed from DasIsland.

Isotope No. Destination

Name : ................................................ Company :.........................................................

Signature : ......................................... Position :..........................................................

Note: This form must be completed on the day an Isotope is brought into Das or the dayit is taken off.

Figure 4-5: RADIOACTIVE ISOTOPE MOVEMENT FORM









4.10.17 APPOINTED RADIATION PROTECTION SUPERVISORS

The following personnel have been nominated and appointed as Radiation ProtectionSupervisors for ADGAS.

No person shall be nominated unless they have received such information instructionand training that will enable them to conduct the work, within the ADGAS Controlled Areas, and is in compliance with their Departmental systems of work for radioactiveisotopes and also with this Chapter of the HSEM.

Nominated Personnel

a) Corrosion and Inspection Department

Steve Bishop - PIEJohn Den Heyer - NDT Specialist

b) Maint – Instrument Section

Raweh Ali Saleh - LIE

Ali Mohamed Ismail - LIE

MOH’D SAQER A. AL SHEHHIPRODUCTION MANAGER

Figure 4-6: RADIOACTIVE PROTECTION SUPERVISORS

4.11 PLANT PRODUCT HAZARDS

4.11.1 INTRODUCTION

The ADGAS Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG) Plant produces the following end products forexport:- Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG) (methane/ethane), Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)(propane/butane), pentane and sulphur.

LNG and LPG are cryogenic materials in that they are produced, handled and stored atbelow 0°C.











temperatures may be adversely affected so far as their reactions and capabilities areconcerned.

Personnel should be protected against low ambient temperatures that may occur forexample on entering cold tanks or vessels. Personnel apparently suffering from theeffects of hypothermia should be removed from the cold area to a warm environment.

4.11.2.5 FIRST AID

On exposure to a cryogenic material, immediate first aid involves flushing the affectedareas of skin with large quantities of fresh water. Where practicable the patient shouldbe moved to the emergency shower and drenched. The casualty should then receive

immediate medical attention and be transported to hospital without delay.

In the event of a person collapsing due to oxygen deficiency, rescue personnel shouldensure that they are adequately equipped with breathing apparatus before attempting toremove anybody overcome in an oxygen deficient atmosphere. The casualty should beremoved immediately to a normal atmosphere. It is vitally important to start artificialrespiration at the first opportunity, if the casualty is not breathing

4.11.2.6 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

Under normal operating conditions, individual protective clothes, gloves and especiallyvisors, should be worn when handling cryogenic fluids.

Protective clothing for handling low temperature liquefied gases serves mainly to protectagainst frost burns. Non-absorbent gloves should always be worn when handlinganything that is or may have been in contact with cold liquids or vapours.

If severe spraying or splashing is likely to occur, eyes should be protected with a faceshield or goggles. Full body protection is also available through the wearing of acryogenic suit.

Further Information3.9 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

4.11.2.7 OVER PRESSURISATION

All systems used for processing cryogenic liquids have the potential to be overpressurised in adverse operating circumstances. Suitable relief systems sized andinstalled to appropriate industry codes and standards must always be provided.









4.11.3 CRYOGENIC SPILLS/FLARES4.11.3.1 SPILLAGE CHARACTERISTICS

When a cryogenic spillage occurs, a white visible cloud develops due to thecondensation of water vapour in the atmosphere. It should not be confused with thedangerous cloud where the gas content lies within its flammable range. Tests haveshown that the flammable cloud is located inside the visible cloud when the relativehumidity level of the air exceeds 40%. The initial volume of the cloud will be greatest atthe beginning of the spill, due to the initial flash off of vapour. The eventual size of thecloud depends on the wetted surface area and on the nature of the ground onceconditions have stabilised and a steady-state is reached.

There are various differences in the behaviour of LNG in comparison with LPG whenspilled. LNG has an initial high rate of evaporation, the cloud moving downwind until itstemperature is sufficiently raised for the gas to disperse upward. LPG, being heavierthan air and with a smaller temperature differential between the liquid temperature andambient, boils off more slowly and follows ground contours downwind. LPG will thereforetend to collect in depressions and trenches.

4.11.3.2 SPILLAGE CONTROL

A distinction should be made between the large spills of cryogenic fluid associated withtank incidents and the small spills associated with seal/flange leakages which essentially

behave as gas leaks, since the cryogenic fluid vaporises rapidly and completely onemission

4.11.3.3 PLANT (T1/T2 UTILITIES)

Facilities on the LNG Plant are provided to assist in the control of large spills by theprovision of water curtains and foam units.

Further InformationEmergency Plans and Procedures Manual: Chapter 3

4.11.3.4 NEW T ANK F ARM/TRAIN 3

Spillage of LNG/LPG in the New Tank Farm and Train 3 is controlled by the drainageand flow of the liquid hydrocarbons to Impounding Basins. There are two cases toconsider; spillage of LNG and spillage of LPG:

4.11.3.5 SPILLAGE OF LNG

· Vapour dispersion and fire control of LNG collected in Impounding Basins can beachieved rapidly using expansion foam.

o For vapour dispersion control, the expansion foam increases theevaporation rate by warming the vapours of LNG so that they are lessdense than air and, therefore, disperse vertically rather than horizontally.









o For fire control of ignited LNG, the expansion foam blanket reduces theboil-off rate and subsequent flame size by shielding the LNG from the fire,thereby reducing or essentially eliminating radiation feedback from the fire.

CautionIt is advisable to allow a foam-controlled LNG fire to burn rather than extinguishit using dry powder.

4.11.3.6 SPILLAGE OF LPG

· Owing to the heavier than air characteristic of LPG, vapour dispersion of an LPG spillin an Impounding Basin cannot be achieved using expansion foam.

In fact, the use of expansion foam increases the boil-off rate with an increase in thehazards associated with a vapour cloud.

· For fire control of ignited LPG, the high-expansion foam blanket shields the liquid fuelsource from the radiation of the fire, thereby controlling the evaporation rate and sizeof fire.

CautionIt is advisable to allow a foam-controlled LPG fire to burn rather than extinguishit

4.11.3.7 FIRE CONTROL

If there is a fire involving cryogenic material two basic cases should be considered:

· Small Area Fires of between 5m2 and 10m2 can be extinguished directly with drypowder. Care however must be taken not to extinguish a three dimensional (gasleak) fire until the fuel source is isolated.

· Large Area Fires generate intense heat radiation and require large quantities of drypowder and it is more usual to apply foam of an expansion ratio of at least 1:150.

This will reduce the flame height allowing consequent extinction with less dry powder.

However, under certain circumstances the controlled burning of the flammable vapourson top of the foam blanket is preferable to extinguishing the fire with dry powdercompletely.

This prevents possible uncontrolled re-ignition of the gas cloud with potentially moredisastrous results. Under these conditions, the cooling effects of water can be used toeffectively screen and protect adjacent facilities from the thermal radiation generated bythe fire. It must be emphasised that water must not be directed onto the areainvolving the fire.









4.11.4 EQUIPMENT FOR CRYOGENIC SERVICEMaterials incorporated in a correctly designed cryogenic plant are suitable for the lowesttemperatures to be expected in actual operation, and foreseeable conditions arising frommaloperation. It is essential that the limiting temperature conditions applying to items ofequipment or systems are clearly defined and that the plant is at all times operated withinthese limits. When replacement parts for cryogenic plant are procured, it is essential thatthe original design criteria are maintained.

4.11.5 PENTANE

Pentane is a colourless extremely flammable liquid with a pleasant odour when pure and

an offensive odour when contaminated with mercaptans and/or hydrogen sulphide. Itsvapour is heavier than air and vapour/air mixtures may be explosive.

4.11.5.1 TOXICITY

Pure Pentane is of low toxicity being a mild irritant but is narcotic if the vapour is inhaledat high dosage. Sour Pentane produced by ADGAS contains sulphur compounds.

4.11.5.2 FIRE CONTROL

Spillages of Pentane which ignite can be extinguished using low expansion foam firefighting equipment or dry powder extinguishers.

4.11.5.3 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

Further InformationChapter 3 Section 7

4.11.6 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE (H2S)

4.11.6.1 GENERAL

The feed gas provided to ADGAS contains a proportion of hydrogen sulphide gas (H2S)

It's properties can be summarised as follows:

· Highly toxic.· Colourless.· Heavier than air, hence tends to settle in low-lying areas.· Readily dispersed by wind or air currents· Has characteristic smell of rotten eggs at low concentration; at higher concentrations

the sensitivity to smell disappears.· Flammable. (LEL 4.3% UEL 46% AUTO IGN 260°c)









WarningDo not depend on your sense of smell to detect hydrogen sulphide.

4.11.6.2 TRAINING

All persons working or visiting the ADGAS facilities must be made aware of the dangersof hydrogen sulphide, made familiar with evacuation procedures and in the use of theSelf Rescue Respirator. This information is normally given at an induction courseprovided by the HSED. No one, with the exception of accompanied visitors, are allowedon the facilities without an induction.

Advanced training on the properties and safety precautions relating to hydrogen sulphideis provided to other Departments by the HSED, as required.

4.11.6.3 TOXICITY

Table 4-5 indicates the toxic effects of H2S at various concentrations.

Concentration Effect

0.13 ppm Minimal perceptible odour.4.60 ppm Easily detectable odour.10 ppm Slight eye irritation.

27 ppm Strong, unpleasant odour, but not intolerable.100 ppm Coughing, eye irritation, loss of sense of smell.

200 ppmMarked eye inflammation. Respiratory tract irritation after onehour exposure.

500 - 700 ppmLoss of consciousness and possibly death in 30 minutes to onehour.

700 - 1000 ppm Rapid unconsciousness, stopping of respiration and death.

1000 - 2000 ppmUnconsciousness at once with rapid stopping of respiration.Death may occur even if individual is removed to fresh air at once.

Table 4-5: H2S Toxic ity

4.11.6.4 S AFETY PRECAUTIONS

In the event of a hydrogen sulphide leak on the plant procedures are laid down in theEmergency Plans and Procedures Manual.

It is important that all personnel retain their Self Rescue Respirator on their person whilstin the ADGAS industrial area.









4.11.6.5 SPECIFIC PRECAUTIONS

Working in an actual or potential hydrogen sulphide environment requires accurateplanning and preparation.

· The proposed method of work is to be reviewed by the Area Authority andSHSEE(Ops) (a Task Risk Assessment should be carried out) and attached to theappropriately completed work permit.

Note:Provision of BA standby is essential.

4.11.6.6 PORTABLE H2S DETECTORS

LEAD ACETATE CASSETTES

Operations Division personnel carry lead acetate cassette detectors which will give anindication of the concentration when in the presence of hydrogen sulphide.

DRAEGER SULFIWARN

Sulfiwarn hydrogen sulphide detectors are held by the HSED.

These may be used for monitoring the hydrogen sulphide content of the ambient air inwork areas. An alarm threshold is set on the device which, when exceeded, provides anaudible and visual alarm.

4.11.6.7 FIXED H2S DETECTORS

Fixed hydrogen sulphide detectors have been strategically located throughout the LNGfacility to monitor the area on a continuous basis. The alarm control panel for thesedetectors is located in the Control Room. An audio/visual alarm is sounded when thehydrogen sulphide concentration reaches 10 parts per million.

Further Information

Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials, Sax.Substances Hazardous to Health, Croner.

4.11.7 SULPHUR

4.11.7.1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND H AZARDS

Sulphur remains solid as yellow crystals or powder up to its melting point of 119oC(248oF). Auto-ignition occurs at 288oC (450oF) but in a dust cloud auto-ignition couldoccur at a temperature as low as 190oC (375oF). Sulphur is easily ignitable andcombustible. Burning sulphur produces highly toxic sulphur dioxide gas which has athreshold limit value (TLV) of 2 ppm. The IDLH concentration for SO2 is 100 ppm. Themain hazards from liquid sulphur are release of dissolved H2S (upto 15 ppm H2S in









Sulphur) in the ullage space of the tank. Severe burns on contact due to the hightemperature of the liquid sulphur which is kept at approximately 140oC and sulphurdioxide release in the event of the sulphur catching fire.

Hydrogen sulphide (H2S) is a hazardous gas. The gas is colourless and even at lowconcentrations of 0.13 ppm has the distinct smell of rotten eggs. Concentrations of 100ppm will cause loss of smell and above 500 ppm will rapidly cause unconsciousness anddeath. The gas is explosive between 4 to 44 vol % in air.

While the liquid sulphur is stored at a constant temperature with no agitation, very littlehydrogen sulphide is released. High and dangerous concentrations of H2S may be

evolved, even several days after sulphur production, by either or both of the following:

· A drop in temperature· Agitation of liquid sulphur.

Tests have shown that tankers filled to within 1 to 2 % of full capacity and carrying liquidsulphur with an H2S concentration of more than 15 ppm would be capable of evolvingsufficient H2S to reach the lower explosive limit within 7 to 8 hours of transport.

4.11.7.2 H ANDLING LIQUID SULPHUR

The continuous threat of the presence of explosive and toxic H2S, the severity of liquid

sulphur burns and the dangers posed by the ignition of sulphur demand the use of well-trained and experienced personnel.

The following precautions shall be observed:

· No sparks, open flames or welding shall be permitted in the handling area without apermit to work.

· Operators shall wear a helmet, face shield, long-sleeved overalls, heat-resistantgauntlet and safety boots.

· Liquid sulphur piping and associated steam piping shall be insulated to eliminatecontact burns.

· All liquid sulphur handling operations shall be supervised.· Supervisory staff and operators shall be aware of emergency procedures to be taken

in event of H2S release or liquid sulphur fire.· In the event of H2S release or fire, emergency shutdown of the loading/ unloading

operations shall be initiated.· Spot checks on loaded tankers entering or leaving Das should be carried out by the

Health, Safety and Environment Division.· Respiratory protection equipment shall be worn during all manual venting operations.









4.11.7.3 BURNS FROM LIQUID SULPHUR Should any person come into contact with the hot sulphur the area should be flushedwith running water for at least 15 minutes and no attempt should be made to remove it.

Skin or clothing burned by liquid sulphur is usually covered with a thin hard coat ofsolidified sulphur, and this should be covered with a clear dry dressing with no attemptmade either to remove clothing or the offending sulphur. The patient should be treatedfor shock if necessary and medical attention sought immediately.

Further InformationHazardous Substances Manual - Product Health & Safety Data sheet on

Sulphur (Liquid).

4.12 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES DISPOSAL

4.12.1 GENERAL

MSDS included in the Hazardous Substance Manual, will indicate, when applicable, therequired methods of disposal together with any special precautions required duringtransportation from site and during final disposal.

The disposal of all flammable, corrosive or toxic substances from the LNG Plant is

covered by GOP 4.2/4.3/4.4: Disposal of Dangerous Material, requiring the Head ofProcess to be informed before removal from site of all such materials.

4.12.2 OUTSIDE AGENCIES

Where outside agencies, including ADMA-OPCO, are employed for the disposal ofhazardous substances, HSED will ensure the methods and precautions used for thedisposal of a specific substance meet the required standard, as described in the WasteDisposal Manual before endorsement of the Waste Disposal Form.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV2-05: Waste Management

ADGAS Waste Disposal Manual ADGAS Hazardous Substance Manual.






PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM Chapter No. 05



CHAPTER 5 CONTENTS

5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 216

5.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 216 5.2 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................................... 216

5.2.1 MANAGEMENT ........................................................ ................................................................. .. 216 5.2.2 SUPERVISORS ............................................................................................................................ 216 5.2.3 CONTRACTORS .......................................................................................................................... 217

5.3 PERMIT AUTHORITIES ......................................................... ........................................................ 217 5.3.1 AREA AUTHORITY........................................ ................................................................. ............. 217 5.3.2 AREA AUTHORITIES (NON-INDUSTRIAL) ........................................................ ....................... 217 5.3.3 AREA OPERATOR ............................................................... ........................................................ 217 5.3.4 AUTHORISED ELECTRICAL PERSON ............................................................... ....................... 217 5.3.5 AUTHORISED GAS TESTER .................................................................... .................................. 217 5.3.6 ISSUING AUTHORITY ........................................................ ........................................................ 218 5.3.7 JOB OFFICERS ........................................................ ................................................................. .. 218 5.3.8 OPERATIONS AUTHORISED PERSON ..................................................................................... 218 5.3.9 PERFORMING AUTHORITY ...................................................................................................... 218

5.4 WHEN IS A PERMIT REQUIRED ................................................................ .................................. 218 5.5 PERMIT SUBMISSION ........................................................... ........................................................ 219 5.6 TYPES OF PERMIT ................................................................. ........................................................ 219

5.6.1 COLD WORK PERMIT ........................................................ ........................................................ 219 5.6.2 HOT WORK PERMIT ........................................................................................... ....................... 219 5.6.3 NAKED FLAME PERMIT ............................................................... ............................................. 219 5.6.4

VEHICLE ENTRY PERMIT ......................................................................................................... 220 5.6.5 REMOVAL PERMIT ................................................. ................................................................. .. 220 5.6.6 BREACH OF BUND PERMIT ..................................................................................................... 220 5.6.7 SMOKING PERMIT ............................................................. ........................................................ 220 5.6.8 INSTRUMENT ROUTINE PERMITS ......................................................... .................................. 220 5.6.9 NON-INDUSTRIAL AREA PERMIT .......................................................... .................................. 221 5.6.10 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY CERTIFICATE .............................................................. ............ 221 5.6.11 EXCAVATION WORK REQUEST ......................................................... .................................. 221 5.6.12 DATA HIWAY ACCESS REQUEST ....................................................... .................................. 221

5.7 PERMIT GAS TESTING .......................................................... ........................................................ 222 5.7.1 CONFINED SPACES ........................................................... ........................................................ 222 5.7.2 OPEN SPACES (I.E. OTHER THAN CONFINED SPACES) ...................................................... 222 5.7.3 CALIBRATION .......................................................... ................................................................. .. 222

5.8 TRAINING ....................................................................................................................................... 223 5.9 AUDITING OF THE PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM .......................................................... ............ 223 5.9.1 DAILY MONITORING ......................................................... ........................................................ 223 5.9.2 MONTHLY AUDIT ............................................................... ........................................................ 223 5.9.3 ANNUAL AUDIT REVIEW ........................................................................ .................................. 223 5.9.4 EXTERNAL AUDIT REVIEW .............................................. ........................................................ 224









5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM

5.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter gives a general overview of the ADGAS Permit to Work System. Forauthoritative and detailed information on the complete system the Operations DivisionPermit to Work Manual should be consulted.

A permit to work procedure is a formal written procedure used to control particular typesof work that are potentially hazardous. Essential features of a permit to work system are:

· Clear definitions stating who may authorise particular jobs, who is responsible forspecifying the necessary precautions and who may accept the precautions to beundertaken during the work.

· Training and instruction in the issue and use of permits.· Effective monitoring to ensure that the system works as intended.

A permit to work is not permission to carry out a dangerous job, but is an essential part ofa procedure that provides instructions on how a potentially dangerous job can be carriedout safely. The issue of a permit does not, by itself, make a job safe. This can only beachieved by those preparing and those carrying out the work. The permit is a writtendocument that authorises certain people to carry out specific work, at a certain time, andmeasures needed to complete the job safely.

Further Information ADGAS OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT: Permit to Work Manual ADNOC-COPV4-05: NON-ROUTINE OPERATIONS

5.2 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

5.2.1 MANAGEMENT

It is the responsibility of Management to ensure that:

· An appropriate permit to work procedure is written and implemented.· Satisfactory arrangements, including training, exist for implementing the procedure on

a day to day basis and that these arrangements include contractor personnel.· Operation of the procedure is monitored to ensure it is being correctly applied.· Procedures are reviewed regularly and amended as necessary.

5.2.2 SUPERVISORS

Supervisory staff, whether ADGAS or Contractor, should ensure that:









· They are fully conversant with the ADGAS permit to work procedure.· No work under their supervision shall start until a permit has been raised and

appropriate authorisation obtained.· Conditions and precautions of any particular permit are understood by their workforce

and strictly followed.· Contractors are told of, and understand, the specific permit to work procedures that

apply on the ADGAS Facilities.· When the job has been completed, the permit is signed off.

5.2.3 CONTRACTORS

Certain contractors working on the ADGAS Facilities may be appointed as permitsignatories. This will be at the sole discretion of Management. Before acceptance assignatories, contractors so nominated, will be required to demonstrate detailedknowledge and understanding of the Permit System.

5.3 PERMIT AUTHORITIES

5.3.1 AREA AUTHORITY

The Area Authority is a member of the Operations Division who has been given theauthority by the Production Manager for the operation of the ADGAS Permit to WorkSystem within his area.

5.3.2 AREA AUTHORITIES (NON-INDUSTRIAL)

Any additional area (Non-Industrial) nominated as an authorised area (even a temporarysite) due to work being carried out by ADGAS must have an Area Authority, nominatedby the functional Divisional Manager and agreed by HSED. Refer to 2.11 AREA AUTHORITIES.

5.3.3 AREA OPERATOR

The Area Operator signs all Work Permits (new and renewed) before work may start inhis area.

5.3.4 AUTHORISED ELECTRICAL PERSON

An Authorised Electrical Person is authorised by the Senior Electrical Engineer to carryout electrical isolation and de-isolation of equipment required for Work Permits. (HighVoltage Switching requires special Authorisation).

5.3.5 AUTHORISED GAS TESTER

An Authorised Gas Tester is a member of the Operations Division or a LaboratoryTechnician who is authorised to carry out gas tests required for Work Permits. A monthlyupdate register of Authorised Gas Testers will be issued along with the list of authorisedpermit signatories.









5.3.6 ISSUING AUTHORITY

An Issuing Authority is a member of the Operations Division who has been given theauthority by the Production Manager to issue Work Permits.

5.3.7 JOB OFFICERS

All ADGAS Job Officers with responsibility for contractors must ensure that the NonIndustrial Area Permit is completed and signed by all parties before commencement ofwork. Also, that the Performing Authority is fully aware of the scope of work and anyassociated hazards.

5.3.8 OPERATIONS AUTHORISED PERSON

An Operations Authorised Person is a member of the Operations Division who has beengiven the authority by the Production Manager to carry out key isolations, fill in specificparts of the Work Permit and to certify site preparation prior to issue of the Work Permits.

5.3.9 PERFORMING AUTHORITY

A Performing Authority is an ADGAS Engineer, Supervisor or Technician who has beengiven the authority by the Production Manager to accept Work Permits and carry outspecific maintenance work on the LNG Plant.

In the Non-Industrial Area, the Performing Authority shall be the person nominated by the ADGAS Job Officer.

5.4 WHEN IS A PERMIT REQUIRED

A permit is required for any work carried out within the ADGAS Restricted Areas asdefined by drawing 33-AOZ-0-3735 "ADGAS Industrial Area Designation andMarshalling Points". A copy of this drawing is contained in the Emergency Plans andProcedures Manual.

There are certain classes of work in the ADGAS Industrial Area, of a relatively low risk

nature, where only permission of the Area Team Leader (Process, Utilities, Storex) isrequired. The following are examples of work that may be carried out with thepermission of the ATL(P), ATL(U), ATL(S) without a Work Permit:

· Routine work in offices, control rooms and amenities building.· Domestic Type Electrical work in Offices and Control Rooms.· Visual inspection of plant and equipment (excluding confined space entry).· Routine housekeeping and cleaning of the plant areas.· Work on domestic type plumbing and toilets in Offices and Control Rooms.· Decorating and painting in Offices and Control Rooms.· Implementing DCS changes.









· Routine sampling by Laboratory Technicians.

5.5 PERMIT SUBMISSION

Work Permits and Confined Space Entry Permits must be submitted by the Performing Authority to the Area Controller (AC / OSS) a minimum of 48 hours before the work isplanned to start due to the time needed to adequately prepare the necessary equipmentand work area.

The Work Permits submitted will be checked by the Area Controller (AC / OSS) to ensurethat:

· A Work Permit is required for the work (may be Non-Permit Work).· The equipment may be released without affecting plant production.· The Permit Application part of the Work Permit form has been filled correctly.· The person applying for the Work Permit is an approved Performing Authority.· The correct category of Work Permit is being applied for.

5.6 TYPES OF PERMIT

The Area Controller will confirm that the appropriate type of permit is being applied for.

5.6.1 COLD WORK PERMIT

A Cold Work Permit is mandatory for any work (except routine) that does not include theuse of a source of ignition. This includes the use of hand tools (spanners, screwdrivers,hammers, picks and shovels etc.) in such a way so as not to generate sparks.

Note Air driven spanners/pneumatic tools must be considered as a source of ignitionand require a Hot Work Permit.

5.6.2 HOT WORK PERMIT

A Hot Work Permit is mandatory for any work involving the use of a source of ignition (otherthan Naked Flames which require a Naked Flame Permit) capable of igniting flammablegases, volatile liquids or other materials.

5.6.3 NAKED FLAME PERMIT

A Naked Flame Work Permit is required for the use of a flame or other high energysource of ignition which is almost certain to ignite a flammable mixture. Such equipmentis potentially extremely hazardous and must only be used when no other means arefeasible.









5.6.4 VEHICLE ENTRY PERMIT A Vehicle Entry Permit is required for any diesel vehicles or crane to pass the LNGcomplex barriers and enter plant roads, streets and bunds.

5.6.5 REMOVAL PERMIT

Whenever equipment is to be removed from the LNG Plant Site to the CentralWorkshops, suitable precautions must be taken to ensure that, wherever possible, nohazards exist from the presence of hydrocarbons, toxic, corrosive or pyrophoricmaterials. All such items of equipment should be decontaminated by steam/waterwashing/nitrogen purging/weathering as appropriate and then tested.

There are two types of Removal Permit, a Removal Permit (Blue), which certifies that theequipment has been cleared of hazardous materials, and a Removal Permit (Red), forequipment that cannot be cleared until dismantled in the workshop.

Further InformationGOP 4.1: Potential Sources of Pyrophoric MaterialPMED SI I-06

5.6.6 BREACH OF BUND PERMIT

A tank bund should not be opened without the authorisation of the PMand then, only

after an appropriate Breach Of Bund Permit, has been issued by the PROM.

5.6.7 SMOKING PERMIT

Smoking is forbidden on the ADGAS LNG complex except in designated smoking areasin which a valid Smoking Permit is displayed. These areas are situated in the CCB,QMB, Train 1/2 Amenity Building, Train 3 Amenity Building and Storex Control Room. ASmoking Permit is issued annually by the PMand I&QM.

Warning Any person found smoking in a restricted area outside the limits indicated on theSmoking Permit will be dismissed.

In places where smoking is permitted, HSED Approved means of ignition andincombustible receptacles for spent cigarettes are provided and must be used.

5.6.8 INSTRUMENT ROUTINE PERMITS

Instrument planned routine maintenance work may be authorised by completion andissue of an Instrument Routine Permit. This allows for up to 6 routine tests to be carriedout on one Work Permit, Hot or Cold as appropriate.









5.6.9 NON-INDUSTRIAL AREA PERMITThe Non-Industrial Area Permit system specifies the work to be done and precautions tobe taken when working outside of the ADGAS Industrial Area.

The ADGAS Permit to Work System does not apply to large projects outside of theIndustrial Area. Such projects will be covered by the Contractors Safe Systems of Workand Permit to Work scheme after acceptance by HSED. Its main purpose is to controlcertain types of work that are identified as potentially hazardous.

5.6.10 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY CERTIFICATE

A Confined Space Entry Certificate is mandatory for any person to enter or partially enterany confined space. A confined space is generally defined as a space or volume,capable of being entered by a person, which:

· Is not intended as a regular workplace.· Has a restricted means of access and exit.· Has inadequate ventilation.· Has an atmosphere that was either contaminated or was Oxygen deficient.

Note A Confined Space Entry Certificate is not a Work Permit, it covers ENTRY and

VISUAL INSPECTION only. Any other work or equipment must be covered byan appropriate Naked Flame, Hot Work or Cold Work Permit

5.6.11 EXCAVATION WORK REQUEST

An Excavation Work Request is mandatory for all excavation work, the driving of stakesinto the ground and the movement of heavy cranes and equipment off designated roadsor streets.

Caution An Excavation Work Request is not a Work Permit and it must be accompaniedby the appropriate Hot or Cold Work Permit and a Confined Space Entry Permit

if the excavation is deeper than 1.3 metres.

5.6.12 DATA HIWAY ACCESS REQUEST

A Data Hiway Access Request is mandatory for access to Data Hiways. Data Hiwayscontain live DCS cables which are critical for the control and safe operation of the LNGplant.

Caution A Data Hiway Access Request is not a Permit to Work.









5.7 PERMIT GAS TESTING

Any gas testing specified by the Issuing Authority must be carried out by an AuthorisedGas Tester. An up to date list of Authorised Gas Testers is kept in the Permit Office.

Further Information Authorised Gas Tester Certification Procedure

5.7.1 CONFINED SPACES

Gas testing for Confined Space Entry must be carried out by Authorised Laboratory

Personnel until the results obtained are satisfactory, after which, the gas testing may bedone by an Authorised Gas Tester.

The following regulations are applicable to gas-testing:

· The initial tests for flammable and toxic gases, and oxygen deficiency will be madefrom outside the confined space using a long probe.

· If these initial tests indicate a concentration that is above the permissible levels, thenfurther gas freeing procedures and tests will be necessary until the gas concentrationis within the permissible limits for the work involved.

· If it is necessary for the Gas Tester to enter the confined space to make further tests,

full protective equipment including air-line or self contained breathing apparatus andlife line must then be worn and entry must be controlled through the SHSEE(Ops)and authorised by PROM.

5.7.2 OPEN SPACES (I.E. OTHER THAN CONFINED SPACES)

The gas testing of general open spaces for combustible and toxic gases and oxygendeficiency will be carried out by the OSS, Charge Engineer, ISS or other authorised ODpersonnel.

All combustible and toxic gas tests must be carried out by a person who has beencertified competent by HSED. A register of all authorised Gas Testers will be maintained

by Training Department and copied to OD and HSED.

5.7.3 CALIBRATION

Combustible gas testing equipment shall be tested for accuracy according to themanufacturer's instructions. Calibration and maintenance of gas testing equipment shallbe carried out on a regular basis, or as required to ensure accuracy, by InstrumentSection. Dates of calibration and re-calibration shall be displayed on the equipment.

Further Information7.4.6 GAS TESTING









5.8 TRAINING

Performing Authorities, Issuing Authorities and Operations Authorised Persosn for WorkPermits, must attend and pass HSED Permit to Work Training Couse and Test.

An Authorised Gas Tester is a person who has attended the Work Permit Gas TestingTraining Course and has been passed as competent in the use of the test equipment byHSED.

5.9 AUDITING OF THE PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM

5.9.1 DAILY MONITORING

The copy of all new Work Permits issued should be checked daily by HSED at the CCBPermit Office. A random selection of three Work Permits should be checked thoroughlyby a member of HSED for correct form completion, worksite preparation and compliancewith the specified precautions. A Daily Monitoring Check List, see Appendix 10.46,should be used for each Work Permit checked.

Any non-conformance highlighted by the daily monitoring should be noted on a PermitNon-Compliance Report, that should then be sent to HOS who should take thenecessary corrective action.

5.9.2 MONTHLY AUDIT

A monthly audit should be carried out by HO/HOS. For this monthly audit, two signed offOriginals/Copies of each type of Work Permit should be taken at random from HSEDarchive for each of the Process, Utilities and Storex areas and checked systematicallyusing the Monthly Audit Checklist.

A copy of the completed Monthly Audit Checklist should be sent to Area Authority whoshould take the necessary corrective action and to HSED for information.

5.9.3 ANNUAL AUDIT REVIEW

An annual review of the Permit to Work System should be carried out by an audit teamconsisting of members of HSED, Operations Department and Maintenance Department,and chaired by I&QM.

The scope of the annual audit should be drawn up by the chairman of the audit team andagreed with the Production Manager beforehand. Appendix 10.50, Permit to WorkSystem Checklist, shows the Permit to Work checklist that is designed to test integrity ofa Permit to Work System.









An Annual Audit Review Report should be written and include all the findings of the auditteam, together with any recommendations for changes to the Permit to Work System.

5.9.4 EXTERNAL AUDIT REVIEW

An external audit review of the Permit to Work System should be carried out by anapproved external body and must be conducted every two years.

This audit should be initiated by the PROM.

The external auditors should provide a scope and programme for the audit review to ADGAS. On completion of the audit a review report should be written that includes all the

findings of this audit, together with any recommendations for change to the Permit toWork System.






HOT AND N AKED FLAME WORK Chapter No. 06



CHAPTER 6 CONTENTS

6 HOT AND NAKED FLAME WORK .................................................................................................... 227

6.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 227 6.1.1 DEFINITION .............................................................. ................................................................ .. 227 6.1.2 LIMITATIONS ........................................................... ................................................................. .. 227

6.2 PRELIMINARY CONSIDERATIONS .......................................................... .................................. 227 6.2.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 227 6.2.2 PERMIT REQUIRED ................................................................................................................... 228 6.2.3 SUPERVISOR'S DISCRETION ....................................................... ............................................. 228 6.2.4 ZONING OF HAZARDOUS RISK AREAS ............................................................ ....................... 229

6.3 WELDING, CUTTING, BURNING, BRAZING AND SOLDERING ............................................ 229 6.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ......................................................................................................... 229 6.3.2 FUME RISKS IN WELDING ........................................................... ............................................. 231

6.4 GAS WELDING AND CUTTING ................................................................................................... 232 6.4.1 CYLINDER FITTINGS ................................................................................................................. 232 6.4.2 VENTILATION DURING GAS WELDING ........................................................... ....................... 233 6.4.3 REPAIRS TO SMALL CONTAINERS ................................................................... ....................... 234 6.4.4 CYLINDER CARE ........................................................................................................................ 234

6.5 ELECTRIC ARC WELDING AND CUTTING ............................................................................... 235 6.5.1 INJURIOUS EFFECTS OF ARC RADIATION ................................................................ ............ 235 6.5.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND CONNECTIONS ............................................................... ............ 235 6.5.3 WELDING LEADS ....................................................................................................................... 235 6.5.4 EARTHING AND BONDING .......................................................... ............................................. 236 6.5.5

STRAY CURRENTS .............................................................. ........................................................ 236 6.5.6 ELECTRODE HOLDERS ............................................................... ............................................. 237 6.5.7 ENGINE DRIVEN WELDING MACHINES .......................................................... ....................... 237

6.6 PLASMA CUTTING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................... 237 6.6.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 237 6.6.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND CONNECTION ................................................................ ............. 237 6.6.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................ ............................................. 237

6.7 BLAST CLEANING AND PAINTING .......................................................... .................................. 238 6.7.1 DEFINITIONS ........................................................... ................................................................. .. 238 6.7.2 RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................ ........................................................ 238 6.7.3 WORK AREA PROTECTION .......................................................... ............................................. 239 6.7.4 PPE .............................................................................................................................................. 240 6.7.5 EQUIPMENT SAFEGUARDS ................................................................... .................................. 240 6.7.6

ENCLOSED SPACE WORKING ................................................................ .................................. 241 6.7.7 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE ................................................................. .................................. 242 6.8 PORTABLE TOOL IGNITION RISKS .......................................................... .................................. 242

6.8.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 242 6.8.2 ELECTRIC POWER TOOLS ........................................................... ............................................. 242 6.8.3 PNEUMATIC POWER TOOLS ....................................................... ............................................. 243 6.8.4 REDUCED SPARKING TOOLS ................................................................ .................................. 244 6.8.5 STEEL HAND TOOLS ................................................................................................................. 244

6.9 STATIC ELECTRICITY .......................................................... ........................................................ 245 6.9.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 245 6.9.2 ABRASIVE BLASTING ......................................................... ........................................................ 245 6.9.3 SPRAY PAINTING ....................................................................................................................... 246 6.9.4 ENGINE REFUELLING ................................................................. ............................................. 246









6.9.5 MECHANICAL SOURCES......................................................................... .................................. 246 6.9.6 NEEDLE GUNS AND DESCALING .......................................................... .................................. 246 6.9.7 STATIC ELECTRICITY ON PERSONNEL .................................................................................. 246

6.10 PORTABLE GAS DETECTORS ..................................................................................................... 248 6.10.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ ........................................................ 248 6.10.2 WHEN TO TEST .............................................................. ........................................................ 248 6.10.3 TEST RESULT CRITERIA ....................................................................................................... 248 6.10.4 USING GAS DETECTORS ...................................................................................................... 248 6.10.5 WORK EXAMPLES ................................................................................................................. 249 6.10.6 EXPLOSIVE LIMITS FOR PLANT GASES ................................................................ ............. 250 6.10.7 CURRENT DETECTORS ........................................................................................................ 250 6.10.8 "Crowcon" Triple, Type 84 TR Portable Gas Detector ......................................................... .. 251 6.10.9 SIEGER 1601 PORTABLE HYDROCARBON CONTINUOUS GAS MONITOR ('DALEK'

TYPE) 253 6.10.10 "DRAEGER" GAS DETECTOR............................................................................................... 254 6.10.11 MSA "TANKSCOPE" ....................................................... ........................................................ 255 6.10.12 DELMAR MINI-CHECK H2S DETECTOR ............................................................................ 257 6.10.13 OLDHAM (BM 22 PLUS BEACON) ....................................................................................... 258









6 HOT AND NAKED FLAME WORK

6.1 INTRODUCTION

6.1.1 DEFINITION

Hot Work and Naked Flame practices are any work on the plant that will or could createa spark or flame or generate surface temperatures likely to ignite combustible gases orvapours or which are deemed to be of such a hazardous nature that it requires coverageby a Hot Work or Naked Flame Permit.

Further Information ADGAS OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT: Permit to Work Manual ADNOC-COPV4-05: Non-Routine Operations

6.1.2 LIMITATIONS

The amount of simultaneous hot and naked flame work, e.g. welding, cutting andgrinding on the plant must be limited to retain control. Jobs should be fabricated,repaired or modified in the welding workshop if at all possible.

Cold cutting should always be used in preference to flame cutting as it is the saferalternative.

6.2 PRELIMINARY CONSIDERATIONS

6.2.1 GENERAL

Observe any colour coding or other indicators on vessels, lines and valves for theircombustion potential and adjust safe working procedures and precautions accordingly.

Identify other possible work hazards, e.g. any other combustibles, hazardous materials,effects of heat, fire and gas detection, rigging considerations, etc.

Restrict ignition sources wherever possible and satisfy the following questions:

· Can the work piece be prefabricated elsewhere and brought to the site as a bolt upcold work operation?

· Can the hot work or the naked flame be eliminated by selecting alternative safemethods, e.g. cold cutting, air-hydraulic tools or hand tools?

· Can the work be moved out of the hazard area?· Can the design be modified to avoid or minimise hot work or the naked flame e.g.

drilling, bolting or clamping?· Can the worksite be shielded from potentially flammable gas or vapour sources?.









· Are the risks associated with the hot work or naked flame justified ?

If the use of hot work or naked flame methods on site is unavoidable, establish a safe hotwork/naked flame area to meet all local safety requirements. Set up surveillance andemergency procedures. Designate personnel responsibilities for area authority, fireguard, etc. and ensure they are adequately trained in emergency procedures.

Ensure that the appropriate fire fighting equipment is on site and operative/pressured.

Establish emergency communications and alarm procedures and emergency shutdownprocedures of equipment.

Ensure effective communications with the control room and other designated authorities.Prepare the hot work or naked flame permit.

Hold a preliminary briefing, conduct and record a Task Risk Assessment as appropriate,inspect the worksite and have gas testing performed as per the work permitrequirements.

Further Information2.10 Task Risk Assessment

Consider that your work may be in conflict with other activities, e.g. gas release, and thatany changes in the scope of the work or site conditions may require re-permitting.

6.2.2 PERMIT REQUIRED

Site preparation, the gathering of tools, etc. can proceed provided that no electric, gas, orother power systems are energised. Work activities may NOT commence until therelevant fully endorsed work permit is at the worksite.

Further Information5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM

6.2.3 SUPERVISOR'S DISCRETION

Adherence to the safe working guidelines will contribute to the desired state of theworkplace. Supervisors however, must continue to exercise their judgement whenconsidering the approval of welding, gas cutting or grinding in hazardous areas. Thesafe working standards may be extended but not diminished to suit a given worksituation.









6.2.4 ZONING OF HAZARDOUS RISK AREASIn planning hot work in or near hazardous areas, first refer to the hazard zoneclassification for the proposed job site, and establish the appropriate protectivemeasures.

Further InformationChapter 3.4 HAZARDOUS AREAS AND ZONES

6.3 WELDING, CUTTING, BURNING, BRAZING AND SOLDERING

6.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS6.3.1.1 INTRODUCTION

All welding, cutting, burning, brazing and soldering work must be conducted under theconditions of the Permit System and the conditions of such work permits must be strictlyfollowed.

All tanks, vessels and equipment on which welding, cutting, burning, brazing or solderingwork is done, and any area in which the work is carried out, must be free from flammablegases and vapours, and no oil or sludge must be present. A naked flame permit shall becompleted according to these regulations before any naked flame can be used.

Gas and electric welding are safe operations when carried out under correct conditionsof work, but it must be stressed that equipment is to be properly maintained and welllocated with proper lighting. In addition, good ventilation and a tidy work area areimportant factors in safe working.

Precautions concerning ventilation shall be taken when vessels and tanks are beingwelded or burned on the outside and where there is a danger of toxic or flammablegases collecting on the inside.

In no circumstances shall compressed oxygen be used for ventilation or to blow throughacetylene hoses. Explosions can occur when acetylene gas is present in air in any

proportion between 2.5% and 80% volume.

In all welding or burning operations, consideration shall be given to the space betweendouble plates or wear plates where flammable material may be found. Inspection by the Area Authority will be necessary to decide on the precautions to be taken.

Before cutting the bottom plates of any tank, test holes shall first be drilled and gas teststaken to ensure that conditions are safe under the tank floor.

Old barrels or drums shall NOT be used to support work in welding operations in view ofthe explosion risk in the event of accidental flame impingement on such receptacles.











The screens can be simply adjusted to bring either or both screens into use. Alternatively, safety clear glass goggles may be worn in conjunction with the use of ahand screen.

6.3.2 FUME RISKS IN WELDING

Toxic gases and fumes can be produced in welding operations and create serioushazards. The following methods of production of such gases should be noted.

6.3.2.1 NITROUS FUMES AND C ARBON MONOXIDE

Nitrous fumes may be produced if the oxy-acetylene flame is permitted to impinge on alarge mass of metal for long periods during gas welding. A deficiency of air during suchwork may also produce carbon monoxide.

6.3.2.2 ACTION OF THE HEAT SOURCE ON THE B ASE M ATERIALS/WELDING RODS

The arc welding of iron or steel is accompanied by the evolution of considerablequantities of fumes consisting of very fine particles of iron oxide.

The welding of brass, bronze and manganese steel requires the provision of adequateventilation or the wearing of suitable apparatus to give effective nasal-oral protection.

6.3.2.3 ACTION OF HEAT SOURCE ON COATINGS Harmful fumes may be produced by the action of the arc or flame on certain paints andprotective coatings on the metal being welded. The welding and cutting of coatedmaterials shall only be carried out when adequate means for removing the fumes areprovided or adequate respiratory devices are available.

Lead based paints and turn-plating emit harmful lead fumes when welded or cut.Inhalation of the fumes produced during the welding and cutting of zinc galvanised metalmay result in an attack of metal fume fever which is characterised by a raisedtemperature, aching muscles, shivering and sweating. These symptoms develop in afew hours after exposure to the fumes and disappear after a period of about 24 hours.

The welding of greasy material can produce unpleasant fumes and accordingly suchmaterials shall be degreased before welding. Parts that have been degreased shall bedry before welding.

In cases where galvanised, painted, lead or cadmium coated materials are used, air-linemasks shall be worn.

6.3.2.4 H ARDENED DEPOSITS

Where hardened deposits are found on the equipment, welding or cutting shall NOT bestarted until the general nature of the deposits are established. Effective protective











The use of lead washers or any kind of packing whatsoever in the valve joints is strictlyforbidden. Packing, particularly lead or copper, tends to get forced into the orificecausing a blockage; its subsequent extraction is attended by grave risk.

Cylinders containing faulty valve joints, immovable valve spindles, or valve leakage shallbe returned immediately to Stores with a note stating the cylinder number, nature of thefault and whether or not the cylinder is charged. Under no circumstances shall the userof the cylinder attempt any repair whatsoever.

Only standard valve keys shall be used. Cylinder valves shall always be openedSLOWLY by gently tapping the key. Cylinder valves shall always be closed when the

cylinders are empty or not in use. Keys with long leverage shall never be used to force avalve to close. If the valve leaks when closed, it is usually due to grit and this can oftenbe removed by opening the valve slowly and closing it sharply.

Only standard automatic pressure regulators and pressure gauges shall be fitted to bothoxygen and acetylene cylinders when in use. The adjustable screw on the regulatormust always be released before the cylinder is opened. The cylinder valve must beclosed before the regulator is removed.

Only high pressure blow-pipes shall be used with high pressure equipment.

All blowpipes shall be dismantled and cleaned internally at regular intervals. Only themanufacturer's recommended tip cleaner, and not a hard metal reamer, shall be used forcleaning or altering the blowpipe tip, but accumulated slag shall be frequently removedduring operation. The blowpipe tip shall NOT be dipped into the molten metal orotherwise blocked up.

Blowpipes shall be connected to the oxygen and acetylene supply by stout canvasreinforced rubber hose firmly attached. Red hose being used for acetylene and otherflammable gases, and the hose for oxygen coloured blue. Hoses must be examinedperiodically and damaged hose must NOT be used.

The supply of both gases shall be shut off before changing the blowpipe or a cylinder

NoteNew oxygen and acetylene hoses are frequently coated with French chalkduring storage. Hoses shall be blown through with air before being connectedto cylinders and blowpipes to prevent clogging of equipment.

6.4.2 VENTILATION DURING GAS WELDING

The application of an oxy-acetylene flame to sheet metal coated with metallic lead, zinc,lead paints or other injurious substances may give rise to highly toxic vapours,particularly in cutting work where an excess of oxygen is required. For such work, asuitable breathing apparatus (NOT CANISTER RESPIRATOR) shall be worn.









6.4.3 REPAIRS TO SMALL CONTAINERS

These repairs include the welding, brazing, soldering or cutting of drums or containers(e.g. 40 gall. drums, petrol tanks of vehicles) which have contained petroleum productsor other flammable or combustible materials.

Before any work mentioned above is carried out, the drum or container, after removal ofthe filler caps and draining, shall be thoroughly steamed out or submerged in boilingwater and kept at the boiling point for at least one hour.

After the steaming or boiling process, compressed air (ensuring that the air has a free

exit to prevent build-up of pressure) shall be blown through the drum or container untilthe vapours are removed. Before carrying out the work, the drum or containers must becertified "Gas Free" and the appropriate Naked Flame Permit completed.

When burning or welding is in progress on a small vessel, unburnt gases can collectinside and an explosive mixture can be formed. Compressed air or steam shall bepassed through the vessel, care being taken to ensure free and adequate exit for the airor steam.

Compressed oxygen must NOT be used for purging.

The following methods are considered inadequate in preparing vessels for repairpurposes:

· Washing out with hot or cold water or allowing water to run through.· Purging with compressed air.· Cleaning by means of solvents such as trichloroethylene (Genklene).

All vessels sent to the Workshops for repair shall be certified free of gas and corrosivechemicals with a Blue Label or carry a Red label warning of possible contamination.

Further Information

GOP4.1.

6.4.4 CYLINDER CARE

Further InformationChapter 4.8 COMPRESSED GASES









6.5 ELECTRIC ARC WELDING AND CUTTING

6.5.1 INJURIOUS EFFECTS OF ARC RADIATION

The injurious effects of the radiation from a welding arc on the eyes and skin are similarwhether direct or alternating current is employed. The effect of looking at an unscreenedarc, even at a considerable distance and for a few seconds only, can cause a temporaryeye injury that, however, does not become apparent until some four to eight hours later.

It is therefore necessary for the welder and any helper to protect their eyes with thescreens, goggles or spectacles provided. The work shall also be effectively screenedfrom other workers nearby.

6.5.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND CONNECTIONS

All welding sets, cables, connectors and terminations shall be maintained in goodcondition.

Electrical supply and earthing connections to welding transformers and generator setsshall be made and maintained (and condemned where required) by the ElectricalSection. Inspection of all trailing leads from machine to "work piece" shall be carried outregularly by the Fabrication Supervisor.

All supplies for welding equipment shall be made with approved cables and approvedplug boxes, and shall be controlled from a circuit that includes protection sensitive toearth fault currents.

Where stationary transformers or generator sets are being used, a suitable switch shallbe mounted adjacent to the equipment so that it can be isolated from supply.

6.5.3 WELDING LEADS

Portable transformers or generator sets having trailing leads shall be provided withinterlocked fused switch sockets and plugs, thus protecting both trailing cable andequipment.

All welding leads and returns shall consist of flexible tough rubber covered cablesconnected where necessary by approved cable couplers. All leads shall be properlyterminated, and lead cable couplers and terminations shall be of adequate currentcarrying capacity.

To avoid long lengths of power cables, the machine shall be sited as close as possible tothe power supply points









A welding return lead shall be provided from the neutral terminal of each phase of an ACwelding transformer or the negative terminal of a DC generator to the "work piece". Thislead is required in addition to the earth bonding.

The connections at the "work piece" shall be made by firmly bolting or clamping as nearas possible to the point at which welding is to take place.

Where more than one operator is working from the same welding machine, the polarity ofeach welding lead and welding return shall be the same.

When two or more leads are being used in a confined area, the corresponding leads

must be paired and, as far as possible, the crossing of pairs with one another or with anysingle lead shall be avoided.

In instances where welding leads trail near tanks or sumps that may containhydrocarbons, additional lengths of cable shall be added to the circuit to circumvent thedanger area.

6.5.4 EARTHING AND BONDING

For all AC welding transformers, the transformer low voltage winding shall NOT beearthed, but the transformer case shall be effectively bonded to an earthing systemadjacent to the equipment.

For all AC driven DC welding generators earth connectings shall be applied to either poleof the DC welding output. The machine frame shall be effectively bonded to earth.

In both the above cases the "Work Piece" shall be bonded to earth by means of a heavysection conductor having suitable clamped or bolted connections.

For engine driven DC welding generators earth connections shall NOT be applied to thegenerator output terminals.

Under no circumstances shall pipeline or structures be used for earthing purposes.

Before electric welding commences the Electrical Section shall ensure that adjacentcathodic protection systems are not affected.

6.5.5 STRAY CURRENTS

In all cases where butt welding of two items (e.g. butt ends of pipe) is required andneither item is permanently attached to any structure, both items must be connected tothe welding return. Bonding shall be effected by the use of mechanical clamps orsecurely attached clips. This requirement is necessary to prevent stray electric currentscausing sparks at a distance from the welding point where there may be flammableatmospheres.









6.5.6 ELECTRODE HOLDERS

Electrode holders shall be provided with a handle of tough insulating non-ignitablematerial with a guard disc of similar material between the hand of the operator and theprojecting line portion.

An electrode holder when not in use, shall be placed on insulating supports.

6.5.7 ENGINE DRIVEN WELDING MACHINES

Engine driven welding machines must not be refuelled whilst in operation. A Hot Work

Permit must be in force where applicable (i.e. within Restricted Area).

6.6 PLASMA CUTTING SYSTEM

6.6.1 INTRODUCTION

Plasma is a gas that has been heated to an extremely high temperature and ionized sothat the gas becomes electrically conductive.

The plasma cutting process uses this plasma to transfer an electric arc to the workpiece.The metal to be cut is melted by the heat of the arc and then blown away by a secondarygas.

6.6.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND CONNECTION

To avoid over heating of the cables and the generator, the overload switch should bemaintained properly to trip the generator.

Special care should be taken to ensure that electrical cables and cooling hose are notdamaged by constant movement.

The plasma cutting nozzle can be susceptible to mechanical damage and should beprotected or stored carefully when not in use.

6.6.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Ventilation must be adequate to remove the smoke during cutting.

Vapours of chlorinated solvents can form the toxic gas phosgene. All solvents,degreasers and potential sources of these vapours must be removed from the cuttingarea.

Keep all fumes and gases away from breathing area.

To avoid eye injuries use welding shield with number 10 lens or darker.









Wear proper protective clothing.

Install and maintain equipment according to National Electrical Code® 2005 Edition(NFPA 70).

Proper grounding procedures must be adhered to when using plasma cutting equipmentto avoid electrical shock.

DO NOT contact electrically live parts.

Replace any cracked or damaged insulating parts, including torch bodies and hoses.

Turn off primary power before working on torch parts, including changing cups and tips.

Remove combustibles from working area before start of the work and provide a firewatch.

Operators and others in the near vicinity should use hearing protection. Plasma cuttingproduces 90 dB(A) when cutting 20 mm thick material.

Further InformationNational Electrical Code® 2005 Edition (NFPA 70)

6.7 BLAST CLEANING AND PAINTING

6.7.1 DEFINITIONS

BLAST CLEANING consists of particles of sand, powdered quartz, chilled-iron globules,emery or other hard granular material blown by a jet of compressed air, water or steamagainst a surface with the intention of removing scale, rust or old surface coatings beforepainting or coating.

PAINTING as covered in this section consists of the application of a protective coating

material using a spray by compressed air or hydraulic atomisation (airless), or usingother more conventional methods of application such as brushes, rollers, sponges, etc.


Although blasting and painting requirements are generally undertaken by contractors,there may be occasions when these activities are undertaken by ADGAS staff.

In either case the following responsibilities are applicable:

· Personnel must be trained and qualified to undertake the required work.









· All required equipment must be safe and well maintained.· Personnel must be aware of any specific safety requirements and information that

may affect the working conditions or procedures.· All work must be carried out under the Work Permit procedures. A Hot Work Permit

is required for any blast cleaning operation.· Because of the possibility of inhalation of dust and fumes, it is recommended that any

personnel involved in blast cleaning and paint spraying are subject to regular lungfunction examinations.

· Before commencement of any grit blasting, the area shall be inspected by OD toensure permit compliance. Daily inspections and permit revalidation are alsorequired.

Further InformationPMED SI H-10 - 01, Dry Grit Blasting on LNG Plant.

6.7.3 WORK AREA PROTECTION

All necessary protection of the work area shall be provided to ensure the work can beperformed in a safe manner, to both personnel and installed equipment.

Warning signs indicating that blast cleaning or painting is being carried out in a specificarea shall be provided in conspicuous places on the periphery of that area.

Markers, ropes or barricades shall be erected to prevent easy access to the work area byunauthorised personnel.

Protective materials such as tarpaulins, plastic sheeting, etc., shall be provided aroundthe work area to provide protection to personnel and equipment outside the work area,and to retain grit within the screened area.

Protective coverings or masking shall be provided to protect instruments, instrumentslines, gauges, valves, etc., which are not to be blasted or painted. These coverings willbe so constructed, and be of the correct materials, to with stand the mechanical andchemical effects of blasting and painting.

Tarpaulins, plastic sheets etc. must not come into contact with hot surfaces (steam pipesetc.) or potential hot surfaces.

Electrical cables and air lines used in carrying out blasting and painting operations will beso protected that they will not be damaged by the work in hand or by work in other areas.

Housekeeping is essential with blasting and painting areas, with excessive debris, spentabrasive and expended paint containers being removed as soon as reasonablypracticable, with the site being thoroughly cleaned after each work period.









6.7.4 PPEDue to the hazardous nature of blast cleaning and painting, the following additionalpersonal protective equipment shall be provided and used when undertaking theseactivities.

6.7.4.1 BLAST CLEANING

Personnel shall wear long trousers and long sleeved shirts, with a heavy duty protectivecoat or oversuit.

Heavy duty leather gloves shall be worn, together with a protective hood that may be

provided with air cooling facilities.

Full face shields will be worn.

Dust filter masks will be used when dry blasting is undertaken.

Hearing protection of an approved type will be worn as necessary.

6.7.4.2 P AINTING

Dust filter masks will be used during paint application by spray.

Safety glasses or goggles of an approved type will be worn during all spray paintoperations.

Long sleeved shirts and long trousers will be worn during all paint operations.

6.7.5 EQUIPMENT SAFEGUARDS

Static electricity can be generated in the hoses and nozzles of blast cleaning and spraypainting equipment, especially in airless spray equipment.

All discharge nozzles and hoses shall be properly earthed to minimise static electricitybuild up.

Earthing shall be ensured by either using hose that is constructed to include an earthingconductor, or by the attachment of a properly earthed static cable to the nozzle or spraygun, and earthing the object being cleaned or sprayed.

6.7.5.1 DISPENSER REFILLING

The method of containing, dispensing and refilling both blast cleaning abrasives andpaint will vary dependent on manufacturer and type being used but the followingprecautions will generally apply:









· Ensure all pressure is vented slowly from any material container or supply hosebefore opening container.

· Do not re-apply pressure to the nozzle until it is manned.· Do not overfill dispenser, and ensure that all covers/lids are properly secured and are

air tight at operating pressures.

6.7.5.2 AIR COMPRESSORS

Most blast cleaning and spray painting requires air to perform the desired work, andtherefore the safety considerations are important.

The air compressor shall be located as near as practicable to the work site, with

adequate access for inspections, maintenance and refuelling.

Compressors shall have a fire guard, with suitable equipment, positioned adjacent tothem whilst running.

Location of compressors shall not cause interference with other work areas, and shall notblock or constrict access or escape routes.

Trailer compressors shall have provision to prevent movement of the trailer duringoperation, i.e. wheel chocks, support stands, etc.

Operation of the air compressors shall be strictly according to the manufacturer'sinstruction.

Engine packages are to conform to Section 13 of this Chapter "Diesel Engine Units".

6.7.5.3 WET GRIT BLASTING

In addition to the general precautions, given above, for dry blast cleaning, the followingspecific requirements apply to wet grit blasting:

· Wet Grit Blasting equipment shall be so designed to ensure grit is mixed with waterbefore leaving nozzle.

· Only inhibited water shall be used for wet grit blasting and any subsequent washingdown operations.

· The wet grit blasting equipment shall include an automatic cut out, ensuring a failsafe condition if a pressure drop occurs in the inhibited water supply.

6.7.6 ENCLOSED SPACE WORKING

Where practicable, at least two possible exits should be established from an enclosedspace, each well marked and kept clear of obstructions at all times.









Effective ventilation and exhaust of the space must be established beforecommencement of work, with gas tests having been carried out to verify suitability ofenclosed atmosphere.

In enclosures where the possibility of toxic or flammable gas releases exists, appropriateemergency escape breathing apparatus sets shall be provided.

Evacuation plans must be prepared by the Contractor and approved by HSED prior tocommencement of work.

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all equipment is maintained

according to manufacturers instructions/accepted codes of practice.

Where possible, maintenance shall be carried out off work site.

All equipment must be cleaned immediately after use to ensure no blocking or cloggingwill occur.

Compliance with the conditions of the Permit System is mandatory.

6.7.7 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE

When using solvents and/or flammable liquids for cleaning purposes, utmost care must

be taken that no sources of ignition exist nearby, that ventilation is adequate, that allflammable liquid containers are properly sealed and returned to suitable storage, andthat used fluids are disposed of in a safe manner. Brushes, rollers, etc., are not to be leftsoaking in cleaning fluids.

6.8 PORTABLE TOOL IGNITION RISKS

6.8.1 INTRODUCTION

Because of the portable nature of hand and smaller power tools, some of which areignition sources and capable of igniting hydrocarbons gases, strict controls on their usein the plant is necessary.

As a general rule the common electric hand tools in general use are not permitted inclassified hazard areas. Air powered tools are the intrinsically safe alternative andshould be used wherever practicable.

6.8.2 ELECTRIC POWER TOOLS

Electric power tools may be used in the plant in non-hazard areas or in special casesunder a hot work permit when no safe alternative exists.











Note A pneumatic tool may be classified as an ignition source by virtue of itsapplication that may result in spark generation or static electricity, e.g. needleguns.

Air driven power tools may only be used after all the required permits to carry out thework are duly authorised.

Compressed air driven lamps of an approved type and associated with other work maybe used within classified hazardous areas. The voltage generated by such lamps shallnot be higher than 24 volts.

6.8.4 REDUCED SPARKING TOOLS

The use of special 'non-sparking' tools is not recommended for use in the plant.

If used, with no alternative, their condition should be checked and the user made awarethat they are not a complete safeguard against ignition and represent risks to the user.

Non, or reduced-sparking hand tools, normally non-ferrous in design, suffer from anumber of deficiencies:

· They can produce sparks even when in first class condition.

· As they are made of softer materials, particles of steel and other materials canbecome imbedded in them and in this condition can produce higher energy sparksthan the normal steel tools.

· Because of their poor mechanical properties they have contributed to hazards of adifferent kind, e.g. personal injury.

6.8.5 STEEL HAND TOOLS

There is ample evidence to show that the impact of steel on steel while using hand toolswill not produce sparks of sufficient energy to ignite hydrocarbon/air mixtures undernormal conditions. However, ignition is possible in hydrogen/air mixtures and inatmospheres of enriched oxygen. However, intrinsically safe power driven tools (e.g.grinders or drills) may produce high energy sparks which are capable of igniting gas/airmixtures.

The impact of steel tools on rust or finely divided metal such as aluminium, can produceincendiary sparks. Therefore, where sparking could present a hazard, the effects ofaccidental impacts such as dropping tools should be avoided and restraining lanyardsmay be effective.

Safety in this regard may be enhanced by covering areas of equipment with soft impactabsorbing material around and below the job.









6.9 STATIC ELECTRICITY

6.9.1 INTRODUCTION

Static electricity is one of the most difficult ignition hazards to control. There are fewoperations in which it is not present to some degree and it is more serious when humidityis low. Static electricity is generated in several ways; by friction, by making andbreaking of physical contact between two masses and by the passage of solids, liquidsor gases at high velocity through pipework or apertures.

The control of static electricity charges in electrically conductive materials is made easierby providing the correct grounding and ensuring that bonding procedures are followed.

Control of this problem on non-conductors such as plastic pipe, requires specialprocedures as the object cannot be grounded in the normal manner.

More obvious hot work such as welding is covered as a matter of course under the hotwork permit system and receives the full impact of the precautionary measures designedto prevent ignition. Ignition caused by procedures normally considered safe, as insampling and decanting, needs special attention due to the possibility of static discharge.

The rate of static charge generation in fluid flow is relative to:

· Rate of flow (velocity).

· Conductivity of the two materials.· Amount of turbulence and splashing.· Surface area of the interface.

The presence of impurities in material f lows, such as water droplets or solids, alsogreatly increases the rate of static electricity generation. Equipment must always begrounded to prevent static charge build-up, therefore dipping tanks immediately aftertransfer is not recommended.

6.9.2 ABRASIVE BLASTING

Abrasive blasting generates high static charges. Sparks jump from the hose to groundand for this reason the hose should always be grounded.

Nozzles must be bonded to the work piece or via the hose to the process structure.Nozzle and hose electrical continuity must be checked before use and verified at regular,frequent intervals.

Wet blasting using the addition of water to the abrasive blast effectively 'grounds' theequipment continuously due to the electrically conductive properties of water.











The person may be insulated because he is standing on an insulating floor or is wearinginsulating footwear.

The person's body can be charged by contact electrification, induction or charge sharing.Examples of charge generating mechanism include:

· Walking on an insulating floor, for example a carpet made of high resistivity material,or polyurethane foam insulation used in annular space of propane/butane tanks.

· Removal of an outer garment, especially if manufactured from low conductivitysynthetic material.

· Pouring of a liquid or a powder from a container held by a person.

A fire hazard is created when the charge is retained in the presence of a flammable gas-air mixture. In such situations the precautions set out below must be taken.

A conductive path must be provided by the person and earth. This can be most easilyachieved by the use of conductive footwear and/or the provision of conductive flooring.

Leather-soled footwear is usually sufficiently conductive although it may fail under verydry conditions. Alternatively, anti-static footwear should be worn, but it should beappreciated that these could be ineffective if the wearer were walking on a lowconductivity material such as polyurethane foam used as insulation.

Under normal circumstances earth, sand, concrete or tarmac surfaces are sufficientlyconductive to dissipate charge from personnel, although this may not be the case undervery dry conditions.

CautionIn general, although man-made fibres are more prone to static charging effects,clothing made from any material can be worn provided that the wearer isearthed as described above. However, clothing or any material must not beremoved in an area where a flammable gas-air mixture is present, since theaction can create sparks.

Further InformationIP Model Code of Practice, Part 1 Electrical Safety Code 7th edition, August2003.Loss Prevention in the process Industries, F. Lees.









6.10 PORTABLE GAS DETECTORS

6.10.1 INTRODUCTION

While the operation of a portable gas detector is not usually defined as hot work, the useof these instruments is inseparable from the safe conduct of any kind of hot work ornaked flame in the plant.

Prior testing and monitoring for explosive atmospheres is accepted as normal mandatoryaction where major ignition source jobs such as welding are undertaken in hazardousareas. Work operations involving the potential for a random spark, may be overlookedas being of minor risk, but do however, require the full use of gas testing and monitoring

procedures.

Gas testing for hot or naked flame work, vessel entry and other critical operations mayonly be performed by trained and authorised personnel (Authorised Gas Testers).

Authorised Gas Tester personnel are authorised by the Operations Manager aftersuccessful completion of a two part gas detector training course conducted the OD andthe HSED.

6.10.2 WHEN TO TEST

A gas test must be performed before commencing any hot or naked flame or confinedspace entry work and periodically or continuously during any potential spark or flameproducing operation.

6.10.3 TEST RESULT CRITERIA

When gas tests are conducted to conform to permit requirements, only zero readings fortoxic and flammable gases and 20% for oxygen will be acceptable.

Further InformationOD SI W-12, Minimum O2 level for entry

6.10.4 USING GAS DETECTORS

6.10.4.1 OPERATING PROCEDURES

Understand how the unit works, its use and limitations

Ensure that the unit has been calibrated within the specified service period byreferencing the attached calibration label.

Ensure that equipment is in sound mechanical condition and check the calibration of theunit before use or when its accuracy is in doubt.









If an extension tube is to be used, allow enough time for the mixture to reach the cell.

Begin aspirating as the mixture to be tested is approached, not after the probe or testeris inserted in the mixture. Observe the meter and alarm at all times.

Ensure that check valves are in place on the inlet and outlet of the bulb in the correctflow direction on manually aspirated models, or sample gas may not reach the cell.

6.10.4.2 UNSAFE AND IMPROPER PROCEDURES:

· Contamination or damage to the cell caused by immersing the probe or detector inliquids.

· Dropping or knocking the instrument· Using for prolonged periods in high gas concentrations, as the filament may be

damaged or burnt out.· Forcing the mixture through the detector. The sample must be at atmospheric

pressure and aspirated (drawn) through the detector.· Using with raw oxygen, acetylene or hydrogen, as the instrument may ignite the gas.· Reliance on the gas detector to measure the exact percentage of gas present, i.e. if

flammable gas is present, hot work and naked flame is not permitted in the area.

6.10.5 WORK EXAMPLES

Examples of work involving the potential for sparking include:

· Opening electrical junction boxes.· Using equipment that is not intrinsically safe (Non-IS) for use in gas atmospheres.· Using impact type tools.

A gas test of the immediate area of the worksite must be performed. Particular attentionmust be paid to flanges, seals, vents, high and low points, valve packings and areaswhere pockets of gas may collect.

Examples of work generating spark or flame include:

· Welding.· Grinding.· Heating or oxy-acetylene cutting.

Further InformationFull details of the requirements for gas testing are contained in the OD WorkPermit Manual.









6.10.6 EXPLOSIVE LIMITS FOR PLANT GASES

GAS LEL UEL

Methane 5.3 13.3

Ethane 3.2 12.5

Propane 2.3 7.3

Butane 1.8 8.4

Hydrogen Sulphide 4.3 46.0

Pentane 1.4 7.8

Table 6-1: UEL/LEL of Plant Gases

Note A reading of 2% LEL on the gas detector dial in an atmosphere of pentaneindicates that the actual concentration in the area is 2% of 1.4 = 0.028%

6.10.7 CURRENT DETECTORS

The following equipment is available for use on the LNG facility:-

Crowcon Triple, Type 84 TR.Suitable for measurement of gases in AIR mixtures only. Can be used to detectflammable, toxic and oxygen concentrations in air.

Refer to Para 6.10.8

Seiger 1601 (Dalek)Suitable for measurement of concentrations of hydrocarbon gases in AIR mixtures only.

Is used as a continuous gas monitor in association with "Hot Work" and "Naked Flame"work.


Draeger Gas DetectorSuitable for measurement of gases in AIR mixtures only.

Can be used for spot checks where approximate quantities are acceptable.










MSA " Tankscope"Suitable for measurement of gases in inert, (Nitrogen), atmospheres.

Can be used to detect hydrocarbons in vessels or pipelines purged with N2


The Delmar Lead Acetate CassetteThis is a cassette measuring device for individual assessment of H2S levels.


OLDHAM (BM 22 Plus Beacon)It can be used to detect the presence of four gases simultaneously in the air by means ofmeasuring all specific to each of the gases to be detected. These can be explosive ortoxic gases or oxygen.


6.10.8 "CROWCON" TRIPLE, TYPE 84 TR PORTABLE GAS DETECTOR


The Triple 84 TR is a free standing, self powered, portable gas detector forhydrocarbons, hydrogen sulphide and oxygen.

The sensors used are pellistors for flammable gases and electrochemical cells for H2Sand O2

All alarms are indicated by a penetrating audible alarm and flashing lamps. Alarms areset at 20% LEL for flammables, 10 ppm for H2S, 19% for O2 deficiency and 24% for O2enrichment.

The unit is powered by a detachable nickel cadmium battery pack. Batteries can eitherbe charged in situ via the charging socket under the door on the top of the instrument, or

they can be charged separately from the instrument.

CAUTION:The Crowcon Triple flammable sensor is calibrated specifically for methane, andalthough it will respond to nearly all other flammable gases, it may give higher or lowerreadings with these other gases.

6.10.8.2 LIMITATIONS OF USE

This unit will not detect the presence of flammable gases in inert atmospheres, or ofcombustible mists such as lubricating oil.











Digital read-out will indicate PPM when switch is in "TOX" position.

Digital read-out will indicate percentage of oxygen present when switch is in "Ox"position.

When alternating modes, i.e. when changing from sampling flammable gases tosampling toxic gas, it will be necessary to allow the instrument to purge for approximately1 minute in fresh air prior to the change.

Prior to returning the unit to storage/recharging, allow it to purge in fresh air for at least 1minute before switching off.

6.10.8.5 FLAT B ATTERY ALARM

If, whilst the unit is in use, the battery voltage falls below the operating requirement, anaudible warning will be sounded. This is a steady continuous note quite distinct from thewarbling alarm note. At the same time the intermittent audible click and flashing greenlight, indicating normal operation, will cease.

6.10.9 SIEGER 1601 PORTABLE HYDROCARBON CONTINUOUS GAS MONITOR('DALEK' TYPE)


In order to be of any use, a monitor must be placed up-wind of the persons or equipmentto be protected and is only as good as the person watching it for signals. Although it hasan audible alarm, this may not be heard on the LNG Plant due to the high noise levels.

6.10.9.2 SIGNALS

The Sieger 1601 ('Dalek' type) is capable of giving two distinct Audio/Visual signals asfollows:-

Intermittent 'Bleeper' Note and Flashing Light

This is the gas alarm signal indicating that gas is present at or above 25% of the lowerexplosive limit of the gas picked up by the sensor. The exact percentage will be shownon the scale.

ACTION;

Immediately stop all Naked Flame and Hot-Work in areaEvacuate persons in immediate vicinityUse breathing apparatus if necessaryInform Central Control Building as soon as possibleOperations personnel should endeavour to stop leak.









Constant Note With Light On (but Not Flashing)

This is the low battery charge signal

ACTION

Switch the instrument off and obtain a replacement.Naked Flame-Work or Hot-Work on a permit requiring a gas monitor should bediscontinued until a replacement is in operation.

6.10.9.3 B ATTERY CHANGING

Battery changing is carried out by the Electrical Section. A 12-hour or a 24-hour batterymay be fitted.

6.10.9.4 ADDITIONAL F ACILITY

The Sieger 1601 may be used with the sensor attached to the instrument or placed on a60-foot extended lead when required Appendix 6-10-2

6.10.10 "DRAEGER" GAS DETECTOR

6.10.10.1 INTRODUCTION The Draeger Gas Detector is a standard volume bellows pump (100cc) into which adetector tube is tightly fitted. These tubes are sealed until required when both ends arebroken off before insertion in the pump. Tubes are available for specific toxic gases andare reasonably accurate. Aspirate only the number of times stated on the tube packetand interpret the results as directed.

6.10.10.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Test the pump before use by compressing fully and sealing the inlet. The pump shouldnot expand.

Ensure correct tubes are selected for specific gas.

Ensure that the tube is fitted the right way, with the arrow pointing towards the pump.

The chain must be fully extended between aspirations.

Replacement tubes are supplied by the Chief Chemist.









6.10.11 MSA "TANKSCOPE"6.10.11.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The MSA Tankscope is intended primarily for the measurement of hydrocarbon gasconcentrations in vessels or lines which contain inert gas

The instrument is scaled 0-20% gas and the standard calibration gas mixtures arecomposed of butane in inert gas. The inert gas used for calibration purposes is a mixturecontaining 85% vol. nitrogen and 15% vol. carbon dioxide.

The MSA Tankscope determines hydrocarbon concentrations by measuring the rate of

heat loss from a heated filament to the surrounding gas mixture. The rate of heat lossdepends on the heat transport characteristics of the gas mixture. Given a relativelyconstant quality of background gas, the heat transport characteristics of the mixturedepend on the hydrocarbon concentration.

The gas sample is drawn through the instrument by means of a rubber aspirator bulbfitted with double acting check valves. Measurement of hydrocarbon gas concentrationsis made over the full range of the instrument without dilution of the sample.

Two identical heated filaments are employed in a Wheatstone bridge measuring circuit inthe MSA Tankscope. Initially both filaments are exposed to air that is free fromhydrocarbons and the instrument circuit is balanced, i.e. zeroed. One filament is thenexposed to the gas sample which causes a change of balance between the filaments.The out-of-balance change in the Wheatstone bridge is indicated as a gas concentration

The dual filament arrangement has the advantage of providing a fully balanced bridge,thus compensating for battery voltage drift. Separate controls are provided for adjustingcircuit voltage and zero.

Experimental investigations have shown that the heat transport properties of inert gasand air are virtually identical. This fact allows the MSA Tankscope to be zeroed on airand used to measure hydrocarbon gas concentrations in inert gas.

If a MSA Tankscope should be re-calibrated for other gaseous mixtures, the heattransport properties of air and the background gas may not coincide.

In this case it would be necessary to zero the instrument using the appropriatebackground gas.

6.10.11.2 LIMITATION OF USE

The MSA Tankscope is limited to measuring gas concentrations in mixtures for which theinstrument has been calibrated and which remain gaseous at the temperature of theinstrument.









Any atmosphere that is at a temperature substantially higher than that of the MSATankscope may contain components that will condense in the instrument. In such asituation the instrument reading would not provide an accurate measurement of theoriginal gas sample.

The sampling lines and the MSA Tankscope could be heated to prevent condensation,but in no circumstances should they be heated to a temperature more than 65°C.

The MSA Tankscope will not detect the presence of liquid mists, such as the lubricatingoil mists which are present in gear boxes and engine crankcases.

6.10.11.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

The measuring circuit is a balanced Wheatstone bridge. Three major steps must betaken before samples are drawn into the instrument for analysis:

· The detector chamber must be swept free of hydrocarbon gases and filled with inertgas or air.

· Batteries must be turned ON, and the proper voltage applied to the bridge.· The bridge must be balanced to zero deflection on the meter with inert gas or fresh

air in the open chamber.

Note

The MSA Tankscope is sensitive to tilt. It is important therefore that theinstrument should be kept in a normal upright position at all times during itsoperation. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to significant errors ininstrument readings.

The following steps must be followed carefully for proper results:

· Check calibration, etc.· Attach the sampling line to the inlet of the instrument and the aspirator bulb to the

outlet. Check the air tightness of the system by pinching a bight on the sampling lineand squeezing the aspirator bulb. The aspirator bulb should not expand as long as

the sampling line is pinched. If the bulb expands, re-check the connections and thenon-return valves on the aspirator bulb.

Place sample line in fresh air.

Turn selector switch to "Check". This places the meter across the active filament whereit will indicate the voltage across the filament.

Pull straight up on the switch. This operation closes the battery circuit and the meterpointer will now be seen to move on the scale towards the "Check" point.









The air is drawn through the Tankscope by alternately squeezing the rubber aspiratorbulb and allowing it to expand completely. Eight to ten squeezes of the aspirator bulbare sufficient to flush the chamber. If a sampling line is used, approximately twoadditional squeezes will be required for each 3 m of line.

Adjust the meter pointer to "Check". To accomplish this turn the volt adjust knob in thedirection the meter pointer must move to come to "Check". This establishes the properoperating voltage to the bridge.

Turn the Selector switch to "Gas".

Adjust the meter pointer to "Zero".

For ordinary usage the MSA Tankscope will be fitted with a sampling line attached to theinlet connection.

Place the end of the sampling line at the point where the sample is to be taken, ensuringthat the sample line is not in any liquid. Aspirate the sample through the instrument. Theaspirator bulb should be operated until the meter pointer comes to rest on the scale (witha 1.5m sampling line and probe, the meter pointer should rise on the scale within fifteensqueezes of the bulb. If it does not move in this time, the sample may be considered gasfree).

Stop aspiration and note final reading attained. It is important that the reading should betaken with zero flow through the instrument and with the gas at normal atmosphericpressure. During aspiration the needle will come to a steady reading. When aspirationstops, the reading will change by a small amount. In general the reading will decreaseslightly but in some instruments a slight increase may be observed. The "No-flow"reading is correct.

Relatively small deviation from normal atmospheric pressure in the instrument producessignificant differences in the indicated gas concentration. If a space which is underelevated or reduced pressure is sampled, it is important to detach the sampling line fromthe MSA Tankscope when aspiration is stopped. This allows the instrument to attain

atmospheric pressure before the reading is noted.

After each reading flush the sampling line and instrument with fresh air.

6.10.12 DELMAR MINI-CHECK H2S DETECTOR

6.10.12.1 OPERATION

Turn winding knob counter clockwise, as the arrows indicate, to expose a fresh,unexposed portion of the chemically impregnated tape at the exposure port.









Breathe several times into the exposure port to slightly moisten the tape. Never placeeven a drop of water directly on the tape, as wet tape will break very easily.

Place Mini-Check in area, so that exposure port is exposed to the atmosphere to bechecked for H2S. Avoid moving air streams, as they will likely cause a higher readingthan the actual H2S level of the atmosphere.

After approximately three minutes, compare the tape colour at the exposure port to thecolour standards to determine the approximate H2S level.

To conserve the tape, do not rotate the knob until you are ready to take another reading.

The unique design of the Min-Check does permit a comparison of several successivereadings.

After approximately 1000 uses, the chemically impregnated tape can be replaced with afresh roll. Also, should the tape break (probably due to excessive moisture on the tape),it can be repaired.

To replace or repair the tape, remove the two screws and the mini-check top cover. Thiswill expose the tape so that a piece of scotch tape can be used for repair of forreplacement with a fresh roll.

Note Always wash hands after handling the chemically impregnated tape.

6.10.13 OLDHAM (BM 22 PLUS BEACON)


The BM22 plus Beacon is a portable gas detector. It can be used to detect the presenceof four gases simultaneously in the air by means of measuring cells specific to each ofthe gases to be detected. These can be explosive or toxic gases or oxygen.

The BM 22 PLUS must be placed in the vertical position with the battery unit as the base.Depending on the " of gas to be detected or which may be present, the appliance mustbe placed:

On the ground, for the detection of heavy gases (H2S, CO), At mid height (about 1 metre above the ground) or at the outlet of a ventilation port forthe general detection of a maximum number of gases or for oxygen monitoring).

The gas content measured by each of the cells in service can be viewed on thealphanumeric display panel. This display panel is divided into four separate areas









0 LEL 10 ppm0.0 ppm 20.9

0 CH4 10 CO

0.0 NO2 20.9 O2

(quadrants), each one corresponding to a specific cell or channel. A maximum of fourmeasurements can be displayed simultaneously.

Example:

The values representing the concentration of methane gas (0% LEL CH4), of CO (10ppm CO), of NO2 (0.0 ppm N02) and oxygen (20.9% O2) are clearly displayed.

Example of alternating display (measurement - -type of gas) illustrating the sequence ofdata displayed after reading.

6.10.13.2 STARTING UP

When the appliance is started up, you have the choice between the following threeprocedures:

1. The standard procedure adopted in most cases,2. A procedure allowing the reference explosive gas to be selected, which is useful

when checking for a specific gas (town -as. methane, etc.)3. A procedure known as "auto-adjustment" which allows the automatic adjustment

of the zero of explosimetric cells or toxic gas metering cells as well as the settingof the oxygen cell to 20.9%. This procedure must be regularly carried out.

6.10.13.3 SHUTTING DOWN

The appliance is shut down by holding down the "ON/OFF" key for three seconds

6.10.13.4 LIGHTING OF DISPLAY P ANEL

It can be made easier to read measurements in dimly lit conditions by pressing the"Lighting" key. This operates a back-lighting device which lights up the data on thedisplay panel. This lighting is automatically stitched off after 15 seconds

The lighting section can be used in hazardous environments, i.e. environmentscontaining explosive gases: the BM 22 PLUS beacon complies with intrinsic safetyrequirements,









6.10.13.5 SCROLLING THROUGH P ARAMETERS STORED IN MEMORY During normal operation of the appliance, you can consult data sequences regarding, onthe one hand, gas measurements and, on the other hand, specific data internal to theappliance (battery voltage, date and time). These displays are selected by pressing the"Up" arrow key the required number of times the data memorized by the appliance arethen displayed. Starting from the display of instantaneous measurements and inmaximum configuration, the data displayed concerns:

6.10.13.6 ALARMS

The alarms given are of the visual type (indicator lights and display panel) and the audio

type

GAS ALARMS

Depending on the programming and the type of gas “Gas alarms’’ may be triggeredwhen the following values are exceeded :

· Instantaneous (on all four channels)· Minimum (applicable on the Oxygen metering channel only)· Maximum (on all four channels)· Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL) corresponding to a sliding mean over 15 minites

on each channel equipped with a toxic gas metering cell· Time limit Value (TLV) corresponding to a sliding mean over 8 hours on each channelequipped with a toxic gas metering cell.

LEL ALARM (explosimetri c)

Proceed with caution (presence of explosive gases)Press ‘’ENTER’’ in order to:

Try to acknowledge the audio alarm (Acknowledgement is possible if the measurement isless then 10% LEL) and reactivate the display

OXYGEN ALARM

The oxygen measurement must be between the two oxygen thresholds: excess oxygenand insufficient oxygen. The alarm is triggered as soon as the measurement fails to fallwithin the ‘’High alarm/Low alarm’’ window

Leave the area as quickly as possible. Excessive oxygen content and insufficient oxygencontent are both hazardous.

Press ‘’ENTER’’ to acknowledge the audio alarm and reactivate the display.









TOXIC GAS ALARM

A ‘’toxic gas’’ alarm can be triggered by three types of measurement.

· Measurement exceeding the maximum authorized instantaneous value· Measurement exceeding the authorized Time Limit Value (TLV)· Measurement exceeding the authorized Short Term Exposure Limit ‘’ALARM’’ when

the permitted maximum instantaneous value has been exceeded. The measurementis frozen so that the user can read off the maximum value recorded.

FAULT ALARMS

Faults Alarms can be divided into two groups:

1 Faults regarding cells (outside range, worn cell, request for calibration onoccurrence of major deviation during auto-adjustment): these faults lead to thegeneration of individual messages displayed on the relevant quadrant of the displaypanel and the triggering of a cyclic visual and audio alarm.

2 Fault regarding the appliance itself (Flat batteries or electronic fault): Thecorresponding fault message appears on the display panel. This message takes priorityover all other messages concerning the cells

ACKNOWLEDGING ALARMS

Gas Alarm

This does not cancel the gas alarm but only the rapid audio signal. When the tactile‘’ENTER/Buzzer’’ area has been pressed. The rapid audio alarm is deactivated but thecorresponding alarm indicator light continues to flash until the measurement falls tobellow the programmed alarm threshold. As soon as the measurement on the relevantchannel returns to within the limits defined by the alarm thresholds . This is applicable forinstantaneous alarms as well as for mean exposure values (TLV) or limit exposurevalues (STEL) .

Fault alarms

This happens automatically as soon as the measurement on the relevant channel returnsto within the limits defined by the alarm thresholds. This is applicable for instantaneousalarms as well as for mean exposure values (TLV) or limit exposure values (STEL).

Further InformationOLDHAM (BM 22 PLUS BEACON) Operating and Maintenance Manual.









6.10.13.7 INTRINSICALLY SAFE EQUIPMENTINTRODUCTION

The term 'Intrinsically Safe' (IS) as used in the petroleum industry generally refers totools, instruments or equipment which due to the design and use, are incapable ofgenerating heat, sparks or flame sufficient to ignite any of the flammable or explosiveatmospheres likely to be encountered on hydrocarbon facilities.

In electrical terms 'Intrinsically Safe' refers to a circuit under test conditions in which anyspark or thermal condition (in both normal and fault conditions) is incapable of igniting aspecific explosive atmosphere.

'Non Intrinsically Safe' (Non-IS) is the term used when the possibility for ignition exists,either in the design or in the operation of the unit.

Further InformationBS EN 50020, 2002: Electrical apparatus for potentially explosiveatmospheres. Intrinsic safety 'i'

RESTRICTED ITEMS

Many of the common portable items such as hand torches, telephones, pagers and

electrical or electronic instruments and larger moveable equipment are in the restrictedrange due to their potential as ignition sources.

Whenever possible, the use of Non-IS equipment is to be avoided. The recommendedcourse of action, assuming their intended use in the plant is essential, is to select theintrinsically safe model, of which there are many available. Failing this, the equipmentand operating procedures must be introduced under the full control of the Permit Systemfor Non-IS equipment in the plant.

Restricted items include:

· Cameras with batteries.· Flash guns and non-approved lighting.· Temporary electrical power distribution systems.· Portable electric power tools.· Non -approved radios and transceivers.· Portable telephones.· Pagers.· Soldering and heat guns.· Electrical stress-relieving or preheating equipment associated with welding.· Electrode hot boxes· Electronic measuring devices.









· Calculators.· Computers.· All other under the Non-IS definition.

EXEMPTIONS

All items put forward for exemption must have the appropriate gas rating nameplateattached and be subject to the electrical inspection and maintenance procedures asoutlined in this manual.

Further Information

Chapter 6.8 PORTABLE TOOL IGNITION RISKS

6.10.13.8 PRE AND POST HEATING EQUIPMENT

INTRODUCTION

As a concurrent operation with some of the more major welding jobs, the use of electricheating coils creates a longer term ignition hazard due to the considerable time durationof these operations. Hazards include the potential for sparking and the elevated surfacetemperatures of the coils being sufficient to initiate fire or explosion.

SAFETY PROCEDURES

Operating safety procedures include:

· Power supply located in a safe area.· Control panels are located away from potential gas hazard areas.· Continuous surveillance and gas monitoring by qualified personnel whilst power is on

and until all surface temperatures have fallen below 200°C in the cooling cycle.· Heating coils to be clear of all flammable and combustible materials.· The total area including the power supply, controls, cabling and worksite be a

designated Hot Work area for work permit purposes.

· The Hot Work Permit System procedures to be applied in full as appropriate to thearea of operations.

6.10.13.9 DIESEL ENGINE UNITS

INTRODUCTION

The use of diesel engines in Zone 2 Hazardous Areas is to be avoided as far aspossible. This section outlines the general design requirements for the protection ofpermanently installed diesel engines and diesel engines driving mobile equipment whentheir use in Zone 2 Hazardous Areas is unavoidable.









These requirements have been drawn up primarily for naturally aspirated, water cooled,diesel fuelled, compression ignition engines. They shall also apply to turbo charged,super charged, air cooled or dual fuelled compression ignition engines, unless other wisespecified by ADGAS, although it should be noted that such engines have relativelyhigher exhaust and surface temperatures and compliance with this section will be moreonerous. Spark ignition engines are specifically excluded.

GENERAL

The requirements outlined in this section are generally according to OCMA publicationNo.MEC-1 1977.

Also refer to GS 134-8 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PROTECTION OF DIESELENGINES OPERATING IN ZONE 2 HAZARDOUS AREAS

Where reference is made to approved equipment or to a test by a responsible authority,this refers to acceptance or test by ADMA-OPCO Municipal Maintenance Department,Transport Section.

The contractor or main equipment supplier shall be responsible for the design, andprovide evidence of the satisfactory functioning, of all the equipment fitted to the dieselengine. In particular, he shall be responsible for ensuring that all protection equipment iscorrectly sized and installed and carries the correct certification as required herein.

Further InformationOCMA No.MEC-1 1977.GS 134-8 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PROTECTION OF DIESEL ENGINESOPERATING IN ZONE 2 HAZARDOUS AREAS

PRIMARY IGNITION HAZARDS

These ignition hazards can exist when the engine is started or running normally:

· Engine surface and exhaust gas temperatures.· Discharge of sparks from exhaust system.· Overspeeding of engine.· Discharging of sparks from electrical equipment.· Static electricity discharge.· Flame transmission through decompression ports.

SECONDARY IGNITION HAZARDS

Additional ignition hazards that may be expected to occur as a result of enginemalfunction or equipment failure are:









· Explosion in crank-case.· Reverse running of the engine.

PRIMARY HAZARD DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Excessive temperature.The temperature of the exhaust discharge gases and the exposed surface temperatureof any part of a diesel engine operating in a hazardous area, including exhaust pipingand manifold, shall in no circumstances exceed 250°C when providing the maximumpower requirements imposed by the driven equipment.

Water-jacked exhaust systems are the preferred method of meeting the above surfacetemperature requirements. Engine radiators or, where applicable, heat exchangers shallbe suitably sized to accept the additional heat load.

Discharge of Exhaust Sparks/Flames A spark arrestor, preferably of the cyclone type, shall be fitted to the discharge end of theexhaust system.

Spark arrestors shall be provided in corrosion resistant materials, suitable for the DasIsland environment and robustly constructed.

All flame arrestors shall be provided with appropriate certification.

Overspeeding Due to Gas or Vapour An automatically operated valve shall be installed in the air intake system so designed toshut when the engine speed rises above a set limit. This limit must not exceed the safelimits for the engine or driven equipment.

The valve and its control system shall be of proven design and shall close sufficientlytightly to ensure that closure stops the engine whether running on normal fuel or inducedvapour.

Acceptable makes of such equipment are: Chalwin, Mitcham, Weston and Harmo.

Discharge of Electrical SparksThe starter system shall be of non-sparking type or of the following non electrical types:

· Pneumatic· Hydraulic· Spring recoil· Inertia

All other electrical equipment shall be of the non-sparking type. Electrical equipmentshall be effectively earthed and bonded to the main engine frame.









Any electrical equipment that does not meet the above standard may be acceptable if:

A lockable switch is provided to prevent it's use in a hazardous area and this is coupledwith a satisfactory control system, or

A slave battery system is used and the diesel engine is started outside the hazardousarea and the connection is made through a heavy duty approved socket.

Static Electricity Discharge All driven belts shall be manufactured from anti-static fire resistant material according to

BS 2050: Specification for electrical resistance of conducting and antistatic productsmade from flexible polymeric material (obsolete). Currently there is no direct equivalentbut refer to BS 3790 (http://www.bsonline.bsi-global.com/search/).

Further InformationBS 3790: 2006: Specification for belt drives. Endless wedge belts, endless V-belts, banded wedge belts, banded V-belts and their corresponding pulleys

At this time they will be issued a certificate of suitability for use in Zone 2 Area that is tobe retained with the engine at all times.

All engines used in the ADGAS hazardous area will re-certified at least annually.

Transmission PortsDecompression ports shall not be provided.

SECONDARY IGNITION HAZARD REQUIREMENTS

Crankcase ExplosionIt is desirable that engines having a crankcase volume of over 0.5m3 be provided with arelief device.

Relief device valves or breathers on engines shall be fitted with flame traps or,

alternatively, discharge into the induction system downstream of the flame trap andupstream of the shutoff valve.

Dipsticks should be of screw in type..

NoteThis is not applicable to ADGAS since the Company has no equipment of thissize. It may however apply to contractors in the ADGAS hazardous area.

Reverse Running









The fuel injection pump and governor, where fitted, shall be so designed that reverserunning of the engine is not possible.

APPROVAL AND MARKING

Approval All engines to be used in the ADGAS hazardous area shall be tested and approved by ADMA-OPCO Municipal Maintenance Department, Transport Section.

MarkingEngines certified by ADMA-OPCO will be marked with a green square, bearing the date

of the certification. Each certificate is valid for one calendar year.

Further InformationBP Engineering, GS-134-8: Requirements for the protection of diesel enginesoperating in Zone 2 hazardous areasBS 2050 (obsolete). Currently there is no direct equivalent but refer to:BS 3790: 2006: Specification for belt drives. Endless wedge belts, endless V-belts, banded wedge belts, banded V-belts and their corresponding pulleysBS 4056 (obsolete). Currently there is no direct equivalent but refer to:BS 229: 1957: Specification. Flameproof enclosure of electrical apparatusBS 1259: 1958: Intrinsically safe electrical apparatus and circuits for use inexplosive atmospheresIEC 60079-4.

6.10.13.10 HOT TAPPING

INTRODUCTION

The term "Hot Tapping" refers to a method of making a connection into a pipeline, vesselor tank while it is in service. This section is concerned with safety aspects of thisspecialised operation in which a valved stub piece is welded to a pipeline, vessel or tankand the connection is made by trepanning a hole using a specialised cutting machine.This operation calls for a high degree of expertise and experience and shall be carried

out only by a competent person .

It should only be undertaken in very special circumstances and only after all other meansof making a connection have been considered. It is intended for those situations where itis extremely difficult to isolate, clean and gas free the equipment, e.g. on very long lines. Authorisation for this operation to be carried out must be obtained from the PMinconsultation with the MHSE.(Refer to Figure 6-1)

Before undertaking a modification involving a hot tap, the Check Out Certificate shown inFigure 6-2 will be completed by the Area and Performing Authorities.









REQUIRED CONDITIONS

Before welding commences it must be established that the equipment or pipeline, etc.,has sufficient thickness and strength. In any event the metal thickness shall not be lessthan 5mm and the material must be free from laminations, cracks, or other injuriousdefects. In some cases the equipment may require strengthening to take the newconnection. Where possible system pressures shall be reduced to the lowest safe level.

The atmosphere around the equipment must be checked to ensure that it is gas free andthat the area is free from combustible material. As guide, the atmosphere up to a heightof 2m above ground level or above the point at which welding is to take place, whichever

is the greater, and within 15m radius at all levels up to this height, shall remain free at alltimes from dangerous concentrations of gas or vapour. In this connection wind directionshall be taken into account.

The ground within 15m of the welding shall be free from any flammable liquids or othercombustible material or open drains. Continuous combustible gas monitoring is required.

When welding on underground pipelines, an excavation of adequate size, with suitableshoring and ladder access, and a secondary means of escape, shall be provided. Advice shall be sought from the HSED. The excavation or pit shall be adequately ventedand gas tested before entry and monitored throughout the operation. An entry permit willbe required if the excavation is deeper than 1.3m.

The temperature and pressure inside the equipment to which such welding operationsmay be carried out are governed by the reduced strength zone during the weldingoperations and the measured wall thickness.

These factors must be determined in each case to ensure that at all times during thewelding operation sufficient thickness of metal in the area remains unaffected to containthe internal pressure. As a guide the pressure and temperature in the system should,where practicable be kept below 3.3 barg and 120°C.

This operation shall not be carried out where the internal pressure is less than

atmospheric or the temperature less than 0°C.

Hot tapping operations shall never be carried out on equipment that contains:

· Any flammable mixture of gases or vapour.· Oxygen enriched atmospheres in the presence of hydrocarbons or other flammable

materials.· Compressed air in the presence of hydrocarbons or other flammable materials, such

as lubricating oil carryover from an air compressor.· Caustic Soda or Elemental Sulphur









· Hot tapping shall not be carried out on any equipment where effective control over itscontents cannot be exercised and such lack of control could make the operationdangerous, for example, any part of flare line system.

Welding on pressure vessels, pipelines, or equipment in service shall not be allowed incircumstances where the materials of construction are such that post-weld heattreatment is necessary. Hot tapping shall not be carried out on lines or equipment linedwith special materials.

Welding procedures are most important and must be established and approved by theHCI and E&TSM prior to commencing any hot tapping operation. Paint or other

contaminants shall be removed from the surface of equipment before welding.

Drains near the welding operations must be effectively sealed.

Flow in the line shall be established before naked flame work commences andmaintained at least until after welding is completed and the metal has been cooled to thetemperature of the flowing liquid.

All connections must be fitted with a block valve, the material of construction, flangerating, jointing and gland packing of which shall be suitable for the equipment design andoperating conditions. The connection, valve and valve seat shall be strength testedaccording to the code requirements to prove the fitting welds and valve flange gasketsand the valve seat, wherever possible use of specially manufactured fittings and valveswill be made. Before commencing cutting operations, the machine flange gasket andspindle stuffing box gland shall be tested to prove they are leak tight under the operatingconditions.

Attention is drawn to the need to establish that the strength of the section of theequipment to which the connection is to be welded is adequate to withstand the externalpressure loading before applying a strength test.

Because of the heavy weight of valves and drilling equipment used in these operations, itis preferable to mount them vertically. Where the connection cannot be made vertically,

the engineering design shall take into account the weight of the valve and drillingmachine. In all cases the connection shall be suitably supported.

Before hot tapping is commenced, the cutter and its pilot bit shall be inspected to ensurethat it is in a satisfactory condition and the coupon recovery attachment is fitted correctly.

Care shall be taken in the design and selection of the branch connection. It shall be longenough to accommodate the cutter and pilot and be designed to the appropriate code.

Further InformationBS 6990: 1989 : Code of practice of welding on steel pipes containing process









fluid or their residuals

ABU DHABI GAS L IQUEFACTION COMPANY LIMITED

APPLICATION FOR AUTHORISATION OF A HOT TAPPING OPERATION

To : Plant Manager Date:From : Operations Manager

1. Permission is requested to undertake a Hot Tapping Operation on:-(Name and reference number of pipe/vessel:...................................... Location:........................

on / / )

The check list overleaf shows that the operation is technically feasible on this pipe/vessel.

The permits for the two distinct phases of the operation will only be issued by my Divisionwhen:-

(a) The requirements of the permit and the associated phase on the checklist have beenmet and the list contains the required signatures.

(b) They are countersigned at the level of management required.

(c) The work from the previous phase (where there is one) is complete and theassociated permit has been cancelled.

Signed:(Operations Manager)

2. This application is rejected (cross out if not applicable).

Signed:(Plant Manager)

This application for authorisation of Hot Tapping is granted. (Subject to the requirementsoutlined in (1) above being fulfilled and full consideration being given to the conditions laid down in the ADGAS Safety Manual, Section 6.14) (Cross out if not applicable).

Signed:(Plant Manager)

Figure 6-1: APPLICATION FOR AUTHORISATION OF A HOT TAPPINGOPERATION









PART - 3: CUTTING COUPON WITH HOT TAP MACHINE

Signature Date WorkshopSupervisor

1. Obtain Permit from SME

2. Final check that block valve on stub piece is in openposition.

3. Wind cutting head of Hot Tap Machine down tomeasurement. 12 in Part 2

4. Start machine and engage automatic feed. When themachine slows down this is the signal that the cutterhas reached the pipe. Stop machine and checkmeasurement. 13 in Part 2. Restart machine.

5. Continue cutting with that automatic feed engaged.When the machine speeds up again this is the signalthat your cutter has removed the coupon. Stopmachine and check measurement. 14 in Part 2.

PART - 4: REMOVAL OF COUPON AND HOT TAP MACHINE

Signature Date WorkshopSupervisor

1. Reverse direction rotation of machine and wind cutterback until the measurement corresponds to No. 11 Part2.

2. Close block valve slowly until it starts to seat, back offslightly and open bleeder valve to blow chips out ofseat.

3. Close block valve and bleeder valve.

4. After 5 minutes open bleeder valve to make sure blockvalve is holding.

5. Remove machine from stub

6. Remove cut out coupon from drill and retain coupon forCID.

7. Fit blank to block valve.

8. Sign permit as completed and hand back to SME.

Figure 6-2: Hot Tap Check Out Certi ficate






CONFINED SPACE ENTRY Chapter No. 07



CHAPTER 7 CONTENTS

7 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY ................................................................................................................. 273

7.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 273 7.1.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................... ........................................................ 273 7.1.2 MANDATORY ENTRY PERMIT ................................................................................................ .. 273 7.1.3 DEFINITION .............................................................. ................................................................ .. 273

7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT ....................................................................................................................... 274 7.2.1 HAZARD CATEGORIES ................................................................. ............................................. 274 7.2.2 OXYGEN DEFICIENCY .............................................................................................................. 274 7.2.3 EXPLOSION OR FIRE ......................................................... ........................................................ 274 7.2.4 TOXIC CONTAMINATION ............................................................. ............................................. 275 7.2.5 PHYSICAL HAZARDS/ AGENTS ............................................................... .................................. 275 7.2.6 CONCURRENT WORK ........................................................ ........................................................ 276

7.3 ISOLATION AND GAS FREEING ................................................................................................. 276 7.3.1 INITIAL GAS TEST .............................................................. ........................................................ 276 7.3.2 RADIOACTIVE DEVICES ........................................................................................................... 276

7.4 SAFE WORKING ENVIRONMENT ............................................................. .................................. 277 7.4.1 CLEANING .................................................................................................................................. 277 7.4.2 FLUSHING .................................................................................................................................. 277 7.4.3 STUBBORN DEPOSITS ....................................................... ........................................................ 277 7.4.4 PURGING .................................................................................................................................... 277 7.4.5 VENTILATION ............................................................................................................................. 278 7.4.6 GAS TESTING ........................................................... ................................................................. .. 279 7.4.7

GAS CONCENTRATIONS ........................................................................................................... 279 7.4.8 GAS SAMPLING .......................................................................................................................... 280 7.4.9 CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) RELEASE IN CONFINED SPACES ................................................ 280

7.5 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................. 281 7.5.1 AUTHORITY .................................................................................................................... ............ 281 7.5.2 RESCUE PLANS ....................................................... ................................................................. .. 282 7.5.3 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................... ........................................................ 282 7.5.4 SAFE WORKING GUIDELINES ................................................................................................. 282 7.5.5 ACCESS..................................................................... ................................................................. .. 283 7.5.6 NON GAS-FREE ENTRY ........................................................................................................... .. 283 7.5.7 STANDBY PERSONNEL ................................................................. ............................................. 284

7.6 PROTECTIVE AND RESCUE EQUIPMENT .......................................................... ....................... 286 7.6.1 BREATHING APPARATUS ............................................................ ............................................. 286 7.6.2

SAFETY BELTS AND LINES ....................................................................................................... 287 7.6.3 PPE .............................................................................................................................................. 287 7.7 CANCELLATION OF PERMIT ...................................................................................................... 287 7.8 HOT AND NAKED FLAME WORK HAZARDS ........................................................................... 287

7.8.1 ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN EQUIPMENT ............................................................. ....................... 287 7.8.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSIDE VESSELS ......................................................................... 287 7.8.3 LIGHTING OF CONFINED SPACES ....................................................... .................................. 288 7.8.4 HOT WORK/NAKED FLAME ......................................................... ............................................. 290 7.8.5 CONTROL OF FUMES ............................................................................................................... 291 7.8.6 GAS EXPOSURE HAZARDS ....................................................................................................... 291 7.8.7 PHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF GASES ................................................................................... 292









7 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY

7.1 INTRODUCTION

7.1.1 DESCRIPTION

Work in a vessel or other confined space involves particular health and safetyconsiderations. Key concerns are the potential presence of toxic vapours, explosiveatmospheres or oxygen deficiency. Other harmful agents such as noise and heat arealso potential health hazards.

The following guidelines represent the minimum precautions to be taken to ensure thesafety and protection of personnel entering vessels, tanks or other confined spaces onthe ADGAS plant.

They do not supersede the requirements of statutory or other ADNOC or ADGASregulations that must be observed.

Further Information ADNOC COP V4-05, NON-ROUTINE OPERATIONS. SECTION 3 ENTRYINTO CONFINED SPACES

ADGAS PTW Manual. SECTION 5.8

Once the decision is made by a responsible authority that the entry is necessary, positiveactions must be taken to eliminate the atmospheric hazards and also physical hazardssuch as moving equipment and also other work activities that may affect the vessel entrywork site.

Whilst the isolation of electrical and mechanical hazards is always possible, in caseswhere it has not been possible to completely remove the chemical hazard the entryprocedures for Non Gas Free Entry must be followed. (Refer to Section 7.5.6).

7.1.2 MANDATORY ENTRY PERMIT An Entry Permit is mandatory for a person to enter or partially enter a confined space onthe LNG facilities. There are no exceptions to this requirement.

An Entry Permit is not a permit to work and appropriate permits will be issued to coverany work activity after entry.

7.1.3 DEFINITION

In general terms applicable to the LNG plant a confined space is defined as a space ofany volume which:









· Is not intended as a regular workspace· Has restricted means of entry and exit· May have inadequate ventilation and/or an atmosphere that is either contaminated or

oxygen deficient

On the LNG facilities the term includes, but is not restricted to, tanks, bunds, vessels,floating roof spaces, towers, sewers, sumps, pits, piping, ductwork, flues or to any otherexcavation more than 1.3m deep.

7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT

A Risk Assessment must be carried out in accordance with Chapter 2.9 prior to enteringthe confined space. All information regarding the confined space should be consideredduring the Risk Assessment, such as engineering drawings, working plans, and data onrelevant soil or geological conditions.

Further Information ADNOC COP V4-05, NON-ROUTINE OPERATIONS. SECTIONS 2 and 3.3

7.2.1 HAZARD CATEGORIES

The range of hazards likely to be encountered with work in confined spaces includes:

· oxygen deficiency· explosion or fire· toxic vapours and atmospheric contaminants· physical hazards and agencies

7.2.2 OXYGEN DEFICIENCY

Lack of oxygen can be created by:

· displacement of air by other gases which may be toxic, combustible or inert· internal corrosion of surfaces

· fire or other combustion· wet charcoal· effects of the work progress, e.g. welding and cutting, painting, sprays, etc.

Caution All confined spaces are deemed to be oxygen deficient if the oxygenconcentration is measured as below 20% at any point.

7.2.3 EXPLOSION OR FIRE

As with other types of fires, the essential elements required to support combustion are:









· oxygen (air)· fuel (flammable gas, vapour, dusts, sludges, etc.)· heat (welding, grinding, static electricity or Non-IS equipment)

7.2.4 TOXIC CONTAMINATION

This may exist in the atmosphere in the ambient state, be created by the work procedureor be introduced.

Sources of toxic gases and vapours include:

· residue in the vessel or space left by incomplete cleaning or preparation, or materialstrapped in surface scale or sludge

· results of failure to properly isolate the space from the normal process connections· contamination by engine exhaust gases or other pollutants through an entry point· substances used for cleaning· H2S· residual inert gas remaining due to incomplete air purging and ventilation

The physiological effects of some of these atmospheric contaminants need to be knownby all personnel involved in confined space entry.

7.2.5 PHYSICAL HAZARDS/ AGENTS

The potential for physical injury is often exacerbated in confined spaces. Mechanicalagitators and other powered equipment are cases where correct isolation proceduresmust be rigidly followed.

Further InformationChapter 9.1 ELECTRICAL

Other physical agents may be present depending on the nature of the work and thesemay include:

· ultraviolet radiation from arc welding· infra-red and heat from hot work· environmental heat from the job or local conditions· risk of falling from ladders, staging or scaffolding within or on the access to large

vessels· excessive noise either location or job-created· effects of blowers or eductors· general hazards from abrasive blasting, chipping, grinding or high pressure cleaning· electric shock from welding, lighting or other power sources









7.2.6 CONCURRENT WORK As an essential element in planning vessel entry work, the effect of other concurrent localwork activities must be considered.

Due to the vulnerability of workers in enclosed spaces, the following other externalactivities must be taken into account as adding to the job risk inventory:

· hot work· abrasive blasting· hydrocarbon release· blast cleaning· spray painting· other activity likely to cause plant change of conditions

CautionThe responsible supervisor must be aware of the potential for psychologicalstress on unseasoned workers in difficult confined space operations. Thecombined effect of heat, wearing of confining clothing and breathing apparatusmay lead to distress.

7.3 ISOLATION AND GAS FREEING

Isolation and gas freeing of items of plant equipment will be achieved according to therequirements set out in Section 8.2 and in the Operations Division MaintenancePreparation Procedures and Blank Schedules.

7.3.1 INITIAL GAS TEST

The initial gas test must be conducted by an Authorised Gas Tester from the Laboratorybefore entry.

7.3.2 RADIOACTIVE DEVICES

Isolation of vessels fitted with radioactive devices is not complete until the isotopes have

been removed by competent and classified personnel to the isotope storage roomlocated off-site.

Further InformationChapter 08.2 TANKS AND VESSELS ADGAS Permit to Work Manual









7.4 SAFE WORKING ENVIRONMENT

7.4.1 CLEANING

All materials, solid, liquid or gas, seen as likely hazards to persons inside a confinedspace must be removed. This may present difficulties as the potentially dangerousmaterial may be trapped in sludge, scale or other deposits, or behind loose linings.Similarly such material may lodge in joints in vessels or in bends of connecting pipes orother places where removal is difficult. Special care should therefore be taken incleaning processes and methods should be adapted to meet each set of circumstances.Cleaning may have to be repeated to ensure that all potentially dangerous materialshave been removed.

7.4.2 FLUSHING

The vessel may require flushing out with potable water several times. When required thevessel should be water-filled and flushed while still closed, allowing hydrocarbons to bedisplaced through vent lines.

CautionDue to the weight factor, care should be taken to ensure that vessels andsupports will not be over stressed if filling with water. Also adequate ventingmust be provided while draining to prevent damage to the vessel due to

formation of a vacuum.

7.4.3 STUBBORN DEPOSITS

Any vessel residue should be flushed out with a water hose. Failing this, a high pressurewater jet may be employed. Heavy or stubborn deposits may require the entry ofpersonnel to shovel the mixture and dispose of it through manways.

7.4.4 PURGING

The vessel must be purged until the lowest safe gas concentrations are attained and areable to be sustained.

7.4.4.1 PROCEDURE

Attach air mover to open manhole

Open vessel vents to atmosphere

Start the air purge and gas test the vessel atmosphere at the vent at 30 minute intervals.Special care should be taken to ensure that the venting of the vessel will not createhazards that could affect adjacent work.









CautionVentilation and purging equipment must be electrically grounded to the vessel'sstructure to negate static charge effects. As the vessel may not have beencleared for free entry, more care and special procedures must be followed inthis operation.

7.4.5 VENTILATION

7.4.5.1 REQUIREMENTS

When persons entering a confined space will work without breathing apparatus theconfined space must be ventilated with fresh clean air by natural, forced or mechanical

means to establish and maintain a safe working atmosphere. This ventilation must becontinued throughout the period of occupancy as a safeguard against the unexpectedrelease of contaminants into the work space and replenish the oxygen consumed by theoccupants of the vessel.

7.4.5.2 N ATURAL DRAUGHT

All access points must be open to ensure the maximum flow of air through the confinedspace. Where there is only one manhole, it will be necessary to remove pipe spools orflanged covers to establish adequate draught and replenishment of fresh air.

When natural ventilation is found to be inadequate, forced or mechanical ventilation must

be provided.

7.4.5.3 FORCED VENTILATION

Fresh, certified quality air may be introduced through a hose with its outlet inside theconfined space at a point as remote as possible from the access manway. A positive airflow is established with its exhaust at the manway.

Air flow must be maintained for the full period in which a person not equipped with BA ora positive supplied air respirator is likely to be in the confined space.

The air supply must be regulated or throttled to the optimum flow and pressure setting

and the supply valve tagged for safety reasons.

Air must be sourced from a safe area with regard for the possibility of recirculation.

7.4.5.4 MECHANICAL VENTILATION

The two major systems for mechanical ventilation are the electrical or air powered fan orcompressed air venturi eductor. Due to inherent ignition hazard in the electric fan, air-powered units are favoured in hydrocarbon service areas.

The following precautions in use must be observed:









· Controls for the ventilating equipment must be accessible outside the confined space.· Controls for electric or pneumatic ventilation equipment must be clearly identified and

tagged to prevent accidental shut-off.· All equipment must be certified suitable for use in hazardous locations.· While ventilating, exhaust from the confined space must be directed away from other

personnel and equipment.· When the job is likely to generate smoke or fumes, the ventilation should be arranged

to extract these contaminants at their source. Flexible convoluted large bore hose ortrunking is appropriate.

Air operated eductors and exhaust fans utilise the principle of exhausting air from the

vessel at an opening, creating a low pressure within the vessel that causes external air toflow in through all other openings. Careful selection of the eductor position and otherinlet openings is necessary to obtain the most complete and efficient air exchange fromthe vessel, thereby avoiding the problem of dead zones of contamination. Eductors aremost effective when assisting natural flow created by heat convection or wind effects.

Caution Air-operated venturi eductors may be a source of static electric generation andmust be earthed or bonded to the structure.

7.4.6 GAS TESTING

The maximum concentrations of contaminants and the quality of the air in confinedspaces must be assessed and compared with the allowable values shown in the tablebelow.

The terms used are:

7.4.6.1 FREE ENTRY

Conditions favourable to the entry and work in a confined space without the need forpersonal breathing equipment.

7.4.6.2 RESTRICTED ENTRY

Entry permission is given only to persons wearing approved supplied-air or self-contained breathing equipment.

7.4.7 GAS CONCENTRATIONS

Gas concentrations for entry are tabulated below.









Agent Free Entry RestrictedEntry

Hydrocarbons 50 PPM max.1400 PPM Max.(10% of LEL)

Oxygen (O2) 20 to 23.5% Below 20%

Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) 10 PPM max. 200 PPM max.

Carbon Monoxide(CO) 10 PPM max. 500 PPM max.

Carbon Dioxide(CO2)0.5% max.(5000 PPM max.)

15% max.(150,000 PPM Max.)

Table 7-1: ALLOWABLE GAS CONCENTRATIONS

7.4.8 GAS SAMPLING

Testing must be representative of the entire space. Sampling of the interior is conductedfrom the outside by means of aspiration through tubing extension of the portable gasdetector.

If the space has been under ventilation a period of 30 minutes must elapse after

ventilation is switched off before entry.

If representative samples cannot be taken from outside the vessel, entry wearing BAmay be necessary to conduct thorough tests and verify the safety of the atmosphere forwork.

CautionThere must be no doubts as to the composition and quality of the atmospherecontained in the confined space.

The time at which the tests were conducted and the highest risk readings obtained mustbe recorded on the work permit.

7.4.9 CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) RELEASE IN CONFINED SPACES

The discharge of carbon dioxide in fire extinguishing concentration creates serioushazards to personnel, such as suffocation and reduced visibility during and after thedischarge period. Suitable safeguards i.e. audible and visual warnings are provided toprevent entry into such atmospheres.

In the event of CO2 discharge into a confined space, i.e. outstations, BMS equipmentrooms, LG5 and ADGAS/ADMA Gas Turbine compartments.









Personnel must not enter area until it has been checked for 21% oxygen and thoroughlyventilated to disperse possible pockets of CO2.

Clearance to enter building must be given by competent person, OSS, USCE, Lab Techor Safety Engineer.

Further InformationChapter 8 PIPELINES, TANKS AND VESSELS

7.5 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS

7.5.1 AUTHORITY

Responsible supervisors are accountable for determining vessel isolations, monitoringand emergency rescue plans before submission of entry permits for approval. TheVessel Entry Checklist is to be used to indicate the requirements specific to the job. TheTask Risk Assessment conducted for the job will provide a set of safety precautions anddevelop procedures to control hazards and prevent accidents.

7.5.1.1 BLANKING/DISCONNECTION

For the purpose of man-entry, isolation must be by means of blanking or disconnection.There are certain exception in the Utilities Area, but in each of these cases, the Utilities

Superintendent must first be advised before entry is effected.

7.5.1.2 PERSONNEL

Before entering the vessel, all personnel involved will be instructed in:

· the scope of the work· potential hazards· the duties of all personnel· the safety requirements applicable to the job· personnel and worksite precautions applicable to the work· the correct use of breathing apparatus for work and/or rescue· the correct use of gas testing and monitoring equipment· emergency response and rescue procedures· agreed communications procedures

Because self-rescue may be difficult under certain extreme conditions, the selection ofworkers should be geared towards those physically and psychologically equipped towork in a cramped space. The number of personnel will be limited to that necessary forcompletion of the work scope. People entering the space must be competent inperforming the tasks assigned to them and have a good knowledge in the use of thetools and protective equipment.









Standby personnel must be trained and competent in emergency rescue techniques,breathing apparatus and emergency rescue equipment in use. They will normally be ADGAS Safety Assistants.

7.5.2 RESCUE PLANS

The availability of the number of trained and suitable personnel and protectiveequipment, protective clothing and rescue equipment must be established.

The safety equipment must be in sufficient supply and available to all personnel likely toenter the confined space for work and for rescue purposes.

The planning for possible emergency rescue must take into account the factors of:

· the shape and size of the confined space· the nature of the task to be performed· any obstacles within the space and the feasibility of their removal· the means of entry and exit· the maximum number of persons occupying the space· the number of persons necessary outside the vessel space required to maintain work

equipment used, to ensure communication with and observation of personnel in thisspace and to initiate rescue procedures if necessary.

7.5.3 COMMUNICATIONS

Adequate means of communication with and between people inside the space andstandby personnel and between the standby personnel and the control room areessential. Hand held radios will be used to raise the alarm or summon assistance.These must be tested before entry.

7.5.4 SAFE WORKING GUIDELINES

The following safe working guidelines must be observed:

· Work required in the confined space must be carefully planned and clearly defined so

that potential hazards are identified. The use of Task Risk Assessment isrecommended.

· Diagrams or drawings of vessel internals should be used to familiarise personnelbefore entry.

· The confined space must be isolated from associated processes or equipment.· Chemical and physical agents and oxygen levels must be measured before entry and

compared with existing standards to judge the need to employ ventilation or personalprotection. During the period of occupation, environmental measurements must betaken either continuously or at predetermined frequency.

· All tasks to be performed must be evaluated, particularly those possibly creatingchanges of conditions within the space.









· Safe and adequate lighting must be provided to illuminate the worksite.· The men entering must be briefed on the effects of claustrophobia and disorientation.· Periods of work in the confined space should be minimised.· Breathing air intakes must be established as safe and monitored for any changing

conditions, e.g. engine exhaust contamination.· A dedicated spotter/attendant must be posted at the entry at all times whilst there are

personnel within· Personnel for vessel work should be selected on the basis of previous training and

experience and be both physically and mentally fit. Due regard should be given tosize/weight of the person.

WarningBlow-pipe and hoses of welding equipment shall NOT be left in vessels orenclosed spaces when they are not in use, for example, after use, during alunch break, or over-night. A very small leak over such a period of any gas,particularly acetylene, from a torch can make the atmosphere in the vesseldangerous. Where this cannot be done, the oxygen and acetylene connectionsshall be disconnected at the cylinders situated outside the vessel. Merelyclosing the valve is not a disconnection.

7.5.5 ACCESS

Access openings into the confined space must permit rescue of all personnel who enterthe confined space

Access ways in and out of and surrounding the vessel must be kept clear of obstructionsat all times

It may be necessary to provide scaffold platforms and stairs or ladders at the manwayslevels to gain safe convenient access for work and for rescue purposes

Signs and barriers shall be erected at all access points to restrict entry of those notengaged in the work

7.5.6 NON GAS-FREE ENTRY

7.5.6.1 GENERAL

Circumstances may dictate the need for personnel entry before the vessel or spaceshave been confirmed and certified safe.

Examples are:

· the need to test the interior in remote pockets inaccessible from the outside.· When residues in the vessel require manual removal and continue to generate

vapour or gas.









· rescue of personnel in emergency situations.

Strict control of these situations is essential and only after all preparatory work such asisolations, purging and ventilation, etc. has been effected.

After all reasonably practicable steps have failed to establish the atmosphere as gasfree, the decision may be taken to authorise the non gas free entry.

7.5.6.2 S AFE WORKING PROCEDURE

The Work Permit must specify all precautions necessary:

· The degree of risk must be assessed by use of Gas Detectors. Test results to beentered on the Work Permit.

· The person who enters must be equipped with and trained in the use of airline or selfcontained BA, belt and lifeline and suitable protective wear and lighting.

· Standby personnel to maintain communication with and tend the lifeline for the entrypersons.

· Inert body retrieval must be understood by the standby crew with prearrangedprocedures rehearsed for use in an emergency.

· HSED advice and assistance may be employed before the work starts and during theentry period.

· Continuous gas monitoring must be maintained.· Routine conflicting activities in the vicinity should be evaluated and suspended if

necessary.· The PMshall approve the entry.

7.5.6.3 STAFF

For safety, rescue and communication purposes, at least two persons (BA Team) mustbe in attendance at all times at the opening closest to any personnel in the confinedspace.

Standby personnel will not leave their station unattended. If the standby person must

leave, either a relief person will be provided or work will cease in that section of thatconfined space and workers will exit the space.

Under some circumstances more than one standby team may be necessary. This willdepend on the number of people entering the space, the work being performed or therequirements for emergency rescue.

7.5.7 STANDBY PERSONNEL

7.5.7.1 NORMAL DUTIES

The main responsibilities of standby personnel are listed below:









· Check the standby BA equipment. Leave the standby set near the point of entry in asecure, accessible position.

· Ensure that a fully authorised Entry Permit is displayed at the entry point.· Check the condition and status of any safety equipment being worn by anyone

entering the space.· Maintain communication with those entering the space and be aware of the location

of fire and safety equipment and the plant call points nearby.· Be alert for any deteriorating conditions, internally or externally and advise those

inside to evacuate the space until conditions have improved.· Alert the Operator or his supervisor of any impending problems.· If an airline BA system is being used, monitor air supplies and regulators and ensure

that the air hose does not become kinked or tangled. Evacuate personnel if the airpressure varies beyond safe limits.

· Stay in attendance at all times unless relieved. If it is necessary to leave, make surethat everyone exits the confined space first.

· Maintain competence in the use of rescue equipment and breathing apparatus andbe familiar with all emergency procedures.

· Hold the free end of tag lines when in use.

7.5.7.2 RESPONSE TO PLANT EMERGENCY

Have everyone inside the space exit immediately and follow the emergency procedures.

Note All equipment in use is to be left in a safe condition.

Take steps to minimise any danger to the occupants in the confined space while theyexit.

In the event of evacuation notify the Marshaller that all people have exited the confinedspace after they have been checked off.

Note

Should an emergency develop on the plant, all permits are automaticallycancelled. Following an emergency it will be necessary to re-certify confinedspaces before permitting re-entry.

7.5.7.3 RESPONSE TO INTERNAL EMERGENCY

One BA team member shall seek help immediately by notifying the Control Room ofemergency details and alerting personnel nearby. The Control Room will mobiliseemergency services and personnel.









Other BA team member shall don breathing apparatus, safely belt and lifeline and thenenter with caution, assessing the risk and responding to the situation. Other BA teammember monitors activity from entrance.

In some cases because of the small size of the manway, it may only be possible to wearthe mask. The cylinder must be inserted through the manway first, then climb in wearingthe face piece. Sufficient care must be exercised to ensure the operator does not losecontrol of the cylinder before donning it again.

Personnel responding to the call must take extra BA sets with them and organise forrequired rescue equipment to be brought to the location. Depending on the

circumstances the leader may take control with appointment of a BA Controller and otherrequirements.

7.6 PROTECTIVE AND RESCUE EQUIPMENT

7.6.1 BREATHING APPARATUS

Appropriate personal protective equipment, particularly respiratory protection, must beutilised when confined space atmospheres cannot be guaranteed to be hazard free.

Self contained breathing apparatus must be worn when entering a confined space if:

· tests specified on the permit indicate a hazardous environment due to the presenceof gases or oxygen deficiency.

· the potential exists for release of gas or vapour, e.g. from sludge remaining in aconfined space.

· entry is required for further testing of the atmosphere.

CautionEntry with BA must not be permitted if the LEL reading is above 10%.

Before entry, a BA set for each person must be made available at the nearest entry pointin excess of sets being used during the job or entry conditions.

The BA sets must be tested when delivered and before entry.

The following precautions must also be followed:

· entry with BA may only be made by currently trained and competent BA wearers.· a dedicated standby person is present at all times at the vessel entry point. He must

be trained and competent in the use and the control of BA equipment.









7.6.2 SAFETY BELTS AND LINESSafety harness and lifelines must be kept available in close proximity to any confinedspace being entered for use in rescue operations.

The type of safety harness should be selected to provide rapid and positive retrieval ofthe wearer under all circumstances without injury.

The activity of the wearer should not be unnecessarily impeded or introduce a personalrisk by wearing belt and line.

7.6.3 PPE

Ear protection, helmet, face shield, goggles, gloves, etc. must be worn as determined bythe job to be performed.

Special considerations for vessel entry personal wear include:

· Small, loose items of safety wear or the contents of pockets should be removed fromthe person or left outside due to the possibility of dropping inside vessels orconfirmed spaces.

· Clothing should be adequate for the task and allow free movement while not beingtoo loose or have loops, belts, etc. which may snag on vessel internals.

· Gloves should be worn for protection against injury on sharp or serrated surfaces.

7.7 CANCELLATION OF PERMIT

The Permit must be properly cancelled when operations to which they refer have beencompleted. They shall be returned to the Area Authority by the person to whom theywere issued, who shall sign the declaration that all personnel and equipment, (includingsurplus and waste materials), have been removed from the plant.

The Area Authority shall first check that completion of work is satisfactory before signingfor acceptance of the plant for operation.

7.8 HOT AND NAKED FLAME WORK HAZARDS

7.8.1 ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN EQUIPMENT

Electrically driven drills, saws, etc. must only be used in approved safe areas. Air driventools are preferably used in hazardous areas and in vessel entry work.

7.8.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSIDE VESSELS

If electrical equipment must be used a hot work permit is required and the followingprecautions should be taken:









· Portable tools feature a 'dead man' switch.· All extension leads to be of the heavy duty type with mechanical connecting

flameproof fittings up to the vessel manway.· Earth fault relay (EFR) to be tested and located outside of the vessel manway, if not

fitted elsewhere in the circuit.· Wherever possible, all leads must enter the vessel through a nozzle or opening other

than the access manway.· Leads entering nozzles are to be encased in a flexible hose for approximately 2m

where the lead goes through the nozzle.· All electrical equipment and leads are to be checked by an electrician before use.· All welding leads to be checked for cracks, cuts and breaks in insulation and if any

doubt exists to be checked by the authorised person and faults rectified.· Isolation switches for all equipment readily available to the outside fireguard or

standby person.

7.8.3 LIGHTING OF CONFINED SPACES

Where it is necessary to introduce temporary artificial lighting into a tank, vessel or otherconfined space, the following regulations apply:

7.8.3.1 DEFINITION VESSEL DECLARED "G AS FREE"

A "Gas Free" vessel or Confined Space is one that has been so prepared by venting, air

purging, flooding or steaming that it presents no risk to personnel from flammable or toxicgas, or oxygen deficiency. Referred to as "Free Entry" for personnel.

Illumination may be provided by any of the means detailed in the previous part. Inaddition Zone 2 certified, fixed lighting fittings operating at a maximum voltage of 110 volt AC (55 volt to earth) may be installed, provided these are of an approved type and arerigidly affixed to internal structures and, therefore, not moveable whilst in use.

Normal industrial standard lighting fittings shall NOT be used in any vessel that could,before being prepared for entry, have contained an explosive atmosphere or flammablesubstance.

Whenever temporary lighting, fixed or hand-held, is to be used within a vessel, the WorkPermit must clearly state the specific type of lighting equipment that may be used.

At all times extreme care must be exercised by personnel working around and within avessel in which temporary lighting is in use to avoid damage to cables, air hoses orlamps.

Any damage or failure must be immediately reported to a member of the ElectricalSection, who must withdraw the damaged or faulty item from use.









Repairs or revamping of lighting equipment must be carried out only by an authorisedmember of the Electrical Section. At no time must repairs, or similar adjustments, tolighting equipment be carried out within a vessel by any person and any repositioning offixed lighting must be carried out only after the power supply has been isolated.

Supply and distribution cables for temporary lighting facilities must, at all times, besecurely supported above ground level to minimise the risk of damage and consequentdanger to plant and personnel.

7.8.3.2 VESSEL NOT DECLARED "G AS FREE" SOUR SERVICE

There are three risks:

· Ignition of ferrous sulphide due to drying by air or direct heating.· Ignition of a hydrocarbon/air mixture within its flammable range.· The toxic risk from H2S or SO2 where there is a possibility of pyrophoric ignition

(vessel not wetted internally).

WARNING: ENTRY IS NOT PERMITTED.

Battery Operated, certified safe hand lamps may be used from the manway only. Alternatively, reflected light from an acceptable external source may be used.

7.8.3.3 VESSEL NOT DECLARED "G AS FREE" SWEET SERVICE

The risk here is from a hydrocarbon/air mixture within its flammable range.

No person shall enter a vessel or confined space where the hydrocarbon/air mixtureexceeds 10% LEL.

Every effort shall be made to gas free the vessel before introducing personnel or lighting.Where this is impracticable because of the condition of the vessel or confined space, thefollowing regulations apply:

· Breathing apparatus and lifelines must be used.· Forced or induced draught shall be used to assist in dilution of the confined space

atmosphere.· Only the following types of lighting shall be used:

o Flame proof (Zone 1 certified) hand lamps operating at maximum voltageof 25 volt AC (12.5 volt to earth) supplied from a certified, flameproof,isolating transformer situated outside the vessel.

o Compressed air turbine, certified flameproof lamps.o Battery powered lamps of a type certified as safe by the SIE for use in the

appropriate environment.

Referred to as "Restricted Entry" for personnel.









Further InformationChapter 7.5: Entry Requirements

7.8.4 HOT WORK/NAKED FLAME

Caution must be exercised at any time hot work or naked flame is required in aconfined space as the work process itself may render the atmosphere hazardous eventhough initial tests were satisfactory.

The safety requirements and precautions pertaining to each Entry Permit must be

carefully analysed taking into account the type of work involved.

A Hot Work or Naked Flame Permit will be required in addition to the Entry Permit.

In addition to the normal precautions associated with vessel entry and hot work/nakedflame the following conditions also apply:

· The concentrations of flammable gases or vapours in the atmosphere must beverified as sustainable below 1% LEL.

· Continuous gas monitoring must be employed.· The flammability and thermal decomposition products of coatings in the work area

must be identified with suitable respiratory equipment worn if considered hazardous.· All liquid and solid residues must be removed which may contribute to the release of

flammable vapours or gases thereby raising the concentration above the 1% LELlimit.

· All potential flammable vapour/liquid traps must be tested hydrocarbon free andcovered with a fire blanket.

· Where arc welding is suspended for crew breaks or at end of shift, the power sourceto the equipment must be switched off. All electrodes must be removed from holdersand placed so that accidental arcing or contact cannot occur.

· When oxy acetylene cutting, heating or welding is suspended for crew or at end ofshift, the torch and cylinder valves must be closed. The torch and hose are thenremoved from the confined space and de pressurised.

Note:No compressed gas cylinders or associated manifolds other than those used forbreathing apparatus may be located inside the confined space.

Further InformationChapter 6 HOT and NAKED FLAME WORK









7.8.5 CONTROL OF FUMESDuring hot work in confined spaces, vessels should be continuously ventilated and fumesextracted by mechanical means.

Tests should be conducted at frequent intervals to ensure that toxic, corrosive or irritantcomponents do not accumulate during the hot work.

All extraction must exhaust into areas where adjacent personnel are not affected andwhere contaminants can not be recirculated into the original confined space.

In planning hot work or naked flame the rate of air flow calculated must take into account

the rate of change required to exhaust the fumes, provided cooling and maintain goodquality breathing air.

This will be many times the requirement for simple vessel entry or cold work.

7.8.6 GAS EXPOSURE HAZARDS

The three most important toxic conditions found in vessel entry work relate to thepresence of carbon monoxide (CO), hydrogen sulphide (H2S) in varying concentrationsand the lack of oxygen (O2) which is essential to support life. Both CO and H2S may befound in vessels as a result of chemical reactions.

Inhalation of CO or H2S or exposure to atmospheres lacking in oxygen can lead todeath.

Equipment required to conduct accurate testing by the AGT for dangerous gases andensuring air quality must also be available and used whenever atmospheric conditionsare suspect.

Further InformationChapter 0CONTENTS and REVISION

At low concentrations hydrogen sulphide smells like rotten eggs, but at highconcentrations (100 PPM or more) it cannot be smelt, because one's sense of smell islost. This creates a dangerous situation when a person's senses may not be relied uponas a danger warning.

The physiological effects of the three gases are tabled in Table 7-4: .

CautionThe gas nitrogen is a major component of normal air. It is used in pure formhowever, for process purging. The inhalation of pure nitrogen when a person'shead is immersed in the gas will bring about instant collapse and death if notrescued and resuscitated.









Further Information ADGAS OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT PTW Manual Section 6.13 Gas Tests

7.8.7 PHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF GASES

Oxygen (O2) Deficiency

Vol. % Effect

20.9 Normal air supply

17.5 Atmosphere can be breathed and work done without ill effect for severalhours

13.0 Work difficult; considerably increased rate of breathing; lips blue; nauseaand headache

7 to 11 Loss of consciousness on exertionBelow 6 Unconsciousness and death if adequate supply not quickly restored

Table 7-2: Physio logical Effects of Oxygen Deficiency

Carbon Monoxide (CO)

Conc. (PPM) Effect

50 or more Produce symptoms of poisoning if breathed for a sufficiently long time200 Mild symptoms (slight headache, discomfort) within several hours400 Headache and discomfort within 2 or 3 hrs1000 to 2000 Slight palpitation of the heart in 30 minutes. A tendency to stagger in 1

½ hours: confusion, headache and nausea in two hours2000 to 2500 Unconsciousness in about 30 minutes

Table 7-3: Physio logical Effects of Carbon Monoxide









Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)

Conc. (PPM) Effect

10 TLV for prolonged exposure (Threshold Limit value)70 to 150 Slight symptoms after several hours exposure. Irritates the eyes170 to 300 Maximum concentration for 1 hour without serious effects400 to 700 Dangerous after exposure of 1 1/2 hours700 andabove

Fatal in 30 minutes

Table 7-4: Physiologiocal Effects of Hydrogen Sulphide






PIPELINES,T ANKS AND VESSELS Chapter No. 08



CHAPTER 8 CONTENTS

8 PIPELINES, TANKS AND VESSELS ................................................................. .................................. 295

8.1 PIPELINES ....................................................................................................................................... 295 8.1.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................. 295 8.1.2 DRAINING AND VENTING LINES ........................................................... .................................. 297 8.1.3 ISOLATION ................................................................ ................................................................ .. 297 8.1.4 LINE CLEARANCE .............................................................. ........................................................ 298 8.1.5 REPAIR OR MODIFICATION ........................................................ ............................................. 300 8.1.6 REPAIR OF NON GAS FREE PIPELINES ........................................................... ....................... 300 8.1.7 PIPELINES PRESSURE STRENGTH TESTING ......................................................................... 301

8.2 TANKS AND VESSELS .................................................................................................................. 304 8.2.1 MANDATORY ENTRY PERMIT ................................................................................................ .. 304 8.2.2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................. 305 8.2.3 ISOLATION ................................................................ ................................................................ .. 307 8.2.4 GAS FREEING ............................................................................................................................. 308 8.2.5 ISOLATION BY SPADING .............................................................. ............................................. 310

8.3 SAFETY VALVES ........................................................ ................................................................. .. 312 8.3.1 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES ........................................................................................................... 312 8.3.2 REMOVAL OF SAFETY VALVES .............................................................. .................................. 312









8 PIPELINES, TANKS AND VESSELS

8.1 PIPELINES

8.1.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

8.1.1.1 BOXING-IN OF PIPELINES

A section of a pipeline containing liquid shall not be boxed in without first makingarrangements to allow it to breathe through an open vent or suitably sited pressure reliefvalve. High pressure can develop very quickly through expansion of the liquid in the pipeunder the heat of the sun. In this respect it should be remembered that a non-returnvalve can act as a shut valve if the liquid downstream of its discharge connectionexpands.

8.1.1.2 STABILITY OF PIPELINES

Pipelines shall be regularly inspected by the Operating Authority to ensure that pipeworkis adequately supported. This is particularly important where pipework is subjected tovibration. Any unusual or excessive vibration of a pipeline system shall be reported tothe Operating Authority immediately. Stays, guy wires or tackle of any description shallnot be attached to any pipeline or pipe support.

8.1.1.3 PIPEWORK CROSSINGS - MEANS OF ACCESS

Where possible pipe work should be routed so that it does not cross footpaths or accessplatforms, etc. However should this be unavoidable, then adequate crossing facilitiesmust be provided. Overhead pipework shall be at least 2 metres above floor level atworking platforms and walkways. Where this is impossible, black and yellow diagonalbanding shall be applied to the pipework, denoting the hazard.

Further InformationEEMUA 105:02 Factory Stairways, Ladders and Handrails

8.1.1.4 PIPEWORK P ASSING THROUGH BUNDS

The annular space between the pipe and its protecting sleeves must be completelypacked with non-combustible material to ensure that, if there is of a spillage, no oil leaksthrough the bund or firebreak.

8.1.1.5 COMMISSIONING STEAM LINES

Steam lines must be thoroughly warmed before commissioning. Drains and steam trapsshall be allowed to blow until all slugs of condensate are cleared.









Where steam lines are to be vented adjacent to roads, and clouds of steam may obscurethe road visibility, the venting of steam must be led away by steam hoses or other pipes,or alternatively the road closed.

8.1.1.6 SUMPS, HOLES AND EXCAVATIONS

Sumps, holes and excavations can be dangerous gas traps. Unless a gas test hasshown the absence of toxic or flammable gas and the presence of sufficient oxygen,each man entering such traps to investigate or repair leakage must wear breathingapparatus, a safety belt and a life line. Each life line shall have attendants whose soleduty is to stand by to raise the alarm and to help pull out any man who has becomeaffected.

Each attendant must also be provided with breathing apparatus ready for immediate use. An entry permit will be required if below 1.3m.

Further InformationChapter 5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEMChapter 7 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY

8.1.1.7 D ANGER FROM STATIC ELECTRICITY

Steam or hydrocarbon liquids spraying under pressure from a break in a line, from partedflanges or similar orifice can generate an electro-static charge capable of accumulatingto a dangerous level upon any conductor not connected to earth (i.e. a man wearingordinary rubber boots). Immediate action shall be taken to repair leaks of this nature.

Further InformationChapter 6.9STATIC ELECTRICITYBS 5958: Part 1: 1991 Code of practice for Control of undesirable staticelectricity: Part 1. General considerations

8.1.1.8 OIL AND G AS LEAKAGES

In the event there is a large leakage of oil or gas the affected area shall be immediately

sealed off and all ignition sources extinguished and excluded.

The appropriate LNG Plant Emergency Procedure must be instituted immediately.

8.1.1.9 D ANGER FROM HOT OIL/W ATER MIXTURES

The consequences of admitting hot oil to a line containing water or passing cold oilthrough such a line into a hot vessel can be disastrous. Where a line has been steamedout or flushed with water, it must be thoroughly drained before oil is admitted.









8.1.2 DRAINING AND VENTING LINES8.1.2.1 DRAINING OF HYDROCARBON LIQUID LINES

Before a hydrocarbon liquid line is isolated for repair or maintenance, it is essential that itis completely drained. Lines shall be depressured to a vessel and then drained as far aspossible through fitted drain points. Facilities must be provided for controlling releasesand containing any liquid spillages. The utmost care must be taken to limit the release offlammable or toxic vapours to atmosphere; it is essential that this operation is adequatelysupervised.

The area downwind of the release that may include a combustible atmosphere must be

clear of all sources of ignition.

Personnel working downwind must receive adequate warning by the Operating Authorityif there is a possibility of an escape of toxic or combustible gas.

8.1.2.2 VENTING G AS LINES

Pipelines containing gas shall be depressured to atmosphere, as far as possible throughprocess flare systems. Gas may only be vented direct to atmosphere when it isabsolutely necessary and then only under strictly controlled conditions.

The area must be adequately fenced off and warning notices posted of the possibility of

toxic or flammable atmospheres being present. A Fireguard will standby whilst joints arebeing broken and will remain on site until gas tests prove that all gas has dispersed. Allwork and vehicle movements in the area will be strictly controlled.

Persons engaged in maintenance work at the site will wear self contained BA sets or airline breathing apparatus.

8.1.2.3 DRAINAGE OF CORROSIVE OR TOXIC CHEMICALS

When lines containing corrosive or toxic chemicals are to be entered, provision must bemade for draining the line contents to a suitable container or drain. Neutralisation orwater dilution may be necessary and advice shall be sought from HSED. Adequate

protective clothing and/or equipment shall be worn.

8.1.3 ISOLATION

8.1.3.1 WORK PERMITS

Before the isolation of any pipeline can commence, a Cold Work Permit must be issuedby the Area Authority. This permit must detail the conditions of work which will enablethe work to be carried out safely.









8.1.3.2 ISOLATION OF HYDROCARBON OR CHEMICAL LINES

Isolation of lines containing hydrocarbons or chemicals shall be effected by one or acombination of the following methods:

· By removing a valve or spool piece and by sealing off the live section with a standardblank flange.

· By inserting a company approved spade between mating flanges.· By closing both valves and opening the bleed valve when ever double block and

bleed facility is available.

Note: Isolation by blanking or removing a section of line is mandatory when men have to

enter vessels connected to these lines

In the above cases, bonding straps shall be used.

Further InformationHSE OIAC The Safe Isolation of Plant and Equipment 1997: ISBN 0 7176 08719

8.1.3.3 ISOLATION OF STEAM LINES

The isolation of steam lines may be effected by locking isolating valves in the shut

position, provided that an adequate number of drain valves in the isolated section arekept fully open. If it is evident that steam leakage past the valves is excessive, thenblank isolation shall be used.

Note: Isolation by blanking or by removing a section of line is mandatory when men haveto enter vessels connected to these lines.

8.1.3.4 ISOLATION OF AIR AND W ATER LINES

Air and water lines may be isolated by locking the isolating valves in the shut position. Ifthere is a tie-in to a hydrocarbon system, then isolation shall be by spading ordisconnection.

NoteIsolation by blanking or by removing a section of line is mandatory when menhave to enter vessels connected to these lines

8.1.4 LINE CLEARANCE

As the configuration of pipework and work content will vary with each job, it is notfeasible to establish a common safety procedure.

Supervisors shall note carefully sections of lines which form natural traps forhydrocarbon liquid or gas, e.g. loops, by-passes, drain points and changes in elevation.









Methods of removing oil from the line will depend upon the shape of the line and the typeof hydrocarbon. The following points shall be noted:

· Where the line is relatively short and connections are available, draining followed bysteaming to a gas free condition is an ideal procedure.

· For lines of 150mm diameter and less, water flushing at high velocity is an effectivemethod of purging oil of low viscosities (e.g. Pentane).

· Air blowing is not permitted to clear hydrocarbon lines because of the possibility of anair/hydrocarbon gas explosion.

· Air may be used to blow out the contents of a strong sulphuric acid line to a safe

place. The residual air pressure must be reduced gradually.

Subsequent water washing may be necessary for complete removal of acid. Protectiveclothing including chemical suits, boots and goggles shall be worn during this operation.

8.1.4.1 LONG SECTION OF PIPELINES

If it is necessary to cut into a long section of pipeline that cannot readily be made gasfree, then the regulations given in the following parts of this section are to be observed:

· Hot tapping techniques. (refer Chapter 6-14)· Cutting of Pipelines.

· Repair/Modification of non gas-free pipelines.

8.1.4.2 PYROPHORIC SCALE

In lines that carry gas or oils which contain hydrogen sulphide there is a possibility thatpyrophoric scale may have been formed. When these lines are opened, the exposedparts must be kept wet with water or blanketed with steam to render harmless anypyrophoric scale that may be present.

Pipelines that may contain pyrophoric scale shall never be left open without ensuring thatany deposits are kept well wetted.

Scale removed from these lines shall be placed in a drum and covered with water. Advice on the disposal of the scale shall be sought from the HSED.

Lines that have been used on sour-gas duty shall not be opened in more than one placeat a time unless the pyrophoric scale has been rendered harmless. Otherwise, currentsof air could ignite the scale.

Further InformationChapter 4.9.11 PYROPHORIC MATERIAL HANDLING STORAGE ANDDISPOSAL PROCEDURECheresources.com: Pyrophoric Iron Fires









8.1.5 REPAIR OR MODIFICATION

8.1.5.1 CERTIFICATES

Before any work is carried out on a pipeline, the necessary work permit(s) must beissued by the Area Authority.

8.1.5.2 C ATHODICALLY PROTECTED PIPELINES

When any maintenance work is to be carried out on pipelines that are cathodicallyprotected, then the regulations given in Chapter 9.1, Electrical are to be followed.

8.1.5.3 HOT T APPING TECHNIQUES

The term "Hot Tapping" refers to a method of making a connection into a pipeline, vesselor tank while in service. The procedures and requirements for hot tapping are presentedin Chapter 6.14, Hot Tapping.

Further InformationChapter 6.10.13.10 HOT TAPPINGEEMUA: Guide for Hot Tapping on Piping and other Equipment

8.1.5.4 CUTTING OF PIPELINES

Cold cutting techniques must be used if full bore access is required into pipelines thathave contained flammable materials. Cold cutting must be carried out using properlydesigned and manufactured mechanical air-operated or manual pipe cutters. During thecutting operation heat is generated and suitable lubricants and coolants must be used todissipate this heat.

8.1.5.5 ABRASIVE WHEEL CUTTERS

Abrasive wheel cutters shall not be used for cold cutting of pipelines. There is a riskexternal to the line from low energy sparks which could ignite carbonaceous material, butthere is greater risk internal to the line as the cutter penetrates the wall. The internal wallof the pipe becomes very hot and high energy sparks are projected into the pipe. A

further hazard is the tendency of these brittle cutting wheels to shatter if improperly used.

8.1.6 REPAIR OF NON GAS FREE PIPELINES

The application of heat, as by welding, to any part of a line that has not been gas freed ispotentially very dangerous.

Therefore, whenever such mechanical work is required on pipelines, the procedures andcautionary instructions given in these regulations must be adopted to ensure that all workis carried out and completed under the safest possible conditions.










8.1.6.1 PREPARATORY ARRANGEMENTS

The Area and Performing Authorities or their deputies shall visit the site and discuss themethod and timing of the work. At the meeting it must also be determined whether thework can be completed by removal to offsite facilities for Naked Flame, Hot Work or ColdWork techniques. If the aforementioned methods are not practicable, Naked Flame orHot Work may be permitted with the use of mechanical seal plugs, but only afterauthorisation from the Plant Manager in consultation with the MHSE.

Further InformationPM&ED Standing Instructions H4-6 Use Of Mechanical Seal Plugs.

Having agreed a work programme, the necessary work permits must be prepared beforework can be started.

8.1.6.2 LINE ISOLATION

Since mechanical plugs are not designed to hold pressure, a secondary atmosphericvent, preferably of full line diameter, must always be provided on the system.

Further InformationCHAPTER 8.1.3 ISOLATION

8.1.7 PIPELINES PRESSURE STRENGTH TESTING

8.1.7.1 HYDRAULIC TESTING GENERAL

The practice of hydraulic testing has long been accepted as an essentially safe methodof conducting a strength test on fabricated piping systems, a fact proven by the amountof such testing in the oil industry alone, and the infrequency of accidents directly relatedto it.

Further InformationHSE GS4 Safety in Pressure Testing 1992: ISBN 0 7176 0811 5 ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping

The intrinsic safety of hydraulic testing lies in the incompressibility of the medium. Thismay seem an obvious statement, but the lack of appreciation of the difference betweentesting with liquid and testing with gas for strength proof purposes is surprising. Simply -if a system is completely filled with liquid, then the injection of a very small additionalvolume may produce a considerable pressure; should failure occur, then the pressurewill be released comparatively harmlessly on the emission of that small volume. To









induce an equivalent pressure in the system filled with gas might necessitate the airbeing compressed to many times its own volume; in this case, the release of storedenergy upon a failure can give rise to catastrophic effects akin to those of explosion.

When conducting hydraulic strength tests, the following safety factors must be borne inmind:

Supporting structures and their foundations must be checked to ensure their ability tosupport the combined weight of the equipment and the fluid required to fill it.

Note

Testing fluid is nearly always water which is approximately twice as heavy asthe hydrocarbon for which the vessel may be designed.

· Temporary closure, such as blind flanges, and spades, must be checked, togetherwith their fastenings, to ensure their adequacy to withstand the test pressureinvolved.

· Screwed plugs shall be removed for examination to ascertain that:o They are of the specified type and material.o The threads are properly cut and in good condition.o An adequate length of thread is entered into the socket.

· Pressure indicating devices must be properly connected, accurately calibrated, and ofa range suited to the test pressure involved.· Adequate vents must be provided at high points and blind ends to ensure that no air

is entrapped during the filling process. Indication that air is trapped is invariably givenby the behaviour of the pumps and difficulty in attaining pressure. Such a situationMust be Rectified Immediately.

· Pressure must be raised gradually.· Attempts to correct leaks must be made judiciously, and normally it will be necessary

to relieve the pressure. If the application of reasonable force proves insufficient, thecause of the leak must be investigated. Particular care must be exercised whenattempting to rectify leaks at screwed plugs and connections.

· Care must be taken to avoid the consequences of a pressure rise due to thermalexpansion of the test medium. If no automatic relief is provided, then the filledsystem, when closed, whether under pressure or not, must be kept under closesurveillance.

· When emptying the system, adequate venting must be provided to preclude thedrawing of vacuum in any part of it.

· In determining test pressures, where a system contains flanges and other fittings, thetest pressure must not exceed the test pressure applicable to the lowest ratedcomponent in the assembly.

· When pipework is being pressure tested to pressures upto and including 20 barg,barriers shall be placed at 15 metres. For test pressures above 20 barg, barriers









shall be placed at 20 metres. No personnel, except the inspector and test personnelshall enter these barriers.

· Performing Authorities will ensure that barriers and warning notices are sited,wherever practicable, at the above indicated distances prior to commencing tests.

8.1.7.2 TEST FLUIDS

Water is the medium used for hydraulic testing of carbon and ferritic steels. Austiniticstainless steel requires water having a chloride content less than 30 parts per million(ppm).

8.1.7.3 PRESSURE TESTING PROCEDURES (STAINLESS STEEL PIPEWORK)

Stainless Steel pipework that has been repaired, reworked or had new components fittedshall be pressure tested according to the following procedures.

8.1.7.4 TYPE 321 M ATERIAL

Type 321 material, used in sour gas service on Plant 1 and 2 of both Trains, shall betested in accordance with the following procedures

Pressure Testing of Type 321 Material (Non-cryogenic service)

The test fluid shall be either water or light distillate (diesel fuel).

8.1.7.5 W ATER AS THE TEST FLUID

Pipework that has been removed from the LNG Plant and taken to the Workshops forrepair or renewal will be tested with water, subject to the pipework being flanged orcapped at its extremities such that it can be pressurised.

Before testing, the pipework shall be thoroughly flushed internally with water which has achloride content of less than 30ppm and which also contains soda ash or similar agentsufficient to neutralise the sulphide films and/or other acid compounds.

Following the procedures above, the pipework shall be flushed a second time with de

mineralised water.

Following this flushing, the pipe work shall be filled with demineralised water andpressure tested to a pressure of 1.5 times design pressure.

All air shall be vented from the pipework prior to pressure being applied.

The test pressure shall be maintained for a time sufficient to permit a full visualinspection of all welds or for 20 minutes, whichever is the greater.

The test pressure shall be released slowly and the fluid discharged.









The pipework shall be thoroughly drained and dried internally as far as it is practicable.

The weld repairs shall not be painted until after satisfactory completion of the testprocedure. All practical steps shall be taken to prevent atmospheric contamination of theweld at all stages between welding, NDT, PWHT and final hydraulic test.

A record shall be kept of the pipe, the test fluid, the test pressure and the signature of theperson witnessing and passing the test.

8.1.7.6 TYPE 304/316 USED IN CRYOGENIC SERVICE

Type 304 or 316 used in cryogenic service at temperatures of 0°C down to minus 160°Cis generally only tested in accordance with pneumatic pressure testing.

8.1.7.7 PNEUMATIC PRESSURE TESTING

Pneumatic pressure testing of closed equipment and pipework is potentially hazardousbecause of the large amount of stored pressure energy in the system. Consequently,this form of testing is only resorted to where hydraulic testing is inappropriate and thenonly with prior approval from PS or US.

When pipework is being pressure tested to pressures up to and including 20barg,personnel except the inspector and test personnel shall not approach within 15m of thepiping system. The approach limit shall be increased to 20m for test pressures above 20barg. Barriers shall be placed at the above limits.

Nitrogen is the normal medium used for pneumatic tests in the LNG plant, but the use ofair may be sanctioned by PMin special cases.

Except where PMgrants special permission to use another procedure, only OperationsDivision Procedures G.O.P. No.4 shall be used.

Further InformationOperations Division Procedures G.O.P. No.4

8.2 TANKS AND VESSELS

8.2.1 MANDATORY ENTRY PERMIT

An Entry Permit is mandatory for a person to enter or partially enter a confined space onthe LNG facilities. This includes the trash and outfall pits, Train 3 Cooling Water InletManifold Pit and CW/FW pump discharge pit.









WarningThere are no exceptions to this requirement.

An Entry Permit is not a permit to work and appropriate permits will be issued to coverany work activity after entry.

8.2.2 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

8.2.2.1 BUNDS

Tank bunds and retaining walls shall be maintained in good condition. Vegetation insidebunds must be kept to a minimum.

Where pipework passes through bund walls, the sleeve seals must be routinely checked.

A tank bund may not be opened without the authorisation of the PMand then only afteran appropriate work permit has been issued by the PROM. This permit shall specify themethod of opening, the machines or tools to be used and any precautions to be taken toguard against damage to buried cables, etc. Where the tank contains a product,temporary facilities must be provided for closing the bund at short notice.

Water collecting sumps are located in the tank bunds and should be emptied frequentlywhen there has been rain. This is particularly important in the case of tanks in cryogenic

service.

All approaches to tanks must be adequately lighted. There shall be sufficient steps overbund walls and adequate access to tank valves.

Further Information ADGAS PTW Manual Section 5.13

8.2.2.2 H AND-R AILS, STAIRS AND L ADDERS

These shall be kept in good condition and any defects reported.

8.2.2.3 RELIEVING DEVICES

All tanks and vessels must be protected by atmospheric vents or pressure/vacuumrelieving devices according to duty, and maintained in good working condition by regularinspection.

The fitting of an intervening stop valve, for maintenance purposes, either between apressure vessel and it's relief valve or on the downstream side should only be resorted toafter careful consideration of the possibilities of mal-operation of the stop valve. Writtenagreement of the PMand the HCI/SPIE is required for this operation and furtherpermission of statutory or insurance bodies may also be required.









Stop valves must be locked either in the open or shut position by authorised persons inOD.

During the exceptional period that a tank or vessel is operated without a relief valve, anoperator must remain at the control point to observe that the internal pressure does notexceed the vessel's set working pressure.

NoteThis procedure shall only be authorised by PROM

If the operating conditions on a vessel or system protected by a relief valve are changed,then the HCI/SPIE must be notified so that the relieving capacity of the valve may be re-calculated. This would also involve the application of the Modification Procedure.

Where goose-necked, mushroom or similar type vents are fitted, the gauze screen mustbe regularly inspected to ensure that it is in good condition and free from blockage.

Further InformationEEMUA: 184:96. Guide to the Isolation of Pressure Relieving Devices

8.2.2.4 DIP HOLES

The covers of tank dip holes, sampling hatches and manholes must be kept closed whennot required to be open for operating purposes.

8.2.2.5 M ANHOLES

Manholes used as means of entry for a tank or vessel shall not be less than 460mm longand 410mm wide, or if circular, not less than 460mm diameter.

Safe access and means of entry and exit shall be provided at all manholes.

8.2.2.6 ACCESS TO T ANK ROOFS

As the condition of a tank roof may be unknown, access onto the roof shall only beauthorised under an Entry Permit.

The conditions for safe access must include the wearing of a safety belt and lifeline withtwo persons on standby for each man. For a floating roof tank, e.g. pentane, when it isnot at rim level then breathing apparatus must be worn.









8.2.2.7 FILLING AND DRAINING V ALVES

Valves on tanks and vessels shall be conveniently positioned so as to be easilyaccessible for operation. Rising spindles and valve wheels should not present a safetyhazard.

8.2.2.8 SUMPS AND PITS

All sumps and pits shall be provided with handrails to a height of 1m or be completelycovered by an approved flooring.

8.2.3 ISOLATION

8.2.3.1 GENERAL METHODS OF ISOLATION

Isolation shall be by one of the following methods:

· By removing a valve or section from each connecting line and its junction with thetank or vessel as near to the shell as possible and by sealing off the disconnectedline with a standard blank flange.

· By insertion of standard blank flanges as close to the tank or vessel as possible. Forthis purpose, spectacle blanks of appropriate pressure rating shall be used. Caremust be taken to ensure that pockets of liquid hydrocarbons are not trapped betweenblanks and closed valves.

· Sumps may be isolated by expandable rubber plugs. If this method is used, careshall be taken to ensure that the bore of the pipe is smooth and round. Theseexpandable rubber plugs must not be used where there is any possible build up ofpressure in the line.

CautionValve closure as the only means of isolation shall only be approved by PMafterconsultation with MHSE.


8.2.3.2 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN ISOLATING

When opening manholes or breaking lines on any tank or vessel in sour gas service, thepossibility of internal pyrophoric scale being present must be considered. Steam andwater hoses must be immediately available to damp down any pyrophoric material.Great care should be taken in the case of vessels and equipment which have containedraw gas because the corrosive sulphur compounds present in this material may form aneasily oxidisable scale that is pyrophoric.









In opening manholes or breaking lines where there is a possibility of the evolution of H2Srich gas, compressed air breathing apparatus must be worn. It is also required to ensurethe area around the manhole or the line is properly cordoned off.

The operation of breaking into lines to swing blanks or to remove distance pieces is onethat can be hazardous. Before permission is granted to do this work by Cold Permit, theOD must be satisfied that all possible means have been taken to remove pressure fromthe lines. Any possibility of liquid being left in the butt end of lines or valves must bepointed out to the Performing Authority and referred to on the Cold Work Permit. TheCold Work Permit must also specify which blanks are to be swung, bearing in mind thatdrain lines may be required to be left open.

8.2.3.3 ISOLATION OF VESSELS FITTED WITH ISOTOPES

Some vessels are equipped with Radioactive Isotopes. Isolation of these vessels is notcomplete until the source is isolated in its shielded container.

It is not required to remove the isotope from the vessel unless there is a great chance ofaccidental damage of the source container during the normal job on that vessel. In thislast case, the source should be isolated, locked in the source container and the wholething removed by a competent and classified person, from the vessel into the isotopeStorage Room offsite.

Further Information ADGAS PTW Manual Section 10.47

8.2.3.4 ISOLATION OF ACID T ANKS AND VESSELS

Spectacle blanks shall not be used in the isolation of acid tanks. The only approvedmethod is by removal of spool pieces with subsequent sealing of disconnected lines withsolid blank flanges. Any remaining acid sludge shall be completely neutralised anddrained. The tank or vessel shall be washed down with water before personnel areallowed to enter without protective clothing.

8.2.4 GAS FREEINGFollowing the isolation of a tank or vessel it must not be entered unless an Entry Permithas been issued by OD who will specify the conditions of the entry and who will certify itas safe for entry without breathing apparatus only after it has been satisfactorily gas-freed.

Further InformationGuidance Note CS15 HSE Books 1985 (rev 1997) Cleaning and gas-freeing oftanks containing flammable residues. ISBN 0 7176 1365 8Tank cleaning safety code (Model code of safe practice in the petroleumindustry, Part 16) Institute of Petroleum 1996 (2nd ed) ISBN 0 4719 7096 4









The following methods of removing dangerous vapour, flammable gas or liquids may beused either singly or in combination.

8.2.4.1 VENTILATION BY FORCED OR N ATURAL DRAUGHT

This method shall only be employed on oil or gas vessels where steaming, flooding orinerting is impracticable.

When a decision is made to employ this technique, every effort must be made to pumpout as much hydrocarbon liquid and sludge as possible before opening the tank orvessel. Whenever possible, forced ventilation should be used so that flammable vapour

may be cleared in the shortest possible time.

All electrical equipment shall be of flameproof construction. Air movers should be fittedat the tank or vessel top to pull air in at a low level through a shell manhole anddischarge gas at a high level.

Care should be taken when using natural draught ventilation during periods of calmweather because vapour released from tanks can travel considerable distances withoutbeing dispersed.

Vapour issuing from shell manholes can give rise to a dangerous concentration in a

bunded or confined area. Under such conditions no ignition sources may be allowed.

With tanks or vessels which have contained sour gas or liquid, provision shall be madefor continuous wetting of the internal surfaces by means of water fog nozzle(s) insertedinto the roof opening. The water fog nozzle(s) shall be turned on first and the air moversstarted immediately afterwards.

A shell manhole should be opened after approximately five minutes operation when theinternals are thoroughly wet. With the air movers still in operation, the fog nozzle shallbe removed and loose scale dislodged with high pressure water streams. The waternozzle must be earthed.

8.2.4.2 STEAMING

This method can be used in the case of process vessels, small storage tanks andmedium sized insulated tanks. It is essential that following a period of closed steaming,adequate provision is made to prevent damage due to a vacuum being drawn bycondensation of steam. In large tanks the rate of condensation of steam is such thatadequate purging is not possible. Where residual material is left on the tank or vesselsurface after prolonged steaming, such residual material could still evolve vapour onapplication of heat, e.g. burning or welding. In such cases cold cutting may be employedor the internal surface kept thoroughly wet during the heating operation.









All temporary steam hoses shall be earth bonded.

8.2.4.3 W ATER FLOODING

Before a tank or vessel is flooded with water, it must be ascertained that it and itsfoundations are capable of sustaining the weight.

To avoid a build up of a static charge when this method is used, water should preferablybe added from the base of the tank or vessel. If a hose pipe is used, the velocity shouldbe kept low until the end is submerged, and the nozzle should be electrically earthed.Flooding with water should not be considered reliable for the removal of all petroleumvapour, liquid or solid residues.

If any Naked Flame or Hot Work is to be done on the outside of tanks which have beenwater flooded, the internal surfaces must be kept wet with water.

8.2.4.4 INERTING

This method is to be used when it is impossible to displace flammable gases or liquidsbecause of the effect of steam, water or air on the contents of tanks. There is a dangerin this method that if air later displaces the inert gas, any pyrophoric scale deposits thatare present may burst into flame. The internal surfaces shall therefore be thoroughlywetted as described in "Ventilation by forced or natural draught".

The atmosphere of the tank or vessel will not be suitable to breathe after Inerting;therefore, the inert gas shall be swept out with air and a test for sufficiency of oxygencarried out before anyone may enter without wearing breathing apparatus (See Chapter6.10 Portable Gas Detectors). Adequate sized openings must be made in the top andbottom of the tank or vessel.

8.2.4.5 WORKING IN INERT ATMOSPHERES

Entry into a tank or vessel containing an inert atmosphere will only be allowed underexceptional circumstances. In such a case the requirements for Restricted Entry are tobe followed.

Further InformationChapter 7.5 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS API STD 2217A: Guidelines for Safe Work in Inert Confined Spaces in thePetroleum and Petrochemical Industries

8.2.5 ISOLATION BY SPADING


Spading is a method of providing physical isolation of a pipeline, vessel or an item ofprocess equipment, by the insertion at a suitable flange point of a blind rated for the duty.









Properly installed, a spade will provide isolation from any contained pressure, fluid orflammable/toxic gases.

When isolations are accomplished by the provision of a blind flange on a single flange,the operation is termed blanking and is not covered by this section.


8.2.5.2 APPLICATION

Spading is generally considered as a temporary method of obtaining system/equipmentisolation for operational purposes but may also be required for test or other purposes.

Spading can be used to:

· Permit isolation of major items of equipment or group of items for gas freeing, makingsafe and under special conditions, testing. A group of items containing no blockvalves in the interconnecting pipework may be considered as one item of equipment.

· Isolate a section of plant for overhaul.· Isolate utility services, e.g. fuel gas, fuel oil, steam, etc., to individual fired heaters.· Prevent contamination of utility supplies, e.g. steam, water, air and nitrogen where

permanently connected to a process unit.

8.2.5.3 DESIGN

Design of flanges are to be according to BP Engineering Code of Practice CP-12, asdetailed on drawings S-0755M and S-0756M.

Spades shall be full flat faced on both sides, the faces being parallel to each other andfree of distortion and weld splatter.

Gasket contact surfaces shall be concentrically machined about the pipeline centreline.

8.2.5.4 USE AND PRECAUTIONS

The use of spades and blinds are to contain enclosed fluids and gases, and generallyare designed to contain maximum operating pressures only.

Blinds or spades inserted for pressure test purposes must be rated for the requiredpressures.

It is the responsibility of the Performing Authority to ensure that all blanks inserted forisolation conform to the correct specification, i.e. thickness and material.









Thin blinds can be deformed due to differential pressure, therefore, they should be usedwith caution, and then only in special cases after the approval from the PROM.

Any changes of spade orientation i.e. open to shut, or vice-versa, must be noted on theblind list at the time the change takes place.

NoteThis is especially important during shutdowns or overhauls

Arrangements shall be provided to enable a section of line containing a spade to bechecked as free from pressure before spade insertion or removal.

If during maintenance, pump suction or discharge valves are found to be passing,spades must be inserted in the suction and discharge lines before the pump casing isremoved. Pumps on H2S, acid or chemical duty will not be opened for maintenancewithout spade isolation of suction and discharge lines - valve isolation is not sufficient.

Spades will be fitted to any hydrocarbon duty pumps that are to remain open at the endof the normal working day.

8.3 SAFETY VALVES

8.3.1 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES

The fitting of an intervening stop valve between a vessel and its relief valve or protectingdevice, or on the downstream side of a relief valve or protecting device shall only beresorted to after careful consideration of the possibilities of mal-operation of the stopvalves. When it is desired to fit such a stop valve, the Modification Procedure must befollowed.

Where stop valves are so fitted, they must be arranged so that they can be locked in theopen or closed position. Permission must be obtained from the OD before any lock isremoved and the stop valve operated.

The keys for the locks of any stop valves on the upstream or downstream side of reliefvalves will be held in the custody of the OD.

8.3.2 REMOVAL OF SAFETY VALVES

If it is necessary to remove or isolate a safety valve from any pressure vessel in service,the Modification Procedure must followed.

During the period that a vessel is operated without a relief valve, a member of the ODmust remain at the control point of the vessel to observe the pressure on a freshlycalibrated gauge and ensure that the vessel does not exceed its set working pressure.









When the safety valve is refitted, the stop valves must be locked in the open positionbefore the services of the special operator are discontinued.

Further InformationChapter 2.12.1 PLANT MODIFICATIONS AND PROJECTSEEMUA: 184:96 Guide to the Isolation of Pressure Relieving Devices






M AINTENANCE S AFETY Chapter No. 09



CHAPTER 9 CONTENTS

9 MAINTENANCE SAFETY .................................................................................................................... 317

9.1 ELECTRICAL .................................................................................................................................. 317 9.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 317 9.1.2 DEFINITIONS ........................................................... ................................................................. .. 317 9.1.3 EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSIFIED HAZARDOUS AREAS ........................................................... 318 9.1.4 ELECTRICAL PERMIT SYSTEM ........................................ ........................................................ 318 9.1.5 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................... ....................... 319 9.1.6 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION CERTIFICATE/DANGER NOTICE CARD ..................................... 319 9.1.7 PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................................. 320 9.1.8

REPORTING OF FAULTS .............................................................. ............................................. 321 9.1.9 STATUTORY POSTERS ............................................................................................................... 321 9.1.10 WORK NEAR CABLES AND WIRING .................................................................................... 321 9.1.11 CABLE MARKERS .................................................................................................................. 321 9.1.12 CABLE DUCTS/CABLE TRAYS .............................................................................................. 321 9.1.13 CUTTING OF CABLES .............................................................. ............................................. 322 9.1.14 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS ............................................................................................. 322 9.1.15 INSTRUMENT CIRCUITS .......................................................... ............................................. 322 9.1.16 PORTABLE HAND LAMPS (BATTERY) .......................................................... ....................... 322 9.1.17 PORTABLE EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................... 322 9.1.18 LIGHTING IN CONFINED SPACES ............................................................... ....................... 323 9.1.19 SUBSTATIONS AND SWITCHGEAR ............................................................... ....................... 323 9.1.20 EARTH CONNECTIONS ............................................................ ............................................. 323

9.1.21 PORTABLE LADDERS ........................................................................................................... 323 9.1.22 DEMOLITION ................................................................. ........................................................ 324 9.1.23 ELEVATED WORK .................................................................... ............................................. 324 9.1.24 CLOTHING ON EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... 324 9.1.25 WASHING DOWN EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................... 324 9.1.26 CATHODIC PROTECTION .................................................................................................... 324 9.1.27 FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. 325 9.1.28 TREATMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ............................................................................ 326

9.2 LIFTING APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................... ....................... 332 9.2.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 332 9.2.2 LIFTING APPLIANCES ....................................................... ........................................................ 332 9.2.3 LIFTING EQUIPMENT ....................................................... ........................................................ 336

9.3 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS .................................................................................................. 342

9.3.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 342 9.3.2 DEFINITIONS ........................................................... ................................................................. .. 343 9.3.3 EFFECTS ON AREAS .......................................................... ........................................................ 344 9.3.4 ALUMINIUM SCAFFOLDING ....................................................... ............................................. 344 9.3.5 SCAFFOLDING IN TRAIN 3 .......................................................... ............................................. 345 9.3.6 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................. .. 345 9.3.7 MISUSE OF BOARDS .................................................................... ............................................. 346 9.3.8 SCAFFOLDING ADJACENT IGNITION SOURCES .................................................................. 346 9.3.9 INDEPENDENT SCAFFOLDS ....................................................... ............................................. 347 9.3.10 INDEPENDENT TIED SCAFFOLDS............................................................... ....................... 347 9.3.11 MOBILE ACCESS TOWERS ................................................................................................... 351 9.3.12 LADDERS .............................................................. ................................................................ .. 353 9.3.13 SPECIALISED TEMPORARY STRUCTURES ........................................................................ 355









9.4 MACHINERY SAFEGUARDS ....................................................................................................... 357 9.4.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 357 9.4.2 DANGERS ................................................................. ................................................................. .. 357 9.4.3 PRINCIPLES OF SAFEGUARDING ......................................................... .................................. 357 9.4.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................. 358 9.4.5 CONSTRUCTION OF SAFEGUARDS ........................................................................................ 358 9.4.6 CHOICE OF MACHINE GUARDS ............................................................................................. 359 9.4.7 REMOVAL OF GUARDS ................................................................ ............................................. 359 9.4.8 ISOLATION OF MACHINERY ....................................................... ............................................. 359 9.4.9 STARTING UP MACHINERY ...................................................................................................... 360 9.4.10 CLOTHING AND CLEANLINESS ......................................................... .................................. 360 9.4.11 LUBRICATION ................................................................ ........................................................ 360 9.4.12 TRIPS AND GOVERNORS ......................................................... ............................................. 360

9.4.13 DRAINING AND VENTING PUMPS ............................................................... ....................... 361 9.4.14 WARMING THROUGH PUMPS ........................................................... .................................. 361 9.4.15 LIGHTING AT MACHINES................................................................... .................................. 361 9.4.16 DIESEL ENGINES........................................................... ........................................................ 361 9.4.17 STEAM TURBINES ................................................................................................................. 361 9.4.18 EYE PROTECTION ......................................................... ........................................................ 362 9.4.19 MACHINE OPERATOR TRAINING...................................................... .................................. 362 9.4.20 GRINDING MACHINES/ ABRASIVE WHEELS ..................................................................... 364 9.4.21 PORTABLE GRINDERS AND ABRASIVE CUTTERS ............................................................ 365

9.5 EXCAVATIONS .............................................................................................................................. 365 9.5.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 365 9.5.2 PERMITS...................................................................................................................................... 365 9.5.3 UNIDENTIFIED BURIED CABLES AND PIPELINES ............................................................. .. 365

9.5.4 EXCAVATION EDGES .............................................................................................................. .. 365 9.5.5 MEANS OF EGRESS FROM TRENCH EXCAVATIONS ............................................................ 366 9.5.6 BARRIERS AND LIGHTING................................................ ........................................................ 366 9.5.7 SHORING ........................................................ ................................................................. ............ 366

9.6 DIVING OPERATIONS ........................................................... ........................................................ 367 9.6.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 367 9.6.2 DIVING CONTRACTORS ............................................................... ............................................. 368 9.6.3 DIVING SUPERVISORS ................................................................. ............................................. 368 9.6.4 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................... 368 9.6.5 EMERGENCY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................ .................................. 368 9.6.6 DIVING IN CONFINED SPACES.................................................................................... ............ 369

9.7 WORK OVER WATER ............................................................ ........................................................ 369 9.7.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 369

9.7.2 HAZARDS ............................................................................ ........................................................ 369 9.7.3 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ......................................................................................................... 370 9.7.4 SAFETY NETS ........................................................... ................................................................. .. 370 9.7.5 SAFETY BELTS AND HARNESSES ........................................................... .................................. 371 9.7.6 FALL ARREST DEVICES ............................................................................................................ 373 9.7.7 USE OF FALL ARREST DEVICES .............................................................................................. 374 9.7.8 CARE OF BELTS AND HARNESSES .......................................................................................... 375 9.7.9 WORK SITE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................... 375 9.7.10 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT ................................................................. ............. 376 9.7.11 RESCUE EQUIPMENT .............................................................. ............................................. 376

9.8 WORK ON ROOFS .......................................................................................................................... 378 9.8.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 378 9.8.2 PLANNING .................................................................................................................................. 378









9.8.3 SAFE ACCESS ............................................................................................................................. 379 9.8.4 SAFE PLACE TO WORK ................................................................ ............................................. 379 9.8.5 Flat roofs ......................................................... ................................................................. ............ 380 9.8.6 Non-fragile sloping roofs ................................................................ ............................................. 381 9.8.7 Non fragile roofs ....................................................... ................................................................. .. 382 9.8.8 FRAGILE ROOFS ........................................................................................................................ 382 9.8.9 FRAGILE ROOF REGISTER ....................................................................................................... 383 9.8.10 SAFETY HARNESSES AND NETS .......................................................................................... 383 9.8.11 PROTECTION OF OTHER PERSONNEL ................................................................. ............. 384

9.9 WORK AT HEIGHT ........................................................................................................................ 384 9.9.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. ........................................................ 384 9.9.2 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 385 9.9.3 WORK OVERHEAD ............................................................. ........................................................ 385

9.9.4 MAN CAGE/WORK BASKET ............................................................................... ....................... 385 9.9.5 SKY CLIMBER ............................................................................................................................. 386 9.9.6 ABSEILING ................................................................ ................................................................ .. 386









9 MAINTENANCE SAFETY

9.1 ELECTRICAL

9.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The stopping and starting of motors and the switching On and Off of lights, heaters, fansand other such electrical equipment is normally carried out by the user. All otheroperations affecting electrical equipment may only be carried out by a person holding theappropriate certificate of authorisation.

9.1.2 DEFINITIONS

9.1.2.1 EXPLOSION PROOF/FLAMEPROOF

An explosion proof/flameproof enclosure for electrical apparatus is one that willwithstand, without damage, any explosion of the prescribed flammable gas or vapourthat may occur within it under practical conditions of operation within the rating of theapparatus and the fault level of the electrical system (and recognised overloads, if any,associated therewith) and will prevent the transmission of flame such as will ignite theprescribed flammable gas or vapour which may be present in the surroundingatmosphere.

9.1.2.2 INTRINSICALLY S AFE

The term 'Intrinsically Safe' as used in the petroleum industry generally refers to tools,instruments or equipment which due to the design and use, are incapable of generatingheat, sparks or flame sufficient to ignite any of the flammable or explosive atmosphereslikely to be encountered on hydrocarbon facilities.

In electrical terms 'Intrinsically Safe' refers to a circuit under test conditions in which anyspark or thermal condition (in both normal and fault conditions) is incapable of igniting aspecific explosive atmosphere.

Intrinsically safe apparatus denotes that it is so constructed that when installed andoperated under conditions specified by the certifying authority any electrical sparking thatmay occur in normal working, either in the apparatus or in the circuit associatedtherewith, is incapable of causing an ignition of the prescribed flammable gas or vapour.

Further InformationChapter 6.10.13.7 INTRINSICALLY SAFE EQUIPMENT









9.1.2.3 APPROVED APPARATUS

Apparatus other than flameproof, explosion proof, or intrinsically safe that has beensubmitted to the appropriate authority for examination and test, and in respect of which acertificate has been issued approving its use in prescribed applications.

NoteNo work shall be carried out on any such apparatus or wiring, nor shall theflameproof enclosure of any apparatus be opened unless all electrical supplieshave been isolated from the apparatus and wiring.

All such apparatus and wiring shall be inspected and maintained so as to retain the

characteristics upon which the design depends to secure flameproof or intrinsic safetyand to comply with the conditions of certification.

Before any such apparatus or wiring is put into use either originally or after repair,adjustment or removal, it shall be thoroughly examined and where necessary tested.

All circuits associated with flameproof equipment or wiring shall be controlledautomatically so as to prevent damage to the apparatus or wiring by reason of overloador short circuit or leakage of current to earth.

9.1.3 EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSIFIED HAZARDOUS AREAS

All equipment in Classified Hazardous Areas must conform to:

· BS EN60079-14:2003: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres.Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

· BS EN60079-25:2004: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres.Intrinsically safe systems

· BP RP 44-6

A Non-Hazardous Area is considered as an area no part of which is classified as aHazardous Zone. Normal industrial equipment is permitted but permission must beobtained on a Work Permit for its use inside the Restricted Area

Further InformationChapter 5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEMChapter 3.4 HAZARDOUS AREAS AND ZONES

9.1.4 ELECTRICAL PERMIT SYSTEM

The following types of permits are issued to cover work on electrical apparatus or toenter sub-stations:

· Figure 9-1: Electrical Isolation Certificate/Danger Notice









· Figure 9-2: Permit to Work on Apparatus· Figure 9-3: Permit to Enter Sub Station· Figure 9-4: Sanctions For Testing Of Electrical Apparatus· Figure 9-5: Temporary Supply Certificate For Change Of Use· Hot, Cold, Entry Permits. (Refer to Chapter 5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM)· Excavation Work Request. (Refer to Chapter 5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM)

Before mechanical inspection and/or cleaning work on any plant or equipment directlyconnected to an electrical power supply exceeding 250 volts is carried out, the Area Authority must obtain confirmation from the Electrical Section that it may proceed. Withinthe terms of any such sanction the Electrical Section will issue an "Electrical Isolation

Certificate/Danger Notice" to the Area Authority.

Work must NOT be carried out on such "live" apparatus until an Electrical IsolationCertificate/Danger Notice is noted on the Work Permit and the Work Permit issued by the Area Authority to the person carrying out the work. The permit must be retained until thework is completed or stopped by an authorised person.

Before an Electrical Isolation Certificate/Danger Notice is issued covering work on anyplant or equipment connected to an electrical power supply (e.g. motor driven pumps,electrically traced lines etc.), electrical isolation must be arranged by the Operating Authority with an authorised person in the Electrical Section. This authorisation will also

be recorded on the respective Hot, Cold/Entry Permit.

At the discretion of the "Authorised Person", routine maintenance operations on circuitsoperating at voltages not exceeding 240 volts, e.g. lamp changing, may be carried outunder a Special Standing Instruction without a specific written Electrical Work Permit.

9.1.5 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION PROCEDURE

9.1.5.1 PURPOSE

To establish a uniform procedure for the isolation of electrical circuits, and to preventthose electrical circuits from being accidentally or inadvertently energised while work isbeing performed on electrical equipment or on equipment which is electrically driven.

9.1.6 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION CERTIFICATE/DANGER NOTICE CARD

A "Electrical Isolation Certificate/Danger Notice" must be attached to the switch directlycontrolling the isolation of the section to be worked upon by a member of the ElectricalSection.

Certification of the Work Permit that the work on the apparatus is complete and is safe toenergise must be obtained before a Electrical Isolation Certif icate/Danger Notice Card isremoved by either:









· An Authorised person in the Electrical Section.· The person who affixed the Danger Notice.

9.1.7 PROCEDURE

Upon receipt of a request for a permit to work the Area Authority must decide if anyelectrical isolation is necessary.

If electrical isolation is required then the Area Authority must initiate this by completingSection 'A' of the Electrical Isolation Certificate/Danger Notice. He must contact theElectrical Section authorised person who is to effect the isolation.

The authorised person will complete Section 'B' of the certificate. He will remove theSection 'B' tear-off portion. This he will affix at the point of isolation.

The authorised person will then perform the isolation as appropriate to the equipment.

He will ensure the isolation is locked off using a padlock unique to that isolation.

He will then place the padlock key in a lock-out box in the Control Room.

The lock out box will then be secured using the multi-lock hasp.

Padlocks will be applied to the hasp by the following:

· The Operating Authority who is to issue the permit.· The Electrical Section authorised person.· The Performing Authority who is to take receipt of the permit.

CautionWHERE MORE THAN ONE WORK PERMIT IS ASSOCIATED WITH THEISOLATION, EACH PERFORMING AUTHORITY WILL APPLY A PADLOCKTO THE MULTI-LOCK HASP

The isolation certificate number and the lock out box number should be entered on theassociated work permit(s). Similarly the permit number(s) should be shown on Section'A' of the Electrical Isolation Certificate/Danger Notice.

Only at this stage can the Work Permit be issued.

On completion of the work, a Performing Authority must sign off the work completedsection of his permit, and remove his padlock from the lock out box hasp.









When all Performing Authority padlocks have been removed, and all associated permitsare signed off, the Operating Authority will initiate the request for re-energisation of theequipment.

The Operating Authority will sign Section 'C' of the Electrical Isolation Certificate/DangerNotice.

The authorised person will sign, date, and time Section 'C', and retain the whole left handsection after it has been signed off.

Both the Operating Authority and authorised person padlocks can now be removed from

the lock out box hasp, and the isolation padlock key retrieved.

The authorised person can then re-energise the equipment, and replace the isolationpadlock key in it's storage cabinet.

9.1.8 REPORTING OF FAULTS

All electrical faults and breakdowns must be reported immediately to the ElectricalEngineer/Supervisor or Shift Superintendent.

9.1.9 STATUTORY POSTERS

Instructions for the treatment of persons suffering from electric shock shall be posted inall premises where electricity is used at over 250 volts D.C. or 100 volts A.C.

9.1.10 WORK NEAR CABLES AND WIRING

If work is planned on buildings, plant or overhead cranes, etc. where damage may becaused to wiring or where there may be danger from exposed wires, the personsresponsible for the work must contact the SEE to ensure that any danger or damage isavoided.

9.1.11 CABLE MARKERS

Cable markers must NOT be moved except under the authority of SEE or his Deputy.

9.1.12 CABLE DUCTS/CABLE TRAYS

Vehicles may not be driven on to cable ducts or slabs except those ducts designed aspart of a road system.

Discarded materials must not be placed or left on cable trays and lifting appliances mustnot be attached to these trays.









9.1.13 CUTTING OF CABLESBefore any cable is cut, except immediately adjacent to a terminating box where it ispossible to trace a cable back to the earthing bond, the SEE and the Area Authority mustbe satisfied that the cable has been made dead and earthed, and see an iron spikedriven into the cores of the cable at the point where the cable is to be cut using anapproved cable spiking gun

9.1.14 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS

Temporary installation work should be avoided as far as possible and will conform withthe BP-RP 12-19 Electrical System and Installation - Construction Site Power. Where

work of a temporary nature is unavoidable, it must not remain as a temporary installationafter a period of three months. If, at the end of that time, an installation is still required, itmust be made a permanent installation complying with all general regulations.

Further InformationBP-RP 12-19 Electrical System and Installation - Construction Site Power

9.1.15 INSTRUMENT CIRCUITS

The SEE is responsible for the safe operation and maintenance of all 110 volt circuitsassociated with instrumentation and will, as necessary, carry out repairs to individualitems of equipment in this category.

9.1.16 PORTABLE HAND LAMPS (BATTERY)

Only the approved portable battery hand lamps supplied by the Company may be usedin Restricted Areas.

All hand lamps will be checked, sealed and numbered by the Electrical Section beforebeing issued. Battery replacement or repairs will only be carried out by the ElectricalSection and NOT by the user. This will ensure that certification of approval for use in aRestricted Area is maintained.

9.1.17 PORTABLE EQUIPMENTIn order to minimise the effects of electrical shock the power requirements for apparatusused in the ADGAS areas are listed below and shall not exceed Industrial Area Handlamps - 25 volts (12.5 volts to earth). Hand held portable tools must be of a typedesigned to operate at a voltage not greater than 110 volts and the supply to suchappliance shall not be more than 55 volts above earth potential. Non-Industrial Area:In addition to the 110 volts supply equipment power hand tools, hand lamps andextension leads of 230 volt mains supply, through a 30mA residual current device (RCD)may also be used. Portable power tools must not be used if any defect is suspected orany damage apparent. Care must be taken to avoid damage to flexible cables. Kinkingand the formation of knots can cause serious damage which may not be apparent on the









outside. Crushing and damage to the outer sheath should be treated as damagenecessitating repair.

9.1.18 LIGHTING IN CONFINED SPACES

Further InformationChapter 7.8.3 LIGHTING OF CONFINED SPACES

9.1.19 SUBSTATIONS AND SWITCHGEAR

Only an authorised person, competent person, or persons under his direct andcontinuous supervision shall enter any enclosure containing high voltage equipment

where it is possible, under any circumstances, to come into contact with live high voltageconductors.

Enclosures containing live high voltage apparatus must be kept locked and keys mustonly be in the possession of persons authorised to enter such enclosures.

Substations, switch houses, transformer houses and bays must never be used assubsidiary store rooms. The switchgear and floors of these buildings must be kept clearof all materials and obstructions.

Switchgear installed in pump houses and on various plants must be kept clear of all

obstructions, and materials shall NOT be stored behind or on top of such switchgear.

An area is to be marked off around all switchboards at a distance of 1m from theequipment, and this area must be kept clear of all obstructions.

All spare entries to metal switches, fuse gear or other equipment must be plugged orblanked off. All covers, cover bolts and nuts must be fixed in position and tight.

9.1.20 EARTH CONNECTIONS

All earth connections on tanks, poles, process plant and buildings are to be testedannually for resistance to earth by a member of the Electrical Section and a record of

these tests must be maintained.

9.1.21 PORTABLE LADDERS

Where there is any possibility of a ladder coming in contact with bare electricalconductors, wooden or glass fibre ladders without any metal reinforcement must beused.









9.1.22 DEMOLITIONBefore demolition work is begun on plant or buildings, the electrical wiring of the system,especially lighting wiring, must be disconnected from the power supply by the ElectricalSection and an Electrical Isolation Certificate issued.

The responsibility for ensuring that the Electrical Section disconnects power rests withthe person in-charge of the demolition work.

9.1.23 ELEVATED WORK

A safe means of access must be provided for personnel engaged in lamp replacement,

maintenance work, etc., on overhead masts and high exposed positions. In many cases(e.g. work on masts) safety harnesses must be worn.

9.1.24 CLOTHING ON EQUIPMENT

Placing or hanging clothes or other materials on electrical equipment is forbidden.

9.1.25 WASHING DOWN EQUIPMENT

The use of water for washing down equipment in the vicinity of electrical apparatus isforbidden.

9.1.26 CATHODIC PROTECTION

9.1.26.1 GENERAL

Cathodic protection which is used to prevent corrosion of tanks, pipelines, jetties andoffshore structures introduces some risk of incendive sparking when this method ofprotection is used in hazardous areas.

Protection may be provided by the current generated either by an externaltransformer/rectifier system or by sacrificial anodes.

To confine the flow of direct current to the structure being protected, insulating flangesare installed at each end and at certain intermediate points in the system.

Incendive sparks can be produced if joints or connections in the system are broken orwhen insulators are short circuited.

9.1.26.2 M AINTENANCE WORK

When maintenance work or any other work is required on cathodically protectedpipelines or tankage or equipment, the system must first be made safe against anypossible arcing by:

· Switching off the associated rectifier(s) and/or;









· clamping a heavy copper bonding wire not less than 70 sq.mm to each side of theintended break.

Alternatively depending on the work to be done, the transformers associated with theCathodic Protection Beds in the vicinity can be switched off. C&ID must be consulted.They will advise, using their “Guideline for CP System Isolation” document, whichtransformers must be isolated for work to continue safely.

These switching and bonding operations will be the responsibility of an ElectricalEngineer nominated by SEE and the work permit will indicate that this work has beencarried out.

An up-to-date plan showing the systems protected by impressed currents must alwaysbe maintained by SEE.

9.1.26.3 INSULATING FLANGES

Insulating flanges must be kept clean and protected against accidental short circuit.

Insulating flanges must be tested at least once in every year to ensure that the insulationresistance is not less than 10,000 ohms.

9.1.27 FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

Foam, water or steam used for fire fighting must not be allowed to contact live electricalequipment.

CO2, BCF or dry powder extinguishers shall be used on fires involving electricalequipment. Use water, foam or steam only when certain that the electrical supply hasbeen cut off.

Further Information ADGAS General Rules Relating to the Control and Safe Operation andMaintenance of Electrical Apparatus









9.1.28 TREATMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

TREATMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

FREE FROM CONTACT

Switch off the power immediately, or send someone to do so. If the power cannot be

switched off at once, attempt to remove the person, but do not touch him with barehands. Preferably use rubber gloves, or if these are not available, use a loop of rope,

coat or stick to drag the person free. Whatever is used must be dry and non-conducting.

AFTER RELEASE

Lay the patient down on a dry surface, if possible, and if no sign of breathing can beobserved, immediately proceed to promote artificial resuscitation (mouth-to-mouth ormechanical resuscitator) and send for medical aid. Check that heart is beating, if not

commence external cardiac massage.

STIMULANTS/HOT DRINKS

Stimulants must not be administered unless recommended by a doctor. Hot drinks mustnever be given unless the patient is fully conscious.

KEEP THE PATIENT WARM









Figure 9-1: Electrical Isolation Certificate/Danger Notice









Figure 9-2: Permit to Work on Apparatus









Figure 9-3: Permit to Enter Sub Station











Figure 9-5: Temporary Supply Certificate For Change Of Use

No . … …… ….

1. THIS NOTICE REFERS ONLY TO THE CIRCUIT/ EQUIPMENT:-

2. OVERALL CONTROLLING DANGER NOTICE:- No.

3. PURPOSE OF INTERIM ENERGISATION:-

4. MODIFICATIONS TO NORMAL CONFIGURATION. MAIN OR CONTROL CIRCUITRY ETC.:-

SIGNED DESIGNATION

TIME DATE

5. ALL MODIFICATIONS AS DETAILED IN 4. HAVE BEEN REMOVED. THE CIRCUIT/ EQUIPMENT

IS RETURNED TO ITS ORIGINAL STATE AND IN NOW RE-ISOLATED UNDER DANGER NOTICE.

No.

SIGNED DESIGNATION

TIME DATE

RETURN TO NORMAL PERMIT CONTROL

ABU DHABI GAS LIQUEFACTION CO. LTD. (ADGAS)

ELECTRICAL SECTION OVERHAUL ENERGISATION NOTICE

No. Title Plant Train









9.2 LIFTING APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT

9.2.1 INTRODUCTION

Lifting operations involving lifting appliances and lifting equipment are used frequentlywithin the LNG Plant to effect maintenance requirements, operating requirements,corrective actions, modifications and scheduled plant shutdowns or overhauls. To thisend it is essential that the requirements of this section on the operation, condition andstorage of the lifting appliances and lifting equipment are strictly followed by responsibleparties of the Company and Contractors.

9.2.2 LIFTING APPLIANCES

9.2.2.1 DEFINITION

Lifting Appliance means any crane, grab, sheer legs, excavator, piling frame drag-line,pulley block, gin wheel, chain hoist, davit, pull-lift or other lifting device, including a forklift truck.

9.2.2.2 CONSTRUCTION AND USE

All parts and working equipment on lifting appliances, both fixed and movable, must be ofgood construction, sound material and free from patent defect. They must be properlymaintained and examined by a competent person at least every fourteen months inaccordance with accepted codes of practice.

A register shall be maintained of all items classed as lifting appliances and details ofexaminations shall be entered in a register.

Every lifting appliance, as far as the construction permits, must be inspected at leastonce in every week by the operator, if competent for the purpose, or other competentperson. A log of each inspection shall be carried on every crane and be available forinspection by HSED, or other authorised party.

In addition to inspections and examinations every lifting appliance must be tested at least

once in four years or following substantial repair or alteration. The test shall be carriedout under the direction of a competent person who will decide on the test weight to belifted. The test weight shall be a minimum of 25% over the safe working load (SWL) ofthe appliance.

A test certificate in respect of each test shall be issued by the competent person makingthe test. A copy of the test certificate shall be retained with the lifting appliance.









9.2.2.3 ISSUE

New lifting appliances shall not be brought into use initially unless accompanied by themanufacturers test certificate. Every such appliance shall also be subject to inspectionby a competent person with details of inspection being recorded in the register.

9.2.2.4 OVERLOADING OF LIFTING APPLIANCES

A lifting appliance shall not be loaded beyond the safe working load marked on it, exceptfor the purpose of proof testing by an authorised person.

Where a lifting appliance is fitted with a safe working load indicator or alarm, this shall

not be disconnected at any time when the appliance is in service.

9.2.2.5 T ANDEM LIFTS

Where by the nature of the load being lifted, a tandem lift is necessary, prior approvalshall be sought from the PM& EM. The operation will require careful planning and anassessment of the share of the load which is to be carried by each crane. A competentperson shall be specifically appointed to supervise the operation and shall ensure thatthe signals to the crane drivers are clear and well rehearsed. A Task Risk Assessmentmay need to be considered for involved lifts.

In all lifting operations, rigging supervisors and crane operators must know the weight of

the load to be lifted. If this information is not available, competent advice shall besought.

9.2.2.6 QUALIFICATIONS OF CRANE OPERATORS

Cranes shall be operated only by trained crane operators who are in possession of avalid U.A.E. Crane Operators Licence.

No person under 21 years of age shall operate a crane or give signals to the operator.

Crane operators must be physically fit with good hearing and eyesight, corrected byspectacles if necessary.

9.2.2.7 MOBILE CRANES

Mobile cranes shall not travel within the Restricted Area unless accompanied by aBanksman whose duty is to guide the crane underneath overhead piperacks, up or downinclines, through sharp turns or within congested areas.

When a mobile crane fitted with outriggers is used, the outriggers shall be fully extendedand jacked down on even firm ground, using a spread support where necessary.









On all multi boom length/jib angle cranes, the operator shall have at his disposal, in thecabin a chart and automatic device indicating the safe working load of the crane in allacceptable positions.

No crane shall leave the recognised roads on Das Island without an authorised VehicleMovement Permit .

No person(s) shall be carried on the platform of a mobile crane unless there is securelyaffixed to the platform a proper seat.

Pre-use inspection checklists are to be completed according to current instructions.

9.2.2.8 CRAWLER MOUNTED CRANES

Crawler mounted cranes shall not travel within the Restricted Area or on the roads ofDas Island unless accompanied by a Banksman, whose duty is to direct the operator andother road users.

When travelling on the asphalt roads of Das Island, the road surface shall be protectedby "Tracked Vehicle Travelling Mats" (Conveyor belt material is ideal).

During the summer months vehicles of this type shall only be moved between 02.00 -05.00 hours when road surfaces are at their hardest.

If there is any damage to the road surface then the contractor in question is responsiblefor the reinstatement of the damaged surface to a standard acceptable to ADGAS.

9.2.2.9 PEDESTRIAN OPERATED OVERHEAD CRANES

Only authorised persons who are experienced and trained shall operate these cranes.

A minimum of two experienced personnel are required during the operation of thesecranes, one person to operate the crane the other to act as banksman.

It is essential that a clear path be kept at all times over the full length of the floor for

personnel operating the crane controls. Lines indicating the width of the path should bepainted on the floor as well as notices indicating that the path shall be kept clear.

The pendant control on such cranes shall be adequately supported so as no undue strainor weight is taken on the electrical power line.

Crane hoist and travel controls are to be clearly marked and legible.

Pre-use inspection check lists are to be completed in accordance with currentinstructions.









9.2.2.10 WORK ON OR NEAR OVERHEAD G ANTRY CRANES

Work that necessitates the presence of men on or near electrically driven overheadgantry cranes or crane tracks shall not be started until the crane has been renderedinoperable by the removal of the fuses by an Authorised Electrical Engineer. In additionthe crane power supply switch shall be padlocked in the Off position.

9.2.2.11 USE OF CRANES

The hoisting mechanism of a crane shall not be used for any purpose other than lifting aload vertically except in the case of a crane fitted with a manufacturer approved dragline.

Transportation of suspended loads by mobile cranes shall only be undertaken where allother methods are impracticable.

No person shall enter the cabin or otherwise distract the operator of a crane during alifting operation.

Only the appointed banksman shall give signals to the crane operator.

NoteBefore the commencement of a lift in excess of one tonne in the ADGASRestricted Area, the site shall be inspected and approval given by the Area Authority

While in transit all telescopic boom cranes shall have boom sections fully retracted, the jib in a near horizontal position and hook block firmly secured to prevent swinging.

Pipeline and supports of equipment shall not be used to tie down crane jibs.

9.2.2.12 SECURING OF LOADS

Every part of a load shall be securely suspended or supported to prevent danger fromslipping or displacement.

When possible the lifting of a load shall be halted after the load has been raised a fewinches, the security of the slinging attachment shall then be checked before proceedingwith the operation.

9.2.2.13 GIN POLES AND DERRICKS

Gin poles shall be adequately constructed of steel with attachments at the head forsuspending the load and guying, and be fitted with proper base plates.

Guys for gin poles shall be attached to "Dead man" earth screws or substantial steelstructure. They shall not be attached to vessels, pipelines or pipeline supports.









An excavation permit must be obtained before driving stakes, etc., into the ground for ginpoles.

9.2.2.14 INDUSTRIAL POWER TRUCKS/FORK LIFT TRUCKS

Industrial power trucks or fork lift trucks shall not be used to lift a load greater than themaximum safe working load permitted for the truck.

Industrial power and fork lift trucks shall be fitted with cabin front protection (e.g.,mesh/plexiglass) to ensure safety of the operator.

Only secure loads shall be moved, and the forks shall be in a low position when in

transit.

Passengers are forbidden to ride on fork lift trucks.

9.2.3 LIFTING EQUIPMENT

9.2.3.1 DEFINITION

Lifting equipment or equipment means any chain sling, rope sling or similar equipment, aring, link, hook, plate clamp, shackle, swivel, eyebolt or any part thereof used inconjunction with a lifting appliance.

9.2.3.2 CONSTRUCTION AND USE

No lifting equipment shall be used unless it is of good construction, sound material,adequate strength and free from patent defect.

Lifting equipment shall be inspected by a competent person at least once every sixmonths.

Every item of lifting equipment must be clearly die-stamped with a Works IdentificationNumber and its Safe Working Load (SWL).

Where lifting equipment fails a test or is visibly defective, it shall be destroyed and

deleted from the register.

Lifting equipment shall not be issued unless there is in existence a valid test certificate inrespect of that item.

9.2.3.3 STORAGE

Adequate storage shall be provided for slings and ropes when not in use. Storage will beunder cover and well ventilated. It will include racks so that air can circulate naturallyaround slings. Ropes and slings shall not be stored on the floor.

Items shall be examined by a competent person before they are issued from the Stores,









9.2.3.4 WIRE ROPE

Wire ropes or wire slings shall not be used in raising or lowering or as a means ofsuspension if in any length of ten diameters the total number of visible broken wiresexceed 5% of the total number of wires in the rope.

9.2.3.5 L ASHING WIRE

Flexible steel lashing wires of 6mm diameter are designed for lashing ladders, etc., andshall not be used for suspended loads.

9.2.3.6 SLINGING OF LOADS

Care shall be taken by the use of wood or similar packing piece to ensure that the sling isnot bent over a small curvature or sharp edge since this may damage the sling.

The weight being lifted plus the weight of the tackle shall be known before starting a lift.

Information indicating the safe working loads of chains, ropes or lifting tackle in use, and,in the case of a multiple sling, the safe working load at different angles of the legs, shallbe issued to all personnel involved in this type of work.

9.2.3.7 FIBRE ROPE SLINGS

Fibre rope slings shall not be used for lifting or lowering if the rope is badly chaffedexternally or worn internally, or where the fibres have noticeably deteriorated to a markeddegree.

When not in use, natural fibre rope slings shall be hung up where they can dry naturallyin a free circulation of air.

9.2.3.8 D AVITS

Davits shall be inspected by a competent person from CID once in every three year andbefore usage.

When suspending floating heads, manhole doors and similar pieces of equipment fromdavits, it is important to ensure that the suspension bolts are not bent or distorted.

9.2.3.9 Y ARN ROPES

All ropes shall be checked for signs of damage and replaced if faulty.

Knotting and splicing of rope shall only be undertaken by a competent person.

In use, care should be taken to avoid damage to the rope by use of suitable packing andby avoiding contact with sharp or abrasive objects.









Ropes shall be stored in thoroughly ventilated areas, preferably tied in loose coils andhung.

Where natural ropes are liable to come into contact with chemicals, acid scale or sludgethat is detrimental to the fibres, then suitable man made fibre or wire ropes shall be used.

9.2.3.10 CHAINS

Chains should be checked on each occasion before use for distortion of links, rings orhooks, and cuts in links.

Chain repairs should only be carried out where there is a proper heat treatment facilityavailable.

A chain should never be:

· Hammered to straighten a link.· Joined by a bolt and nut.· Shortened by twisting or knotting.· Subjected to strain if it is in a kinked or twisted position, or if the links do not move

freely.

9.2.3.11 FLAT BELT SLINGS

Belts made from woven material shall comply with BS 3481: Flat lifting slings.Specification for flat woven webbing slings made of man-made fibre for general service, or a recognised alternative standard approved by MHSE and should only be used if thereis no satisfactory alternative. They should be discarded after each job or, if not, theyshould be regularly checked for cuts, excessive wear or fraying. Blisters in the coveringof wire mesh types are a sure indication that the mesh has been broken underneath.

In use, flat belt slings should be protected from sharp-edged loads by sacking or similarpadding. It is most important that all lifts should take place vertically, since any side-pulltends to overload the edge of the belt and risks tearing it; it also tends to move the belt

inwards over possible rough edges and risks cutting.

9.2.3.12 SHACKLES

Shackles are widely used for making connections in slinging. They shall be tested,certificated and identified. The SWL shall also be stamped on them and they shall berecorded in the register.

The shackle pin is a separate part of the shackle but belongs to it. Only the correct pinshall be used.









9.2.3.13 HOOKS Every hook used for raising or lowering, or as a means of suspension, shall comply withBS EN1677-5: 2001 or a recognised alternative standard approved by MHSE It shall beprovided with an efficient device to prevent the displacement of the sling or load from thehook.

A load can become displaced by an unlatched hook falling back after it has been setthrough an eye or hole in the load to be lifted, or, particularly in the case of multi-legslings, when the load is at rest. Loads can also become displaced if the point of the hookcatches against an obstacle during the lift.

Further Information

BS EN1677-5: 2001: Components for slings. Safety. Forged steel lifting hookswith latch. Grade 4

9.2.3.14 EYE BOLTS

The construction, fitting and use of eyebolts shall comply with a recognised standardapproved by MHSE such as BS 4278:1984: Specification for eyebolts for liftingpurposes.

It is essential for safe lifting that eyebolts should be screwed only into tapped holes withwhich they are compatible. To avoid mismatching both eyebolts and tapped holesshould be identified and clearly marked with diameter and thread form.

Eyebolts are made to screw into or through a load and may be plain or have collars. Theplain eyebolt is good for vertical loading but if loaded at any angle the load it can carry isconsiderably reduced. Even when a collared eyebolt is used the safe working load isreduced with angular loading.

When installed the collar shall be at right angles to the hole and should be in full contactwith the surface, and be properly tightened.

The load should always be applied in the plane of the eye, never in any other direction.If necessary, washers or shims should be inserted below the collar to ensure that the eye

is correctly aligned when tight.

Eyebolts should not be permanently secured in place, e.g. by spot welding.

In common with other general purpose lifting equipment, all eyebolts should be kept in asuitable store under the charge of a responsible person. They should be inspected fordamaged threads or other defects before and after use.

Further InformationBS 4278:1984: Specification for eyebolts for lifting purposes









9.2.3.15 CHAIN HOISTS The general rules relating to slings and lifting equipment apply to chain hoists, inaddition, attention is drawn to the following:

The correct size of chain hoist for the load to be lifted shall be used; only one man shalloperate the hoist and he should be able to operate it with ease, other-wise a largercapacity hoist should be used.

Loads shall not be left suspended for any length of time without securing the pull chain toavoid the load dropping.

The load chain shall not be run out to the point where the load is entirely dependent onthe bolt holding the dead end of the chain.

The load chain shall never be used to encircle the load; a sling should be used.

A load shall never be lifted with the tip of a hook.

9.2.3.16 SPREADER BEAMS/EQUALISER BEAMS

Spreader beams should be used to support long or wide loads. They eliminate thehazard of a load tipping as well as wide sling angles and any tendency of the sling tocrush the load.

Spreader beams should be used where eyebolts are in use, in which case only verticallifts should be made. They should be used where it is necessary to distribute the loadingto avoid excessive stresses in the object being lifted.

Equaliser beams should be used to equalise the load in sling legs and keep equal loadswhen making multiple lifts.

Both types of beam are manufactured to suit a specific purpose and care should betaken to ensure that the correct beam is used.

The capacity of a beam with multiple attachments depends on the distance betweenattachment points. If the distance between attachment points is doubled the capacity ofthe beam is halved.

9.2.3.17 P ADEYES

Padeyes are designed specifically to suit the package weight and centre of gravity of theitem to be lifted. They are constructed and fixed by welding to the load in order to lift withminimum additional stress being placed on the load.









Accuracy of the design criteria is of paramount importance to ensure that the strength,size and location of the padeyes are correct. The following criteria form the mainaspects of the padeye design:

The theoretical centre of gravity in relation to the geometry of the structure to be lifted.

The design package weight shall be distributed such that 75% is transferred to anydiagonal pair of slings in the case of a four point lift.

The distribution of the load to the padeyes is proportional to the distance from the designcentre.

Construction of the padeyes shall be in strict accordance with the calculated designcriteria.

NoteFollowing welding of pad-eyes to the load as a minimum NDT such as MPI mustbe carried out in consultation with CI&D

9.2.3.18 COLOUR CODING OF LIFTING EQUIPMENT

To ensure that all the lifting equipment used by ADGAS and ADMA-OPCO has beensystematically examined and certified for use by the CI&D, a colour coding system is to

be used by the Central Workshop Rigging Section. See Figure 9-6: Colour Coding forItems on a 6 Month Cycle.

9.2.3.19 RESPONSIBILITY

The HOW is responsible for providing the Health Safety & Environment Manager withdetails of changes to the colour code for publication as a revision to the manual.

NoteDEFINITIONFor the purpose of this instruction, lifting equipment is defined as all liftingequipment of a mobile nature under the general control of the Central Work

Shop Rigging Section. It does not include site cranage, fixed runway beams,etc.









ITEMS CERTIFIED FOR A SIX MONTH SERVICE PERIOD (inspected on a sevenmonth cycle) WILL BE COLOUR CODED as follows:

YEARMONTH

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

2006BL

OR OR OR OR OROR

GR GR GR GR GROR GR

2007GR

WH WH WH WH WHWH

BL BL BL BL BLWH BL

2008BL

OR OR OR OR OROR

GR GR GR GR GROR GR

2009GR

WH WH WH WH WHWH

BL BL BL BL BL

WH BL2010

BLOR OR OR OR OR

ORGR GR GR GR GR

OR GR

Figure 9-6: Colour Coding for Items on a 6 Month Cycle

ITEMS CERTIFIED FOR A TWELVE MONTH SERVICE PERIOD (inspect ion on athirteen month cyc le) WILL BE COLOUR CODED as follows:

YEARMONTH

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

2006 BK Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY

2007Y

BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BKBK

2008BK

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY

2009Y

BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BKBK

2010BK

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY

Figure 9-7: Colour Coding for Items on Annual Cycle

Users of lifting tackle will be notified of the colour system for 2011 to 2015 during the 4thquarter of 2010 by way of a revision to this page of the Health, Safety and EnvironmentManual.

9.3 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS

9.3.1 INTRODUCTION

Where work is required to be performed at heights which cannot be reached from theground, means must be provided to raise the worker to a suitable working level and a









temporary platform must be built from which the job can be completed safely. It is vitalthat all scaffolding working platforms be properly constructed, provide adequate spaceand comply with statutory requirements. In the absence of definitive U.A.E. legislation inthis area reference has been made to British Standards throughout this section.

9.3.2 DEFINITIONS

9.3.2.1 SCAFFOLDING

Scaffolding is defined as a temporary structure on which persons may work.

It also provides support for the materials used in construction, maintenance, repair and

demolition work and can be used to obtain temporary access to certain areas orequipment.

9.3.2.2 STANDARDS

Scaffolding shall be constructed to the following standards:

· BS EN 12811-1:2003 Temporary works equipment. Scaffolds. Performancerequirements and general design and

· BS 5974: 1990 Code of Practice for "Temporarily Installed SuspendedScaffolding and Access Equipment".

Equivalent or recognised codes approved by MHSE may also be acceptable.

Further InformationBS EN 12811-1:2003 Temporary works equipment. Scaffolds. Performancerequirements and general designBS 5974: 1990 Code of Practice for "Temporarily Installed SuspendedScaffolding and Access Equipment".

9.3.2.3 SCAFFOLDING SUPERVISOR

This shall be an Engineer, Supervisor or a Foreman who has the practical and theoreticalknowledge and who knows the purpose of the scaffolding and how it should be

constructed to carry the load to be placed on it.

This would normally be an ADGAS or Contractor, Rigging/Scaffolding Supervisor.

9.3.2.4 SCAFFOLDING INSPECTOR

This shall be a Scaffolding Supervisor who was not involved in the erection or alterationof the scaffold construction he is inspecting.

This would normally be an ADGAS Rigging/Scaffolding Supervisor.









9.3.2.5 SCAFFOLD CONSTRUCTION All scaffolding shall only be erected, altered or dismantled by competent andexperienced workers under the immediate supervision of a Scaffolding Supervisor.

9.3.2.6 SCAFFOLD INSPECTION

All scaffolding shall be inspected:

· Prior to handover to the user,· At least once each quarter during use and· Following inclement weather conditions liable to adversely effect the integrity of the

structure,

by a Scaffolding Inspector.

A record of inspections of every scaffold construction shall be maintained by the RiggingSection.

9.3.3 EFFECTS ON AREAS

As a non-routine work operation, usually of a temporary nature, the erection ofscaffolding on a process area may have various undesirable effects.

Some of these effects are:

· Restriction of free movement of personnel on escape routes.· Restriction of access to process controls including valves, sight glasses and other

operator control points.· Blocking of free access to fire and safety points such as manual call points, fire

extinguisher stations, hose reels and emergency showers and others.· Inhibition of, or interference with, the process fire and gas detection and protection

systems.

The relevant area supervisor must be involved in the planning and setting of the scaffold

so that it has of minimum impact on the safety of the plant and its operation.

9.3.4 ALUMINIUM SCAFFOLDING

The use of aluminium scaffold materials is widespread and usually acceptable in theconstruction industry. However, aluminium scaffolding and fittings are not acceptable foruse within the Industrial Area. Use of aluminium scaffold tubing has the potential tocreate the problems of:

· Generation of incendiary sparks when aluminium is impacted on oxidised surfaces,e.g. rust.









· Low heat strength with possible melting or burning in situations of excessive heat orfire.

9.3.5 SCAFFOLDING IN TRAIN 3

The location and type of scaffold erected in an area serviced by a deluge system such asis found in areas of Train 3 can have radical effects on the designed coverage and watervolume in that area. Such interference to spray patterns in the case of a process firecould lead to catastrophic process vessel failure.

The major problem created by scaffolding is in the blanking effect of the scaffold boards,stairs and staging.

Control measures in this case include:

· prior planning for location and scaffold design that will minimise the blanking effect onestablished spray patterns.

· open mesh type approved scaffold planks and stair treads, if appropriate.· minimising the life span of the scaffold by promptly removing on the completion of the

job.· when an extended period of installation is unavoidable, removal of planks and

flooring will alleviate the blanking effect.

CautionDanger signs, barriers and appropriate prohibition scafftags must clearlyindicate that the scaffold is unserviceable during the period the decking isremoved

In the unavoidable situation of extended term installations, the possibility of extending thelength of the spray nozzle branches through the scaffolding to clear the areas of delugecoverage together with the possibility of compensating spray angles may becontemplated. This alternative must be assessed by the relevant qualified authoritiesand the original design configuration restored promptly on removal of the scaffold.

9.3.6 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.3.6.1 GENERAL

Every scaffold shall be of suitable and sound material and of adequate strength for thepurpose for which it is built. Wooden standards and ledgers shall not be used. Allscaffolding components shall be examined by a competent person before issuing for use.

9.3.6.2 TUBES AND FITTINGS

All tubes, couplers and fittings, when new, must be at least up to the standard and typedescribed in BS 1139. Tube ends must be square with the axis and cut cleanly. Usedtubes must be free form cracks, splits and excessive corrosion and be straight. All









couplers and fittings shall be free from distortion and shall be maintained in an oiledcondition. Bolts with worn or damaged threads shall be replaced.

Further InformationBS 1139: Metal Scaffolding

9.3.6.3 BOARDS

Boards for use in platforms shall be unpainted to facilitate identification of defects, andshall be fire retardant or sprayed with a fire retardant chemical approved by the MHSEbefore assembly into the scaffolding.

Face knots shall not exceed 150mm in total when summed across the width of bothfaces, with the width of a single knot not exceeding 75mm. Edge knots generally shallnot exceed 28mm.

Where an edge knot also appears on the face, it is summed in with the total of the faceknots. Generally there shall be a clear distance between knots or knot groups of not lessthan 150mm.

The twist in a 3.9m board shall not exceed 12mm over the full length.

Standard boards are nominal 225mm wide x 38mm thick. Other board thicknesses of

50mm and 63mm are available.

Further InformationBS 2482: 1981. Standard Boards

9.3.7 MISUSE OF BOARDS

Scaffolding boards must not be used for any other purpose than scaffold platforms.Their use as ramps on roadways for hoses and cables is a dangerous practice thatweakens the board internally and may cause a serious accident if the board issubsequently used in a platform.

If non-serviceable boards are to be used for these purposes they must be painted onboth sides.

CautionThe use of serviceable scaffold boards other than for scaffolding will beregarded as a serious safety breach.

9.3.8 SCAFFOLDING ADJACENT IGNITION SOURCES

Owing to the effects of radiant heat on scaffold boards care must be taken when erectingscaffold platforms adjacent to process heat sources.









The checklist shown in Figure 9-8: Scaffolding Adjacent Ignition Source Checklist is tobe completed jointly by the plant operator and performing authority and attached to thefield white copy of the permit.

9.3.9 INDEPENDENT SCAFFOLDS

This scaffold construction is free standing and is completely independent of the structurebeing worked upon. When used, the scaffold must be adequately guyed and tensioned.Frequent checks, particularly during high winds, must be made on the tensioning systemto ensure integrity of the scaffold.

9.3.10 INDEPENDENT TIED SCAFFOLDS

9.3.10.1 GENERAL

This type of scaffold is not completely independent of the building or structure. Thescaffold structure carries its own weight and all applied loads- men, materials and windloads - placed upon it down to the ground, but it must be tied to the building or structureto obtain stability and prevent possible movement.

9.3.10.2 B ASE

A good base is essential. Standards shall be supported on base plates. Wherenecessary, ground shall be levelled and rammed to provide a firm surface. Timber sole

plates, at least 219mm wide and 35mm thick, shall be laid to support the base plates forstandards.

The sole plate area must not be less than 300cm2, or 500cm2 for soft ground. Whereverpossible, a sole plate should support at least two standards. This will ensure that theload carried by each standard is distributed over a fairly large area to prevent thestandard from sinking into the ground, so disturbing the balance of the scaffold.

Bricks, broken paving stones and similar loose materials are dangerous and shall not beused as supports for standards as they can easily shatter or become displaced.

9.3.10.3 STANDARDS

Standards must be vertical and this must be ascertained with a spirit level. Any jointsnecessary in standards to reach the required height shall be staggered and occur nearledgers. Joints in adjacent standards shall not occur in the same lift.

9.3.10.4 LEDGERS

The standards in each row are kept equidistant and strengthened by ledgers fixedhorizontally on the inside of standards with right angle couplers.









Joints in ledgers shall also be staggered, i.e. joints in adjacent ledgers shall not occur inthe same bay. These joints should preferably be made using sleeve couplers and be atnot more than one-third of the distance between two standards.

9.3.10.5 TRANSOMS

Transoms, keeping the inner and outer rows of standards apart, are set on top of ledgersand at right angles to them and to the building or structure.

Horizontal distance between transoms at working platform level is determined by thethickness of the boards to be used. For 38mm boards, transoms must be spaced so thatno board overhangs by more than 150mm or less than 50mm.

Transoms shall be fixed to ledgers or standards with right angle or putlog coupler.Where transoms are not required to support boards, a transom must occur within 300mmof each pair of standards.

Where a scaffold structure exceeds 50m in height, the transom adjacent to the standardon an unboarded lift shall be secured to the ledger or standard by couplers capable ofsustaining a safe working load of at least 5KN.

Ledgers and transoms shall not protrude more than is necessary beyond the generaloutline of the scaffold. At lower levels, such protrusions are a danger to pedestrians or

passing vehicles and it is good practice to use safety caps on the open ends; at higherlevels, these protrusions can easily be struck by crane-handled loads or dislodgematerials hoisted by gin wheels, etc.

9.3.10.6 BRACING

Bracing is essential to stiffen the structure. Use right angle couplers wherever possible;failing that swivel couplers. Bracing takes two forms:

· Ledger bracing. This runs diagonally from ledger to ledger or standard to standard atalternate pairs of inner and outer standards. Diagonal braces may all run parallel orrise in zig-zag fashion. Care is necessary to ensure correct seating of toe-boards.

· Facade bracing. This usually runs across the face of the scaffold to its full height atan angle of approximately 45° to the horizontal at 30m intervals. The brace shouldcross standards at, or near, ledger positions.

Alternatively, this bracing can extend to the full height of the scaffold in zig-zag fashionacross the first and last bays and at 30m intervals between.

Joints in braces shall be made with sleeve or parallel couplers. As a general rule, ledgerbracing shall not be removed to make way for men or materials. If this does becomenecessary, individual braces, within one lift, may be removed to allow passage ofmaterial. Braces must then be replaced.









9.3.10.7 TIES

The spacing of lines of ties shall not exceed 8.5m horizontally or vertically and shall beevenly distributed over the scaffold surface.

9.3.10.8 WORKING PLATFORMS

All boards that make up a working platform shall rest squarely and evenly on correctlyspaced transoms. Each board must have at least three supports unless its thickness orspan is sufficient to prevent sagging under load. In practice a 3.9m x 38mm board will besupported at approximately 1.2m intervals with a maximum permissible span of 1.5m.

NominalThickness

mm

Maximum Spanm

MinimumOverhang

mm

MaximumOverhang

mm

385063

1.52.63.25

505050

150200250

Table 9-1: Maximum Span Scaffold Boards

Where boards need to butt, transoms must be doubled and spaced to ensure that boardoverhang falls within the permissible range.

Too much overhang will cause a board to tip if someone steps on the end; too little willmake it unsafe, i.e. a small movement may allow the board to drop through.

No board shall overhang its support by more than four times its thickness, i.e. 150mmwhen using boards of 38mm. No board, of whatever thickness, shall be allowed tooverhang less than 50mm.

The surface of the working platform should be even to reduce tripping hazards.

All boards shall lie closely together along their length. If, for any reason, a platform hasto be completed with short boards, they must be battened together to prevent any oneboard from tipping.

Every precaution must be taken to prevent boards from lifting in high winds by usingstraps or purpose made metal clamps.

Probably the simplest method is to use straps at the ends of each run, anchored to thetransom with wire or hook bolts.









9.3.10.9 PLATFORM WIDTH

Platforms must always be wide enough to permit freedom of movement and, asnecessary, to accommodate storage of such materials as are necessary.

DutyDistributed

LoadKN/m2

MaximumNumber

Platforms

CommonWidth

Maximum BayLength

Inspection 0.75 1 3 boards 2.7mLight Duty 1.5 2 4 boards 2.4mGeneralPurpose 2.0 2 4/5 boards 2.1m

Heavy Duty 2.5 2 4/5 boards 2.0m

Table 9-2: Working Scaffolds of Tube and Couplers

Platform widths of independently tied scaffolds in general terms are:

· boards (600mm) - used only as footing.· boards (800mm) - as footing and materials.· (Figures in brackets are minimum permitted width).

Further InformationBS EN 12811-1:2003: Temporary works equipment. Scaffolds. Performancerequirements and general design

Wherever materials need to be deposited, a clearway of 430mm must always bemaintained. The space between the edge of the platform and the face of the building orstructure must always be as small as possible.

9.3.10.10 TOEBOARDS AND GUARDRAILS

Guardrails and toeboards are required at the sides and ends of all working platformsfrom which men or materials can fall more than 2m. Toeboards and guardrails shall befitted to the inside of standards to prevent outward movement. Toeboards must rise atleast 150mm above the working platform. Guardrails must be not less than 915mm normore than 1150mm above the working platform. The distance between the top of thetoeboards and the underside of the guardrails must not be more than 765mm.

Where materials need to be stored on the working platform, additional boards may benecessary to stop materials falling. Alternatively, wire mesh frames may be suspendedfrom guardrail to toeboard to effect complete closure.









If guardrails and toeboards are removed to permit passage of men and materials, theymust be replaced as soon as possible.

9.3.10.11 MOVING THE WORKING PLATFORM

Careful attention must be given to moving all boards from lift to lift, otherwise a welldesigned and prepared deck progressively becomes an incomplete and unsafe platform.

9.3.10.12 MEANS OF ACCESS

Ladders provided for access purposes must be supported by the stiles resting on a firm,even base. The stiles shall be securely lashed or fixed with a ladder clamp to a ledger or

transom near the top to prevent slipping either sideways or outward. Ladders must beset at a working angle of 75° to the horizontal, i.e. 1m out for every 4m in height, andextend at least 1m, (5 rungs), above platform level to provide adequate handhold at thestepping off point.

Ladders required to rise more than 9m of vertical height shall have an intermediatelanding place provided.

Stairs must be provided with handrails and, where persons can fall more than 2m, theremust be guardrails, fitted at a height of between 900mm and 1m above the centre ofeach step. A lower guardrail, 450mm above the centre is advisable since toeboardscannot be fitted. Handrails shall be continued beyond the end of the stairs if additionalhandhold is necessary. Stairways must be kept free of obstruction, materials andrubbish, and if they become slippery shall be cleaned or sanded as quickly as possible.

9.3.11 MOBILE ACCESS TOWERS

Mobile scaffolds take the form of towers made of normal steel tube and fittings andmounted on wheels, with one working platform, the dimensions of which are normallyequal to, or less than, the corresponding base dimensions.

9.3.11.1 STRUCTURE

Dimensions will vary according to need, but the corner standards shall never be less

than 1.2m apart. On larger types of rectangular shapes an additional standard may wellbe advisable in the centre of each of the larger sides.

Where joints become necessary in standards, they shall be made with sleeve or parallelcouplers. Wheels, or castors, not less than 125mm in diameter and fitted with brakeswhich cannot accidentally be released, must be locked into the base of the standards.

Wheels or castors shall be marked with safe working load. Ledgers and transoms, atright angles to the standards, shall commence approximately 150mm from the bottom toprovide a firm base clear of the wheels. Lifts shall not exceed 2.5m.









Bracing is in two forms:

· Plan bracing, i.e. diagonal at base, working platform and alternative lifts.· Diagonal bracing at approximately 45° to the horizontal in zig-zag position to full

height of the structure on all four sides.

9.3.11.2 HEIGHT LIMITATIONS

The height to base ratio is based on the shortest base length. Height is measured fromground to level of working platform and does not include guardrails. Height to baseratios shall not be greater than the following:

· Mobile internal tower 3.5: 1· Mobile external tower 3.0: 1

The recommended maximum height for mobile scaffolds is 9.5m except that this may beincreased to 12m where the scaffold is tied-in to a structure whilst in use.

9.3.11.3 WORKING PLATFORM

The working platform shall be fully and closely boarded using boards with 38mmthickness.

Transoms shall be spaced at not more than 1.5m intervals. Distributed load on theplatform of a light duty platform shall not exceed 1.5 KN/m2.

9.3.11.4 GUARDRAILS AND TOEBOARDS

Guardrails and toeboards will be necessary on all four sides. Toeboards must rise atleast 150mm above platform level. Guardrails must be between 900mm and 1m aboveplatform with the distance between the top of the toeboard and the guardrail notexceeding 750mm.

9.3.11.5 ACCESS

A ladder for access purposes can be lashed vertically to one of the narrow sides, the foot

resting on an additional transom. The ladder must extend at least 1m above platformlevel to provide hand-hold at the stepping-off point.

9.3.11.6 IN USE

Mobile scaffolds shall only be used on ground which is firm and level.

Moving the structure shall only be effected by pulling or pushing at the base.

Working platform shall be clear of men and materials when the scaffold is being moved.









Wheels shall be turned outwards to provide maximum base dimensions and wheelbrakes must be "on" and locked when the scaffold is in use.

Further InformationChapter 9.8 WORK ON ROOFSChapter 9.9 WORK AT HEIGHT

9.3.12 LADDERS


Ladder misuse is the cause of many accidents and these could be obviated by more

frequent inspection of the ladder before use and correct placing during use. A laddershall be used as a working place only after careful consideration that it is suitable for thepurpose.

All ladders shall be soundly constructed of timber, steel or aluminium and shall be of aproprietary manufacture complying with the relevant British Standard.

9.3.12.2 PORTABLE L ADDERS

Ladders shall be erected on a firm level base and the ladder supported by the stiles only.On sloping or uneven surfaces an adjustable safety foot can be used to ensure equalsupport. Loose packing shall not be used. The use of non-slip pads, caps or sleeves is

recommended, especially on slippery floor surfaces.

The head of the ladder should rest on a firm, solid surface. A ladder stay can be usedwhere the support may be otherwise unsuitable, i.e. at a plastic gutter. The correct slopefor a ladder is an angle of about 75° to the horizontal, i.e. one metre out for every fourmetres in height.

Where possible, ladders must be secured near the top to prevent the base from slippingoutwards and the top from slipping sideways. This is normally achieved by lashing orclamping each stile to a convenient secure anchorage. In certain cases, the use ofspreader arms attached to the top of the ladder may satisfy this requirement to secure,

but it must first be established that the ladder, so fitted, cannot slip in the circumstancesin which it is to be used.

Where a ladder cannot be secured at the top, it must be secured near its base by meansof guy ropes secured between stiles and stakes embedded into the ground or to othersuitable anchorages. If possible the feet of the ladder should be heeled in.

If no other means of securing the ladder can be used, then someone must hold it at thebase whilst it is in use. This is only effective with comparatively short ladders.









In use, a ladder shall be placed so that there is space behind each rung for properfoothold. Rungs should be clear of grease, oil or other slippery substances. Only oneperson is permitted on a ladder at any one time.

9.3.12.3 TIMBER L ADDERS

Damage to timber ladders may be caused without leaving any visible sign of thatdamage. Great care must be exercised in handling timber ladders to ensure that theyare not overloaded or dropped from a height.

Correct storage is necessary so that the ladders do not warp or the rungs become loose.Ladders shall be erected with the wire tie rods beneath the rungs, and wire stile

reinforcement on the underside of the stile.

Timber ladders must not be painted as the paint may disguise defects. Coating with apreservative and clear varnish is permissible.

All ladders must be inspected by a competent person before issue and after use, andadditionally, inspections are to be conducted at least every six months in January andJuly of each year to ensure all are serviceable.

Inspection shall include the following items:

· Timber ladders for splits or cracks, splintering, warping or bruising. Metal ladders formechanical damage.

· Rungs for signs of undue wear or movement. No rungs shall be missing.· Wedges and tie-rods for tightness. Metal reinforcement to stiles for correct position

and wear.· Feet for splitting and fraying. Timber/plastic inserts to metal ladders for wear and

correct position.

9.3.12.4 METAL L ADDERS

Metal ladders and timber ladders with metal stile reinforcement shall not be used whereany electrical hazard exists.

9.3.12.5 ALUMINIUM L ADDERS

Aluminium ladders can produce a spark via a thermic reaction when impacted onto anoxidised surface eg. rust. They should not be used in areas where there is a possibilityof an ignition. Aluminium ladders shall not be used inside the Industrial Area.

9.3.12.6 SUSPENDED L ADDERS

When ladders are suspended they shall be lashed or clamped at top and bottom so thatthey are equally supported on each stile. Long ladders will need additional ties in thelength to prevent movement.









9.3.12.7 L ADDER TOWERS

Ladders used for gaining access will normally be timber pole ladders and should beerected in parallel rather than zig-zag pattern where more than one ladder is used.

9.3.12.8 ACCESS TO AND FROM L ADDERS

All ladders must extend at least 1m above any landing place, or beyond the highest rungfrom which a man may be working, to ensure adequate handhold. If this is not possiblethen a nearby adequate handhold must be provided.

Suitable access to a working place must be provided at the stepping off point. Personsmust not be required to climb over or under guardrails or over toeboards, gaps inguardrails and toeboards must, however, be kept as small as possible.

Landing places shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 9m and these must beprovided with correctly fitted toeboards and guardrails.

Where ladders pass through platforms, the openings must be no longer than isreasonably practicable and no more than 500mm wide, leaving sufficient platform widthfor access.

9.3.13 SPECIALISED TEMPORARY STRUCTURES

Specialised scaffolding and power or manually operated working cradles must beerected/rigged under the direct supervision of a competent and suitably experiencedperson and must conform to the relevant standard.

Further InformationConstruction Safety Manual: Building Advisory Service.BS 1129:1990 Portable Timber Ladders.BS 2037:1994 Portable Aluminium Ladders.BS 2482:1981 Timber Scaffold Boards.BS EN 12811-1:2003 Temporary works equipment. Scaffolds.

Performance requirements and general designBS 5974:1990 Code of Practice for temporarily InstalledSuspended Scaffolding and Access Equipment









SCAFFOLDING CHECKLIST

For use with scaffold work permits where the scaffold will be adjacent to hot surface lines or vessels(Even if they are not in service at the time)

1. Identify possible heat source. Yes No

- steam lines

- hot oil lines

- exhaust pipes

- heat stress relief work

- heat exchangers

- other

2. Check insulation of hot service lines.

- is the scaffold required to gain access to remove insulation

- will this expose the scaffold to higher temperature

- are the scaffold boards at a safe distance from the hotservice line.

3. Should the boards be removed when not in use ?

4. Is a fire blanket required ?

INITIAL :

1. Performing Authority 2. Plant Operator

________________ Date: / / ____________ Date: / /

Figure 9-8: Scaffolding Adjacent Ignition Source Checklist









9.4 MACHINERY SAFEGUARDS

9.4.1 INTRODUCTION

The absence of any injury from operating machinery without the necessary safeguardsover a period of time does not mean that the moving parts are not dangerous. Althoughgood supervision, co-operation, training and constant attention by the operator have animportant part to play, there is no substitute for proper safeguarding measures and theirmaintenance.

The basic principle is that unless a danger point or area is safe because of its position,the machinery should be provided with an appropriate safeguard that eliminates or

reduces danger before access to the dangerous point or area can be achieved.

The general requirements for safeguarding machinery are presented below.

Further InformationPD 5304:2000 Safe use of machinery

9.4.2 DANGERS

A person may be injured at machinery as a result of:

· Coming into contact with a moving part, or being trapped between the machinery andany fixed structure.

· Being struck by, or becoming entangled in or by any material in motion in themachinery.

· Being struck by parts of the machinery ejected from it.· Being struck by material ejected from the machinery.

These may be regarded as mechanical hazards. Some machinery may also present nonmechanical hazards in which the dangers are less obvious or tangible, e.g. electricshock, toxic vapour production, airborne contaminants, ionising radiation, noise. Theseareas are dealt with elsewhere in this Manual.

9.4.3 PRINCIPLES OF SAFEGUARDING

Wherever practicable, dangerous parts should be eliminated or effectively enclosed inthe initial design of the machinery. If this cannot be achieved, safeguards should beincorporated.

Provision should be made to facilitate the fitting of alternative types of safeguards onmachinery where it is known that this will be necessary because the work done on it willvary.









Where a movable guard or cover is used as a safeguard it should be interlocked to thedrive.

Machinery should be isolated from the power source during maintenance.

Lubrication and routine maintenance facilities should be located outside the dangerousarea.

Suitable illumination should be provided at all dangerous areas.

Every mechanism and control forming part of a safeguard should, as far as practicable,

be of fail safe design.

9.4.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS

It is the duty of all employees supervising the operation of machines to be vigilant tocheck all dangerous operating practices being performed by persons under their control,and to encourage the practice of all reasonable safety precautions, such as the use ofsuitable push sticks and holders for the work, and the use and maintenance in properadjustment of all safety guards.

Sufficient clear and unobstructed space shall be maintained at every machine while inoperation to enable the work to be undertaken without unnecessary risk.

The floor surrounding every machine shall be maintained in good and level condition,and as far as practicable be free of machine cuttings or other loose material and shall notbe allowed to become slippery.

When doubt exists as to the regulations laid down for various machines then the MHSEshould be consulted.

Aisles shall be kept clear of materials. Floors should be swept at regular intervals and allscrap and cuttings removed. Oil spillages should be immediately cleaned up.

Where dangerous or objectionable dust, fumes or flammable swarf is produced by theoperation of the machine, specific provision should be made for the control and effectiveremoval of such substances in such a way as to avoid danger to the operator andmachine. This may involve the provision of effective exhaust appliances over themachine.

9.4.5 CONSTRUCTION OF SAFEGUARDS

All safeguards should be of sound design and adequate strength.

Guards should be made of appropriate material for the potential danger; the shatterresistant properties of the materials may need to be considered.









Whatever safeguard is used should not itself present a hazard such as trapping or shearpoints, splinters, rough or sharp edges or any other source likely to cause injury.

Fixed guards should be secured with fastenings that require the use of a tool.

9.4.6 CHOICE OF MACHINE GUARDS

The general principles regarding choice of type of guard are:

· Fixed guards must be installed in every practical case.· Where a fixed guard is impossible, an inter-locking guard should be fitted where

practical.· Where neither a fixed guard nor an inter-locking guard is practical, an automatic

guard should be used as the second alternative.

9.4.7 REMOVAL OF GUARDS

No person is allowed to remove a recognised machine or shafting guard without writtenauthority or sanctioned work permit, and the guard must be replaced before the machineis restarted.

9.4.8 ISOLATION OF MACHINERY

A Work Permit must be obtained giving detailed conditions and precautions to be takenin the isolation procedure of process machinery or equipment.

Adjustment, repairs or cleaning operations that may be a possible source of danger mustnot be carried out until the machine is isolated from any source of power.

Electrical power must be locked off at the switch gear of any machine by an authorisedperson in the Electrical Section.

The person making the isolation must attach a Danger Notice Card to the switch at thetime of isolation.

Isolation of compressors may be made using two valves and a bleeder provided thatboth valves are locked shut and the bleeder is checked as open and clear (double blockand bleed).

Where work upon pumps, compressors, etc., cannot be completed within a normalworking day, isolation shall be effected by removing spool pieces and blanking off thelive lines.









When pressure gauges are to be removed from running machinery, the gauge andassociated pipework must first be correctly vented. Pressure gauge pipework shall beplugged off immediately after a gauge is removed.

The machine must be isolated so that no liquid or gas can enter the machine orequipment concerned if opening up of a section to atmosphere is necessary.

Further InformationBS 1506:1986. Standard blanksChapter 5 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM

9.4.9 STARTING UP MACHINERYBefore starting up any machinery, care shall be taken that no apparatus, tools, rags, etc.are in a position to foul a moving part, and that no person is in a position of danger.

No person may enter a machinery space within which he may be trapped without anEntry Permit that specifies isolation of power from the driver.

Every machine must be provided with efficient starting and stopping appliances sosituated as to be conveniently controlled by the machine operator.

9.4.10 CLOTHING AND CLEANLINESS

Machine operators must not wear loose clothing, which would be liable to catch inmoving parts.

The area and floors surrounding every machine must be maintained free from loosematerial and kept dry and free from oil or chemical spillages.

9.4.11 LUBRICATION

Lubrication of moving parts of a machine may only be carried out where it is unnecessaryto remove guards. Lubricating oil bottles and grease lubricators shall be checkedfrequently and any abnormal usage of lubrication reported immediately.

9.4.12 TRIPS AND GOVERNORS

Machines fitted with overspeed and other trips shall not be operated unless these are infull working order. No attempt shall be made to render trips and governors inoperable.

Trip Testing is to be carried out:

· In accordance with statutory requirements, e.g. limit devices on passenger carryinghoists.

· Whenever a machine is shut down.









· At periodic intervals which experience has shown to be appropriate for the type oflimiting device on the particular machine concerned.

9.4.13 DRAINING AND VENTING PUMPS

The greatest care must be exercised when draining pumps for maintenance work.Draining shall be carried out slowly, and oil spillage kept to a minimum at the pumpsurroundings to avoid slipping hazards. Drain and vent line connections to pumps andcompressors shall be adequately secured according to BP Engineering Practice.

Steam hoses and/or portable fire equipment shall be readily available during the drainingor venting of pumps and compressors on light hydrocarbon duty. When gas or liquid is

to be released to atmosphere, it shall be done only after it has been established thatthere are no ignition sources nearby.

9.4.14 WARMING THROUGH PUMPS

Pumps on hot oil duty after being returned to service following maintenance work, shallbe warmed through slowly. Where warming-through lines are fitted, they shall always beused.

9.4.15 LIGHTING AT MACHINES

Where shop lighting is inadequate to permit work at machines to be carried out safely,

additional illumination shall be provided.

9.4.16 DIESEL ENGINES

Diesel driven equipment must have the diesel drive immobilised by some positivemethod that will prevent it being started when work is carried out involving the drivenpart.

The use of mobile diesel engines in Zone 1 or Zone 2 areas shall be made subject to aHot Work Permit

Further Information

Chapter 6.10.13.9 DIESEL ENGINE UNITS

9.4.17 STEAM TURBINES

Whenever steam turbines, which exhaust to a low pressure (LP) steam main, are takenout of service for maintenance work, the high pressure (HP) steam supply must alwaysbe valve isolated before the LP steam valve is closed. Steam valves must be lockedclosed and drains and vents open while the machine is off line.

Whenever preparations are being made for the starting of a steam turbine, the HP andLP steam lines shall be drained of condensate and the LP steam valve opened slowly to









warm the turbine casing through to open drains. The exhaust valve must be fully openbefore any attempt is made to open the HP steam supply valve.

Note An instruction to this effect must be prominently displayed in all areas wheresteam turbines are sited

Overspeed trip mechanisms shall be checked, as far as is practicable, for mechanicaloperation before running a turbine at, or near, its overspeed trip setting. The speed shallbe checked with a rotational speed indicating instrument. Reed/Vibrational typetachometers are not acceptable for the setting up of overspeed trips.

During all overspeed trip tests, a member of the OD will stand-by, and operate the mainsteam inlet valve.

9.4.18 EYE PROTECTION

Adequate eye protection is to be worn when:

· Welding or cutting of metals by means of an electrical, oxygen-acetylene or similarprocess.

· Grinding, using either a pedestal or portable grinder.· The following processes when carried out by means of hand tools or other portable

tools:· Fettling of metal castings involving the removal of metal.· Cutting out or cutting off (not including drilling or punching back) cold rivets or bolts

from boilers or other plant.· Chipping or scaling of boilers, vessels, etc.· Breaking or dressing of stone, concrete or slag.

Further InformationChapter 3.12 EYE SAFETY PROGRAMME

9.4.19 MACHINE OPERATOR TRAININGNo person may be employed at a machine unless he has been sufficiently trained towork that class of machine, or unless he works under the supervision of a person whohas a thorough knowledge of the working of the machine and of the dangers associatedwith the machine and of the precautions to be observed.

Every person being trained to work a machine must be fully and carefully instructed as tothe dangers associated with such a machine and the precautions to be observed.

9.4.19.1 CIRCULAR S AWS

The blade of a sawing machine shall not be cleaned by hand while the blade is in motion.









The blade of a circular saw shall be fenced as follows:

· The part of the saw blade that is below the table shall be guarded to the greatestextent possible.

· The sawing machine shall be provided with a riving knife, securely fixed below themachine table, behind and in direct line with the saw blade and have a smoothsurface, be strong, rigid and easily adjustable.

· The part of the saw blade above the machine table shall be guarded with a strongand easily adjustable guard, to extend from the top of the riving knife to a point abovethe top surface of the material being cut, which is as close as practicable to that

surface. The guard shall have a flange of adequate depth on each side of the sawblade and be kept so that the flanges extend beyond the roots of the teeth of the sawblade.

A suitable push stick shall be provided and kept available for use at every circular sawingmachine fed by hand.

A person shall not stand at the delivery end of a machine to remove material whilst thesaw is in operation.

9.4.19.2 PLANING M ACHINES

Planing machines that are not mechanically fed shall be provided with a bridge guardwith a length not less than the full length of the cutter block and a width not less than thediameter of the cutter block and be so constructed as to be easily adjusted.

9.4.19.3 M ACHINE TOOLS

Machine tools shall only be operated by authorised and suitably trained persons.Protective clothing, particularly eye protection shall be worn as appropriate to the job andmachinery in use. Machine safety guards shall be in position.

Machines used in a workshop, such as wood working equipment, lathes, boring,grooving, mortising, milling machines, power presses, circular band saws, etc., are

governed by special regulations regarding the operation of the machines in the StandingInstructions of the appropriate Division. In the majority of cases the regulations requirethe following:

· Trays with adequate drainage to reservoirs should be arranged beneath hydraulicunits, coolant pumps, or any similar unit which can leak oil and cutting fluids to thefloors.

· Safe means of removing swarf or trade waste, such as a brush, is to be provided toclear the operating area. On no account will compressed air or bare hands be used.









· The cutters of every machine tool shall be enclosed by a guard or guards as far aspracticable, having regard to the work being done. All guards shall be of soundconstruction.

· Guards shall be correctly positioned whenever a machine is operated. On noaccount should guards be adjusted whilst the cutting tool is in motion.

· Every machine tool shall be provided with an efficient device for starting and stoppingthe machine and be in such a position as to be readily and conveniently operated bythe operator.

· Every part of the machine tool shall be of sound construction, sound material andproperly maintained.

· Every machine tool other than those held by hand, shall be securely fixed to a

foundation.

9.4.20 GRINDING MACHINES/ ABRASIVE WHEELS

9.4.20.1 S AFETY PRINCIPLES

The main principles of safe use of grinding machines and abrasive wheels are as follows:

· Abrasive wheels must be maintained properly by trained persons. A register of suchcompetent persons is held by the Head of Workshops.

· Every abrasive wheel more than of 55mm diameter shall have the maximumpermissible speed marked on the wheel. Maximum speeds of small wheels will be

stated on a notice attached to the machine.· The maximum permissible speed of an abrasive wheel must not be exceeded under

any circumstances.· No spindle shall be operated at a speed in excess of the maximum permissible speed

of the wheel.· The maximum working speed of spindles on grinding machines must be marked on

the spindle.· A guard shall be provided to enclose the wheel to the greatest possible extent, the

opening being as small as possible consistent with the nature of the work.· Eye protection in the form of goggles and/or shields must be used when working with

grinding machines and abrasive wheels.

9.4.20.2 GENERAL RULES

· Trained persons only shall be allowed to use grinding machines and abrasive wheels.· Before starting a machine:

o Brush and inspect the wheel for defects.o Check position of safety guards.o Check wheel has correct speed rating.

· On starting the machine stand aside until wheel reaches its normal running speed,thereafter check for wobbling and vibration.

· Apply the workpiece slowly and do not use excessive pressure.









· Keep the workpiece properly secured and use a holder for small pieces.· Keep the workpiece rest adjusted as closely as practicable to the wheel.· Do not strike the wheel or use the side of the wheel for grinding unless it is so

designed.· Switch off machine and wait for wheel to stop before making adjustments.

9.4.21 PORTABLE GRINDERS AND ABRASIVE CUTTERS

All persons handling or using this equipment must be familiar with the hazards involved.Sufficient heat may be generated by the operation - in the form of sparks or by friction -to ignite a flammable mixture; heavy hydrocarbons can also be vaporised by the heat ofgrinding.

A Hot Work Permit shall be obtained before using grinders or abrasive cutters inhazardous areas, or on equipment that is not completely free of oily residue. The permitshall state the conditions for carrying out the operation safely.

9.5 EXCAVATIONS

9.5.1 INTRODUCTION

Excavations are inherently dangerous because of a number of factors such as:

· Possible contact with, or damage to, underground cables/services.· Possible collapse of the excavation walls.· Personnel falling into the excavation.

It is, therefore, essential to check services in an excavation area and to providesafeguards for personnel who have to work in and around the excavation.

9.5.2 PERMITS

All excavations shall be carried out according to the work permit procedures detailed inChapter 5 Permit Systems.

9.5.3 UNIDENTIFIED BURIED CABLES AND PIPELINES

If any buried cables, pipelines or structures are unexpectedly encountered duringexcavation, work shall cease immediately and shall be reported to the Area Authority.Work shall not recommence until clearance is obtained from the Area Authority.

9.5.4 EXCAVATION EDGES

No load, plant or equipment shall be placed, or moved, near the edge of any excavationwhere it is likely to cause the collapse of the side of the excavation.









Similarly, scaffold structures shall not be constructed adjacent to excavations where thedanger of excavation collapse may result. Whenever possible scaffold structures near,but not constituting a danger to the excavation, should be supported on large foot platesor boards.

Employees shall be protected from excavated or other materials or equipment that couldpose a hazard by falling or rolling into excavations. Protection shall be provided byplacing and keeping such materials or equipment at least 1 metre from the edge ofexcavations, or by the use of retaining devices that are sufficient to prevent materials orequipment from falling or rolling into excavations, or by a combination of both ifnecessary.

9.5.5 MEANS OF EGRESS FROM TRENCH EXCAVATIONS

A stairway, ladder, ramp or other safe means of egress shall be located in trenchexcavations that are 1.3 metres or more in depth so as to require no more that 7.62metres of lateral travel for employees.

9.5.6 BARRIERS AND LIGHTING

Excavations in which persons are working and into which a person is liable to fall shall besuitably covered or protected by a barrier. No work shall be carried out from the edge ofthe excavation to the barrier boundary.

During darkness, such fences, covers or barricades shall be clearly illuminated toprevent accidents. This also applies to open manholes or drains, removed covers incable trenches, etc.

The person in charge of the work will be responsible for the erection of any barricades,roping off and provision of yellow warning lamps.

Excavations and barriers, or the traffic associated with their construction, which will affectroads and other means of access shall be reported to the HSED by the Performing Authority, before work commencement.

Appropriate precautions such as temporary controlled drainage, suction pumps, or othersuitable means shall be taken to protect the excavation from water/rain ingress.

9.5.7 SHORING

Generally, shoring of all excavations 1.3m, or less in depth will be at the discretion of theperforming authority. However, each excavation should be considered separately forparticular precautions or exemptions.

All excavations more than 1.3m deep will be shored unless prior exemption is approvedby Snr. Safety Engineer – ADGAS, Lead Construction Engineer and SE-GS. It will bethe responsibility of the Performing Authority to obtain said approval.









Factors for consideration should include the width and length of the excavation, soilcondition-sandy, clay, compacted, wet or dry. Whether the sides are battered or can bebattered, location of spoil to the edge, loading from other sources, services in theimmediate area and in particular the work to be carried out in the excavation.

When these factors have been considered, a decision can be made on the extent ofshoring if required, or other safety considerations.

Shoring designs must take into account the composition of the soil, its water content,depth of the excavation and the intended work activity.

All shoring shall extend at least 300mm above the top of the excavation, and in the caseof wide excavations horizontal and diagonal bracing maybe required.

Shoring will be subject to daily inspection in excavations where men are to work. Theinspection shall be carried out by the Performing Authority before commencement ofwork and the permit endorsed with his findings.

Shoring structure must not be altered or removed except under the direction of thePerforming Authority.

CautionExcavations shall be kept clear from toxic and explosive gases. These may benatural gases like methane and sulphur dioxide, exhaust gases from nearbyengines or leaks from nearby pipes or installations. These can seep throughthe soil and accumulate at the bottom of an excavation below ground level.

9.6 DIVING OPERATIONS

9.6.1 INTRODUCTION

Diving activities considered to be covered by this section are those associated with theinstallation, maintenance or removal of any subsea equipment or structure that

necessitates the use of compressed air breathing apparatus either surface supplied orself contained.

Installations subject to these rules include but are not limited to:

· Sub-sea Pipelines and Risers.· Sea Water Intakes and Facilities.· Jetty structures.

It should be noted that all diving activities beyond the shoreline of Das Island, includingthose associated with ADGAS facilities, come under the responsibility and supervision of









ADMA-OPCO, and therefore reference must be made to ADMA-OPCO DivingRegulations in these cases.

The rules given below will apply in all other cases.

All diving operations will generally be required to comply with the, or equivalent.

Further InformationThe Diving at Work Regulations 1997 Approved Code of Practice andGuidance - L103 ADNOC COP V4-09: Diving Operations. Risk Assessment and Control.

9.6.2 DIVING CONTRACTORS

It is anticipated that most diving operations shall be undertaken by an approvedContractor.

The Diving Contractor must issue diving rules and has the duty to ensure they arefollowed.

Contractors must appoint, in writing, sufficient diving supervisors to ensure direct andeffective control of diving operations at all times.

A diving operations log book that shall record all diving activities and incidents must beprovided by the Contractor.

9.6.3 DIVING SUPERVISORS

A diving supervisor has overall responsibility for all diving activities, including thedetermination that the operations are carried out from a suitable safe place by anappropriately qualified Diving Team with all plant, equipment and facilities for the safeconduct of these operations.

9.6.4 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

A high standard of plant and equipment selection and maintenance is vital to reducerisks to a minimum, and care shall be taken to ensure that intakes of air compressor aresituated well clear of areas where dangerous gases or fumes might occur.

9.6.5 EMERGENCY INSTRUCTIONS

As part of the planning for the diving operations Emergency Instructions for evacuation ofthe diving site in the event of plant alarms are to be produced jointly by the DivingSupervisor and SHSEE.









9.6.6 DIVING IN CONFINED SPACES An underwater confined space may be regarded as any underwater situation in whichthere is an "overhead environment" obstructing direct vertical access to the open watersurface. Underwater confined spaces also may exhibit the characteristics of otherconfined spaces, such as tanks and vessels, where there are a limited number or size ofopenings for entry and exit.

The following examples are typical underwater confined space diving situations:

· Sewer line installation, repair and maintenance· Sea Water Intakes repair, maintenance, and debris removal· Underwater construction activities which involve an overhead environment with

limited direct access to the water’s surface· Recovery and rescue operations (which can be necessary in the above situations)

Diving in confined or restricted spaces is a hazardous activity and should only be carriedout when all alternatives have been considered. Only Diving Contractors specialised andexperienced in this type of work should be employed.

The work must be carried out in complete compliance with the Work Permit Procedurefor confined space entry, and the following considerations must be taken into account:

· A Task Risk Assessment must be carried out· A dive plan must be prepared· Tether and tend all divers in the water· Communication and retrieval systems suitable for the conditions that can be operated

from the surface· Emergency plans

9.7 WORK OVER WATER

9.7.1 INTRODUCTION

Working over, on or near water has the ever-present risk of persons falling into the water.General guidance only is given in the following paragraphs on the most obvious hazards.Detailed safe working procedures from a Task Risk Assessment shall be developed foreach individual project by the Job Officer and SHSEE(Ops) in the light of prevailingconditions.

9.7.2 HAZARDS

Any workplace over, on or near water presents a danger that persons might slip, fall orbe swept off their feet by a rapid rise of tide, strong current, or swell. Whether or not aperson is injured by a fall, there is an immediate risk of drowning and/or being carriedaway by the current.









Considerable effort must be made, firstly to prevent persons from tripping, falling or beingswept into the water and secondly, if the worst does happen, to ensure that they arerescued in the shortest possible time before they can come to any further harm.

9.7.3 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

9.7.3.1 PLATFORMS, GANGWAYS, ETC.

Platforms and gangways must be of the correct width and equipped with guard-rails andtoeboards. At all edges from which a person might fall into the water, secure barriers orfences are required.

Barges, pontoons, etc. used as working platforms, must be properly constructed andsufficiently stable to avoid tipping. Special attention must therefore be paid to goodanchorage and ballasting, point loads near the edge should be avoided and due accountshould be taken of the variation of load at the different radii of crane jibs.

9.7.3.2 L ADDERS

Ladders must be sound, of sufficient length and strength and be securely lashed toprevent slipping. Where ladders are permanently fitted to plant over water, they shouldbe fitted with safety hoops

9.7.4 SAFETY NETS9.7.4.1 GENERAL

Safety nets shall be used wherever practicable. Safety nets should be properly securedand slung sufficiently far above high water level for anyone caught in them to remainclear. Manufacturers should be consulted on what type of net best suits the kind of workto be carried out and the prevailing conditions.

Safety nets should be erected as close to the working level as possible and, if on theoutside of a structure, should be higher at the outer edges than at the inner.

9.7.4.2 TYPE AND STRENGTH

Personnel nets are usually constructed in a 100mm mesh - and the size of cord fromwhich they are made is determined by the distance below working level at which they areto be suspended. Every effort should be made to keep this distance to a minimum.

Nets can be made from both natural and man-made fibres. Natural fibres should be rot-proofed. Whereas all must have minimum breaking strengths each have varyingcharacteristics in relation to their resistance to abrasion, overloading, mildew andchemical attack.









9.7.4.3 STORAGE When nets are stored they should be protected from damp and heat and it is well to hangthem on wooden pegs or galvanised hooks so that air can circulate through them. Wetnets should be dried naturally. If nets need to be placed on the floor they should bestacked on timber and kept clear of the ground.

9.7.5 SAFETY BELTS AND HARNESSES

9.7.5.1 USE OF HARNESSES AND BELTS

The main reason for the use of safety belts and harnesses is to limit the distance of anyfall and thereby minimise the risk of injury. Safety belts and harnesses provide valuable

protection, but they are not a substitute for effective fall prevention measures. It shouldbe clearly understood that, where practicable, proper working platforms, with guard-railsand toeboards, must be provided.

NoteWhere the provision of working platforms, or the use of safety nets, isimpracticable, safety harnesses or belts shall be provided and used.

In choosing a belt or harness for a particular application care should be taken to ensurethat it will give the user, as far as is compatible with safety, maximum comfort, freedomof movement and if there is a fall every possible protection to the body from the shock of

sudden arrest. Proper fitting and adjustment are essential to achieve these aims. A fullharness gives greater protection than a safety belt if there is a fall and is thereforepreferable.

9.7.5.2 TYPES OF BELTS AND HARNESSES

BS 1397 Specifications for industrial safety belts, harnesses and safety lanyards, givesguidance on the choice of a suitable belt or harness but in view of the wide variations inconditions of use it does not attempt to standardise the design of any specific type or toprescribe which type should be used in any particular industry.

The general purpose harness incorporating shoulder and crutch straps and fitted with fall

arrest device shall be the only type to be used on ADGAS sites.









Figure 9-9: General Purpose Safety Harness

Further InformationBS 1397: Specification for industrial safety belts, harnesses and safetylanyards

9.7.5.3 FIXING POINT

It is of the utmost importance that, whenever a harness is provided there is also aneffective means of fixing it to the structure at all times the protection is required. It is alsovital that the fixing point is strong enough to withstand the snatch load of a fall.

The distance of fall should be as small as is possible and should not exceed thedimensions specified above. To that end the belt or harness should be fixed to thestructure, or fixing point as high as practicable above the working position.

It is vital that the harness and the attendant line are not damaged during use. The

practice of fastening the line around small sectioned structural steel or other sharpobjects and hooking the karabiner back on to the line may cause failure. As analternative it is recommended that a tested loop of at least 8mm diameter steel wire ropewith properly made eyes, be used. Refer to Figure 9-10: Method of attaching line tosmall sectioned steel.

The wire loop should be wrapped around the steel and the harness line attached to theloop, maintaining the maximum falling distances previously outlined. An alternativeanchorage may be provided by use of special proprietary hooks that are available withopenings to accommodate metal sections up to 50mm.









Figure 9-10: Method of attaching line to small sectioned steel

9.7.6 FALL ARREST DEVICES

9.7.6.1 GENERAL

These mechanical devices, when used in conjunction with a harness, permit greaterfreedom of movement. The devices have two main features:

· They extend the area over which the user may work safely.· If there is a fall, they restrict the drop, thereby reducing the load imposed upon the

body on sudden arrest.

Types

BS EN 353-1:1993 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height.Specification for guided type fall arresters on a rigid anchorage line

Type 1 A device that runs on a fixed anchorage, line or rail, the safety belt or harnessbeing attached to the device.

BS EN 353-2:1993 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height.Specification for guided type fall arresters on a flexible anchorage line









Type 2 A device through which an extendable line passes or unreels from, the user beingconnected to the end of the anchorage line, the device itself being attached to a fixedanchorage point. See Figure 3 below page.

NoteThe Type 2 is the only type to be used on ADGAS sites

Figure 9-11: Inertia Reel

Further InformationBS EN 353-1:1993 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height.Specification for guided type fall arresters on a rigid anchorage lineBS EN 353-2:1993 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height.

Specification for guided type fall arresters on a flexible anchorage line

9.7.7 USE OF FALL ARREST DEVICES

The following precautions shall be observed when using fall arrest devices:

· The correct type rail or cable for the device shall be used for the anchorage line.· The attachment point and attachment structures shall be adequate to hold the user if

there is a fall.









· Before each occasion of use the end of the anchorage line should be jerked tosimulate a fall, this will lock the device. Should the device not lock it must beimmediately withdrawn from service for investigation.

· Instructions on safe use, which must be provided by manufacturers, shall be given tousers.

· Regular inspection and maintenance of the equipment shall be carried out accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

· Equipment must be stored safely according to the manufacturer's instructions.· In the event that the device is subjected to shock loading, action must be taken

according to the manufacturer's instruction. Usually the device must be returned tothe manufacturer for inspection and overhaul.

9.7.8 CARE OF BELTS AND HARNESSES

9.7.8.1 EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION

All belts and harnesses shall be thoroughly examined by a competent person at leastevery three months. Leather and webbing shall be inspected for cuts, cracks, abrasionsor tears and any signs of undue stretching. Snap hooks shall be examined for signs ofdamage, distortion or faulty springs. The tongues of buckles shall be examined wherethey fit to the shoulders. Stitching threads should not be cut or worn. A record ofexaminations shall be maintained. The wearer should make a visual inspection at leastdaily before use.

9.7.8.2 STORAGE

Belts and harnesses shall be stored in a cool, dry well-ventilated place away from directsunlight and free from contact with anything that could cause damage.

9.7.9 WORK SITE REQUIREMENTS

9.7.9.1 SITE TIDINESS

Site tidiness is of special importance in minimising tripping hazards. Tools, ropes andother materials not in use should be cleaned up promptly. Materials awaiting use shouldbe stacked compactly and particularly on pontoons, not piled too high.

Slippery surfaces are extremely dangerous and should be treated immediately.Seaweed, sea-slime and bird droppings should be cleaned off. Oily or greasy surfacesshould be gritted.

9.7.9.2 ILLUMINATION

Illumination is essential for night work and at all times in shafts, dark corners andstairways. An even spread of light is required to avoid deceptive shadows and glare.The area floodlit should always include the immediate water surface; spotlights, onswivels should be fixed at strategic points to assist in locating a person in the water.









9.7.9.3 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A suitable stretcher and resuscitation equipment, of the portable type, should be readilyaccessible to the main working area over water and to normal landing places.

9.7.10 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

9.7.10.1 S AFETY HELMETS

Safety helmets should be worn at all times, since anyone struck on the head and thenfalling into water is at special risk. Chin straps should be considered for scaffolding workor other tasks requiring bending or awkward body positions.

9.7.10.2 FOOTWEAR

Types with non-slip soles should be worn. The "Trainer" type of safety shoe isrecommended for riggers and scaffolders.

9.7.10.3 BUOYANCY AIDS

Some form of buoyancy aid must be worn as standard practice. A wide range of life jackets is available and, pending introduction of a local standard, selection should bemade from those conforming to relevant British Standards.

Further Information

BS EN 396:1994: Lifejackets and personal buoyancy aids. Lifejacket 150

Life jackets must be suitable both for the work and the hazards and they should:

· Provide sufficient freedom of movement for persons to be willing to wear and work inthem.

· have sufficient buoyancy to bring persons to the surface and keep them afloat, faceup.

· be easily secured to the body.· be readily visible.· be capable of withstanding hard treatment.

· require minimum maintenance.· not be prone to snagging under water.

9.7.11 RESCUE EQUIPMENT

9.7.11.1 LIFEBUOYS AND RESCUE LINES

Lifebuoys, or rescue lines, should be set at intervals along the workings.

Lifebuoys, which are normally 765mm outside diameter, should be fitted with a 30mbuoyant lifeline, knotted at every 3m to assist handhold, i.e. long enough to allow for thestate of the tide, height of working place above water, or for the person being carried









downstream by a current. They may be constructed of either cork with canvas covering,or of polyurethane foam with a rigid PVC cover. If night work is carried out self-ignitionlights should be fitted.

Lifebuoys or rescue lines should be thrown as near as possible to a person in the waterand if any tide is running they should be thrown on the upstream side.

Daily checks should be made to ensure that lifebuoys and rescue lines are still in theirproper place and that no repair work is required as a result of vandalism or otherinterference.

9.7.11.2 STANDBY BOAT The rescue boat, if required, should be properly made and of sufficient length and beamto afford reasonable stability. Inflatable craft are preferred since they provide a betterchance of getting a person aboard without injury. Engines of rescue craft, when notpatrolling should be run several times a day to ensure full efficiency.

Propeller blades shall be adequately guarded.

All rescue boats should carry three oars or paddles to cater for losing one overboard.Rowlocks should be removable and on retaining lines so that they can hang from theside without being lost.

The boat should be fitted with grab lines and carry at least one approved life buoy.Boathook, baler, anchor and line should be standard equipment. Two-waycommunication between boat and work site shall always be provided. If night work is totake place, a powerful spotlight should be fitted.

Rescue boats should be manned continuously and on patrol whilst work is in progress byexperienced boatmen who are qualified First Aiders. There shall be a minimum twopersons to a boat so that one is free to attend to the person in the water. Boatmenshould always wear suitable buoyancy aids.

Whether first aid treatment can be given on the rescue boat, will depend on its size andthe state of the rescued person. Boats should at least carry sterile wound dressings andsome bandages, a sucker for clearing a person's airway, and blankets. All first-aidequipment on board should have waterproof protection.

It is essential that:

· the number of persons at work is periodically checked to ensure that no one ismissing.

· operatives work in pairs so that there is always one to raise the alarm.· each person is trained in what to do if there is an emergency.









Further InformationBS EN 354:2002 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height.LanyardsBS EN 361:2002 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height. Fullbody harnessesBS EN 362:2004 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height.ConnectorsBS EN 363:2002 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height. Fallarrest systemsBS EN 365:2004 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height.

General requirements for instructions for use, maintenance, periodicexamination, repair, marking and packagingBS EN 1263-1:1997 Safety nets. Safety requirements, test methodsBS 4211:2005 Specification for permanently fixed laddersBS EN 1263-1:2002 Safety nets. Safety requirements, test methodsBS EN 396:1994 and BS EN 396:1994 Life jacketsBS 5062 Part 1:1985 Self locking safety anchorages for industrial useConstruction Safety, Construction Employers Federation.

9.8 WORK ON ROOFS

9.8.1 INTRODUCTIONWork on roofs is a hazardous task and has resulted in a significant number of injuries.

Most of these accidents could have been prevented by the identification of hazards andby the provision and proper use of readily available equipment.

9.8.2 PLANNING

As a high risk activity it is important that any roof work operation is pre-planned. As fallsare the major cause of accidents precautions must be taken either to prevent a personfrom falling or if that is not practicable, to prevent the fall from leading to serious injury.

The particular hazards of each job and the best means of overcoming them must beconsidered so that a safe method of work can be established.

NoteWith complex jobs it may be appropriate for a detailed Task Risk Assessment tobe prepared

The system of work should take into account not only persons involved in the work butothers who might be affected such as personnel normally working in, or passing throughthe area. Roof work includes not only its original construction but also its maintenance,such as replacing sheets or guttering and gutter cleaning.









NoteMaintenance is often carried out by persons with little experience in roof workwhich makes it all the more important for a safe system of work to beestablished and followed

9.8.3 SAFE ACCESS

Suitable equipment must be provided to give safe access to the roof, for example:

9.8.3.1 L ADDERS

Ladders should be placed at an angle of about 75° to the horizontal, i.e. about 1m out forevery 4m in height. They must be long enough for the job, extending to a height of atleast 1m above the landing place unless there is an alternative handhold. A laddershould be secured as near as practicable to its upper resting place or where this is notpossible at or near its base. Care must be taken that the support for the top of a ladderis strong enough to withstand the thrust imposed. Refer to Section 9.8.3.1

9.8.3.2 TOWER SCAFFOLDS

The height of a tower's working platform in relation to the width at the base is critical.Requirements for towers constructed from tube and fittings are given in Section 9.3.11.For proprietary towers the manufacturer's instructions must be strictly followed.

Mobile towers must have wheels which are positively secured to the uprights and eachwheel should have a locking device to be applied when the tower is stationary. Towersshould be moved only by pushing or pulling at the base and never when any person is onthe scaffold.

9.8.3.3 INDEPENDENT SCAFFOLDS

In addition to providing access and a working platform around the edge of a roof,scaffolding may also be used to prevent falls of persons and materials from the edge of aroof and to provide a storage area for materials.

9.8.3.4 MOBILE WORK PLATFORMS

Mobile work platforms may be useful for work of short duration such as inspection wherethe expense and risks involved in erecting scaffolding might not be warranted.

Power operated mast work platforms (cherry pickers) may be suitable for someoperations such as the fixing of vertical cladding sheets or remote roof inspections.

9.8.4 SAFE PLACE TO WORK

Appropriate precautions against falls will be determined by the type of roof and thenature of the work to be carried out.









9.8.5 FLAT ROOFS

Where a roof is not more than 5m above ground level scaffold tube uprights spaced atabove 3m centres are pitched from the ground level, suitably propped by raking tubesand braced by a longitudinal diagonal tube in every fifth bay. Guard rails and toe boardsare fixed to the uprights. Refer to Figure 9-12: Flat Roof Edge Protection.

Roofs with a pitch of less than 10° may be considered to be flat. Toeboards at least150mm high and guardrails not more than 765mm above the top of toeboards and910mm to 1.15m above roof levels are required at any point where a person could fallmore than 2m.

Where it is necessary for a person to kneel or crouch near the edge of roof anintermediate guardrail should be provided unless other precautions such as the use of asafety harness are taken.

On a large roof where work does not have to be carried out at or near the edge a simplebarrier consisting of crossed scaffold tubes supporting a tubing guardrail may be used tolimit the extent of the working area. Such barriers should be positioned at least 2m fromthe edge and work should be closely supervised to ensure that persons do not gooutside the designated area

Figure 9-12: Flat Roof Edge Protection









9.8.6 NON-FRAGILE SLOPING ROOFSOn sloping roofs, unless suitable precautions are taken there are dangers of personsfalling from the perimeter edge - either whilst working there or due to slipping down theroof - and of falling through the roof at the working edge. Protection can be provided by:

9.8.6.1 B ARRIERS AND PLATFORMS

A typical method of providing barriers or platforms to prevent falls from the eaves of aroof are the provision of a scaffold barrier at least 900mm above the roof and not morethan 700mm above the scaffold board catch barrier The catch barrier should protrude atleast 430mm above the roof. The barrier must be high and strong enough to stop a

person who is rolling or sliding down the roof slope. Platforms must be so positionedthat they will stop a fall from the roof. An intermediate guardrail, or other barrier will beneeded where persons need to kneel or crouch near the edge. The need for a barrier atthe gable edge must also be considered.

9.8.6.2 ROOF LADDERS

On most sloping roofs, suitable roof ladders or crawling boards are essential. For minormaintenance work or inspection where work is of short duration and edge protection isnot provided roof ladders should always be used.

Roof ladders or crawling boards should be purpose made for the job and should be

strong enough to support persons when spanning across the supports for the roofcovering and be secured or so positioned as to prevent movement. A suitable type withsockets and locking bars at the joints, is illustrated in Figure 9-13.

Figure 9-13: Roof Ladder With Sockets And Locking Bars

The anchorage at the top of the ladder should not rely on the ridge capping which maybreak away from the ridge. The anchorage should, wherever possible, bear on the









opposite slope by means of a properly designed and manufactured ridge iron or besecured by other means such as a rope tied to a strong point.

CautionEaves gutters should never be used as a footing or to support a roof ladder asthey are seldom strong enough

9.8.6.3 WORKING PLATFORMS

In some cases a working platform fitted with guardrails and toeboards situated on theroof may be used as an alternative to a barrier or platform at the roof edge. This appliesparticularly where the steepness of the slope or the type of surface could give rise to an

insecure foothold.

9.8.7 NON FRAGILE ROOFS

A significant number of accidents occur during the fixing of non-fragile industrial roofsheeting.

Where the continuous use of safety nets is not practicable steps must be taken tominimise the risk of falls by planning a system of work that avoids the need to lean orstep out over an unprotected area. This may entail the provision of a suitable workingplatform on the purlins and/or the use of safety harnesses attached to suitableanchorages for certain stages of the operation.

Lightweight stagings can be used to provide protection at the leading edge while work isdone on the decked area. They can also be used to help prevent the need to lean orstep out over an unprotected area. Care must be taken in the positioning of stagings sothat they do not dangerously overhang their supports. Consideration must also be givento the means of moving stagings as the work progresses.

Where stagings are used as a walkway or as a working platform, guardrails andtoeboards must be fixed at the edge away from the roof decking, stagings should also besecured against the risk of tipping if a person leans on the guardrail. Working platformsmust be at least 600mm wide, i.e. two stagings.

Non-fragile roofs often contain fragile components such as rooflights and these shouldbe covered or protected by suitable barriers during cladding operations.

9.8.8 FRAGILE ROOFS

9.8.8.1 PRECAUTIONS

Before any roof is used as a means of access or as a place of work during anyoperations whether construction, repair, maintenance or demolition it is essential toidentify parts covered with fragile materials and decide on the precautions to be taken.









The appearance of some roof coverings is misleading and can give a false sense ofsecurity to those who are working on or passing across them. Although such coveringsmay be capable of carrying a significant distributed load and appear solid, they will not infact carry a concentrated load such as that applied by the heel of a person walking or bya person stumbling and falling. For example asbestos and non-asbestos cementsheeting unless reinforced and/or of sufficient thickness is liable to shatter withoutwarning under a person's weight. Any sheeting may become more brittle with age,chemical or environmental attack and even corrugated steel sheets will become "fragile"due to rust. There is a mistaken belief that, on a fragile roof, it is safe to walk along theline of roof bolts above the purlins, in reality this is like walking a tightrope and one falsestep or loss of balance can lead to disaster.

Problems can also arise where a non-fragile roof has been repaired with fragile materialswhich may not easily be recognised under a paint or other surface coating. Plasticrooflights may similarly be disguised by age or paint and it is important that these pointsare borne in mind by persons carrying out roof surveys.

NoteOn roofs covered by fragile materials roof ladders or crawling boards must beused

9.8.8.2 ROOF L ADDERS/CRAWLING BOARDS

The number of boards or ladders required will depend on the nature of the work, the typeof roof and the access to it, and the number of persons carrying out the work. A personmust never have to step on to a fragile roof to move a board or ladder. An absoluteminimum of two boards or ladders should be provided, but more will normally berequired. Scaffold boards are sometimes used as crawling boards, but they are liable torock if laid along roof corrugations or on projecting bolts and they are normally only225mm wide. If scaffold boards are used there must be a sufficient number to providesafe access and they should be secured against movement. Purpose made stagings orroof ladders are therefore preferred.

Where access is needed on a regular basis the installation of a permanent means of

protection should be considered.

9.8.9 FRAGILE ROOF REGISTER

Area Authorities are to keep a register of the fragile roofs under their control and are tobe prepared to brief any Performing Authority who may have to work on them.

9.8.10 SAFETY HARNESSES AND NETS

The aim must always be to provide a safe place of work but in roof work this may notalways be practical. In such cases the use of safety harnesses and fall arrest devicemay be appropriate provided suitable anchorage points capable of withstanding anyanticipated shock load are available. Similarly safety nets can provide a potential









solution to many of the problems. The advice of manufacturers should be sought on thesuitability of any particular net for the purpose for which it is to be used. Refer to Chapter9.7.6 FALL ARREST DEVICES.

9.8.11 PROTECTION OF OTHER PERSONNEL

Other personnel must be protected from the hazards of any falling material during roofwork operations. This may entail the provision of guards and other similar precautions.It may also be necessary to lay sheeting or boarding to prevent material falling throughgaps in a working platform or between the working platform and the building. Barriers atground level may also be necessary.

Waste material shall be lowered in skips or baskets or disposed of through encloseddebris chutes. The practice of throwing such material from the roof or scaffold shall bestrictly prohibited.

9.9 WORK AT HEIGHT

9.9.1 INTRODUCTION

Work of a non-routine nature at heights of 2m above grade e.g. cleaning, painting,construction, inspections, etc. may introduce hazards to both the work group and othersnearby.

Work at height by definition entails some potential hazards for those involved due to theheight above grade whilst it also carries a potential risk for those directly below theworksite.

Work at height is treated in two broad categories:

· Where personnel are on scaffold platforms, other temporary staging or elevating lifts.· Where personnel are suspended by crane or other hoist working from a man cage,

also known as a work basket.

CautionWhere the task / work activity requires the employee working on platform to leanover the barrier, he is required to wear the proper harness.

Further InformationOperations Standing Instructions C-47: Suspension of Work During Periods ofStrong WindBS 8454:2006: Code of practice for the delivery of training and education forwork at height and rescue









9.9.2 GENERAL

9.9.2.1 PERSONAL PROTECTION

Working at height outside fully approved scaffolded areas or access ways at heightsabove 2m requires a safety net or approved form of body restraint to prevent or arrest afall. Elevation of personnel by boom lift, scissors lift, etc. may also require the use of asafety harness and inertia reel. An approved safety harness worn together with aninertia reel restraint is the minimum safety requirement.

Lifelines can restrict mobility of a worker at times and the temptation may be present,

even in hazardous conditions, to disregard this important safety requirement. Personnelin these situations are required to wear a harness and reel at all times and clip on for themaximum part of the job time.

Head protection is mandatory as a minimum workwear requirement. The fitting of a chinstrap to the helmet for use at all times aloft and especially in windy conditions is required.This will prevent the loss of the helmet or the possible risk of its striking another person ifdislodged.

9.9.3 WORK OVERHEAD

Securing tools and materials at height with the use of lanyards and tie-downs helps to

prevent objects falling. Loose materials should always be removed or secured at the endof work.

Round or cylindrical objects are particularly prone to rolling off staging and as suchrequire special attention.

Sparks and hot slag need to be contained during hot work.

Additional precautions in the form of nets or tarpaulins to protect those below the job siteshall be provided where appropriate.

CautionWhere any doubt remains whether material can fall on to personnel accessareas below, those areas must be flagged off or barricaded and prominentlymarked with the appropriate danger signs.

9.9.4 MAN CAGE/WORK BASKET

For short term elevation to otherwise inaccessible points use of the crane man cage is asafe method.

General conditions for safe working include:









· Banksman with radio in the basket who is in communication with the crane operator.· The work basket in view of the crane operator at all times.· Crane operator stays at the controls throughout the operations.· A minimum of two persons in the basket whilst aloft.· Personal protective wear for all occupants appropriate to the work in progress.· The work basket to be in current serviceable condition, certified and inspected

according to the controlling regulations.· The basket must not be loaded beyond its rated and marked weight capacity.· Safety harness must be worn by occupants with lifelines to a fast point.· The approved man basket is dedicated to the task of carrying workers and their

equipment to otherwise inaccessible locations by crane. The man basket must not beused for any other purpose and conversely no substitute is permitted in the form ofskips or bins that are not authorised for this purpose.

· Wind velocity may impose limitations on use of the man cage. All safetyconsiderations must be considered including wind speed, location of lift, nature ofwork, etc.

These conditions may only be varied by the R&SS after consultation with SOSE.

Direction to crane operators should be given by certified banksmen, however approvalmay be given by I&QM to waive the requirement for the continuing presence of a

banksman in the man cage when the work is long term, routine, in favourable conditionsand in sight of the crane operator. A designated radio operator in the man cagehowever, will maintain communications with the crane operator.

9.9.5 SKY CLIMBER

The Sky Climber is an elevating work platform which ascends on two wire ropes bymeans of air operated winches. When required on Plant, R&SS shall visit the site todetermine if the Sky Climber is suitable for the task in hand. R&SS will also superviseinstallation before use and brief users on the safety requirements of the equipment.

9.9.6 ABSEILING

Abseiling is a commonly used technique for mountaineering descent using a double ropesystem. Increasingly the technique has been adopted in the offshore oil/gas industry forthe inspection and maintenance of platforms and high structures.

It is not commonly used in ADGAS, but when it is used, the activity is classed as a riskand must be managed by application of HSE standards and practices.

Prior to performing such a task, the following safety instructions must be strictlyfollowed:-

Kick off meetings must be held with all Abseiling contractors/employees prior to the work.









Task risk assessment requirements should be performed as per Chapter 2 Section 9.

As a minimum requirement the following points must be addressed:-

· Joint site inspection must take place during which C&ID/GSD will identify all safe Abseiling anchor points and C&ID to confirm all such points are sound and noncorroded.

· All Abseiling equipment certification must be checked and confirmed valid andunexpired. Where doubt exists ADGAS Rigging Section may consider testing.

· Site visits to demonstrate equipment use must be done.

· Assessment of exclusion zones at grade level must be made to ensure no personnelenter the restricted area during Abseiling activities.

· An appointed safety standby will be present with a radio at all times during workactivities.

· Role of the Safety standby will be clearly communicated to all involved in the work.· An alternative system of communication will be established in case of radio failure.· The effect of wind speed must be considered. In the event of wind speeds above 20

knots all work must cease.· In the event of a rising wind speed the operations Shift Superintendent must be

informed by the Central Control Building staff.· The duty OSS will advise the Abseiling crew and decide a safe course of action.

· In the event of unusual flaring or high SO2 atmospheric conditions all Abseiling muststop and Abseilers must return to ground level.

· Working hours and rest breaks must be discussed and agreed taking dueconsideration of ambient temperatures and relative humidity conditions.

· Operations must identify any potential risk areas (flange leaks/valve gland leaks etc.)· If the Abseiling work is extensive a formal work method statement must be issued for

ADGAS review and agreement prior to the work commencing.· Manpower histograms must be identified and agreed.· If during Abseiling activities, the No. of abseilers is extensive, HSED must conduct

risk assessment and conduct emergency drills.

All Abseiling work in the ADGAS LNG Plant will be subject to Permit to Work conditionsand issue of a cold work permit.

Further InformationChapter 2.10Task Risk Assessment






ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS Chapter No. 10



CHAPTER 10 CONTENTS

10 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS........................................................................................................... 389

10.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 389 10.2 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................. 389 10.3 REPORTING .................................................................................................................................... 390 10.4 INITIATING AUTHORITY ................................................................ ............................................. 391 10.5 MANAGEMENT ROLE .................................................................................................................. 391 10.6 HSED ROLE ........................................................ ................................................................. ............ 392 10.7 FOLLOW-UP PROCEDURE .............................................................. ............................................. 392

10.7.1 RESPONSIBILITY OF MHSE ............................................................... .................................. 392 10.8 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS- REPORTABLE ACCIDENTS ................................................ 393 10.9 NOTIFICATION TO OTHER AUTHORITIES ........................................................ ....................... 393 10.10 IN-HOUSE NOTIFICATION ......................................................... ............................................. 394 10.11 MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS .............................................................................................. 394

10.11.1 REPORTING OF MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS ............................................................. .. 394 10.11.2 INVESTIGATION OF MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS ........................................................ 395 10.11.3 REMOVING VEHICLE FROM SITE.......................................... ............................................. 395

10.12 BOARDS OF ENQUIRY ............................................................................................................. 395 10.13 INSURANCE REPORTING ........................................................... ............................................. 396 10.14 NEAR-MISS (INCIDENT) REPORTING ............................................................ ....................... 396 10.15 REPORTING OF SERIOUS HSE INCIDENTS TO ADNOC ..................................................... 397

10.15.1 GUIDELINES .......................................................................................................................... 397 10.15.2 CLASSES OF SERIOUS REPORTABLE INCIDENTS .......................................................... .. 397 10.15.3

REPORTING ARRANGEMENTS ............................................................................................ 399 10.15.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR REPORTING INCIDENTS ............................................................. .. 400









10 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS

10.1 INTRODUCTION

Accidents and incidents are usually caused by a combination of substandard acts andsubstandard conditions (previously known as unsafe acts and unsafe conditions). Thesesubstandard acts/conditions are the "symptoms" or immediate causes of the accidentsand incidents. Behind the "symptoms" are the real causes or basic causes which needto be identified to permit meaningful management control to avoid recurrence of theevent. The main objective of an investigation is to determine the immediate and realcauses and recommend remedial actions, rather than to apportion blame on an individualor group of individuals.

Further Information ADNOC-COPV1-01: HSE ADMINISTRATION SYSTEMS. Section 7.3 Workrelated injuries & illnesses ADNOC-COPV1-03: Determining Reportability of Occupational Injuries andIllnesses ADNOC-COPV1-07: Directions for Preparing the Annual HSE Letter ADNOC-COPV1-08: Reporting of Serious HSE Incidents

10.2 DEFINITIONS

· Accident/Incident - An undesired event that results in harm to people, damage toproperty and/or Environment, loss of product or loss of containment.

· Accidents result from contact with a substance or source of energy above thethreshold limit of the body or structure.

· Major accident - fatality, lost-time injury, fire or explosion, high potential chemicalspill, undesired process loss, and property loss exceeding US$ 50,000.

· Near Miss - An undesired event which, under slightly different circumstances, couldhave resulted in harm to people, damage to property and/or Environment, loss ofproduct or loss of containment.

A Near-Miss s also commonly known as a Near-Accident.

· High potential Near miss – Near miss having the potential of causing major accidentunder slightly different circumstances.

· Injury - Harm to people resulting from an accident.· Motor Vehicle Accident - An accident associated with motor vehicles.· Lost-Time Injury - An injury which disables a person from working on one or more

days following the day of the accident.









· Minor Injury - An injury which does not disable the person from working beyond theday of the accident.

This is also referred to as a Non Lost-Time Injury.

· Occupational Disease - An illness/disease resulting from an exposure during thecourse of work.

10.3 REPORTING

All accidents and incidents (hereafter referred to as events) shall be immediately

reported to the responsible supervisor who will take the following actions as appropriate:

· Arrange medical attention for the injured.· Make conditions safe.· Report the event to his Section Head and CCB. Central Control will notify duty HSE.

Central Control will also notify DIFS in case of fire or explosion, major oil/gas spills orserious injury (see Fig. 10-15).

· Any fires (fire, flame, smouldering, burning etc.) must be reported immediately to Daspolice, this will be done through HSE who will contact Personnel Officer (Relations)who in turn will report to the police (see Fig. 10-15).

· All accidents & incidents including fires, injuries, and environmental damage or asset

damage will be investigated by ADGAS through the Accident & Incident reportingprocedure to allow lessons to be learned and improvements to be made. Only casesof suspected criminal damage will be handed to the police for investigation. ThePolice and State Security will be kept informed of the outcome of any ADGASinvestigation into Reportable Accidents (see Chapter 10, Section 8).

· Complete Section A of Das Hospital Medical Examination Form for presentation tothe Das Island Medical Service by the injured person. (In case of serious injury,priority shall be given in transporting injured person to hospital and documentationshould be initiated later).

Brief details of any event aboard a ship shall also be immediately communicated by

PM/HO or their deputies via telephone to the Senior Marine Superintendent, CommercialDivision, Shipping and Marine Department, Abu Dhabi. This information shall beconfirmed by MHSE in writing within 24 hours of the event.

All accidents occurring in ADGAS non industrial areas, must be reported following thereporting procedure chart in fig. 10-17.

Accidents and incidents occurring in project sites should be reported and anaccident/incident form should be completed.









10.4 INITIATING AUTHORITY

For all events, excepting those that result in injury only, the Authority responsible for thearea where the event occurred, or the Projects Liaison Superintendent, shall report to thescene of the event for investigation and shall initiate the accident/incident investigationreport. See Accident Report and Completion Guidelines in Figure 10-1/2/3/4.

Area Authorities are detailed in Chapter 2.11.

For events that result in injury only, the supervisor of the injured shall be responsible forreporting to the scene of the accident for investigation and initiating of the report.

The Duty SOSE/OSC shall assist the responsible authority initiate the investigation of theevent without delay upon receipt of the information from the CCB.

10.5 MANAGEMENT ROLE

Division/Department Head upon receiving a copy of partly filled Accident/IncidentInvestigation Report from the authority responsible for the area where the event occurredshall immediately visit the site of the event for at-the-scene investigation.Division/Department Heads shall be involved in at-the-scene investigation of thefollowing events as a minimum:

· Fatality.· Lost-time injuries.· Fires and explosion.· High potential chemical spills.· High loss potential incidents.· Property loss exceeding US$ 50,000/-

Sections A to F of the report shall be completed and signed before the end of shift/workday. If necessary the concerned person shall stay on after the shift change to completethe report.

It shall be submitted to the concerned Division/Department Head as per the followingguide lines:

· Before the end of the day for events occurring two hours prior to work completion.· No later than 10:00 hours on the next working day for events occurring within two

hours of work completion.· Upon receipt of the report, Division/Department Heads shall inform the PM of all the

events except non lost-time injuries.









The Division/Department Head shall investigate the event and complete and signSection G of the report before the end of the normal working day on which the report wasreceived and forward it immediately to MHSE.

10.6 HSED ROLE

The SOSE/OSE, after completing Sections H to L shall submit a copy of the report or itsbrief summary to MHSE not later than 09.00 hours on the normal working day followingreceipt of the report.

The investigation shall be completed as soon as possible considering the need of

supporting documents, statements from witnesses and operational requirement of theLNG Plant/Equipment. The result of investigation shall be submitted to MHSE within twodays for all injuries and within three days for all other events.

Sections M and N are completed by the MHSE when notifications have been sent to allauthorities, and forwards the report it to the PM.

This is to be completed within three days for injuries and four day for other events.

NoteIf the form can not be completed within the 2 days it still moves onward and a

separate investigation is carried out. Reference on the Accident/Incident form ismade to the follow up report in preparation

The PM shall nominate responsibility for implementation of the recommendations bycompleting Section P of the report and return to MHSE within one day of its receipt.

MHSE upon receipt of completed report from PM, initiates the procedure foraccident/incident follow up.

10.7 FOLLOW-UP PROCEDURE

10.7.1 RESPONSIBILITY OF MHSE

After PM has assigned the responsibility of implementation of remedial actions tovarious division department heads in Section P of the report, it will be forwarded toMHSE for distribution and follow-up.

Responsibi lit ies of MHSE are as follows:

Distribute copies of accident/incident investigation report to designateddepartments/divisions within 48 hours upon receipt of report from PM.Maintain a record of all corrective actions, divisions/departments responsible forimplementation, completion target dates and status for effective follow-up.









Advise Management on the status of remedial actions on a monthly basis via the PM'sweekly meeting on 1st Thursday of every month.Retain status and completion reports with the investigation report.

Responsibility of Division/Department Heads

The concerned division/department heads upon receipt of a copy of the report fromMHSE will initiate necessary action to implement the recommendations as per thecompletion target dates.

Should any delay in meeting the schedule be foreseen, MHSE shall be notified

immediately in writing as to the reason for the delay and expected date of completion.

The division/department heads will advise MHSE of the status of actions on a monthlybasis in writing by the last working day of the month.

Upon completion, the division/department heads shall inform MHSE in writing certifyingthat the corrective action has been completed.

10.8 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS- REPORTABLE ACCIDENTS

Certain types of Accidents shall be reported to the appropriate Government Departmentsaccording to Abu Dhabi legislation. Types of accidents requiring reporting, the reportingprocedure and the person responsible for notification are shown in Table 10-6: StatutoryNotification Requirements and the prescribed forms are shown in Figure 10-5 to Figure10-8. The reporting to the authorities will be coordinated by ADGAS MHSE andreporting will be in writing at the earliest opportunity or within 24 hours of the accidentoccurring.

Where an accident occurs outside the LNG Facilities but in an area of ADGASresponsibility, i.e. fenced Project Worksites, the Projects Liaison Superintendent or the Area Authority shall be responsible for ensuring that the Statutory NotificationRequirements are complied with by the Company involved in the accident.

10.9 NOTIFICATION TO OTHER AUTHORITIES

There is no statutory obligation to report accidents of any type to the police or statesecurity representative. However in the interest of good relations and effectivecommunication the following will apply:

Any accident reported to the Supreme Petroleum Council or Ministry of Labour & Social Affairs will also be reported to the Police and State Security representatives on DasIsland by a letter in the format shown in Figure 10-9. The letter will be prepared byMHSE and signed by the PM.









Any fire that occurs in any area managed by ADGAS will be reported to the Policeimmediately. This will be done by PO(R) who will be informed by duty OSE who willhave been called by OSS on discovery of the fire.

The responsibility for investigating all accidents (including fires) will rest with ADGASthrough the accident and incident reporting procedure. Only cases of suspected criminaldamage will be handed to the police for investigation. The Police and State Security willbe kept informed of the outcome of any ADGAS investigation into reportable accidents.

10.10 IN-HOUSE NOTIFICATION

A brief statement of the facts, as available following an initial investigation, and ofprecautions to be taken to avoid similar events from occurring elsewhere, will becirculated by MHSE to all Superintendents and above for all major accidents and highpotential incidents by next working day after the event.

The "Major Accident/Incident Announcement" form shown in Figure 10-10 shall be usedfor this purpose.

Supplementary announcements should be made by MHSE as other data is confirmed orcause(s) determined related to the event.

10.11 MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS10.11.1 REPORTING OF MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS

10.11.1.1 ACCIDENT ON ADGAS PROPERTY RESULTING IN PERSONNEL INJURY

The driver of the vehicle (or a witness to the accident if the driver is badly injured) shallinform Train Shift Supervisor in Central Control Building on Telephone 62222 (see Fig.10-16).

The Train Shift Supervisor will do the following:

· Arrange medical assistance.· Inform driver's supervisor.· Inform duty HSE.· Inform DAS Police.

10.11.1.2 ACCIDENT ON ADGAS PROPERTY WITHOUT INJURY

The driver of the vehicle shall take the following action:

· Inform Central Control Room Telephone 62222 (See Fig. 10-16).









· Inform his supervisor.· Inform DAS Police.· Inform duty HSE.

Accidents ou ts ide ADGAS Facili ti es

ADGAS driver involved in traffic accidents outside ADGAS facility shall do the following:

· Inform ADMA-OPCO Emergency Services Control Room (Tel: 63400/63228). Ask formedical help in case of injury.

· Inform ADGAS Duty HSE.

· Inform his supervisor.· Inform DAS Police.

10.11.2 INVESTIGATION OF MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS

All motor vehicle accident investigation reports shall be initiated by the Section Head ofthe driver on the Accident/Incident Investigation Report. Section A to F of the report shallbe completed before the end of shift/work day and submitted to concernedDivision/Department head to complete Section G as per following guidelines:

· Before the end of the day for accidents occurring two hours before work ceases.· No later than 10:00 hours on the next working day for accidents occurring in the last

two hours of work.

In the case when more than one driver is involved in the accident, the report shall beinitiated by HSED and Section A to H shall be filled by the duty HSE.

10.11.3 REMOVING VEHICLE FROM SITE

Vehicle(s) involved in an accident shall not be removed from their exact position unlessauthorised by police. In exceptional circumstances the vehicle should be moved, ifleaving the vehicle on site will create additional hazards and it is considered essential toremove the same for the safety of plant and personnel.

10.12 BOARDS OF ENQUIRY

All major accidents and high loss potential incidents shall, at the discretion of the PM orGM, be investigated by a Board of Enquiry, using ADGAS RCA procedures and RCAWorkflow Diagram (Accident/ Incident Investigation). Figure 10-14.

Terms of Reference for the Boards of Enquiry are shown in Figure 10-11 .

After a major accident the scene should, as far as safety will allow, be left untouchedpending an enquiry. In all major accidents, SOSE/OSE shall take statements from all









witnesses and interested parties and obtain if possible whatever photographs arenecessary to assist in the investigation.

These statements may also be required to assist the Board of Enquiry if constituted forthe event.

10.13 INSURANCE REPORTING

For those accidents wherein an insurance claim may be filed, the PM, in consultationwith the MHSE, shall submit to the ADGAS Insurance Co-ordinator a report within twodays of the accident. The report shall include the time and date of the accident, the

location, nature of loss or damage and circumstances of the event.

10.14 NEAR-MISS REPORTING

A Near-Miss is an event which under slightly different circumstances could have resultedin an actual loss occurring. The potential loss could have resulted in harm to people, anundesired process loss or damage to the environment.

In order to learn from these events it is important that they are always noted andreported. Learning from Near-Miss will help us prevent more serious accidents.

To help reduce and eventually eliminate accidents, a Near-Miss Reporting Procedurehas been introduced throughout ADGAS.

When a Near-Miss has been witnessed, or someone has been involved in one,regardless of how minor it appears, a Near-Miss Report Form (Refer to Figure 10-12)must be completed, and placed in the Near-Miss Report boxes at selected points in ADGAS. The forms are designed so that identification of the originator is not required.

The Near-Miss must be reported verbally to the Supervisor who will investigate andinitiate any temporary corrective action, where applicable. The verbal report is essentialin order to ensure that the incident can be rectified before an accident occurs, if requiredthe supervisor should initiate corrective action by the SAP system.

The Near-Miss Report will be entered onto the Action Tracking sheet for discussion atthe Central HSE Sub Committee meeting and actions allocated, where required.Immediate actions taken at the time will also be logged on the sheet. The originatorshould be notified, by his Supervisor, of the recommendations and actions taken, whenavailable.

The identification number on the Near-Miss Reporting Form will be entered into themonthly draw, held by the HSED, and the winning numbers selected, will be displayed onthe Safety and Health Bulletin Boards.









10.15 REPORTING OF SERIOUS HSE INCIDENTS TO ADNOC

10.15.1 GUIDELINES

‘The Guidelines’ require ‘serious’ HSE Incidents to be reported to ADNOC in the mosttimely manner possible following the incident. For the purpose of ‘the Guidelines’,definitions of HSE incidents are taken from the ADNOC HSE Risk ManagementGuidelines. Incident is defined as: ‘an event or chain of events which has caused, orcould have caused injury, illness, and/or damage (loss) to assets, the environment,company reputation or third parties’. ‘Serious’ incident is a generic category which hasbeen chosen to include catastrophic, severe and critical incidents. These are defined insummary form in Table 10-1.

Severity People Assets Environment Reputation

CatastrophicMultiple fatalitiesor permanenttotal disabilities

Extensivedamage

Massive effectInternationalImpact

SevereSingle fatality orpermanent totaldisability

Major damage Major effect National Impact

CriticalMajor injury or

health effects

Local damage Localised effectConsiderable

Impact

Table 10-1: Report ing Guidelines

It will be noted that the ADNOC definition of ‘incident’ includes events which cause orcould have caused injury, illness etc. It follows therefore that any event which couldhave resulted in either catastrophic, severe or critical consequences should also bereported in accordance with these guidelines. These events are often referred to as‘High Potential Near Misses’.

Less serious incidents e.g. a Lost Time Injury where the person does not have ‘severe’

or ‘critical’ injuries shall not be reported to ADNOC immediately. This type of incident willbe reported as part of the requirement to submit safety and environmental dataperiodically. The requirement will be defined in the ‘Guidelines on the periodic reportingof HSE data and statistics from Group Companies to ADNOC’.

10.15.2 CLASSES OF SERIOUS REPORTABLE INCIDENTS

More detailed definitions of catastrophic, severe and critical incidents (genericallyclassed as ‘serious’ incidents for the purposes of ‘the Guidelines’) are given below. Theyhave been taken directly from the ADNOC HSE Risk Management Guidelines.









Table 10-2: People:


Catastrophic Multiple fatalities or permanent total disabilities – from an accident or occupationalillness (poisoning, cancer)

Severe Single fatality or permanent total disability – from an accident or occupational illness(poisoning, cancer)

Critical Major injury or health effects (including permanent disability) – Affecting workperformance in the longer term, e.g. prolonged absence from work. Irreversible healthdamage without loss of life, e.g. noise induced hearing loss, chronic back injuries

Table 10-3: Assets:Severity Description

Catastrophic Extensive damage – Substantial or total loss of operation (costs in excess of US$10,000,000).

Severe Major – Partial operation loss (2 weeks shutdown, costs up to US$ 10,000,000).Critical Local damage – Partial shutdown (can be restarted but costs up to US$ 500,000).

Table 10-4: Environment:


Catastrophic Massive effect – Persistent severe environmental damage or severe nuisanceextending over a large area. In terms of commercial or recreational use or nature

conservation, a major economic loss for the company. Constant, high exceedance ofstatutory or prescribed limits

Severe Major effect – Severe environmental damage. The company is required to takeextensive measures to restore polluted or damaged environment to its original state.Extended exceedance of statutory or prescribed limits

Critical Localised effect – Limited loss of discharges of known toxicity. Repeated exceedance ofstatutory or prescribed limit. Affecting neighbourhood. Spontaneous recovery of limiteddamage within one year.

Table 10-5: Reputation:


Catastrophic International impact – International public attention. Extensive adverse attention ininternational media. National/international policies with potentially severe impact onaccess to new areas, grants of licenses and/or tax legislation.

Severe National impact – National public concern. Extensive adverse attention in the nationalmedia. Regional/national policies with potentially restrictive measures and/or impact ongrant of licenses. Mobilisation of action group.

Critical Considerable impact – Regional public concern. Extensive adverse attention in localmedia. Slight national media and/or local/regional political attention. Adverse stance oflocal government and/or action groups.









NoteReputation also accounts for the liabilities arising from injuries and propertydamage to third parties including the cross liabilities that may arise between theinterdependent ADNOC Group Companies.

10.15.3 REPORTING ARRANGEMENTS

Catastrophic, Severe and Critical Incidents must be reported to ADNOC as soon aspossible after they occur. The objective should be to provide ADNOC with a report withintwenty-four hours of the incident occurring. It is acknowledged that in some cases,particularly with respect to ‘High Potential Near Misses’, this may prove to be difficult.The objective in this case must be to report in the most timely manner possible.

As a minimum in all cases, the ‘ADNOC Initial Incident Notification Form’, shown as Attachment 1 of ADNOC-COPV1-08: Reporting of Serious HSE Incidents, must becompleted and faxed to the ADNOC Control Room on Fax No. 6673766. The ADNOCControl Room is manned 24 hours/day, 7 days/week.

The ADNOC Control Room Supervisor shall contact the relevant Duty Manager(s) fromthe concerned Directorate(s) and provide them with a copy(s) of the ‘ADNOC InitialIncident Notification Form’. ADNOC Duty Managers shall follow up the incident inaccordance with their procedures and notify ADNOC senior management accordingly.Based on the gravity of the incident, the Senior Management of each respective

Business line Directorate will then inform the CEO.

The ADNOC Control Room Supervisor shall also, in all cases, provide the ADNOCEH&S Division Manager with a copy of the ‘ADNOC Initial Incident Notification Form’.

NoteRelevant ADNOC Directorates are as follows:

Exploration & Production:Gas Processing Div. GASCO; ADGAS; ATHEEROffshore Div. ADMA-OPCO; ZADCO; ADNOC; TOTAL-ABK; BUNDUQ

Onshore Div. ADCO; NDC

Marketing & Refining: ADNOC-FOD; TAKREER; NGSCO; ADNATCO

Chemicals Directorate:BOROUGE; FERTIL

Shared Services Directorate:NMS; ADDCAP; ADDPOC; NPCC









10.15.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR REPORTING INCIDENTS All incidents shall be reported by the Group Company which has overall control of thesite or operation where the incident has occurred. This includes incidents which result ininjuries to employees, contractors, visitors or employees of other Group Companies.Where an incident in one Group Company impacts on another Group Company, theGroup Company having control of the site where the incident was initiated shall reportthe incident.

Where one Group Company is providing a service to another Group Company, theGroup Company in overall control shall report the incident. For example, if an incidentoccurs on an NDC rig while it is working for ADCO, ADCO must report the incident.

















Figure 10-1: Investigation Report (1st

page)









Figure 10-2: Investigation Report (2nd

page)

Figure 10-3: Investigation Report (3rd

page)









Figure 10-4: Investigation Report (4th

page)









TYPE OF ACCIDENT

STATUTORYNOTIFICATION

TO

REPORTPREPARED

BY

REPORT APPROVED

BY

NOTIFICATIONREQUIREMENT

S

REPORTFORMAT REF

Fire andExplosion inProcess Plant

SPC Via LA,Head Office, AbuDhabi

MHSE PM

Initial report byfastest means ofcommunication;Detailed reportwithin 15 days.

Figure 10-5

Figure 10-6

Major Spillageof Oil or Gasfrom Process

Plant

SPC via LA,Head Office, AbuDhabi

MHSE PM

Initial report byfastest means ofcommunication;Detailed report

within 15 days.

Figure 10-5

Figure 10-6

Fire,irrespective oflocation.

MOLSA via LA,Head Office AbuDhabi

MHSE PMBy fastestmeans ofcommunication

Figure 10-7

Fatality

MOLSA (DasIsland) via P&TMcopied to LA,Head Office, AbuDhabi

MHSE PMBy fastestmeans ofcommunication

Figure 10-7

Injury resultingin 3 or moredays lost-time


MHSE PM Within 24 hours Figure 10-7

Injuriesresulting inless that 3days lost-time,non lost timeinjuries andoccupationaldisease.


MHSE PM

Quarterly returnwithin 15 daysof the end of thequarter.

Figure 10-8

Table 10-6: Statutory Noti fication Requirements









TELEX FROM PM TO GM

"URGENT"

TO : Legal Advisor - ADGAS - Abu Dhabi.Via : GM - ADGAS - Abu Dhabic.c. : HRRD - ADGAS - Abu Dhabi

FROM : PM - ADGAS - Das Island

SUBJECT :

Date and Time of Accident :

Location of Accident :

Brief Details:

INJURED :

DAMAGE :

Figure 10-5: TELEX FROM PM TO GM









TYPED REPORT FROM MHSE,

APPROVED BY PM TO GM AND L.A.

WRITTEN NOTIFICATION (WITHIN 15 DAYS)OF ACCIDENT TO SUPREME PETROLEUM COUNCIL

(Law 8 of 1980, "Conservation of Petroleum Resources", Article 50)

In accordance with the above legislation the final report of the following accident ishereby attached for forwarding to the Supreme Petroleum Council.

ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT

TITLE

1. Synopsis.

2. Details of how accident occurred.

3. Report ing of accident.

4. Conclusions.

5. Recommendations to prevent recurrence.

6 Attachments.

Reported By :Manager Health Safety and Environment

Approved By :Product ion Manager

Figure 10-6: TYPED REPORT FROM MHSE










LNG PLANT, DAS ISLAND

NOTIFICATION OF ACCIDENT TO MINISTRY OFLABOUR AND SOCIAL AFFAIRS

In accordance w ith Article (28) of Ministerial Decision No.(32) of 1982.

1. Type of Activi ty :

2. Date of Accident :

3. Full Descrip tion of Accident :

4. Details of Injured Person;

Name :

Company No. :

Age :

Address :

Grade/Salary range :

Date of Appoin tment :

Injuries Sustained :

Period of Disablementfrom Normal Duties :

5. Damage caused by Fire or Explosion :

PRODUCTION MANAGER

Date:

Figure 10-7: NOTIFICATION OF ACCIDENT









TO : Ministry of Labour and Social AffairsThrough : Personnel and Training Manager

c.c. : Legal Advisor, ADGAS, Abu Dhabi.

Subject : NOTIFIABLE INJURIES/OCCUPATIONAL ILLNESSDURING THE PERIOD TO ( QTR 200 )

Details of notifiable injuries and illness for Qtr 200 in compliance with Article 26 of

Ministerial Decision No.32 of 1982 is tabulated below:-

Name Employer Date ofInjury/ Disease

Description

Report Prepared by ___________________ _________________MHSE Date

Approved by ____________________ _________________PM Date

Figure 10-8: Summary of Notifiable Injuries and Illnesses










LNG PLANT - DAS ISLAND

INFORMATION TO BE PASSED TO BOTH OFFICER I/C POLICE AND

STATE SECURITY CONCERNING ACCIDENT ON LNG SITE

Date :

Time :

Location :

Injuries :

Damage :

Details :

PRODUCTION MANAGER

Date:

Figure 10-9: State Securi ty Report









MAJOR ACCIDENT/INCIDENT ANNOUNCEMENT

Event

Personal Injury

Process Loss

Incident

Property Damage

Other (Specify)

Location

Date:________________ Division/ Dept:____________________

Apparent nature and extent of injury, damage, process loss or potential loss

Details available at present.(Description of Accident/ Incident)

Cause Apparent at this time.

Dist.: All Division Managers/Department Heads.Report Prepared by ____________________ _________________

MHSE Date Approved by ____________________ _________________

PM Date

Figure 10-10: Major Accident/Incident Announcement









TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR BOARDS OF ENQUIRY

INTRODUCTION

Any major accident or High Potential Loss incident that occur within the sphere of operations of ADGAS, involving company or contractor's personnel or property shall, at the discretion of PM or GMbe investigated by a Board of Enquiry.

CONSTITUTIONThe Chairman will be independent and the members shall have no direct involvement with the event.The members should be appointed by PM in consultation with the chairman of the Board of Enquiry

and shall be sufficiently qualified and experienced to meaningfully conduct and complete the enquiry.It is advisable that in team selection the following are considered as well:

Manager HSE or his nominee shall not be member of the Board but only act as a technical advisor. A facilitator, skilled in conducting Root Cause analysis (RCA) and will normally be part of the team. Amember from HR Division should be nominated as part of the BOE team.

DUTIES

The task of the Board of enquiry is to follow a structured procedure (using ADGAS RCA procedure) toexpose the root cause(s) of the incident and recommend appropriate actions in order to avoidrecurrence.

It is the duty of the Board of Enquiry to establish all the relevant facts. This may require

laboratory/metallurgical tests, questioning of witnesses, etc. The Board Members shall have the rightto examine all the relevant evidence including operational and maintenance records, work permitsetc., and interview any person considered appropriate.

Based on available evidence the Board of Enquiry shall report as accurately as possible the precisecourse of event before, during and after the event.

The Board of Enquiry should determine the immediate causes and basic causes of the event.

The Board of Enquiry shall recommend actions needed to avoid a recurrence of the event.

The Board of Enquiry shall submit its findings as a single comprehensive report with appropriateattachments to the PM/ GM within ten days of the occurrence of the events.

REPORT FORMAT

The Board of Enquiry shall submit its report in three distinct and separate sections:

Findings

This consists of a narrative in chronological order of the facts established by the Board as a result oftheir enquiry. This section should be supported by appropriate drawings, photographs, laboratoryanalysis, flow diagrams, work permits, log books, etc., as applicable.

Causes and Recommendations









This consists of the Board's opinion as to the causes of the accident/incident and recommendations toprevent recurrence. The recommendations must be converted into an action plan.

Statements

This consists of statements made by witnesses and other persons who gave evidence to the Board.

DISTRIBUTION

Only Five copies of the full report shall be prepared and distributed to the following persons:

The General Manager.The Deputy General Manager

The Plant Manager.Health, Safety and Environment Manager.

Copies of the report shall be distributed to other persons and third parties only after approval by theGeneral Manager and Production Manager.

ASSIGNMENT OF ACTION

PM consultation with GM upon receipt of the report shall review and approve the recommendations

and action plans and if necessary changes of responsibilities/ target dates where consideredappropriate be advised. The action plan will be forwarded to HSED for inclusion in the Action TrackingSystem.

Figure 10-11: Terms Of Reference For Boards Of Enquiry









Figure 10-12: Near Miss Repor t Form









FAX MESSAGE TO ADNOC CONTROL ROOM - FAX NUMBER: 02-6673766

ADNOC Control Room Supervisor to Notify ADNOC Duty Managers in the following Directorate(s) and ADNOC EH&S Division Manager

E&P ‡ Marketing & Refining ‡ Chemicals ‡ Shared Services ‡ Others: …………………………………………

Date: Time of Incident:Group Company/Site/Location:

Type of Incident:

Casualty(ies) Details:

Name(s):

Nationality(ies):

Employer(s):

Job Title(s):

Status:

Incident Description:

Nature and extent of losses:

Status at present and apparent cause (if known):

From:

Name:

Signature:

Position: Group Company:

Figure 10-13: INITIAL NOTIFICATION TO ADNOC – SERIOUS HSE INCIDENTS









RCA Workf low Diagram

Accident/ Incident Investigations

EmployeeInitiates

Yellow Form

Head of

Department/ Div.

Manger

Comments

HSEDreview and

investigate

IQM

comments.Consult H&PR

of required on

integrity and

reliability

PROM

Remarks

Technical

Report

Required

Assign

Responsible

Decide of

Maxi or

Mini RCA

required

To RCA

Flow

Diagram

- What Happened

- Where Happened

- When Happened

- Who was there

- Losses

RCA Workf low Diagram

Accident/ Incident Investigations

EmployeeInitiates

Yellow Form

Head of

Department/ Div.

Manger

Comments

HSEDreview and

investigate

IQM

comments.Consult H&PR

of required on

integrity and

reliability

PROM

Remarks

Technical

Report

Required

Assign

Responsible

Decide of

Maxi or

Mini RCA

required

To RCA

Flow

Diagram

- What Happened

- Where Happened

- When Happened

- Who was there

- Losses

Figure 10-14: RCA Workflow Diagram









Figure 10-15









Figure 10-16









Figure 10-17






L ABORATORY S AFETY Chapter No. 11



CHAPTER 11 CONTENTS

11 LABORATORY SAFETY ...................................................................................................................... 421

11.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 421 11.2 GENERAL SAFETY ........................................................................................................................ 421 11.3 GLASSWARE .................................................................................................................................. 422 11.4 SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND PPE .................................................................................................. 423 11.5 NAKED LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................. 424 11.6 SMOKING, FOOD AND DRINK .................................................................................................... 424 11.7 CHEMICAL USE ............................................................................................................................. 424

11.7.1 HANDLING OF CHEMICALS .............................................................. .................................. 424 11.7.2 FLAMMABLE AND EXPLOSIVE CHEMICALS ......................................................... ............ 425 11.7.3 CORROSIVE CHEMICALS ........................................................ ............................................. 425 11.7.4 TOXIC SUBSTANCES ............................................................................................................. 425 11.7.5 FUME CUPBOARDS .............................................................................................................. 426

11.8 LABELLING .................................................................................................................................... 426 11.9 ULTRA VIOLET (UV) RADIATION ............................................................ .................................. 427 11.10 SAMPLE DESPATCH ......................................................... ........................................................ 427 11.11 WASTE DISPOSAL .................................................................................................................... 427 11.12 GAS CYLINDERS ............................................................... ........................................................ 428 11.13 ELECTRICITY ............................................................................................................................ 429

11.13.1 ELECTRICAL APPARATUS................................. ................................................................. .. 429 11.13.2 STATIC ELECTRICITY ........................................................................................................... 429

11.14 FIRST AID ................................................................................................................................... 430

11.15 CRYOGENIC MATERIALS ....................................................................................................... 430 11.16 MERCURY .................................................................................................................................. 430









11 LABORATORY SAFETY

11.1 INTRODUCTION

This section covers the specific safety requirements for laboratories and laboratorysampling operations and includes hazards and precautions such as toxic/hazardoussubstances, disposal of waste and use of compressed gases.

These procedures shall be read and complied with by all personnel working in or visiting ADGAS Laboratories.

11.2 GENERAL SAFETY

The main factors which contribute to a high standard of safety in laboratories are asfollows:

· Adherence to laid down experimental procedures.· High standards of housekeeping.· Use of protective equipment provided.· High standard of equipment maintenance and the use of equipment in good

condition.

Apart from the dangers associated with toxic chemicals many common laboratorychemicals carry with them the risk of fire or explosion due to either their flammability ortheir unstable and highly reactive nature.

A laboratory with a heavily polluted atmosphere indicates faults which if not rectifiedcould cause a toxic or flammable atmosphere.

These may be produced by one or a combination of the following:

· Poor ventilation.· Poor fume extraction from fume cupboards.· Spillage of chemicals.· Badly designed experimental procedures.

Whenever a test is in progress a qualified competent person shall always be present.

Laboratory users shall ensure that any equipment they have used is left in a safecondition.

All personnel working within a laboratory shall make themselves familiar with the siting ofthe fire fighting and other safety and emergency equipment.









The senior person in charge shall ensure that the laboratory is left in a safe condition atthe end of the working day or at shift change.

All flexible tubing should be inspected before use to ensure that it is in good condition.

Protective clothing issued, either laboratory coats or overalls, shall be worn at all times.Coats should be buttoned to ensure that loose flapping clothing does not catch inmachinery or knock over glassware.

Gas cylinders when not in use shall be turned off at the cylinder valve. Cylinders should

be securely stored in racks with safety chains or bench straps.

Work benches should be kept tidy, free of unwanted apparatus and chemicals and thework areas free of obstructions.

All electrical apparatus should be inspected for worn cables, damaged plugs, deficientearthing, etc. Defective equipment should be withdrawn and any repairs effected by acompetent person from the Electrical Section.

Do not pipette by mouth any volatile, toxic or corrosive liquids. Use a safety device suchas a pi-pump pipette or a Griffin pipette filler, auto pipette, etc.

Rubber tubing connecting apparatus should be secured by metal clips and not twistedwire. Wire is unsatisfactory since there is invariably a point of weakness at the base ofthe twist and an additional hazard is introduced by the twisted end having sharp points.

Samples of oil/chemicals shall not be stored in the offices, mess rooms or in any areawhere there are naked lights or where smoking is permitted.

Thermometers that are broken should only be disposed of after the mercury has beenremoved in a safe manner.

11.3 GLASSWARE

All glassware should be inspected before use especially those items or apparatussubjected to vacuum or high temperature. Damaged equipment should be sent for repairor discarded.

Glass vessels containing liquid reagents should be kept out direct sunlight; this willprevent any lens effect taking place and creating an additional fire hazard.

Glass Winchesters should be treated with care as often the walls are thin. Winchestersshould never be lifted by the neck as the weight of the contents may be sufficient toshatter the bottle.









Winchesters of corrosive liquids should only be transported in the special carriersprovided.

One of the most common causes of accidents within a laboratory is the careless handlingof glass tubing and apparatus.

Although ground glass joints are almost universally used, the insertion of glass tubinginto cork or rubber bungs still causes accidents.

The following points should reduce such accidents:

· Glass tubing after being cut should be rounded off in a flame.· A lubricant such as glycerine or Teepol should be used to ease the insertion of the

glass tubing into a cork bung.· When inserting the tubing, hold the glass in a sufficient thickness of cloth or gloves. If

force is required then hole is too small.· Long lengths of glass tubing should be carried vertically.

Broken glass should be cleared up immediately and disposed of in a safe manner,ensuring that there will be no hazard to persons clearing away waste materials.

Spillages shall be cleared up immediately. Acid or alkalis may require neutralisation ordilution before disposal is safe.

11.4 SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND PPE

All personnel must know the location of fire extinguishers, control valves and electricalisolating switches. All personnel shall be instructed in the use of portable fire fightingequipment.

Protective clothing must be worn when handling hazardous materials.

Armoured glass safety spectacles are provided and must be worn by all personnelworking or visiting in the Laboratory. Safety spectacles and goggles provide protectionagainst unexpected dangers. With work involving a known potential hazard, useadditional protection such as a full face visor.

See also Section 3-9, Personal Protective Equipment and the Hazardous SubstancesManual.









11.5 NAKED LIGHTS

Naked lights such as a gas burners, non flameproof electrical equipment, etc., shouldonly be used in rooms or locations agreed by the HSED. Flammable liquids shall not bestored in such areas where naked lights are allowed.

All necessary ignition sources, e.g. Bunsen burners, heaters, etc., should be turned offwhen not in use.

11.6 SMOKING, FOOD AND DRINK

Smoking is not permitted in the laboratory or laboratory storerooms.

Food shall not be consumed in laboratory working areas

Laboratory apparatus shall not be used instead of cups or glasses and vice versa.

11.7 CHEMICAL USE

11.7.1 HANDLING OF CHEMICALS

Most chemicals are potentially harmful and should be handled with caution. It is arequirement of recognised international standards such as the UK Health and Safety at

Work Act, 1974 that manufactures/suppliers of potentially harmful materials shall supplytheir customers with relevant health and safety information. Should this information notbe supplied with the materials, manufacturers will provide it on request.

Before a new or unknown chemical is used within the laboratory all relevant informationshall be obtained by the Lab Superintendent. Copies of the data shall be forwarded tothe HSED in accordance with Section 11.4, who will be responsible for updating theHazardous Substances Manual. Chemicals shall be transported, stored and usedaccording to the manufacturer's instructions, company safety regulations and codes ofpractice such as those issued by the UK Health and Safety Executive.

Glass bottles, whatever their contents, should be transported in a safe manner using thecarriers provided.

Extreme care shall be exercised when decanting liquids, for example when filling reagentbottles from a full Winchester. It is highly dangerous when pouring from a large containerto rest it so that the whole weight is on the receiver. A variety of suitable liquid transferequipment is available from various laboratory suppliers and these should be used asthey provide a safe, efficient and speedy method of transferring liquids. All transferswhere practicable should take place on spillage trays.









11.7.2 FLAMMABLE AND EXPLOSIVE CHEMICALSFlammable explosive chemicals shall not be stored in the vicinity of naked lights. Theywill be stored only in specifically designated areas of storeroom/cupboards.

Mechanical stirring of flammable materials should only be carried out using eithercompressed air or explosion proof electrical equipment. Such operations should becarried out in a fume cupboard.

The maximum quantity of highly flammable materials held in the laboratory should be theminimum amount required to ensure the continuance of the work in hand.

Storage of explosion and flammable compounds should comply with a recognisedstandard, approved by MHSE such as the UK Highly Flammable Liquids & LiquefiedPetroleum Gas Regulations.

Within the laboratory these compounds should not be placed on window sills or shelvesabove shoulder level.

Safety containers should be used for the transfer and conveyance of highly flammableliquids.

Strong oxidising chemicals shall not be stored with flammable substances or materials.

Organic chemicals which can form peroxides should be stored in a darkened area.

Inter-reacting chemicals shall be adequately isolated from one another in storage.

Non-explosive proof refrigerators are unsuitable for storing substances that may lead toflammable/explosive gas/vapour and should be labelled as such. Any items stored in arefrigerator should be clearly labelled and be recorded in a log book.

Refrigerators should be clearly labelled "Chemicals only - no Food".

11.7.3 CORROSIVE CHEMICALS

Large containers of these chemicals (acids and alkalis) shall be transported in suitablecarriers.

When handling these liquids in bulk, full chemical protective clothing shall be worn.

Concentrated acids should not be used or stored in the vicinity of flammable material.

11.7.4 TOXIC SUBSTANCES

Toxic substances may enter the body by inhalation, ingestion or by absorption throughthe skin. Extreme care shall be exercised when handling these substances and theappropriate protective clothing/equipment shall be worn.









Toxic substances shall be stored in clearly labelled containers.

Any poisonous substances shall be stored in a properly labelled container. The containershall be replaced in its proper position immediately after use.

All recognised poisonous substances shall be stored in a Poisons Cupboard that shall bekept locked, the key being under the control of the person in charge of the laboratory.

Note A Poisons register shall be kept containing details of all poisons and amounts

stored.

11.7.5 FUME CUPBOARDS

Any operations involving harmful or dangerous gases or fumes shall be carried out in afume cupboard. Only fume cupboards equipped with flameproof motors shall be usedwhen flammable gases are being vented, cooled, etc

Before any work is carried out in a fume cupboard it shall be ascertained that theventilation is adequate.

The effluent from the fume cupboard should be directed to a safe place where dispersion

is assured.

11.8 LABELLING

All containers, bottles, jars, etc., used in the laboratory and in particular those containinghighly toxic, corrosive or reactive substances shall be clearly labelled with the name ofthe contents.

All substances shall be stored in properly designed and approved containers, bottles,etc., suited to the nature of the substance and hazards involved and never in anycontainer that may suggest that the contents are a foodstuff or other domestic product.

Substances, liquids, etc., that cannot be positively identified should be set aside andlabelled as "UNKNOWN LIQUID OR SUBSTANCE", carefully packed and the Safety andLoss Prevention Department notified.

Wash bottles that contain a liquid other than water should be clearly labelled as to itscontents.

Highly poisonous, corrosive or reactive substances should have this indicated in red.









11.9 ULTRA VIOLET (UV) RADIATION

UV radiation readily causes conjunctivitis and in extreme cases causes irreparabledamage to the retina. UV sources should always be properly shielded and eye protectionworn by all personnel working in the vicinity.

11.10 SAMPLE DESPATCH

Flammable liquids and other reactive materials require special packaging and labelling toconform with a recognised standard, approved by MHSE such as the DangerousSubstances (Classification, Packing and Labelling) Regulations 1996, and IATA

Regulations, etc.

A record of all samples despatched from the laboratory shall be meticulously logged.

11.11 WASTE DISPOSAL

The attention of all personnel is drawn to the fact that the disposal of waste shall becarried out in a responsible manner. National, Gulf and International protocols andlegislation are in force to protect the environment.

Special bins or drums shall be provided for the disposal of waste material.

Broken glassware should be segregated from other waste, e.g. paper, rags, etc.,

Separate drums shall be provided to store chlorinated and non chlorinated wastesolvents.

All containers, even when empty, if they have contained flammable materials, shall bestored and treated as if they were full containers. Empty containers for disposal shall berendered safe by thorough washing and gas freeing.

It shall be borne in mind that other persons who finally dispose of the waste material canbe exposed to hazard should not enough care be exercised in the original disposal ofwaste into segregated containers.

Care shall be taken in the disposal of any materials that can spontaneously ignite or giveoff excessive heat when in contact with water.

Disposal procedures will normally be specified in the relevant Material Safety Data Sheetin the Hazardous Substances Manual.









11.12 GAS CYLINDERS

Gas cylinders or compressed air shall not be connected directly to any glass apparatus,a safety bottle shall be used.

Always open the cylinder slowly and release a little gas before connecting the apparatus.

Wherever possible gas cylinders should be kept outside and the gas piped into thelaboratory. Cylinders should be secured in racks and out of the direct rays of the sun.

The direct heating of gas cylinders to increase the evaporation rate is not allowed. Gas

cylinders are marked with a specification colour code and these colours should bechecked against the contents before use. On British cylinders, red is used to indicateflammability and yellow to indicate toxicity.

Compressed gas cylinders shall be handled with care, they shall not be dropped orallowed to strike against each other.

Safety devices where fitted shall not be tampered with.

Cylinder valves shall always be closed even when the cylinder is empty.

Ensure that the mating surfaces of the cylinder and the required pressure regulator areclean and in good condition before being attached.

Ensure that the thread connections on cylinder regulators correspond to those on thecylinder outlet as threads vary for different gas cylinders.

Regulators provided for a particular gas shall not be used on cylinders containing anyother gas.

Only the standard valve keys as provided by the manufacturer shall be used. Valve keysthat have been adapted to provide extra leverage should never be used to force a valveopen or shut. The cylinder valve shall always be opened slowly and by gently tapping the

key.

Cylinders with faulty valve joints, immovable valve spindles or valve leakage shall bereturned to stores stating clearly the nature of the fault and whether the cylinder is emptyor is still charged. Under no circumstances shall the user attempt any repairswhatsoever.

Should the cylinder valve leak slightly when closed it is usually due to grit on the seat;this can often be removed by opening the valve slowly and closing it sharply.









Cylinders should be protected against excessive rise in temperature and extremes oftemperature.

Cylinders of compressed gas should not be stored near highly flammable materials.

Every possible precaution should be taken to prevent oil and grease coming into contactwith cylinder valves or regulators.

WarningOILS AND GREASES ARE SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE IN THEPRESENCE OF OXYGEN UNDER PRESSURE

Further InformationChapter 4.8 COMPRESSED GASES

11.13 ELECTRICITY

11.13.1 ELECTRICAL APPARATUS

All electrical apparatus shall be serviced as per laid down schedules by a competentelectrician and maintained in good order.

Laboratory personnel shall not undertake any electrical repairs or alterations toequipment or permanent electrical wiring.

All electrical apparatus, plugs, leads, etc., should be kept clean and dry. If any partshould become wet immediately switch off the power, disconnect the plug and drythoroughly. If in doubt seek advice from the Electrical Section.

WarningNever touch electrical equipment with wet hands. Tangles of wires and unduelengths of cables on work benches should be avoided.

Further InformationSection 9.1 ELECTRICAL

11.13.2 STATIC ELECTRICITY

Organic solvents and solids (powder) often develop high electrical charges when beingpoured from containers and particularly so when constructed from polythene. Wheneverpossible metal drums and gas cylinders should be earthed to prevent sparks throughstatic electricity that would cause an explosion. The receiver should also be earthed.Earthing shall be checked by a competent electrician.









Further InformationSection 6-9 Static Electricity

11.14 FIRST AID

All injuries shall be reported as laid down in Chapter 10 of this Manual.

A reference list of toxic substances, medical symptoms and first aid treatment shall bereadily available in the laboratory. The Medical Services Department of ADMA-OPCOand HSED shall be informed of any extremely toxic substances being used which mayrequire them to hold recognised antidotes.

The handling of chemicals can give rise to skin irritation, and any such case noticed shallbe reported at once to the Senior Laboratory Staff.

11.15 CRYOGENIC MATERIALS

Cryogenic materials such as liquid nitrogen or solid carbon dioxide are extremely cold.Cryogenic liquids and their cold boil-off vapours can rapidly freeze human tissue andcause many common materials such as carbon steel, plastic and rubber to becomebrittle or even fracture under stress.

Accidental contact of liquid or cold gas with the eyes or skin may cause severe frostbite. Always handle cryogenic liquids carefully.

Safety spectacles, gloves and other personal protective equipment shall be worn at alltimes when transferring liquid nitrogen to or from glass vacuum flasks, whichoccasionally fail in service. Stand clear of boiling or splashing liquid and its vapours.

11.16 MERCURY

Mercury is highly toxic and shall be handled with care. Precautions shall be taken toprevent contact with the skin. Suitable gloves shall be worn when handling.

Exposure to mercury vapour for short periods requires only removal from exposure torectify but, if mercury is swallowed, medical attention shall be sought.

Mercury vapour is volatile at room temperature and dangerously high concentrations canbuild up in a non-ventilated room (TLV 0.0005 ppm).

Its use should be limited and equipment shall be designed to contain spillages throughbreakage or malfunction. Mercury manometers should be fitted with an effective mercurytrap.









If, in spite of precautions, mercury is spilled, it shall be removed immediately usingsuitable suction equipment. Any inaccessible residues in floor cracks should be treatedwith lime-sulphur paste or zinc dust to render harmless.

Further Information ADGAS Hazardous Substances Manual






OFF THE JOB S AFETY Chapter No. 12



CHAPTER 12 CONTENTS

12 OFF THE JOB SAFETY ......................................................................................................................... 433

12.1 FIRE PRECAUTIONS IN ACCOMMODATION UNITS ON DAS ISLAND ................................ 433 12.1.1 FIRE PREVENTION ........................................................ ........................................................ 433 12.1.2 FIRE ACTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 433

12.2 FIRE PRECAUTIONS AT HOME ................................................................. .................................. 434 12.2.1 FIRE PREVENTION ........................................................ ........................................................ 434 12.2.2 FIRE ACTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 434

12.3 SAFETY IN THE HOME ................................................................................................................. 436 12.3.1 KITCHEN ................................................................................................................................ 436 12.3.2 BATHROOM ......................................................... ................................................................. .. 436 12.3.3 ELECTRICAL SAFETY ................................................... ........................................................ 437

12.4 SPORT AND RECREATION........................................................................................................... 437 12.5 DRIVING ......................................................................................................................................... 437









12 OFF THE JOB SAFETY

12.1 FIRE PRECAUTIONS IN ACCOMMODATION UNITS ON DASISLAND

12.1.1 FIRE PREVENTION

· Never bring any highly flammable materials such as gasoline into youraccommodation unit

· Always douse cigarette and cigar butts with water before putting them in the bin· Never smoke in bed· Never overload electrical outlets and extension cords· Report any damaged electrical wires and cords to Camp Maintenance· Make sure that you know where your marshalling point is, and your nearest fire alarm

and fire extinguisher

12.1.2 FIRE ACTIONS

12.1.2.1 INITIAL FIRE ACTION

If you discover a fire in your room take the following action:

· Sound the nearest fire alarm and if practicable dial 62222· If safe to do so, attack fire with available fire extinguisher· Shut, but do not lock, doors· If safe to do so, attack fire with available fire extinguisher· Evacuate your area to the nearest Marshalling Point· Make yourself known to the emergency services and inform them of the location of

the fire· Await further instructions

12.1.2.2 IF YOU HEAR THE FIRE ALARM

On the sounding of the local Fire Alarm residents SHALL take the following actions:

· Leave their room· Shut, but do not lock, doors· Leave their place of work or room· Shut, but do not lock, doors· If safe to do so, attack fire with available fire extinguisher· Evacuate your area to the nearest Marshalling Point· Await further instructions









12.2 FIRE PRECAUTIONS AT HOME

12.2.1 FIRE PREVENTION

· Make sure that flammable items are kept in their original containers in a lockedstorage area separate from the home?

· Avoid bring any highly flammable materials such as gasoline into your home· Always douse cigarette and cigar butts with water before putting them in the bin· Never smoke in bed· Never overload electrical outlets and extension cords· Regularly check all wires and cords for damage

· Regularly use the “test button” on any smoke alarms to ensure that they are workingand so that everyone will recognise the sound of the alarm· Ensure that family members with special needs, such as ill or frail family members or

small children, have arrangements to help them get out safely· Ensure that family members know to get out first if there is a fire, and then call for

help once safely outside

12.2.2 FIRE ACTIONS

12.2.2.1 INITIAL FIRE ACTION

If you discover a fire in your apartment

· Tell everyone in your apartment to leave· If the fire is small and contained, and you are trained in the use of fire extinguishers,

use a suitable fire extinguisher or fire blanket to attack the fire. If in doubt - get out· Then close all doors behind you· Sound the nearest fire alarm and shout fire· Leave the building using the nearest stairway· When you are safe phone the Fire Brigade on ---------· If practical, someone should meet the Fire Brigade at the front entrance and tell them

where the fire is

12.2.2.2 IF YOU HEAR THE BUILDING FIRE ALARM · Make sure everyone in your apartment is awake and aware of the alarm· Normally the best course of action is to leave the building as soon as possible· In some cases you may not be able to leave and you may have to stay in your

apartment· In either case you must act quickly· No matter what your decision you must protect yourself from the smoke









If you decide to leave the building· Check the door to your apartment. If smoke is entering from around the door, do not

open it, but protect yourself from smoke inside your apartment as described later· If there is no smoke, brace yourself and open the door a little· If you see smoke or feel heat, close the door quickly and protect yourself· If the corridor is clear, take your keys, lock your door, and go to the nearest stairway· DO NOT USE THE LIFTS· Open the nearest escape stairway door carefully· If there is no smoke, use the stairway to leave the building· If there is smoke, do not enter. Close the door. Go to another stairway and open the

door carefully

· If there is no smoke here, use this stairway to leave the building· If there is smoke, do not enter. If there are other stairways, try them. If there are not,

return to your apartment and protect yourself from smoke· If you can't use any stairway, return to your apartment if you can, or go into any

corridor and bang on apartment doors until you find a place to take shelter.· Never go to the roof· Remember, wherever you are, if there is smoke, crawl low under it. The air is cleaner

near the floor

If you remain in your apartment

· You must protect yourself from smoke. Stay in your apartment until you are rescued

or until you are told to leave. This may take a long time. Do not try to leave yourapartment a long time after the alarm has sounded. The longer you wait, the morerisk there is that heavy smoke will have spread into stairways and corridors. Yourchances of survival are less.

· Keep smoke from entering your apartment. Use duct tape to seal cracks around thedoor and place wet towels at the bottom. Seal vents and air conditioning ducts thesame way.

If smoke enters your apartment

· Telephone the Fire Brigade and tell them where you are and then move to thebalcony and close the doors behind you

· If you don't have a balcony, go to the most smoke-free room, close the door and sealit with any available tape and towels. Open the window for fresh air

· Show your rescuers where you are by hanging a sheet from the window or balcony· Keep low to the floor where the air is cleaner· Listen for instructions from authorities









12.3 SAFETY IN THE HOME

12.3.1 KITCHEN

· Store harmful products in their original containers and away from food· Do not transfer poisonous or caustic products to drinking glasses, pop bottles, or

other food containers· If you have small children install store medicines and other potential or harmful

substances in secure places where they cannot reach or install child safety locks onaccessible cabinets

· Store knives and other sharp objects out of the reach of children

· Make sure that all dangerous products, including medication, cleaning products and· chemicals have child-resistant caps· Read and follow the use and storage directions before using cleaning products· Wear gloves when using harsh products such as bleach· Do not mix products together to avoid dangerous reactions· Put away products after use and wipe up spills immediately· Keep kitchen walkways clear of clutter· Make sure the bin is covered with a lid· Do not leave oils and fats unattended when in use for cooking· Keep things that can burn, such as dishtowels, paper or plastic bags, and curtains· at least three feet away from the stove or burners

· Turn pan handles always inward while cooking· Keep hot items, such as beverages and cooking trays, away from the edge of work

tops and out of children’s reach

12.3.2 BATHROOM

· Use a non-slip mat or install adhesive safety strips in baths and showers· Keep the bathroom floor clean and promptly wipe up all spills.· If you use a bath mat on the floor, choose one that has a non-skid bottom· Use nightlights to help light hallways and bathrooms during night-time hours· Never leave children unattended in the bath or near standing water.

· Always stay within touch supervision of young children – within an arm’s reach --during bath time. Never leave them unattended, even for a short while. to answer thetelephone or door

· Make sure electrical appliances, cords and fixtures in your bathroom are suitable forthe location and are properly installed

· Never use electrical appliances such as hair dryers, curling irons, and razors whilst inthe bath or shower. Keep them away from water and unplugged and stored when notin use.









12.3.3 ELECTRICAL SAFETY· Make sure that all electrical equipment is fitted with correct type of plug for the

sockets in your home· Never overload sockets. One socket per appliance is good practice· Only use the safe light bulb wattage for each light fixture· Never tamper with electrical plugs to make them fit the wrong type of socket· Keep electrical leads away from walking routes· Ensure that all electrical leads are in good condition and not knotted or coiled or· run under furniture or rugs· If fuses are used, ensure they are the correct size for the circuits they protect

· Ensure that all power tools are earthed or marked to indicate that they are doubleinsulated

12.4 SPORT AND RECREATION

Many injuries are caused because people are not fit enough to carry out strenuousactivities such as running or squash, or that they do not adequately warm up beforestarting the activity. Always stretch and warm up before commencing any strenuousactivity.

If you go out jogging at night always wear bright clothing with reflective tape to ensure

that drivers can see you clearly. Always run on the left side of roads facing the oncomingtraffic.

Never go swimming alone. Closely monitor all children near swimming pools and openwater, particularly those who cannot swim.

Carefully plan all desert trips ensuring adequate supplies of food, water, fuel, spares, firtsaid kit and maps. Always let someone responsible what your plans are, and when youintend to return.

Protect yourself, and in particular your children, from the harmful effects of the sun by theuse of sunscreen, sunglasses and hats. In summer always make sure that you have

plenty of water to drink. Prolonged exposure can lead to heat stroke or exhaustion. Beaware of changes in peoples skin colour and attitude. Sufferers may become red facedwith hot dry skin and complain of headaches and dizziness.

12.5 DRIVING

Driving is one of the most hazardous off the job activities undertaken. When you aredriving you are responsible for the safety of everybody in the vehicle including you andyour family.

· Do not drive if you feel sick or tired









· Ensure that your vehicle and its equipment is maintained in good condition· Use the seat belts provided with the car· Children should not ride in the front seat. Make sure that they are secure in the rear

seats· Always drive within posted speed limits and obey highway instructions· Avoid using your mobile phone whilst driving. If necessary, stop and pull over· At filling stations, turn off the engine, do not use your mobile, and if self service keep

hold of the filling nozzle throughout the refuelling operation








M ANAGEMENT OF HSE IN PROJECTS Chapter No. 13



13 MANAGEMENT OF HSE IN PROJECTS

13.1 INTRODUCTION

This Section provides a summary of the HSE issues which need to be taken into accountand managed during the project phase of an ADGAS asset, and provides links to thestandards and processes that should be complied with or referred to.

The objectives are to safeguard the well-being of our employees, contractors andcommunity and protect the environment throughout the design, construction andoperation of ADGAS projects.

13.2 SCOPE

This Section addresses the lifecycle of an asset from appraisal to operation andmaintenance, and should be applied to all projects.

13.3 GUIDANCE

Projects vary in size, complexity and associated HSE Risks therefore a project specificset of HSE Requirements shall be established for every ADGAS Project and MajorPlant Modification.

The Project HSE Requirements CHECKLIST (Tables 13.1-5) provides a systematicapproach for identifying the requirements, assigning responsibilities and givingnecessary guidance, references and procedures.

The CHECKLIST shall be initiated by ADGAS Project Managers in coordination withHSED during the conceptual phase. The requirements shall be revisited and updated ifnecessary at the end of every consecutive project phase.

For detailed information on how to prepare and use the CHECKLIST, refer to I&Q

Division PROJECT HSE REQUIREMENTS CHECKLIST & GUIDLINE document.









Table 13.1 - Guideline for Project HSE Activities

















Table 13.2 - Guideline Check List of HSE Deliverables

















Table 13.3 - Guideline Check List of HSE Deliverables















Table 13.5 – Project HSE Codes, Guidelines & Procedures